Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

Life Skills Grade 7 CBC Free Schemes of Work

GRADE 7 LIFE SKILLS EDUCATION SCHEMES OF WORK

NAME OF THE TEACHER                                                                  SCHOOL                                             YEAR                          TERM             III

Week LSN strand Sub-strand Specific Learning Outcomes Key Inquiry Question(s) Learning Experiences Learning Resources Assessment Methods Refl
1 1 DECISION MAKING SKILLS Decision-Making Process

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe decision-making process that leads to desirable actions or behaviour

b) display values necessary in making appropriate decisions in their day-to-day life

c) appreciate the importance of effective decision-making in different situations

1. Why do I make my decisions?

2. How has effective decision- making helped me in my life?

 

The learner is guided to:

• search in pairs, using digital devices the meaning of decision-making processes and present in class

• explore and analyze in groups situations that require decision-making

• engage in puzzles and games like chess that demand multiple decisions to solve problems

• Vetted digital resources- TV/video/films/slides/ Internet sources

• Approved textbooks and other printed resources

• Library

• Display boards

• Drawing charts

Thriving Life Skills Grade 7 T.G Pg. 95-100

Thriving Life skills Education Grade 7 P.b Pg.87-92

a) checklist

b) project

c) written tests

d) oral questions

e) aural questions

 
2 1   Creative Thinking Skills By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe different situations that require creative thinking

b) Play games that promote creativity

c) Exhibit values that foster creative thinking in different situations.

1. Why is creative thinking important for me?

2. How can I be a good creative thinker?

 

The learner is guided to:

• use digital devices to search for the meaning of the term creative thinking

• play games in small groups such as the jigsaw puzzle, snake and ladder and other relevant games that promote creativity

• Vetted digital resources- TV/video/films/slides/ Internet sources

• Approved textbooks and other printed resources

• Library

• Display boards

• Drawing charts

Thriving Life Skills Grade 7 T.G Pg. 101-106

Thriving Life skills Education Grade 7 P.b Pg.93-99

a) checklist

b) project

c) written tests

d) oral questions

e) aural questions

 
3 1   Creative Thinking Skills By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe different situations that require creative thinking

b) display creative thinking skills in different situations

c) Exhibit values that foster creative thinking in different situations.

1. Why is creative thinking important for me?

2. How can I be a good creative thinker?

 

The learner is guided to:

Read and discuss real-life stories from selected hard or soft copies,

• watch video clips on fostering values in creativity, and discuss in class.

• Vetted digital resources- TV/video/films/slides/ Internet sources

• Approved textbooks and other printed resources

• Library

• Display boards

• Drawing charts

Thriving Life Skills Grade 7 T.G Pg. 101-106

Thriving Life skills Education Grade 7 P.b Pg.93-99

a) checklist

b) project

c) written tests

d) oral questions

e) aural questions

 
4 1   Critical Thinking

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe different situations that require critical thinking in their day- to-day lives

b) Play games that enhance critical thinking

c) Appreciate the need for critical thinking in their everyday life.

1. What shows I am a consistent critical thinker?

2. What shows that I manage my time well?

 

The learner is guided to:

• in groups solve number or word puzzles and discuss how critical thinking was applied

• use digital devices to search for scenarios or case studies that show enhancement of critical thinking and present in class

 

• Vetted digital resources- TV/video/films/slides/ Internet sources

• Approved textbooks and other printed resources

• Library,Display boards

• Drawing charts

Thriving Life Skills Grade 7 T.G Pg. 107-112

Thriving Life skills Education Grade 7 P.b Pg.100-104

a) checklist

b) project

c) written tests

d) oral questions

e) aural questions

 
5 1   Critical Thinking

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe different situations that require critical thinking in their day- to-day lives

b) apply critical thinking in their day-to-day lives

c) Appreciate the need for critical thinking in their everyday life.

1. What shows I am a consistent critical thinker?

2. What shows that I manage my time well?

 

The learner is guided to:

• role-play scenarios that require critical thinking skills and discuss the importance of being critical

• discuss common instances that depict challenges in time management in the school community and note them down.

• Vetted digital resources- TV/video/films/slides/ Internet sources

• Approved textbooks and other printed resources

• Library, Display boards

• Drawing charts

Thriving Life Skills Grade 7 T.G Pg. 107-112

Thriving Life skills Education Grade 7 P.b Pg.100-104

 

 

 

 

 

a) checklist

b) project

c) written tests

d) oral questions

e) aural questions

 
6 1   Problem- Solving Skills By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the term problem-solving as it relates to day-to-day life

b) State the steps involved in problem solving

c) exhibit values necessary for problem solving in their day-to-day lives

1. What guides me when solving my problems in life?

2. Why are skills of problem solving important in my life?

 

The learner is guided to:

• buzz in pairs on the meaning of problem- solving

• discuss in small groups some problems they face in their lives, and make presentations in class

• search in groups using digital devices the steps used in problem-solving, and present in class

• Vetted digital resources- TV/video/films/slides/ Internet sources

• Approved textbooks and other printed resources

• Library,Display boards

• Drawing charts

Thriving Life Skills Grade 7 T.G Pg. 113-117

Thriving Life skills Education Grade 7 P.b Pg.105-107

a) checklist

b) project

c) written tests

d) oral questions

e) aural questions

 
7 1   Problem- Solving Skills By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the term problem-solving as it relates to day-to-day life

b) demonstrate ways of solving problems in their day-to-day lives

c) exhibit values necessary for problem solving in their day-to-day lives

1. What guides me when solving my problems in life?

2. Why are skills of problem solving important in my life?

 

The learner is guided to:

• search in groups using digital devices the steps used in problem-solving, and present in class

• explore and analyze real-life stories depicting poor and excellent problem-solving skills and discuss in class

• perform skits on problem solving and discuss the values displayed in class

• Vetted digital resources- TV/video/films/slides/ Internet sources

• Approved textbooks and other printed resources

• Library

• Display boards

• Drawing charts

Thriving Life Skills Grade 7 T.G Pg. 113-117

Thriving Life skills Education Grade 7 P.b Pg.107-108

a) checklist

b) project

c) written tests

d) oral questions

e) aural questions

 
8-9 END TERM ASSESSMENT/CLOSING

 

 

Computer Studies KCSE Mock Exams and Answers {Latest Best Collections}

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

COMPUTER STUDIES

PAPER 1 MARKING SCHEME

FORM FOUR

Answer ALL questions in the spaces provided

  1. Differentiate between embedded computer and dedicated computer             (2mks)
  • Embedded computers are special purpose computer used inside another device and usually dedicated to specific functions.
  • Dedicated computer is a general purpose computer designed to perform a specific task.
  1. The current monitor technology use LED back lit technology. Give two advantages of using TFT monitors over CRT monitors                         (2mks)
  • Images formed in TFT do not suffer from angle distortion
  • TFT have low power consumption than CRT
  • TFT have a higher resolution than CRT
  1. A Form four student wants to send a large document to a printer.
  2. State the name for the area of memory that the document is sent to immediately from RAM             (2mks)
  • Input buffer
  • As the printer runs out of paper during printing, the operating system sends a signal back to the computer to stop temporarily. Name this function of the operating system Interrupt handling                                                                                           (1mk)
  1. a) Differentiate between a flash memory and compact disk as used in computer storage devices                                                                                                             (2 mks)
Flash memory Compact disk
ü  Solid state device ü  Optical media
ü  Plugs directly to the USB port ü  Requires a disk drive
ü  Fast access of data ü  Slow access of data
ü  Uses circuitry access ü  Has moveable read and write head

 

  1. b) People like using a DVD over a compact disk yet they are of the same physical size, state three reasons that justifies this                                                             (3mks)
  • A DVD has a higher storage capacity
  • A DVD offers a better sound and picture quality than a CD
  1. For a monitor to display images, it must be connected through video port to a video adapter or controller mounted on the mother board. What is the role of a video adapter                                                                                                             (2mks)
  • It determines the resolution and clarity of the monitor
  1. Name four categories of input devices             (2mks)
  • Keying in devices
  • Pointing devices
  • Scanning devices
  • Automated method
  1. Name any two physical measures taken to protect a computer lab from unauthorized access.(2mks)
  • Burglar proofing the room
  • Use of alarms
  • Use of padlocks
  • Use of special cards
  • Employing security guards

 

  1. Most word processors have some automated features such as word wrap and type over modes. Describe these features             (2mks)
  • A wordwrap is a feature that enables the cursor to move automatically to the start of a new line/page
  • Type over mode (overwrite mode) enables the user to edit an individual character of a word in a text document
  1. Differentiate between proofreading and formatting a document as used in word processing                                                                                                                (2mks)
  • Proofreading is the process of checking whether the document has typographical or grammatical errors
  • Formatting a document refers to enhancing the appearance of a document to be attractive and appealing to the eye of the reader
  1. Most computerized systems in different organizations face a lot of unauthorized access such as Eavesdropping, Surveillance and Industrial espionage. State a control measure against each vice                                                                                                 (3mks)
  • Eavesdropping: refers to tapping or listening into a communication channel to get information
  • Surveillance: Refers to monitoring use of computer system and networks using background programs such as spyware and cookies
  • Industrial espionage: it involves spying on competitor to get information that can be used to cripple the competitor
  1. A world wide web is a vast virtual space in the internet where information is made available such as web portals and blogs. Different between a web portal and a blog                                                                                                                         (2mks)
  • Web portal: it is a specialized websites that offer restricted services such as e-learning, searching, e-mail, and sports to registered user updates, financial news and links to selected websites.
  • Blog: It is a website that contains personal information which can easily be updated

 

 

  1. Differentiate between filtering and hiding of rows/columns as used spreadsheets(2mrks)
  • Filtering is the process of finding and working with a subset of related worksheet. This will display only the rows that meet the condition or criteria specified.
  • Hiding columns: its the process of making a column not be shown on the display or printed when you print the worksheet. The columnis not deleted.
  1. Industrial plants use computer systems in different ways such as Computer Aided design, manufacturing, Simulation and process control. Explain how computers are used in the mentioned areas above                                     (4mks)
  • Computer Aided design: it is an integrated system that allows products that have been designed using design application software
  • Simulation: it allows some activities that would otherwise be expensive and dangerous in real life to be put under test
  • Process control: it refers to the use of a computer system to control an ongoing physical process.
  1. a) Differentiate between Job displacement and Job replacement                        (2mks)
  • Job replacement implies that the employees who are computer illiteratelose their jobs and replaced by computer literate people
  • Job displacement is where the computer illiterate workers are moved from a department with computers to another place which does not require computer literacy.
  1. b) State three advantages of using automated production in manufacturing plants(3mks)
  • Increased efficiency due to the balancing of workload and production capacity
  • Improved customer service
  • Efficient utilization of resources such as raw materials
  1. Due to high demand and dynamic nature of computers and information systems, there is need for qualified computer trainers are required. What are the roles of computer trainers(3mks)
  • Training people on how to use a computer and various application programs
  • Developing training reference materials
  • Guide learners on how to acquire knowledge through carrying out research
  • Advising the learners on the best career opportunities in the field of ICT
  • Preparing learners for ICT examinations

 

SECTION B.

Condition?
yes
No
statement
WHILE..DO Loop
Condition?
statements
Yes
No
REPEAT… UNTIL Loop
  • . a) By use of a Flowchartconstruct, differentiate between a while loop and Repeat… Until loop             (4mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  • In the WHILE Loop, the condition is tested before the execution of statements while REPEAT loop statements are executed before the condition is tested
  • In WHILE loop, statements are executed until the condition becomes FALSE the you exit while in REPEAT loop, you exit when the statement is true
  • In WHILE loop,statementsmay exit without any statement being executed while in REPEAT loop atleast one execution of statements must be done

 

b)Angela deposits 3500 shillings in a microfinance company at an interest rate of 20% per annum.At the end of each year, the interest earned is added to the deposit and the new amount becomes

the deposit of that year.       

  1. Write an algorithm for a program that would track the growth of the deposits over a period of six years.                (5mks)

Start

Input initial deposit

            Input interest rate

                                                Set deposit to initial deposit

Set year to 0

                                                While year £ 6 Do

                                                Interest = Deposit x Interest rate

                                                Total = Deposit + interest

                                                Deposit = Total

                                                Year = Year + 1

                                    END WHILE

                                                Print, deposit, year

                        STOP

 

 

 

 

 

(b)       Draw a flowchart for above algorithms.                                                                    (7mks)

Start
 
Input Deposit
Input interest rate
Principal = initial deposit year = 0
Print deposit
Total = deposit + interest
Deposit = total

Year = year + 1

Interest = deposit X interest rate
Print year
Stop
Is year £

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. . a) Differentiate between a primary key and a foreign key as used in Database (2mks)
  • Primary key is a special index that enforces uniqueness in a table
  • Foreign key is a field in a table that matches the primary field in another table
  1. b) State four factors to be considered when designing a good database (4mks)
  • Carefully study the requirements of the user in order to define all the data inputs, outputs and relationships required
  • Design a draft database on the paper to determine the number of files or tables required
  • Divided the information into separate fields, records and tables to allow flexibility in manipulating the database
  • Define a field for each table that will be used to identify each record uniquely
  • Give the most important fields the first priority
  • Design data entry forms needed for the database
  1. c) Explain the use of each of the following field datatypes as used in database (3mks)
  2. OLE object
  • It is used for storing graphical objects such as pictures
  1. Look up wizard
  • It is a field displays the data as a drop down list so that the user can select the desired value from the list
  • Memo
  • It is a field in database that contain alphanumeric data and can accommodate a maximum of 32000 characters
  1. d) kamau has been experiencing a lot of problems in his computer. As a result, he decided to format his computer and re-installed a new operating system.
  2. What is Formatting in relation to the above context       (2mks)
  • It is the process of preparing a new storage media by imprinting empty sectors and tracts on the surface of the disk so that the operating system can recognize and make it accessible
  1. What precaution must kamau observe before formatting his computer (1mk)
  • Make a backup of all the documents to avoid losing them
  1. e) You are required to purchase an operating system. State three factors that you should consider before acquiring the software                                     (3mks)
  • Hardware configuration
  • The type of computer in terms of of size and make
  • The application software intended for the computer
  • User-friendliness
  • Documentation available
  • Cost of the operating system
  • Reliability and security provided by the operating system

 

18.Virtual realityis a condition in which a person becomes psychologically immersed in an artificial setting generated by a computer system

  1. b) Application areas of virtual reality

-represents any three dimensional real objects such as buildings, landscape

-represent any three dimensional abstract objects

-entertainment

-training of medics, military among others

-assistance to the physically challenged people in the society

  1. c) Head gearit is equipment made up of two tiny displays and sound systems. These help to direct images and sound from the source to the eyes or ears, enabling the wearer to look through the virtual setting

Body suitethis is made up of conductor wires wound in a rubber suit. The wires sense the body movement and convey the data into the system which in turn changes the position of the user in the virtual world.

  1. d) Artificial Intelligenceis a branch of computer science that is concerned with developing artifacts with the ability to perform the same kind of functions that characterize human thought and actions (award 1mk for correct definition)
  2. e) Components of an experts system
  • User interface-display screen that enable the user to interact with the system
  • knowledge base- expert system’s data base of knowledge about a particular subject
  • inference engine- software that controls search for knowledge in the knowledgebase and produce conlusions.
  1. a) Binary systems has been used to develop most electronic devices. Give three advantages of using binary                                                                   (3mks)
  • It is difficult to develop devices that can understand or process natural languages directly it is easier to develop electrical circuits based on binary ON/OFF
  • All forms of data can be represented in binary system format
  • Binary devices are more reliable
  • They became smaller in size
  • They use less energy

 

  1. b) Convert the following number systems (4mks)
  2. 62510 to binary

 

Using long division get the binary of 3710 =1001012

get the binary of the decimal by multiplying repeatedly by two i.e 0.62510=0.1012

Add the binary of the whole number and the decimal

1001012+0.1012=100101.1012

  1. EF16to Octal
HEXADECIMAL B C D E F
BINARY 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
Group In terms of three 101,111,001,101.111,011,110

 

 

To octal 5715.7368

  1. c) Using twos complement, perform the following arithmetic opration leaving your answer in decimal notation (4mks)

3910 – 1910

using long division get the binary of:

3910 = 1001112

1910= 100112

write  the binary of 1910 in 8-bits 1910= 000100112

ones complement of the binary of 1910=11101100

twos complement ones complement   =11101101

add the binary of 3910 to the twos complement of 1910

 

11101101

+0100111

(1)00010100   ignore the overflow

 

(1×24)+(1×22)=2010

  1. d) one of the student in the Diocese was developing a file. List any four attributes that the student must consider in the development process             (2mks)

e). downloading – is a process of transferring infor mation from a remote computer to a local storage.

Hyperlink– is a link infor m of text on a web page that causes onother web pages to open when the link is clicked.

  • Key field
  • The data type
  • The lenghth of each field
  • Back up and recovery strategies
  1. a)(3mks)
  • To enable the analyst to test the system in phases
  • The operations and results of both systems are compare and evaluated
  • Errors can be identified and corrected before the old system is abandoned
  1. b) State three reasons why an organization may change an information system(3mks)
  • New opportunities
  • Incase of problems in the current system
  • New directives

 

 

 

 

  1. c) Different students were asked to state the characteristics of a system. The responses were as follows:
  2. i) They are holistic
  3. ii) They are open or closed systems
  • They have a boundary and environment.

Explain each of the above responses                                                                                   (3mks)

  • Holistic system: the different components of a system are grouped together to make a whole
  • Open or Closed: open system receives input from and gives out to the environment and can adopt to changes in the environment.
  • Boundary and Environment: it is a space within which the component operates.
  1. e) Explain the following data collection stages as used in data processing             (3mks)
  2. i) Data preparation
  • It is the process of converting data from source documents to machine readable format
  1. ii) Media conversion
  • This is where the data is converted from one medium to another

 iii) Input validation

  • It is the process taken during data entry to prevent wrong data from being processed by subjecting to validity checks
  1. f) State three ways a data entry clerk may use to reduce the threat to data integrity(3mks)
  • Back up data
  • Control access to data by enforcing security measures
  • Design user interfaces that minimizes chances of invalid data entry
  • Using error detection and correction software when transmitting data
  • Using devices that directly capture data from the source

NAME: ……………………………………. INDEX NUMBER: ………….………………….. SCHOOL……………………………. SIGNATURE: …………………DATE:……………….

451/1

COMPUTER STUDIES

PAPER 1

TIME: 2½ HOURS

MOCKS 1 2023

KENYA CERTIFICATE OF SECONDARY EDUCATION

COMPUTER STUDIES

PAPER I

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

  • Write your name and index number in the spaces provided.
  • This paper consist of two sections A and B.
  • Answer all questions in section A.
  • Answer question 16 (Compulsory) and any other THREE questions in section
  • All answers should to be written in the spaces provided in the question paper

For Official use only.

 

Section

 

Question

 

Max. Score

 

 

Candidates Score

A 1 – 15 40  
 

B

16 15  
17 15  
18 15  
19 15  
Total Score 20 15  

This paper consists of 14 Printed pages.

Candidates should check the question paper to ensure that all the

Papers are printed as indicated and no questions are missing

 

SECTION A (40 MARKS)

Answer all the questions in this section

  • Differentiate between embedded computer and dedicated computer (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • The current monitor technology uses LED backlight technology. Give two advantages of using TFT monitors over CRT monitors             (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • A form four student wants to send a large document to a printer.
  1. State the name for the area of memory that the document is sent to immediately from RAM                                     (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. As the printer runs out of paper during printing, the operating system sends a signal back to the computer to stop temporarily. Name this function of the operating system                                         (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

  • a) Differentiate between a flash memory and a compact disk as used in computer storage devices             (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) People like using DVDs over compact disks yet they are of the same physical size. State three reasons that justifies this (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • For a monitor to display images, it must be connected through video port to a video adapter or controller mounted on the motherboard. What is the role of a video adapter?

(2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Name four categories of input devices (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  • State any two physical measures taken to protect a computer laboratory from unauthorized access (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Most wordprocessors have some automated features such as word wrap and type over mo Describe these features (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Differentiate between proofreading and formatting a document as used in wordprocessing (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Most computerized systems in different organizations face a lot of unauthorized access such as Eavesdropping, surveillance and industrial espionage. State a control measure against each vice (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

  • A world wide web is a vast virtual space in the internet where information is made available such as webportal and blogs. Differentiate between a web portal and a blog.

(2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Differentiate between filtering and hiding of rows /columns as used in spreadsheets

(2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Industrial plants use computer system in different ways such as computer aided design, manufacturing simulation and process control, explain how computers are used in the mentioned areas above (4 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • a) Differentiate between job displacement and job replacement (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. State three advantages of using automated production in manufacturing plants

(3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Due to high demand and dynamic nature of computers and information systems, there is need for qualified computer trainers. What are the roles of computer trainers? (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

SECTION B (60 MARKS)

Answer question 16 (COMPULSORY) and any other THREE questions from this section

  • a) By use of a Flowchart, differentiate between a while loop and Repeat……..Until loop

(4 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Angela deposits 3500 shillings in a microfinance company at an interest rate of 20% per annum.At the end of each year, the interest earned is added to the deposit and the new amount becomesthe deposit of that year.
  2. Write an algorithm for a program that would track the growth of the deposits over a period of six years. (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b)       Draw a flowchart for above algorithms.                                                        (6mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • a) Differentiate between a primarykey and a foreign key as used in database (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) State four factors to be considered when designing a good database (4 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) Explain the use of each of the following field datatypes as used in database (3 marks)
  2. i) OLE object

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. ii) Lookup wizard

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

iii)Memo

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

  1. d) Kamau has been experiencing a lot of problems in his computer. As a result, he decided to format his computerand re-installed a new operating system.
  2. What is formatting in relation to the above context (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. What precaution must Kamau observe before formatting his computer (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. e) You are required to purchase an operating system. State three factors that you should consider before acquiring the software (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • (a) What is Virtual reality? (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(b)       Explain three application areas of virtual reality                              (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

c). Explain the following interactive sensory equipment used in virtual reality.                                                                                                                                        (2 marks)

  • Head gear.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Body suit.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(d)       What is Artificial Intelligence?                                                         (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

e).  State and explain three components of an experts system.                    (6 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(d)       Most computerized security systems make use of Biometric analysis, name two physical features of human beings that can be considered in this analysis.(2mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • a) Binary system has been used to develop most electronic devices. Give three advantages of using binary (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) Convert the following number systems (4 marks)
  2. 37.62510 to binary

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. BCD.EF16 TO octal

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Using Two’s compliment, perform the following arithmetic operation leaving your answer in decimal.

3910-1910                                                                                                                                                                     (4 marks)

 

 

  1. One of the students in the Diocese was developing a file, list any four attributes that the student must consider in the development process (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Define the following terms in relation to internet (2 marks)
    i). Downloading

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………

ii).             Hyperlink

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • a) A system analyst in Mukumu preferred using phased changeover to implement a new system. State three reasons for this preference (3marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) State three reasons why an organization may change an information system (3marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) Different students were asked to state the characteristics of a system. The responses were:
  2. they are holistic
  3. they are open or closed systems
  • they have a boundary and environment

Explain each of the following responses                                           (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………’……………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Explain the following data collection stages as used in data processing (3 marks)
  2. data preparation

………………………………………………………………………………………’……………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. media conversion

………………………………………………………………………………………’……………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Input validation

………………………………………………………………………………………’……………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. State three ways a data entry clerk may use to reduce threats to data integrity

(3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………’……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

THIS IS THE LAST PAGE PRINTED

NAME: ……………………………………. INDEX NUMBER: ………….………………….. SCHOOL……………………………. SIGNATURE: …………………DATE:……………….

451/2

COMPUTER STUDIES

PAPER 2

FORM 4                                                                                                         

TIME: 2½ HOURS

 

MOCKS 1 2023

KENYA CERTIFICATE OF SECONDARY EDUCATION

COMPUTER STUDIES

PAPER 2

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

 

  1. Type your name and index number at the top right hand corner of each printout.
  2. Write your name and index number on the CD provided
  3. Write the name and version of the software used for each question on the answer sheet.
  4. Passwords should not be used while saving in the CD
  5. Answer all questions.
  6. All questions carry equal Marks.
  7. All answers must be saved in the CD
  8. Make a printout of the answers on the answer sheets provided.
  9. Hand in all the printouts and the CD

 

 

 

This paper consists of 4 printed pages.Candidates should check the question paper to ensure that all pages are printed as indicated and no questions are missing.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Question One

The following data is an extract of data obtained from Movers Transport company records. Study the data and answer the questions that follow.

AREA PRODUCER

ID

NAME QUANTITY DELIVERED (KG) TOTAL COST TRANSPORT COST GROSS COST DEDUCTION NET PROFIT
101B 115 Selina Mwao 4562          
79A 145 Yvonne Kibet 1254          
79A 012 Dorothy Namulungu 235          
79A 561 Tiffany Wangui 8954          
101B 016 Asha Waningu 9658          
20Z 123 Ruth Mellanie 7895          
20Z 458 Afif Mumtaz 456          
101B 654 Pelah Wonder 421          
20Z 758 Christabel Simbauni 7895          

 

  1. a) Enter the data shown above into a spreadsheet giving it an appropriate title, center and bold across the worksheet. Save the workbook as WORK01. Rename the worksheet as Jan records                                                                                                 (10 Marks)
  2. b) Copy the data to a new worksheet and add the details of producer Valence Masitsa of area 101B, ID 452 with quantity of produce of 2,700kg in an appropriate row.             (1 Mark)
  3. c) Insert double borders around every cell and every row.                         (2 Marks)
  4. d) Use a function to calculate the Total cost for the producer with ID number 115 given that the price per KG of the produce is Sh.41 .00                         (2 Marks)
  5. e) Use the formula for Total cost obtained for producer Selina Mwao and use it to calculate the gross cost for all the farmers                         (2 Marks)
  6. f) Use if function to calculate transport cost for all the producers given that transport is charged per Kg is as follows             (5 Marks)
AREA Price per kg
101B 5.00
20Z 3.50
 79A 4.00

 

  1. g) Insert the value 20% in cell E14. Using absolute cell referencing calculatedeductions, given that the deduction is 20% of the Total cost.                         (4 Marks)
  2. h) Using a function calculate the Net cost, given that Net cost is Gross cost minus deductions and gross cost is Total cost plus Transport cost                         (4 Marks)
  3. i) Format the columns containing currency values to currency with 2 decimal places and prefix Ksh. Rename the worksheet PRODUCE PAY.                         (3 Marks)
  4. j) Arrange the records in ascending order of the producer ID. (2 Marks)
  5. k) Copy the contents of worksheet Jan records to a new worksheet and rename it as Filtered. By applying suitable filter condition, display records for all producers except those from area 79A.                                                                         (4 Marks)

1)         Use subtotals function to calculate subtotals for the quantity delivered, gross pay and net pay from each area.                                                                                                       (3 Marks)

  1. m) Create an embedded pie chart showing the total quantity of produce delivered for each area .The chart should have the following details.
  2. Chart title: Area Total produce delivered
  3. Legend Position: Right

Save it as CHART 1                                                                                          (5 Marks)

  1. n) Print Jan records, Produce Pay and Filtered in landscape orientation.             (3 Marks)

 

Question 2

You are part of a wedding committee of your friend and you have a vast knowledge of using a computer; you are tasked to be in charge of the wedding cards. Using a desktop publishing software, design the wedding card as it appears. Name the file as W-Card.                     (24marks)

 

  • Prepare the page layout specifications as follows:
  • Paper size: A4 portrait             (2mks)
  • Grid guides             (3mks)
  • Column guides: 1
  • Row guides: 2
  • Spacing: 3”
  • Margins guides             (2mks)
  • Left and right: 24”
  • Top and bottom: 25”

 

 

  • Format the Outer heart shape in the middle part of the design to the following specifications:             (4marks)
    1. Color: Red
    2. Outline: Light blue
  • Height:2.64”
  1. Width: 2.84”
  • Perform the following formatting on the rectangle of the first part of the design.
    1. Apply an outlineshadow.                                                                                                                 (1mark)
    2. Background Texture fill – Newsprint.            (2Marks)
  • Add a glow (Accent 1, 18pt glow), glow size 25pts, and 57% transparency.   (4marks)
  • Change the paragraph text starting from “Request the blessings…” to color coldwith line spacing of 75sp.                                                                                           (2marks)
  • Format the names of the bride and bridegroom to have a strikethroughand a dotted underline.             (2marks)
  • Group all objects in the design. (2marks)
  • Insert a page header “LOVE IS A GOOD THING”.                         (1mark)
  • Print the publication.                                                                                                                                     (1mark)

 

a Title , centre, bold, save rename @2 each  max 10 marks
b Copy  new worksheet

 

add details

c Double boarders for each cell and row formatted max 2marks

 

d Function (observe equal sign and product of cell with 41 by kgs )

=PRODUCT(d2:d11)       =187042

Assuming 41 is entered in cell d11

2marks
e Correct formula  copied to all cells =(D2*D11)+G2 2 marks
f Correct Function =if(A2=101B,D2*5, IF(A2=20Z, D2*3.5, IF(A2=79A, D2*4)))

ASSUNG A STUDENT TYPED 101 B IN A2 THEY CAN USE THE CELL ADRESS AS WELL AS 5 IN CELL LETS SAY E12

5marks
g Use of dollar sign in absolute e.g. =($E$14*$E$2$) @2 each max 4
h Function =SUM(E2:F2:-H2)

Copy to other cells

3 marks

1 mark

i Currency 2 decimal places

Ksh

Rename to PRODUCE PAY

1 mark

1 mark

1 mark

j Arrange from smallest number to the largest (012-758) 2 marks
k Copying to another worksheet

Rename as filtered filter conditions

Display excluding area 79A

1 mark

2  marks

2  marks

l Check sort criteria  by area code( since it’s the only column that will be used to isolate data)

Check formula for subtotals

3  marks
m.i Chart –with title: area total produce delivered 2 marks
 ii Legend position: right 1  mark
   iii Saved chart as CHART 1 2 marks
n Print records-jan

Produce pay

Filtered landscape orientation

 

1  mark

1  mark

1  mark

     

 

 

PAPER 2 MARKING SCHEME

 

QUESTION 1

 

 

 

 

 

Designing and typing

 

Save as W-Card 2marks
Design the heart 4 marks
Fully typed text and bolded on the names 9 marks
Word art 4 marks
  Text  added and formatted in rectangles 3 marks
  Boarders 2 marks
a.      i) Paper size A4 2marks
   ii Gridlines –column guide: 1

-row guides :2

-spacing 0.3

@1  total 3marks
    iii Margin guides –left and right 0.24

–        Top and bottom 0.25

@ total 2 marks
b Format color red

Outline light blue

Height 2.64

Width 2.84

@ 1 total 4
c Applying shadow

 

Background texture fill-newsprint

 

Add glow(accent 1, 18pt glow), glow size 25pts and 57% transparency

1

 

2

 

4

d Color gold of specified paragraph

Line spacing 0.75sp

1

1

e Format by strike through

dotted underline

1

1

f Grouping  all objects 2
g Header 1
h printing 1

QUESTION 2

Microsoft Office Access Free Computer Studies Notes

MICROSOFT ACCESS.

 

Ms-Access is a Window-based program used to manage information, which is in form of databases.

 

It helps in storing information about different subjects in separate tables.

It also enables the user to add and edit records, sort, query and also print records.

 

Note.  Ms-Access can be installed as a stand-alone program, but it is mainly found within the Microsoft Office suite.  It is very useful for routine and simple database management tasks.

 

Starting Microsoft Access.

 

  1. Click Start, point to Programs, then click Microsoft Access.

 

OR

Click on the Microsoft Access icon on the Microsoft Office Shortcut Bar, if it is displayed on the desktop.

 

Features (Parts) of the Microsoft Access Window.

 

  • Menu bar.

 

It appears horizontally at the top of the window.  It is used to issue Ms-Access commands.

 

 

They appear after the Menu bar.  They contain icons (buttons).

 

The toolbars provide many of the tools you need to find, edit, and print records.  You can use the buttons in the toolbars to:

 

  • Add or delete records.
  • Preview and Print data.
  • Check spellings.
  • Cut, copy, or paste selected text, fields, whole records, or the entire datasheet.
  • Sort records.
  • Find or replace values, and also Filter records.

 

  • Scroll bars.

 

They enable the user to see data not visible on the screen.

 

  • Status bar.

 

It is a horizontal bar at the bottom of the screen that displays information about commands, toolbar buttons, and other properties.

 

COMPONENTS OF A DATABASE (Database Terminologies).

 

 

The material (stuff) that a database program stores, organizes and manages for you.

 

 

  • A collection of related data organized in rows and columns.

 

  • A collection of data about a specific topic.

 

  • A collection of records that describe a similar data.

 

 

  • An element of a table that contains a specific item of information.

 

  • A single unit of information within a table.

 

  • The place where data is placed within a database.

 

  • A collection of related characters.

 

  • A group of characters that form a unit of information such as Age, Telephone number, or a Job classification.

 

In a datasheet, each column represents a Field.

 

One field holds one piece of data.  E.g., in a Student record, the possible fields are Name, Admission number, and Age.

All the fields for one student constitute a Record.

 

  • Field Name:

 

  • This is the name that indicates each column (field).

 

  • It is the column title/ heading or a label for a field.

 

 

  • Field Type:

 

  • It is the type of data stored in a field.

 

 

  • A group of logically related fields treated as a unit. It can be a collection of data about a person, a place, an event, or some other item.

 

  • A set of all the fields for one row in a table.

 

Each record contains fields for storing your information.  For example,

 

Name              Age                 Origin             Sex

John                23                    Machakos       Male

 

In a database table, each row represents a Record.

DESIGNING A DATABASE STRUCTURE.

Good database design makes the database easy to maintain.  Data is stored in tables and each table contains data about only one subject, e.g., Customers.

 

Before using Ms-Access to build tables, queries, forms, and other objects, it is advisable that you first sketch out and rework the design on a paper.

 

The following are some of the basic steps in designing a database.

 

  1. Determine the purpose of the database file and how it has to be used.

 

  • Think about the questions that you would like the database to answer.
  • Gather the forms used to record the data.
  • Sketch out the reports you would like the database to produce.

 

This helps you to determine what facts (Fields) will be stored in the database and what table each fact belongs to.

 

  1. Determine the fields needed in the database.

 

Each field is a fact about a particular subject.  E.g., if you are designing a database that will handle your customers, you might need to store the following facts: Company name, Address, City, State, & Phone no.

Create a separate field for each of these facts.

 

When determining the fields that are needed, ensure that the following design principles are observed:

 

  • Include all of the information you will need.

 

  • Store the information in the smallest logical parts. g., a name is usually split into 2 or 3 fields; First Name, Middle Name & Last Name.  This makes it easy to sort the data.

 

  • The Fields should not be similar to each other.

 

E.g., in a Suppliers table, you should not create fields such as Product1, Product2, & Product3, because it will be difficult to find all suppliers who provide a particular product. This will also force you to change the design of your database if a supplier provides more than 3 products.

 

In the Products table, you need only one field for Products.

 

 

  1. Determine the type of tables needed in the database.

 

Each table should contain information about one subject.  The list of fields you have will enable you to know what tables you need.

 

E.g., if you have a HireDate field, its subject is an employee, and so it belongs in the Employees table.

 

You might have a table for Customers, a table for Products, and a table for Orders.

 

  1. Identify the field or fields with unique values in each record.

 

In order for Ms-Access to connect information stored in separate tables; for instance, to connect a customer with all the customer’s orders, each table in your database must include a Primary key (a field or set of fields that uniquely identifies each individual record in the table).

 

  1. Determine the relationships between tables.

 

After dividing your information into tables and identifying primary key fields, you need a way to tell Ms-Access how to bring related information back together again in meaningful ways.  This is done by defining Relationships between the tables.

 

  1. Refining the design.

 

After designing the tables, fields, and relationships you need, study the design and detect any mistakes that might remain.  If there is any, change your database design before entering the data.

 

  1. Entering data and creating other database objects.

 

After making sure that the table structures meet your needs, add your data to the tables.

CREATING A MS-ACCESS DATABASE.

 

Database is a collection of data and objects, such as tables, queries, or forms, related to a particular topic or purpose.

 

MS-ACCESS DATABASE FILES.

 

Using Ms-Access, you can manage all your information from a single database file.

 

 

Database File:

 

  • A collection of logically related records.

 

  • A collection of all tables and objects used to manage data.

 

A Database file consists of rows and columns.

 

Within the file, you can use database objects such as:

 

  • Tables – to store your data.
  • Queries – to find and retrieve any data you want.
  • Forms – to view, add, and update data in tables.
  • Reports – to analyze or print data in a specific layout.

 

Methods of creating an Ms-Access Database file.

 

  • Create a new Blank database file.

 

You can create a Blank database & then add the Tables, Forms, Reports & other objects later.

 

This requires the user to define each database element separately allowing him/her to create a self-defined database.

 

  1. Click New on the File menu or on the Standard toolbar (or press CTRL+N).
  2. Under New, click Blank Database, then click the OK button.
  3. In the File New Database dialog box, specify a name & location for the database file, then click on the Create button to display the Database window.

 

Note.  All Ms-Access databases are saved with an automatic extension of .mdb

 

  1. Click on the tab that has the object you want to create, e.g., Tables, and follow the instructions provided in the resultant dialog box.

 

Database window – The window that appears when you open an Ms-Access database.  It displays tabs/ buttons for the database objects, such as Tables, Queries, Forms, Reports, Macros and Modules.  These shortcuts are used for creating new database objects and opening existing objects.

 

  • Create a database file using the Database Wizard.

 

The Database Wizard allows the user to create in one operation the required Tables, Forms, and Reports for the type of database you choose.  The wizard provides a set of databases where the user is free to modify them according to his/her needs.

 

  1. On the File menu, click New.
  2. Under New from template, click General templates.
  3. Click the Databases tab, then double-click the icon for the kind of database you want to create, (or click the icon, then click the OK button).
  4. In the File New Database dialog box, specify a name & location for the database.
  5. Click on the Create button, then follow the instructions in the Wizard to define your new database.

 

DATABASE TABLES.

 

A Table is a collection of data about a specific topic.

 

Defining the structure of a database Table.

 

Tables organize data into columns (called fields) & rows (called records).

 

E.g., in a Products table, each field contains the same type of information for every product, such as the Product’s name.

 

Each record in that table contains all the information about one product, such as the Product’s name, supplier ID number, units in stock, and so on.

 

When defining a table structure, enter the following:

 

  • Field Name:

 

Each column in a database table is called a Field.

 

Field name is the name that identifies each column (i.e., it is the title of a field or column).

 

To enter names in the columns, for example, enter the First Name in its own column & Last Name in a separate column.

 

  • Field Type:

 

This specifies the type of data to be used/ stored in the field.

 

  • Field Size:

 

Specifies the maximum no. of characters that can be typed in that column.

 

Field width – the no. of spaces required to hold the largest data item to be stored in the field.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FIELD DATA TYPES.

 

A Data type is the characteristic of a field that determines what type of data it can store / hold.

 

Field Data types available in Ms-Access.

 

 

A Text field can store text or combination of text & numbers, such as names, addresses, or any numbers that do not require calculations, such as Telephone nos., or Postal codes.

 

A Text field stores up to 255 characters.

 

 

A Memo field is used to store lengthy text & numbers that are more than 255 characters, such as notes or descriptions.

A Memo field can store up to 65,536 characters.

 

 

A Number field is used to store numeric data that would be included in mathematical calculations.

Stores 1, 2, 4, or 8 characters.

 

Note.  A Number field only stores Whole numbers (i.e., numbers without decimal values) from 0 to 255.

 

 

A Currency field is used for currency values or to store any calculations that involve money or that require a high degree of accuracy.  This prevents rounding off during calculations.

 

Stores 8 characters.

 

A Currency field is accurate to 15 digits to the left of the decimal point & 4 digits to the right.

 

  1. Date/Time.

 

A Date or Time field is used to store dates and times depending on the formats chosen.

It stores 8 characters.

 

  1. Yes/No.

 

Used for data that can be only one of two possible values, such as Yes/No, True/False, On/Off.

Stores 1 character.

 

 

AutoNumber is a field data type that automatically stores a unique number for each record as it is added to a table.

It automatically numbers the records in the table.  It is used for unique Sequential (incrementing by 1) or Random numbers that are automatically inserted when a record is added.

 

It stores 4 characters.

 

  1. OLE Object.

 

An OLE Object field allows one to bring data & files from another program into the current field.

 

Used for OLE objects (such as Ms -Word documents, Ms -Excel spreadsheets, Pictures, or Sounds) those were created in other programs using the OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) protocol.

 

 

A Hyperlink field links the fields to another table within the same database or in a different database.

 

 

 

 

  1. Lookup Wizard.

 

The Lookup Wizard is used to create a field that allows you to choose a value from another table or from a list of values using a combo box. 

 

Choosing data types and field sizes

 

The following considerations determine the kind of data type to use for a field:

 

  • The kind of values you want to allow in the field, e.g., you cannot store text in a field with a Number data type.
  • The amount of storage space you want to use for values in the field.
  • The types of operations you want to perform on the values in the field, e.g., Ms-Access can sum values in Number or Currency fields, but not values in Text or OLE Object

 

Note.  A field’s data type defines what kind of values you can enter in a field.  E.g., if you want a field to store numerical values or data that you can use in calculations, set the field’s data type to Number or Currency.  A field whose data type is Text can store data consisting of either text or number characters.

 

CREATING A DATABASE TABLE.

 

Ms-Access provides 3 ways of creating a blank (empty) table;

 

  • Use the Table The Wizard enables the user to choose the fieldsfor the table from a variety of predefined tables such as Business contacts, Household inventory, or Medical records.

 

  • Create a table in Design viewwhere you can add fields, define how each field appears or handles data, and create a primary key.

 

  • Enter data directly into a blank datasheet. When you save the new datasheet, Ms-Access will analyze your data and automatically assign the appropriate data typeand format for each field.

 

TO CREATE A TABLE USING THE DATASHEET VIEW.

 

Datasheet view – A window that displays data from a Table, Form, or Query, in a row-and-column format.  In Datasheet view, you can edit fields, add and delete data, and search for data.

 

  1. Click New on the File menu or on the Standard toolbar (or press CTRL+N).
  2. Under New, click Blank Database, then click the OK button.
  3. In the File New Database dialog box, specify a name & location for the database file, then click on the Create button to display the Database window.
  4. Under Objects, click Tables, then click New on the Database window toolbar.
  5. Double-click Datasheet view (or click on Datasheet view, then choose the OK button).

A blank Datasheet with rows and columns is displayed.

  1. Enter the Field names.

 

To rename each field/column.

 

Double-click the column name.

 

-OR-

Click in the column, then choose Rename Column on the Format menu.  Type the Field name, then press the ENTER key.

 

  1. Click in the cells and enter your data. Press the TAB key to go to the next field or record.
  2. After adding data to all the columns you want to use, save the Datasheet table.
  3. If you do not set a Primary key before saving the newly created table, Ms-Access will ask if you want it to create a primary key for you. If you answer Yes, Ms-Access will create an AutoNumber primary key.

After saving the table, Ms-Access will assign data types to each field based on the kind of data you have entered.

 

Note.  Any columns you leave empty will be deleted when you save the Datasheet.

Customer Orders: Table
Order Number Customer ID Company Name City Required Date
11022 BSBE V B’s Beverages London 25-May
11023 HANAR Hanari Carnes Rio De Janeiro 09-May
11024 EAST C Eastern Connection London 10-May

 

To add or edit data in a datasheet.

 

  1. To change data within a field, click in the field you want to edit, then type the data.

 

To replace the entire value, move the pointer to the leftmost part of the field until it changes into the plus pointer, then click to select.  Type the data.

Notes.

  • To correct a typing mistake, press the BACKSPACE key.

 

  • To cancel your changes in the current field, press the ESC key. To cancel your changes in the entire record, press the ESC key again before you move out of the field.

 

  • When you move to another record, Ms-Access saves your changes.

 

To rename a field in a table in Datasheet view.

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Double-click the field selector of the field that you want to change.
  2. Type the new field name, then press the ENTER key to save it.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. Click in the column that you want to change.
  2. On the Format menu, choose Rename Column.
  3. Type the new field name, then press the ENTER key.

 

To change the Column Width in Datasheet view.

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Click in the column whose width you want to change.
  2. On the Format menu, click Column Width.
  3. Type the desired width in the Field Size box, then choose the OK

 

To make the column width fit an entry, click Best fit.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. Point to the edge of the column whose width you want to change. The pointer becomes a double-headed arrow.
  2. Drag the arrow to increase or decrease the column width.

 

To change the Font, Appearance, Font Size, Colour & Underline of text in a field or record in Datasheet view.

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Select the text, Record or Field whose contents you want format.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar, click the arrows to the right of the Font, Font Size, & Font Color button, then choose the options you want, or click the Bold, Italic, Underline

 

Method 2.

 

  1. On the Format menu, click Font, then choose the options you want in the Font dialog box.

 

To change the Row Height in Datasheet view.

 

  1. Click in the row / record whose height you want to change.
  2. On the Format menu, click Row Height.
  3. Type the desired height in the Row Height box, then choose the OK

 

 

 

SELECTING FIELDS & RECORDS IN A DATASHEET USING THE MOUSE.

 

To select                                 Do This

 

A single field                          Point to the left edge of the field.  When the pointer changes into a Plus, click the left mouse button.

OR

Click in the field, then press F2.

 

Adjacent fields                       click the left edge of a field, then drag to extend the selection.

OR

Select the first field; hold down the SHIFT key, then press the Left or Right arrow to extend the selection.

 

A column                                Click the field selector.

 

Adjacent columns                   click the field name at the top of the column, then drag to extend the selection.

A record (row)                                    Click the Record selector.

OR

Click in the row, then click Select Record on the Edit menu.

 

Multiple records                     click the record selector of the first record, then drag to extend the selection.

 

All records                              Click Select All Records on the Edit menu (or press CTRL+A).

 

Field selector – A small box or bar that you click to select an entire column in a datasheet.

 

Row selector – A small box or bar to the left of a record that, when clicked, selects an entire row in table in a Datasheet view.

 

To move between records by using record Navigation buttons in a datasheet.

 

The navigation buttons are located at the bottom of the window in Datasheet or Form view.  You can use these buttons to move quickly between records.

 

To Move to                                                    Click

 

First record                                                     |3

Next record                                                     4

Previous record (1 record to the left)            3

Last record                                                      4|

New record                                                     4à

Add a field (column) to a table in Datasheet view.

 

Note.  A Datasheet view table consists of 30 columns.  To insert an additional column at any time in Datasheet view,

 

  1. Click in the column to the right of where you want to insert a new column.
  2. On the Insert menu, click Column.

 

To insert a new record (row) in Datasheet view.

 

  1. Click in the row below where you want to add the new record.
  2. On the Insert menu, click New Record, (or click New Record button on the toolbar).

 

Save a record in a datasheet.

 

Ms-Access automatically saves the record you are adding or editing as soon as you move the insertion point to a different record, or when you close the datasheet you are working on.

 

  • To save the data in a record while editing, click Save Record on the Records

 

Delete a field from a table in Datasheet view.

 

  1. Select the column you want to delete.
  2. On the Edit menu, click Delete Column.

 

Delete a record (row) from a table in a Datasheet.

 

  1. Click the row selectorof the record you want to delete.
  2. On the Edit menu, click Delete Record (or click Delete Record on the toolbar).

 

Delete an item (contents of a field or record).

 

  1. Select the field, text, or other item that you want to delete.
  2. Press DELETE (or click Delete on the Edit menu).

 

CREATE A TABLE IN DESIGN VIEW.

 

Design view –A window that shows the design of the database objects: tables, queries, forms, reports, and macros. In Design view, you can create new database objects and modify the design of existing ones.

 

  1. Press F11 to switch to the Database window.
  2. Under Objects, click Tables, then click New on the Database window toolbar.
  3. Double-click Design View. Access takes you to the design view of your table.
  4. Define each of the fields in your table.

 

How?

 

  • Click in the Field Name column and type a unique name for the field.
  • Click the arrow in the Data Type column, and select the data type you want.
  • In the Description column, type a description of the information the field will contain. The description is optional.
  1. Define a primary key field before saving your table.

 

Primary key – One or more fields that can be used to identify each record in a table. A primary key is used to refer to related records in other tables (it is used to relate a table to foreign keys in other tables).

 

Note.  If you do not define a primary key, Ms-Access asks if you want Access to create one for you when you save the table.

 

  1. To save your table, click Save on the File menu or on the toolbar, then specify a name for the table.
  2. Switch to Datasheet view, then start entering records.

 

Switch between views of a table.

 

  1. On the View menu, click Design view or Datasheet view (or click the View button on the Standard toolbar)

 

FIELD PROPERTIES.

 

The table’s Design view is divided into 2 parts.  The lower part is used to display and assign field properties to selected fields.

 

Field properties – a set of characteristics that provide additional control over how the data in a field is stored, entered, or displayed.

 

Each data type has a different set of properties.

 

The different field properties include:

 

 

The FieldSize property defines/ controls the maximum no. of characters that can be entered/ stored in a Text or Number field.

 

 

The Format property specifies how (the way) data is displayed in a field & printed.

 

Number & Currency fields provide predefined display formats.  They include Currency, Fixed, General, Percent, Scientific, General data, Medium date, Medium time.

 

  • Decimal places.

 

It is used to define the no. of decimal places in values.  This option is used on fields that already have the Fixed format such as in Number and Currency fields.

 

  • Default value.

 

It allows you to define a value that will automatically be inserted into the field as you add new records.  It is used in Text and Memo fields.

For example, to insert the current date in the Admission date field use “Date ( )”.

The default value affects only new records inserted.

 

  • Validation Rule.

 

It allows you to create an expression or a formula that will test data when being entered into the field.

 

It automatically rejects faulty/flawed entries, e.g., entering very large or very small figures in the Age or Salary fields.

 

Validation Rule            Description

 

Between 18 and 55                   Limits an age field from 18 to 55.

<10000                                      Allows any value less than 10000

<=500 AND <=1000                 Accepts any entry between 500 and 1000.

>Date( )                                                Allows entries whose dates are the current date or later.

<Date( )                                                Allows the current date and before.

 

Note. To test whether the Validation rule is applicable, choose Test Validation Rules on the Edit menu.

 

  • Validation Text.

 

Defines an error message that will be displayed when the validation rule is violated/broken.

It must be typed in earlier.

Enter a useful message that can be clearly understood by the input clerk.

 

 

It controls the entry of important fields.

When this option is set to YES, an entry must be made within that field, i.e., it ensures that the field is not left blank.

A YES option is equivalent of typing IS NOT NULL as a field Validation rule.

 

  • Input Mask.

 

Lets you define a pre-formatted pattern for the entry of data into a Date or a Text field.  The data in that field must conform to a pattern.

 

Examples of data include:

 

0#/0#/0#               – this forces a 2-digits entries for the year, month and date in a date field.

A               – Allows letters or digits into a field, but an entry is required.

9               – Allows letters or digits in a field, but no entry is required.

000000     – Allows a 6-digit number (not more or less than that).

999999     – Allows 6 or less digits.

AAAAA   – only 5 characters are to be entered.

>               – converts the field entry to Uppercase.

<               – converts the field entry to Lowercase.

 

  • Allow Zero Length.

 

Applies to Text and Memo field data types.

Setting the value in Allow Zero Length property to YES and the Required property YES, the field must contain at least one character.

 

 

This is an alternative name used (other than the fieldname) in order to appear in the fieldname header button in Table datasheet view and as a label in Forms.

 

They provide a neat and descriptive name since the fieldname should be kept small for practical use.

 

 

[Yes (Duplicates OK)] – Gives sorted, indexed field and can allow data duplicates.

[Yes (No duplicates)] – Gives sorted, indexed field but cannot allow data duplicates.

 

Note. It is not available for Memo or OLE object data types.

 

  • New Values.

 

Applies only to AutoNumber fields.

 

Ms-Access can increment the AutoNumber field by 1 for each new record, or fill in the field with a randomly generated no., depending on the New Values property setting that you choose.

 

Note. To check the Field properties set for the records in a table, click Properties on the Edit menu.

 

Rename a field in a table in Design view.

 

  1. Double-click the field name you want to change.
  2. Type the new field name.
  3. Click Save on the toolbar or on the File menu to save your changes.

 

Set or change the Primary key in Design view.

 

Primary key is a field that uniquely identifies each record in a database table.

Examples of key fields include – Identification numbers, Registration numbers, User codes, etc.

 

Using a Primary key is a way of telling Ms-Access to:

 

  • Make sure no two records have the same value within that field.
  • Keep records sorted by the entries of the Primary key fields.

 

There are 3 kinds of primary keys that can be defined in Ms-Access:

 

  1. AutoNumber primary keys.

 

An AutoNumber field can be set to automatically enter a sequential no. as each record is added to the table.

Choosing an AutoNumber field as the primary key for a table is the simplest way to create a primary key.

 

  1. Single-field primary keys.

 

If you have a field that contains unique values such as ID numbers, you can select that field as the primary key. You can specify a primary key for a field that already contains data as long as that field does not contain duplicate values or Null values.

 

Null – A value you can enter in a field or use in expressions and queries to indicate missing or unknown data. Some fields, such as primary key fields, cannot contain Null values.

 

  1. Multiple-field primary keys.

 

In situations where you cannot guarantee the uniqueness of any single field, you can choose two or more fields as the primary key.

This commonly arises in situations where a table is used to relate two other tables in a many-to-many relationship.

 

  1. Open a table in Design view.
  2. Select the field or fields you want to define as the Primary key.

To select one field, click the row selector for the desired field.

To select multiple fields, hold down the CTRL key, then click the row selector for each field.

  1. On the Edit menu, click Primary key. (Or click the Primary Key button on the toolbar).

 

Note. A Primary key field cannot be left empty when editing and entering records.

 

Once you assign a primary key for a table, Access will prevent any duplicate or Null values from being entered in the primary key fields.

 

Add a field (column) to a table in Design view.

 

  1. Click in the row below where you want to add the field.

To add the field to the end of the table, click in the first blank row.

  1. Click Insert Rows button on the toolbar (or on the Insert menu, choose Rows).

Double-click in the new column, then type a unique name for the field.

 

Delete a field from a table in Design view.

 

This permanently removes a field plus all the data in it from the database.

 

  1. Select the field(s) you want to delete.

To select one field, click the field’s row selector.  To select a group of fields, drag through the row selectors of the fields.

  1. On the Edit menu, click Delete Rows (or click Delete Row on the toolbar).

 

Change a field’s data type in Design view.

 

  1. Click the arrow in the Data Type column of the field you want to change, then select the new data type.
  2. Click Save on the toolbar. Ms-Access converts the data type.

 

Caution.  If the data type conversion would result in lost values, Access displays a message telling you that errors occurred during conversion before it actually saves the changes. Click Cancel to cancel the changes. Click OK to continue and save the changes.

 

Change the field size of a Text or Number field.

 

Field size controls the maximum no. of characters that can be entered into a text field and the kind of numeric values that can be entered into a numeric field.

 

  1. In Design view, click the field whose FieldSize property you want to set.
  2. In the lower portion of the window on the General tab, click the FieldSize property

For a Text field, type the maximum no. of characters to allow in the field (up to 255).

For a Number field, click the arrow and select the desired field size.

 

Set the data display format for a field in a table.

 

  1. In Design view, click the field you want to format.
  2. In the lower portion of the window, click the arrow next to the Format property box, then click a format from the list.

 

Set the no. of decimal places to display for a field in table Design view.

 

  1. In Design view, click the field you want to define decimal places for.
  2. In the lower portion of the window, click the arrow next to the DecimalPlaces property box, then click the desired no. of decimal places.

 

CREATE A TABLE BY USING THE TABLE WIZARD.

 

  1. Click New on the File menu or on the toolbar (or press CTRL+N).
  2. Under New, click Blank Database.
  3. In the File New Database dialog box, specify a name & location for the database, then click Create to open the Database window.
  4. Under Objects, click Tables, then click New on the Database window toolbar.
  5. Double-click Table Wizard, then follow the directions in the Table Wizard dialog boxes.

 

Note.  If you want to modify or extend the resulting table, you can do so in Design view when you have finished using the Table Wizard.

 

Open a database table.

 

  1. In the Database window, under Objects, click Tables.
  2. Click the table you want to open.

To open the table in Datasheet view, click Open.

To open the table in Design view, click Design.

 

Exercise (a).

 

  1. (a). Define the following terms as used in Database Management systems:
    • Field Name.
    • Field Type.
    • Database File.

     (b). Give five different field data types found in Microsoft Access and explain each.

2.     What are the procedures you have to follow when designing a database?

 

Exercise (b).

1.     Differentiate between:

(a).      Table and Record.

(b).      Field and Field name.

  1. Create a simple record of a company, having the following fields; Company’s Name, Address, City, State, and Phone number.
  2. Create a Personal records database giving the following details; Father’s Name, Baptismal Name, Last Name, Origin, Sex, Date of Birth, Age, Primary and Secondary schools attended, College, Career and Hobbies.

Include the relevant field data types and formats.

  1. Create a database giving the following details; Name of company, Address, Phone number, Years of existence, Location, Number of employees, and what it does (operations).
  2. Create a database of an employer who decides to keep a record of all his employees, under the following lines; Name of employee, Sex, Age, Origin, Date he/she was employed, Salary, Department of work, Working hours for each employee, Marital status, Education level, and ID card number.
  3. A farmer decides to keep a record of his farm produce of a certain season. Create a database showing the following; Name of grain, Produce in tonnes.

COPY OR MOVE AN ITEM.

 

  1. Select the items you want to copy or move.

To copy the item, click Copy on the Edit menu or on the toolbar.

To move the item, click Cut on the Edit menu or on the toolbar.

  1. Click the location where you want to place the item.
  2. Click Paste on the Edit menu or on the toolbar.

 

Copying a table.

Copying can be used to reproduce tables and/or data within tables.

1.     Select the table in Datasheet view.

  1. Click Copy on the Edit menu or on the toolbar.
  2. Click the location where you want to place the item.
  3. Click Paste on the Edit menu or on the toolbar.

Access will then ask you to enter a name for the new table.  It will then ask whether you want to paste the structure and data or just to append the database records.

Appending refers to adding records at the bottom of an existing table or file.

To append the records, choose Paste Append on the Edit menu.

SORTING OF RECORDS.

This allows you to arrange your records in a logical order in the database.  It can either be in Ascending or Descending order – in Alphabetical, Chronological, or Numeric.

1.     In Datasheet view, click in the field to be sorted.

Method 1.

Click Sort on the Record menu, then click on the order to apply; Ascending or Descending.

Method 2.

On the Standard toolbar, click A-Z button (to sort in Ascending order), or click Z-A button (to sort in Descending order).

HIDING AND UNHIDING OF COLUMNS WHEN EDITING.

Purpose.

You may want to hide a column for 3reasons;

ó  Prevent anybody from accessing the information.

ó  Prevent the data in those columns from being printed.

ó  In case you want to suppress display of some columns in a database view, i.e. reduce the size of a database table in order to view more columns at once.

To hide columns in Datasheet view.

1.     Move to the column you want to hide.

2.     On the Format menu, click Hide column.  The selected column disappears from the screen.

To Unhide columns.

1.     On the Format menu, click Unhide column.

A list of hidden columns appears.

2.     Click to select the checkboxes of all columns that you want displayed.

FREEZING AND UNFREEZING OF COLUMNS.

Freezing makes the selected column to remain fixed on the screen while scrolling.  This enables the user to see the data in a column especially in a database table with very many columns.

When a column is freezed, it stays at the left-most position while the rest of the columns continue to move or scroll in and out of view.

Unfreeze is removing the Freeze command.

To Freeze column(s) in Datasheet view.

1.     Click on the column you want to freeze.

2.     On the Format menu, click Freeze column.

To Unfreeze columns.

1.     Select the column to unfreeze.

2.     On the Format menu, click Unfreeze All columns.

FILTERING OF RECORDS.

Filtering refers to sieving/ examining out particular records from the database.  The records you sieve/ select out can be printed, deleted, or edited.

There are 3 types of filters in Access.

(i).        Filter by Selection.

This filter allows you to choose a criteria for sieving out records by selecting them directly from the table in Datasheet view.

1.     Open the table in Datasheet view.

2.     Select the cell that contains the criteria that you need,

E.g. under First Name, select Philip.

3.     On the Records menu, click Filter, then choose Filter By Selection (or click Filter By Selection on the Standard toolbar).

Access displays all the records that meet the criteria, e.g., all people in the database whose first names is Philip.

Note. If you want to sieve in all records except the ones selected, click Filter Excluding Selection.

(ii).       Filter by Form.

This filter opens up a Form where you can give a more elaborate criterion.

1.     Open the table in Datasheet view.

2.     On the Records menu, click Filter, then choose Filter By Form, (or click Filter By Form on the toolbar).

A Form will appear where you can type in or choose the criteria you want, e.g., To list all people called Philip, click under First Name, then type ‘Philip’ or chose it from the drop down list.

The following can be used;

First Name      Last Name

Peterson              Kamau         It looks for a person called Peterson Kamau.

Age

>18                                            Displays all people above 18.

Between 25 and 30                  Displays records of all people aged between 25 & 30

Country

In (Uganda, Kenya, Tanzania)      Displays people from Uganda, Tanzania or Kenya.

Date

>2004/01/31                             Displays all records created on the specified date and after.

Between 93/10/31 and 95/7/1 Displays all records created between the indicated dates.

Date of Birth

Date ( ) -30                               Displays all records of people born 30 days ago.

Between Date ( ) and Date ( ) -30  Displays records of people born within the last 30 days.

Sports

Like *ball                                 Displays all records with all sorts of ball games.

Not Football                             Displays all records of people who do not play football.

Awards

Is Null                                       Displays all records given the award ‘Null’.

Is Not Null                                Displays all records that do not have the award ‘Null’.

3.     On the Records menu, click Apply Filter/Sort, (or click the Apply Filter button on the toolbar).

(iii).     Advanced Filter/Sort.

This filter allows one to sort and filter at the same time.

Note. You can sort and filter at the same time or you can perform each independently.

1.     Open the table in Datasheet view.

2.     On the Records menu, click Filter, then choose Advanced Filter/Sort.

Access will take you to QBE grid.  From this grid, you have a field list in the top half and the grid table.

The grid table allows you to choose fields for filtering or sorting.  To insert a field(s), double-click it from the field list (or click once in the grid, then select the field from the drop down list).

3.     When you have specified your criteria, click Apply Filter/Sort on the Records menu, (or click the Apply Filter button on the toolbar).

That filter stays in effect until you delete it from the QBE grid.

Note. To remove a filter and get back the original table, click Remove Filter/Sort on the

          Records menu.

 

Advanced Filter/Sort window – A window in which you can create a filter from scratch. You enter criteria expressions in the filter design grid to restrict the records in the open form or datasheet to a subset of records that meet the criteria.

PRINTING.

Setting up the paper.

You can change the Page Setup for your table to affect the way it will print.

1.     On the File menu, choose Page Setup.

2.     From the Page Setup dialog box,

·     Click the Margins tab, to change the margins of the printing page.  To include the headings in the printed document, select the Print Headings checkbox.

·     Click the Page tab, then change the Orientation of the paper, and the Paper size.

Actual Printing.

Before you sent the job for printing, make sure you have set the print options you want to apply to your print job.

1.     On the File menu, choose Print (or press CRTL+’P’).

2.     From the Print dialog box,

·     Under Printer, click the arrow next to the Name box, then select the printer you are using.

·     Under Print range, select the specific pages to print.

To print only certain records in the datasheet, select the records, then click Selected Record(s).

·     In the Number of Copies box, select the desired copies to be printed per page.

·     To change the Print Quality, Paper Type, Paper Size and Orientation, click Properties.

3.     After setting the options, choose OK to send the print job to the printer.

RELATIONSHIPS IN A MS-ACCESS DATABASE FILE.

To store your data, create one table for each type of information that you track.

After setting up the different tables for each subject, you can define relationships between the tables.

 

Relationship – An association established between common fields (columns) in two tables.

 

Defining relationships is a way of telling Ms-Access how to bring information/ data from multiple tables back together again in a query, form, or report.

 

After defining the relationship, you can create queries, forms, and reports to display information from several tables at once.

 

Relating two tables.

 

In order to relate two tables, each table should include a field or set of fields that uniquely identifies each record stored in the table. Such a field is called the Primary key of the table.

 

The Primary key field relates two tables so that Ms-Access can bring together the data from the two tables for viewing, editing, or printing.

 

In one table, the field is a Primary key that you set in table Design view. That same field also exists in the related table as a Foreign key.

 

Suppliers: Table
Suppliers ID Company Name
1 Exotic Liquid
2 New Orleans
3 Grandma Kell
4 Tokyo Trade
Products: Table
Product Name Suppliers ID Units in Stock
Chai 1 39
Chang 1 17
Aniseed Syrup 1 13
Camarvon Tiger 2 53

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A Product Key – A unique ID, such as a Customer ID, that distinguishes one record from another within a table.

 

In the Suppliers table, enter a Supplier ID, Company name, and so on, for each supplier.  The Suppliers ID is the primary key.

 

In the Products table, you include the Suppliers ID field, so that when you enter a new product, you can identify its supplier by entering that supplier’s unique ID number. The Suppliers ID is the foreign key in the Products table.

 

Define relationships between tables.

 

When you create a relationship between tables, the related fields may not have the same names, but must have the same data type.

 

A relationship can be One-to-one, One-to-many, or Many-to-many.

 

Define a one-to-many or a one-to-one relationship.

 

  1. Close any tables you have opened.

You cannot create or modify relationships between open tables.

  1. Press F11 to switch to the Database window.
  2. Click Relationships on the Tools menu or on the Standard toolbar.
  3. If you have not yet defined any relationships in your database, the Show Table dialog box is automatically displayed.
  4. Drag the field that you want to relate from one table to the related field in the other table.

In most cases, you drag the primary key field (which is displayed in bold text) from one table to a similar field (often with the same name) called the foreign key in the other table.

To drag multiple fields, press the CTRL key, click each field, and then drag them.

 

  1. The Edit Relationships dialog box is displayed. Check the field names displayed in the two columns to ensure they are correct. You can change them if necessary.
  2. Set the relationship options if necessary, then click the Create button to create the relationship.
  3. Close the Relationships Window.

When you close the Relationships window, Access asks if you want to save the layout. Whether you save the layout or not, the relationships you create are saved in the database.

 

Relationships window – A window in which you view, create, and modify relationships between tables and queries.

 

Many-to-many relationship.

 

This is an association between two tables in which one record in either table can relate to many records in the other table.

 

To establish a many-to-many relationship, create a third table and add the primary key fields from the other two tables to this table.

 

For example, an Order Details table can relate the Orders and Products tables. Its primary key consists of 2 fields: OrderID and ProductID. The Order Details table can list many products and many orders, but each product can only be listed once per order, e.g., 51 as shown below.  So combining the OrderID and ProductID fields produces an appropriate primary key.

 

 

 

Orders Details: Table
Order ID Product ID
10249 14
10249 51
10250 41
10250 51
10250 65

 

View existing relationships.

 

  1. Press F11 to switch to the Database window.
  2. Click Relationships on the toolbar (or on the Tools menu).
  3. Do one of the following:

 

To view all the relationships defined in the database,

 

  • Click Show All Relationships on the toolbar.

 

To view the relationships defined for a particular table,

 

  • Click the table, and then click Show Direct Relationships on the toolbar.

 

  1. Click Clear Layout on the toolbar to remove all tables from the Relationships window.
  2. To add the table back, click Show Table on the toolbar, double-click the table, and then click Close.
  3. Click Show Direct Relationships on the toolbar.

 

Remove a table from the Relationships window.

 

  • Click the table you want to remove, then press the DELETE

This action affects only the display of the Relationships window. The table and relationships remain in the database.

 

Delete a relationship.

 

  1. Close any open tables.
  2. Press F11 to switch to the Database window.
  3. Click Relationships on the Tools menu or on the toolbar.
  4. If the tables whose relationship you want to delete are not displayed, click Show Table on the toolbar and double-click each table you want to add. Then click Close.
  5. Click the relationship line for the relationship you want to delete (the line will turn bold when it is selected), then press the DELETE

Exercise (a).

 

  1. (a). What are Database management software?

(b). What are the advantages of storing data on the computer using a database tool such as

Microsoft Access as opposed to storing in paper files.

  1. Distinguish between the following terms in relation to a database:
    • DBMS and database.
    • Records and Fields.                    (4 marks).
  2. Define the term Sorting.                    (2 marks).
  3. (a). Differentiate between Primary key and Relationship.

(b). What is the importance of the Primary key.

 

Exercise (b).

 

  1. (a). What are Database management software?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

QUERIES.

 

A Query is a question about the data stored in your tables, or a request to perform an action on the data.

 

You use queries to view, change, and analyze data in different ways.

 

A query can find & bring together data that meets conditions that you specify from multiple tables.  It can also serve as the source of data for a Form, or a Report.

 

A query can also update or delete multiple records at the same time, and perform predefined or custom calculations on your data.

 

There are 4 major types of queries in Microsoft Access.

 

  • SELECT QUERIES.

 

A Select query is a query that asks a question about the data stored in your tables and returns a result set in the form of a datasheet—without changing the data.

 

You use a select query to:

 

  • Bring together data from one or more than one tables by using the criteria you specify and then display the data in the order you want.
  • Update records in the datasheet of a select query (with some restrictions).
  • Group records and calculate Sums, Counts, Averages, and other types of totals.

 

A select query is the most common type of query.

 

Creating a Select query.

 

You can create a query with a wizard or from scratch in Query Design view.

 

In Design view, you specify the data you want to work with by adding the tables or queries that contain the data, and then by filling in the Design grid.

  • You add fields to the design grid by dragging them to the field lists.
  • What you will see in the query’s results will be determined by the fields, sort order, and criteria you add to the design grid.

 

  • Create a Select query.

 

 

  1. In the Database window, click Queries under Objects, then click New on the Database window toolbar.
  2. In the New Query dialog box, click Design View, then click OK.
  3. In the Show Table dialog box, click the tab that lists the tables or queries whose data you want to work with.
  4. Double-click the name of each object you want to add to the query, and then click Close.
  5. Add fields to the Field row in the Design grid, and if you want, specify criteria and a sort order.
  6. To view the query’s results, click View on the toolbar.

 

Design grid: The grid that you use to design a query or filter in query Design view or in the Advanced Filter/Sort window.

 

  • PARAMETER QUERIES

 

A Parameter query is a query that when run displays its own dialog box prompting you for information, such as criteria for retrieving records or a value you want to insert in a field.

 

You can design the query to prompt you for more than one piece of information;

 

For example,

  • You can design it to prompt you for two dates. Ms-Access can then retrieve all records that fall between those two dates.
  • You can create a monthly earnings report based on a parameter query. When you print the report, Ms-Access displays a dialog box asking for the month that you want the report to cover. When you enter a month, Ms-Access prints the appropriate report.

 

  • CROSSTAB QUERIES.

 

A Crosstab query is a query that calculates a Sum, Average, Count, or other type of total on records, and then groups the result by two types of information — one down the left side of the datasheet and the other across the top.

 

Use Crosstab queries to calculate and restructure your data for easy analysis.

 

Note. A Crosstab query displays the same information, but groups it both horizontally and

vertically making the datasheet more compact and easier to analyze.

 

Creating a Crosstab query

 

You create a crosstab query from scratch in query Design view.

 

Create a Crosstab query.

 

  1. In the Database window, click Queries, and then click New.
  2. In the New Query dialog box, click Design View, and then click OK.
  3. In the Show Table dialog box, click the tab that lists the tables or queries whose data you want to work with.
  4. Double-click the name of each object you want to add to the query, and then click Close.
  5. Add fields to the Field row in the Design grid and specify criteria.
  6. On the toolbar, click Query Type, and then click Crosstab.
  7. In the Design grid, you specify the field’s values that will become column headings, the field’s values that will become row headings, and the field’s values to sum, average, count, or calculate.
  • For the field(s) whose values you want to appear as row headings, click the Crosstab row, then click Row Heading.
  • For the field whose values you want to appear as column headings, click the Crosstab row, and then click Column Heading. You can choose Column Heading for one field only.

 

You must leave the default Group By in the Total row for these fields.

 

  • For the field whose values you want to use in the cross-tabulation, click the Crosstab row, and then click Value. Only one field can be set to Value.
  1. In the Total row for this field, click the type of aggregate function you want for the cross-tabulation (such as Sum, Avg, or Count).

 

Changing the Sort order of the Column headings in a Crosstab query.

 

Usually, the column headings are sorted in alphabetic or numeric order. You can set them to appear in a different order, or if you can limit which column headings to display.

 

For example, in column headings containing the months of the year, you can display the months chronologically rather than alphabetically. Or, you can limit the columns to just January through June.

 

  1. Open the crosstab query in Design view.
  2. Click the background of query Design view, outside the design grid and the field lists.
  3. On the toolbar, click Properties to display the query’s property sheet.
  4. In the ColumnHeadings property box, enter the column headings you want to display, in the order in which you want to display them. Between the column headings, type a comma.
  5. To view the query’s results, click View on the toolbar.

 

Run a Select or Crosstab query.

 

When you open a select or crosstab query, Access runs (executes) the query for you and shows the results in Datasheet view.

  1. In the Database window, click Queries under Objects.
  2. Click the query you want to open, then click

 

Open a query (select or crosstab) that shows records.

 

  1. In the Database window, click Queries under Objects.
  2. Click the query you want to open.

To open the query in Datasheet view, click Open.

To open the query in Design view, click Design.

 

 

Note.  When you open a select or crosstab query in Datasheet view, you are actually executing

the query.

 

  • ACTION QUERIES

 

An action query is a query that copies or makes changes to or moves many records in just one operation.

 

There are 4 types of Action queries:

 

  • Delete Queries.  

 

A Delete query deletes a group of records from one or more tables. For example, you could use a delete query to remove products for which there are no orders.

 

Notes.

 

  • With delete queries, you always delete entire records, not just selected fields within records.
  • Once you delete records using a delete query, you cannot undo the operation. Therefore, you should preview the data that the query selected for deletion before you run the query. To do this, click View on the toolbar, and view the query in Datasheet view.

 

  • Update Queries.  

 

An Update query makes global changes to a group of records in one or more tables.

 

For example, you can raise prices by 10% for all dairy products, or you can raise salaries by 5% for the people within a certain job category. With an update query, you can change data in existing tables.

 

  • Append Queries.  

 

An Append query adds a group of records from one or more tables to the end of one or more tables.

 

For example, suppose that you acquire some new customers and a database containing a table of information on those customers. To avoid typing all this information into your own database, you can append it to your Customers table.

 

Append queries also helps in:

 

  • Appending fields based on criteria. For example, you might want to append only the names and addresses of customers with outstanding orders.
  • Appending records when some of the fields in one table do not exist in the other table. For example, the Customers table has 11 fields. Suppose that you want to append records from another table that has fields that match 9 of the 11 fields in the Customers table. An append query will append the data in the matching fields and ignore the others.

 

  • Make-Table Queries.  

 

A Make-table query creates a new table from all or part of the data in one or more tables. Make-table queries also helps in creating a table to export to other Microsoft Access databases or a history table that contains old records.

 

Run an action query.

 

Unlike select and crosstab queries, you can’t view the results of an action query by opening it in Datasheet view. However, in Datasheet view you can preview the data that will be affected when you run the action query.

Caution   It is a good idea to make a copy of the data you are changing or moving in an action query, in case you need to restore the data to its original state after running the action query.

 

  1. Open the action query in Design view.
  2. To preview the records that will be affected in Datasheet view, click View on the toolbar and check the records. For each action query, you will see the following:

 

For this query                   The datasheet displays

Update                              The fields to be updated.

Delete                               The records to be deleted.

Make-table                       The fields to be included in the new table.

Append                             The records to be added to another table.

  1. To return to query Design view, click View on the toolbar again. Make any changes you want in Design view.
  2. Click Run on the toolbar to run the query.

 

Add or remove tables, queries, and fields.

 

You can add a table or query if the data you need is not in the query, or remove a table or query if you decide you do not need them. Once you add the tables or queries you need, you can then add the fields that you want to work with to the design grid, or remove them if you decide you do not need them.

 

Notes.

  • A join line between field lists tells Microsoft Access how the data in one table is related to the data in the other.
  • You drag a field from the field list to a column in the design grid to show the field in the query results.

 

Calculate amounts

 

You can add the values in a field or do other computations with the data by specifying the type of calculation to perform.

  • Use an aggregate function, such as Sum or Avg, to calculate one amount for all the records in each field in the design grid.

Aggregate function – A function, such as Sum, Count, Avg, or Var, that you use to calculate totals.

  • Use Group By to calculate separate amounts for groups of records in a field.

 

Limit results by using criteria

 

You can limit the records that you see in the query’s results or the records that are included in a calculation by specifying criteria.

 

For example;

 

  • To limit the records in the query’s results, enter criteria in one or more fields.

Between #6/1/01# And #6/15/01#

  • Use the Or row for alternative criteria in the same field.

Between #6/1/01# And #6/15/01#

Or Between #7/1/01# And #6/30/01#

  • Enter criteria for different fields. For example, for orders between 6/1/01 and 6/15/01 …

Between #6/1/01# And #6/15/01#

  • Calculate total order amounts, but display only those that are more than $100,000.

>100000

 

Sort records.

 

You can sort the query’s results by specifying a sort order in the design grid.

You can Sort by Ascending or Descending order, or remove a sort.

 

Show only the high or low values in a query.

 

You can show in a query datasheet those records with the highest or lowest values in a field or the highest or lowest percentage of values in the field.

For example, you may want to show the top 10 Salespeople with the highest total sales for a month, or the bottom 20 percent of students in a class by grade average.

  1. Create a query in Design view.
  2. In the Design grid add the fields you want to display in the query’s results, including the field you want to display top values for.
  3. In the Sort cell of the field you want to display top values for, click Descending to display the highest values or Ascending to display the lowest values.
  4. Click in the Top Values box on the toolbar.
  5. Enter the percentage or the number of highest or lowest values you want the query results to display.

Note   To display a percentage, enter a number followed by a percent sign (%).

  1. To view the query’s results, click View on the toolbar.

 

When can I update data from a query?

 

In some cases, you can edit data in query Datasheet view to change the data in the underlying table. In other cases, you cannot.

 

You can update a query or query field in the following cases:

  • A query based on one table
  • A query based on tables with a one-to-one relationship.
  • The query’s results contain a Memo, or OLE Object.

 

Set the data display format for a field in a query.

 

  1. Open a query in Design view.
  2. In the query Design grid, place the insertion point in the column for the field you want to format (or place the insertion point in any row for that field).
  3. Click Properties on the Query Design toolbar to open the property sheet for that field.
  4. On the General tab, click the arrow next to the Format property box, then click one of the predefined formats.

 

Set the no. of decimal places to display for a field in query Design view.

 

  1. Open a query in Design view.
  2. In the query design grid, place the insertion point in the column for the field you want to change.
  3. Click Properties on the Query Design toolbar to
  4. On the General tab, click the arrow next to the DecimalPlaces property box, then click the desired no. of decimal places.

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORMS.

 

A Form is an Access database object on which you place controls for taking actions or for entering, displaying, and editing data in fields.

 

A form is a type of a database object that is primarily used to enter or display data in a database.

To easily view, enter, and change data directly in a table, create a form. When you open a form, Microsoft Access retrieves the data from one or more tables, and displays it on the screen with the layout you choose in the Form Wizard, or with the layout that you created on your own in Design view.

 

 

Notes.

 

  • A form focuses on one record at a time, and it can display fields from more than one table. It can also display pictures and other objects.
  • A form can contain a button that prints, opens other objects, or otherwise automates tasks.

 

Most forms are bound to one or more tables and queries in the database. A form’s record source refers to the fields in the underlying tables and queries. A form need not contain all the fields from each of the tables or queries that it is based on.

You create a link between a form and its record source by using graphical objects called controls. The most common type of control used to display and enter data is a text box.

You can also open a form in PivotTable view or PivotChart view to analyze data. In these views, you can dynamically change the layout of a form to present data in different ways. You can rearrange row headings, column headings, and filter fields until you achieve the desired layout. Each time you change the layout, the form immediately recalculates the data based on the new arrangement.

  • In PivotTable view, you can view detail or summarized data by arranging fields in the filter, row, column, and detail areas.
  • In PivotChart view, you can display data visually by selecting a chart type and viewing data by arranging fields in the filter, series, category, and data areas.

 

Creating a form

You can create a form quickly by using the AutoForm command or a wizard. AutoForm creates a form that displays all fields and records in the underlying table or query. A wizard asks you questions and creates a form based on your answers. You can then customize the form the way you want it in Design view.

Customizing a form

In Design view

You can customize a form in Design view in the following ways:

Record source.   Change the tables and queries that a form is based on.

Controlling and assisting the user.   You can set form properties to allow or prevent users from adding, deleting, or editing records displayed in a form. You can also add custom Help to a form to assist your users with using the form.

Form window.   You can add or remove Maximize and Minimize buttons, short cut menus, and other Form window elements.

Sections.   You can add, remove, hide, or resize the header, footer, and details sections of a form. You can also set section properties to control the appearance and printing of a form.

Controls.   You can move, resize, or set the font properties of a control. You can also add controls to display calculated values, totals, current date and time, and other useful information on a form.

In PivotTable or PivotChart view.

You can customize a form in PivotTable or PivotChart view in the following ways:

Add, move, or remove fields   You can add fields to the filter, row, column, and detail areas in PivotTable view, and to the filter, category, series, and data areas in PivotChart view. You can also move fields from one area to another and remove fields from the view.

Filter records   You can filter data displayed in the view by adding or moving a field to the filter area. You can also filter a field in the row and column area.

Sort records   You can sort items in row or column fields in ascending or descending order. You can also sort items in custom order in PivotTable view.

Group records   You can group items in row or column fields on intervals, or create custom groups.

Format elements and change captions.   In PivotTable view, you can change the font settings, alignment, background color, and number format of a field. You can also change the captions of fields and custom groups. In PivotChart view, you can change the chart type, format data markers, and more.

 

Open a form or subform.

 

  1. In the Database window, click Forms under Objects.
  2. Click the form or subform you want to open.

To open the form in Form view, click Open.

To open the form in Design view, click Design.

 

Form view: A window that displays a form to either show or accept data. Form view is the primary means of adding & modifying data in tables. You cannot change the design of a form in this view.

 

Switch between views of a subform.

 

When a main form is open in Form view, you can switch between the views of its subforms.

 

  1. Open the main form in Form view.
  2. Click the subform whose view you want to change.
  3. On the View menu, point to Subform, and click the view you want.

 

REPORTS.

 

A Report is an Access database object that prints information formatted and organized according to your specifications. Examples of reports are sales summaries, phone lists, and mailing labels.).

To analyze your data or present it a certain way in print, create a report. For example, you might print one report that groups data and calculates totals, and another report with different data formatted for printing mailing labels.

  • Use a report to create mailing labels.
  • Use a report to show totals in a chart.
  • Use a report to calculate totals.

A report is an effective way to present your data in a printed format. Because you have control over the size and appearance of everything on a report, you can display the information the way you want to see it.

Most reports are bound to one or more table and query in the database. A report’s record source refers to the fields in the underlying tables and queries. A report need not contain all the fields from each of the tables or queries that it is based on.

A bound report gets its data from its underlying record source. Other information on the form, such as the title, date, and page number, is stored in the report’s design.

You create the link between a report and its record source by using graphical objects called controls. Controls can be text boxes that display names and numbers, labels that display titles, or decorative lines that graphically organize the data and make the report more attractive.

Creating a report

You can create different types of reports quickly by using wizards. Use the Label Wizard to create mailing labels, the Chart Wizard to create charts, or the Report Wizard to create a standard report. The wizard asks you questions and creates a report based on your answers. You can then customize the report the way you want it in Design view.

 

Customizing a report

You can customize a report in the following ways:

Record source   Change the tables and queries that a report is based on.

Sorting and grouping data   You can sort data in ascending or descending order. You can also group records on one or more fields, and display subtotals and grand totals on a report.

Report window   You can add or remove Maximize and Minimize buttons, change the title bar text, and other Report window elements.

Sections   You can add, remove, hide, or resize the header, footer, and details sections of a report. You can also set section properties to control the appearance and printing of a report.

Controls   You can move, resize, or set the font properties of a control. You can also add controls to display calculated values, totals, current date and time, and other useful information on a report.

 

Open a report or subreport.

 

  1. In the Database window, click Reports under Objects.
  2. Click the report or subreport you want to open.

To open the report in Design view, click Design.

To open the report in Print Preview, click Preview.

 

Print preview –A view of a document as it will appear when you print it.

 

 

 

Get free KCPE 2022-2023 Revision Exams Plus Marking Schemes

KCPE 2022-2023 Prediction Exams, JESMA, KNAT free downloads

-KCPE KNAT EXAM-2022.pdf
-KCPE KNAS THIRD PREDICTION 2022.pdf
-KCPE KNES 2ND PREDICTION 2022.pdf
-KCPE PREDICTION EXAM 2022.pdf
-KCPE PREDICTION KNE 2022.pdf
-KCPE PREDICTION SET 2 2022.pdf
-KCPE THIRD KNES PREDICTION-2022.pdf
2019-KCPE-PAPERS.pdf
BLUEPRINT KISWAHILI 8 (2).pdf
BLUEPRINT KISWAHILI 8.pdf
BLUEPRINT SCIENCE 8-1 (2).pdf
BLUEPRINT SCIENCE 8-1.pdf
G6 JESMA 008 EXAM 2022.pdf
KCPE 2021 MARKING SCHEME.pdf
KCPE BLUE PRINT MATHS 8 (2).pdf
KCPE BLUE PRINT MATHS 8.pdf
KCPE BRILLIANCE 001.pdf
KCPE COMPASS 001.pdf
KCPE CONQUEROR OO1.pdf
KCPE COUNTRY MOCK 001.pdf
KCPE CROSSCOUNTRY MOCKS 001.pdf
KCPE ENG FINAL PREDICTIONS (2).pdf
KCPE ENG FINAL PREDICTIONS.pdf
KCPE ENG LAST PREDICTION (2).pdf
KCPE ENG LAST PREDICTION .pdf
KCPE HEADSTART 001..pdf
KCPE JESMA 003 EXAM.pdf
KCPE KIS LAST PREDICTION (2).pdf
KCPE KIS LAST PREDICTION .pdf
KCPE KISW FINAL PREDICTIONS (2).pdf
KCPE KISW FINAL PREDICTIONS.pdf
KCPE MARVELLOUS 001.pdf
KCPE MASTER EXAMS 001.pdf
KCPE MAT FINAL PREDICTIONS (2).pdf
KCPE MAT FINAL PREDICTIONS.pdf
KCPE MAT LAST PREDICTION (2).pdf
KCPE MAT LAST PREDICTION .pdf
KCPE MERIT EXAMS 001.pdf
KCPE NATIONAL MOCK 001.pdf
KCPE NATIONAL MOCK 002.pdf
KCPE PERFECTOR 001.pdf
KCPE PRECIOUS 001 EXAMS.pdf
KCPE PREDICTOR 001 2.pdf
KCPE PREMIUM 001.pdf
KCPE PRIME 001 EXAM.pdf
KCPE PROSPECTOR 001.pdf
KCPE REFLECTOR 001 EXAM.pdf
KCPE REPLICA EXAM 001.pdf
KCPE REVEALED 001.pdf
KCPE REVEALED 002.pdf

ENGLISH FORM ONE LESSON PLAN FREE

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING/ Oral Literature

SUB-TOPIC: Trickster Narratives

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Identify the features of a trickster narrative.

(b)        Discuss the functions of a trickster narrative

T/L RESOURCES: Sample of a trickster narrative

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 1-3

  • Oral Literature for Schools
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4        minutes

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson. Asks learners to define a myth a trickster narrative.

(b)   Tells the learners that they will be learning about trickster narratives.

(a)    Defines a legend.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

 

32    minutes

1. Narrates a trickster narrative to the learners.

2. Explains the features and functions of a trickster narrative.

3. Groups the learners. Gives the learners a sample trickster narrative h. Asks learners to identify the features of a trickster narrative in it.

4. Asks learners present their projects.

1. States how they grabbed and kept the attention.

2. Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3. Discusses.

4. Presents their projects.

CONCLUSION

4        minutes

(a)    Asks them to narrate a trickster narrative of their own.

(b)    Gives them an exercise.

(a)    Explains the ways.

(b)   Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         LISTENING AND SPEAKING

Oral Literature

Trickster Narratives

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________   

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Silent Reading 1

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Develop techniques of silent reading.
  • Identify the main points and the supporting materials in a text.

T/L RESOURCES: Posters, chalkboard demonstration of sitting postures

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 3-4

  • Head Start English Bk 1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to how they do their studies.

(b)   Tells them that they would be learning how to develop good silent reading techniques.

(a)    Gives the features of summary.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1.      Outlines the best silent reading study techniques for maximum concentration.

2.      Issues a handout with a passage to be read.

3.      Tells the learners to read it using the techniques explained and identify the main points as well as the supporting material.

4.      Summarizes the points to consider when preparing for silent reading

 

1.      Listens and takes notes.

2.      Reads the passage.

3.      Writes down the answers.

 

4.      Writes a summary.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks some students to read aloud their answers to the question given earlier.

(b)   Writes an exercise on the chalkboard.

(a)    Corrects the others.

 

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                  Silent Reading

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: Karani and Kemunto

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 5

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b)   Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)    Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification.

 

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)    Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

33 minutes

1.      Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

2.      Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

3.      Asks students some questions on the passage.

4.      Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

1.      Reads the paragraphs.

2.      Retells the passage.

3.      Answers the questions.

4.      Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

3 minutes

1.      Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

2.      Gives an exercise.

1.      Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

2.      Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

KARANI AND KEMUNTO  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1,

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Common and Proper Nouns

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define common and proper nouns.

(b)        Use common and proper nouns in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing common and proper nouns

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 6-7

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Writes sentences with common and proper nouns.

(b)   Asks learners to identify the common and proper nouns.

(c)    Tells them that they will be learning common and proper nouns.

(a)    Reads the sentence.

(b)   Identifies the common and proper nouns.

(c)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1.      Writes more sentences.

2.      Explains more examples of common and proper nouns.

3.      Displays the chart with the common and proper nouns.

4.      Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

5.      Asks learners identify the common and proper nouns.

1.      Identifies common and proper nouns.

2.      Listens and seeks clarification.

3.      Identifies their components.

4.      Identifies common and proper nouns.

5.      Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to use common and proper nouns learnt in sentences.

(b)   Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

COMON AND PROPER NOUNS

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Handwriting

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  1. a) Write neatly and legibly.
  2. b) Appreciate the importance of writing neatly.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample of good handwriting

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 7-9

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

 

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson.

(b)   Tells the learners they are going to learn how to write using a good handwriting.

Listens and writes down notes.

 

DEVELOPMENT

32minutes

1. Explains the importance of good handwriting.

2. Asks students to write a passage using good handwriting.

3. Asks individual students to read the passages of their neighbours.

1. Listens and seeks clarification. Takes notes.

2. Writes down the passage.

3. Reads the passage

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

(a)    Gives an exercise. (a)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                      FORM 1

                                                       WRITING

Handwriting

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING

SUB-TOPIC: Pronunciation of /l/ and /r/ sounds

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Pronounce the sounds /l/ and /r/ with distinction
  • Write words in which the sounds /l/ and /r/ appear

T/L RESOURCES: Chart with minimal pairs of the sounds /l/ and /r/

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 10-11

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4        minutes

1. Write two words, one bearing each sound.

2. Demonstrate how the two sounds are produced.

1. Reads the words aloud.

2. Listens and asks for clarification.

DEVELOPMENT

30    minutes

1. Displays the chart and asks the learners to read aloud.

2. Explain that the words are minimal pairs.

3. Ask learners to give more examples of minimal pairs of /l/ and /r/.

4. Divide the class in pairs.

5.Shows the students the flashcards and asks them to write the word that differs in pronunciation with only one sound considering the sounds under study

 

1. Reads the minimal pairs aloud.

2. Takes notes and asks for clarification.

3. Gives examples.

4. Sits in pairs.

5.Writes the words after discussing

CONCLUSION

5minutes

(a)    Asks the students to reread the minimal pairs.

(b)   Writes an exercise on the chalkboard.

(a)    Rereads the minimal pairs.

 

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 2

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                  Pronunciation of /l/ and /r/ sounds

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Silent Reading 2

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Develop techniques of silent reading.
  • Identify the main points and the supporting materials in a text.

T/L RESOURCES: Posters, chalkboard demonstration of sitting postures

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 11-12

  • Head Start English Bk 1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5        minutes

(a)    Asks students to how they do their studies.

(b)   Tells them that they would be learning how to develop good silent reading techniques.

(a)    Gives the features of summary.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30    minutes

1. Outlines the best silent reading study techniques for maximum concentration.

2. Issues a handout with a passage to be read.

3. Tells the learners to read it using the techniques explained and identify the main points as well as the supporting material.

4.Summarizes the points to consider when preparing for silent reading

 

1. Listens and takes notes.

2. Reads the passage.

3. Writes down the answers.

 

4. Writes a summary.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks some students to read aloud their answers to the question given earlier.

(b)   Writes an exercise on the chalkboard.

(a)    Corrects the others.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                  Silent Reading

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: The Sick Man

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 12

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4        minutes

(a)    Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b)   Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)    Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification.

 

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)    Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

33     minutes

1. Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

2. Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

3. Asks students some questions on the passage.

4. Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

1. Reads the paragraphs.

2. Retells the passage.

3. Answers the questions.

4. Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

3         minutes

1. Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Gives an exercise.

1. Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

THE SICK MAN  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Concrete and abstract Nouns

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define concrete and abstract nouns.

(b)        Use concrete and abstract nouns in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing concrete and abstract nouns

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 14-15

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5         minutes

(a)    Writes sentences with concrete and abstract nouns.

(b)    Asks learners to identify the concrete and abstract nouns.

(c)    Tells them that they will be learning concrete and abstract nouns.

(a)    Reads the sentence.

(b)   Identifies the concrete and abstract nouns.

(c)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

1. Writes more sentences.

2. Explains more examples of concrete and abstract nouns.

3. Displays the chart with the concrete and abstract nouns.

4. Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

5. Asks learners identify the concrete and abstract nouns.

1. Identifies concrete and abstract nouns.

2. Listens and seeks clarification.

3. Identifies their components.

4. Identifies concrete and abstract nouns.

5. Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5minutes

(a)    Asks students to use concrete and abstract nouns learnt in sentences.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Concrete and Abstract Nouns

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WORD STUDY

SUB-TOPIC: Commonly Misspelt words

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Write neatly and legibly.
  • Spell given words correctly.

T/L RESOURCES: Posters, chalkboard demonstration of sitting postures

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 16

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5        minutes

(a)    Asks students to mention some words that they commonly misspell.

(b)   Tells them the reasons behind misspelling of words.

(a)    Gives the features of summary.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30    minutes

1. Read out a list of commonly misspelt words.

2. Tells learners to write them down in their exercise books.

3. Asks the learners to spell each word as they mark for one another.

4.Summarizes the points to consider when spelling words

1. Listens.

2. Writes down the answers.

 

3. Mark for one another.

 

4.Listens and takes down notes

CONCLUSION

5        minutes

1. Asks some students to give more commonly misspelt words.

2. Gives an exercise in the students’ textbook.

1. Gives more commonly misspelt words.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 3

                                                                   WORD STUDY

Commonly Misspelt Words

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING

SUB-TOPIC: Pronunciation of /i/ and /I/ sounds

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Pronounce the sounds /i/ and /I/ with distinction
  • Write words in which the sounds /i/ and /I/ appear

T/L RESOURCES: Chart with minimal pairs of the sounds /i/ and /I/

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 17-19

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4         minutes

1. Write two words, one bearing each sound.

2. Demonstrate how the two sounds are produced.

1. Reads the words aloud.

2. Listens and asks for clarification.

DEVELOPMENT

31    minutes

1. Displays the chart and asks the learners to read aloud.

2. Explain that the words are minimal pairs.

3. Ask learners to give more examples of minimal pairs of /i/ and /I/.

4. Divide the class in pairs.

5.Shows the students the flashcards and asks them to write the word that differs in pronunciation with only one sound considering the sounds under study

 

1. Reads the minimal pairs aloud.

2. Takes notes and asks for clarification.

3. Gives examples.

4. Sits in pairs.

5.Writes the words after discussing

CONCLUSION

5minutes

(a)    Asks the students to reread the minimal pairs.

(b)    Writes an exercise on the chalkboard.

(a)    Rereads the minimal pairs.

(b)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                  Pronunciation of /i/ and /I/ sounds

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Reading Aloud 1

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)          Appreciate the need of developing good oral reading skills.

(b)          Explain the importance of understanding what they read aloud.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample instructions

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 19-20

  • Head Start English Bk1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4         minutes

1. Reviews the previous lesson. Asks the learners to prepare to read a text aloud.

2. Tells the learners that they will be learning how to read a given text aloud.

1. Prepares to give and receive instructions.

2. Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

32minutes

1. Asks learners how to read a given text aloud.

2. Explains how one should read a given text aloud.

3. Groups the learners. Gives learners a question. Asks learners to read a given text aloud.

1. States how to give and receive instructions.

2. Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3. Reads.

 

CONCLUSION

4         minutes

(a)    Asks them to explain the ways of reading a given text aloud.

(b) Writes the exercise on the chalkboard.

(a)    Explains the ways.

(b)    Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         STUDY SKILLS

Reading Aloud 1

COMMENTS:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: Mlafi and Ndele

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 21-23

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5         minutes

(a)    Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b)    Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)    Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification.

 

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)    Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

32     minutes

1. Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

2. Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

3. Asks students some questions on the passage.

4. Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

1. Reads the paragraphs.

2. Retells the passage.

3.       Answers the questions.

4.      Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

3         minutes

1. Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Gives an exercise.

1. Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

MLAFI AND NDELE  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Count and Non-count Nouns

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define count and non-count nouns.

(b)        Use count and non-count nouns in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing collective nouns

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 23-25

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

6         minutes

1. Writes sentences with count and non-count nouns.

2. Asks learners to identify the count and non-count nouns.

3. Tells them that they will be learning count and non-count nouns.

1. Reads the sentence.

2. Identifies the count and non-count nouns.

3. Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

1. Writes more sentences.

2. Explains more examples of count and non-count nouns.

3.       Displays the chart with the count and non-count nouns.

4.      Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

5.      Asks learners identify the count and non-count nouns.

1. Identifies count and non-count nouns.

2. Listens and seeks clarification.

3. Identifies their components.

4. Identifies count and non-count nouns.

5. Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

4         minutes

(a)    Asks students to use count and non-count nouns learnt in sentences.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Collective Nouns

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Narratives

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a) Write neatly and legibly

(b)  State the steps in writing a narrative.

(c) Follow the steps outlined in writing an imaginative composition.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample of a narrative

 REFERENCES:

  • Head Start English Bk 1 Pg 25-26
  • Teachers Book page 98

 

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

1. Asks students whether they have ever written a narrative.

2. Explains what a narrative composition is.

3.Tells them that they are about to learn how to write a narrative composition

1. Says whether or not they have written a narrative.

2. Listens and seeks clarification.

3. Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1. Issues the sample of a narrative composition.

2. Asks students to list the elements of a narrative composition.

3. Groups the learners. Asks them to write a narrative composition on the topic given.

4. Asks learners to read aloud some of the narrative composition.

1. Reads the narrative imaginative composition letter.

2. Lists the elements.

3. Write the narrative.

 

4. Reads aloud the letter.

5 CONCLUSION 1. Asks students to outline the features of a narrative.

2. Gives an exercise.

1. Outlines the features.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                FORM 3

                                                         WRITING

Narratives

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING

SUB-TOPIC: Pronunciation of /u/ and /u:/ sounds

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Pronounce the sounds /u/ and / u:/ with distinction
  • Write words in which the sounds /u/ and /u:/ appear

T/L RESOURCES: Chart with minimal pairs of the sounds /u/ and /u:/

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 17-19

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

1. Write two words, one bearing each sound.

2. Demonstrate how the two sounds are produced.

1. Reads the words aloud.

2. Listens and asks for clarification.

DEVELOPMENT

31 minutes

1. Displays the chart and asks the learners to read aloud.

2. Explain that the words are minimal pairs.

3. Ask learners to give more examples of minimal pairs of /u/ and /u:/.

4. Divide the class in pairs.

5.Shows the students the flashcards and asks them to write the word that differs in pronunciation with only one sound considering the sounds under study

 

1. Reads the minimal pairs aloud.

2. Takes notes and asks for clarification.

3. Gives examples.

4. Sits in pairs.

5.Writes the words after discussing

CONCLUSION

5minutes

(c)     Asks the students to reread the minimal pairs.

(d)    Writes an exercise on the chalkboard.

(c)     Rereads the minimal pairs.

(d)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                  Pronunciation of /u/ and /u:/ sounds

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Reading Aloud 2

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)          Appreciate the need of developing good oral reading skills.

(b)          Explain the importance of understanding what they read aloud.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample instructions

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 19-20

  • Head Start English Bk1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5         minutes

1. Reviews the previous lesson. Asks the learners to prepare to read a text aloud.

2. Tells the learners that they will be learning how to read a given text aloud.

1. Prepares to give and receive instructions.

2. Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

32minutes

1. Asks learners how to read a given text aloud.

2. Explains how one should read a given text aloud.

3. Groups the learners. Gives learners a question. Asks learners to read a given text aloud.

1. States how to give and receive instructions.

2. Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3. Reads.

 

CONCLUSION

5         minutes

(b)    Asks them to explain the ways of reading a given text aloud.

(b) Writes the exercise on the chalkboard.

(c)     Explains the ways.

(d)    Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         STUDY SKILLS

Reading Aloud 2

COMMENTS:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: Relating With Parents

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 29-31

Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4         minutes

1. Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

2. Asks students question concerning the issue.

3.       Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

1. Listens and seeks clarification.

2.       Answers the questions asked.

3.       Open their books.

DEVELOPMENT

33     minutes

1. Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

2.       Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

  1. Asks students some questions on the passage.
  2. Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.
1. Reads the paragraphs.

2. Retells the passage.

3. Answers the questions.

4. Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

3         minutes

1. Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Gives an exercise.

1. Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

RELATING WITH PARENTS  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Articles

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define an article.

(b)        Use articles in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing articles

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 31-33

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

1. Writes a sentence with articles.

2. Asks learners to identify the articles.

3. Tells them that they will be learning articles.

1. Reads the sentence.

2. Identifies the articles.

3. Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

1. Writes more sentences.

2. Explains more examples of articles.

3. Displays the chart with the articles

4. Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

5. Asks learners identify the articles.

1. Identifies articles.

2. Listens and seeks clarification.

3. Identifies their components.

4. Identifies articles.

5. Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

1. Asks students to use articles learnt in sentences.

2. Gives an exercise.

1. Uses them in sentences.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Articles

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Use of a Comma

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  1. a) Write neatly and legibly.
  2. b) Demonstrate ability to use the comma correctly.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample sentences

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 33-35

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson. Write some sentences on the chalkboard in which the comma has been used. Asks the learners to identify the commas. (a)    Identifies the commas.

 

 

DEVELOPMENT

32 minutes

1.      Explains the various uses of the comma.

2.      Asks students to place comma appropriately in given sentences.

3.      Groups the learners and gives them a passage. Asks them to use commas in the right places in the passage.

4.      Asks individual students to say where commas should be placed.

1.      Listens and seeks clarification. Takes notes.

2.      Puts commas in the appropriate places.

3.      Identifies the places where commas should appear.

 

4.      Says where commas should be

CONCLUSION

4 Minutes

Gives an exercise  Writes the exercise

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                FORM 2

                                                         WRITING

Punctuation

Commas

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING/ Oral Literature

SUB-TOPIC: Riddles

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Identify the features of a riddle.

(b)        Discuss the functions of a riddle

T/L RESOURCES: Sample of a riddle

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 36-38

  • Oral Literature for Schools
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5        minutes

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson. Asks learners to define a riddle.

(b)    Tells the learners that they will be learning about riddles.

(a)    Defines a riddle.

(b)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

 

30    minutes

1. Poses a riddle to the learners.

2. Explains the features and functions of a riddle.

3. Explains steps in a riddling session

4. Groups the learners. Gives the learners samples of riddles. Asks learners to identify the features of a riddle in them.

5. Asks learners present their projects.

1. Deciphers the riddle.

2. Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3. Discusses.

4. Presents their projects.

CONCLUSION

5        minutes

(a)    Asks them to pose riddles of their own.

(b)     Gives them an exercise.

(a)    Pose their riddles.

(b)   Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         LISTENING AND SPEAKING

Oral Literature

Riddles

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC:  Speed Reading

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)          Appreciate the need of developing speed reading skills.

(b)          Explain the importance of understanding what they read aloud.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample passage

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 38-41

  • Head Start English Bk1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

1. Reviews the previous lesson. Asks the learners to prepare to read a text fast.

2. Tells the learners that they will be learning how to read a given text with speed.

1. Prepares to give and receive instructions.

2. Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1. Asks learners how to read a given text with speed.

2. Explains how one should read a given text with speed.

3. Groups the learners. Gives learners a question. Asks learners to read a given text with speed.

1. States how to give and receive instructions.

2. Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3. Reads.

 

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks them to explain the ways of reading a given text with speed.

(b) Writes the exercise on the chalkboard.

(a)    Explains the ways.

(b)    Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         STUDY SKILLS

Speed Reading

COMMENTS:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: What About This Child?

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 41-42

Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5         minutes

1. Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

2. Asks students question concerning the issue.

4.       Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

1. Listens and seeks clarification.

4.       Answers the questions asked.

5.       Open their books.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1. Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

2.       Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

3.      Asks students some questions on the passage.

4.      Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

1. Reads the paragraphs.

2. Retells the passage.

3. Answers the questions.

4. Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

1. Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Gives an exercise.

1. Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

WHAT ABOUT THIS CHILD?  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Pronouns

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define a pronoun.

(b)        Use pronouns in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing pronouns

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 43-44

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Writes a sentence with a pronoun.

(b)    Asks learners to identify the pronouns.

(c)    Tells them that they will be learning pronouns.

(a)    Reads the sentence.

(b)   Identifies the pronouns.

(c)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

(a)    Writes more sentences.

(b)    Explains more examples of pronouns.

(c)    Displays the chart with the pronouns.

(d)   Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

(e)   Asks learners identify the pronouns.

(a)    Identifies pronouns.

(b)    Listens and seeks clarification.

(c)    Identifies their components.

(d)   Identifies pronouns.

(e)   Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5minutes

(a)    Asks students to use pronouns learnt in sentences.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Pronouns

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Final Punctuation Marks

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  1. a) Write neatly and legibly.
  2. b) Demonstrate ability to use the final punctuation marks.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample sentences

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 44-45

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson. Write some sentences on the chalkboard in which the final punctuation marks has been used. Asks the learners to identify the final punctuation marks. (b)   Identifies the final punctuation marks.

 

 

DEVELOPMENT

31     minutes

(a) Explains the various uses of the final punctuation marks.

(b)    Asks students to place final punctuation marks appropriately in given sentences.

(c)     Groups the learners and gives them a passage. Asks them to use final punctuation marks in the right places in the passage.

(d)    Asks individual students to say where final punctuation marks should be placed.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification. Takes notes.

(b) Puts final punctuation marks in the appropriate places.

(c) Identifies the places where final punctuation marks commas should appear.

(d) Says where final punctuation marks should be

CONCLUSION

5 Minutes

Gives an exercise Writes the exercise

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                FORM 1

                                                         WRITING

Punctuation

Final punctuation Marks

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WORD STUDY

SUB-TOPIC: Commonly Confused Words

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Write neatly and legibly.
  • Spell given words correctly.

T/L RESOURCES: Posters with commonly confused words

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 41-47

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(c)    Asks students to mention some words that they commonly confuse.

(d)   Tells them the reasons behind confusing of words.

(c)    Mention the words they commonly confuse.

(d)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1. Read out a list of commonly confuse words.

2. Tells learners to write them down in their exercise books.

3. Asks the learners to spell each word as they mark for one another.

4.Summarizes the points to consider when spelling words

1. Listens.

2. Writes down the answers.

 

3. Mark for one another.

 

4.Listens and takes down notes

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

1. Asks some students to give more commonly confused words.

2. Gives an exercise in the students’ textbook.

1. Gives more commonly confused words.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 3

                                                                   WORD STUDY

Commonly Confused Words

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Using the Library

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Identify different types of libraries
  • Identify the materials found in a library
  • Identify the different sections of a library.

T/L RESOURCES: Textbooks, library

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 47-48

  • Head Start English Bk 1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students if they have visited the school library yet.

(b)    Tells them that they would be learning how to use the library.

(a)    Says if they have visited the library.

(b)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

(a)    Outlines the different materials found in a library.

(b)    Issues a handout with the different sections of a library.

(c)    Explains to the learners the type of libraries that are there.

(d)   Explains how to locate books in a library.

 

(a)    Listens and draws the layout of a library.

(b)    Listens and writes down notes.

(c)    Writes down the notes.

(d)   Writes down.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks the learners to locate specific books in the library.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Locates the books.

(b)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                 Using the Library

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: Alfred Nobel – A Man of Contrasts

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 49-50

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b) Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)    Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification.

 

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)    Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

33 minutes

(a)    Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

(b)   Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

(c)    Asks students some questions on the passage.

(d)   Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

(a)    Reads the paragraphs.

(b)    Retells the passage.

(c)    Answers the questions.

(d)   Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

3         minutes

(a)    Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

ALFRED NOBEL – A MAN OF CONTRASTS  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Verbs

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define a verb.

(b)        Use verbs in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing verbs

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 50-54

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Writes a sentence with a verb.

(b)    Asks learners to identify the verb.

(c)    Tells them that they will be learning verbs.

(a)    Reads the sentence.

(b)   Identifies the verb.

(c)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

(a)    Writes more sentences.

(b)    Explains more examples of verbs.

(c)    Displays the chart with the verbs.

(d)   Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

(e)   Asks learners identify the verbs.

(a)    Identifies verbs.

(b)   Listens and seeks clarification.

(c)    Identifies their components.

(d)   Identifies verbs.

(e)   Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to use verbs learnt in sentences.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Verbs

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Building Sentence skills

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  1. a) Write neatly and legibly.
  2. b) Recognize various types of sentence construction errors
  3. c) Write properly constructed sentences

T/L RESOURCES: Sample sentences with construction errors

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 54-55

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

 

Reviews the previous lesson. Write some sentences on the chalkboard in which there are construction errors. Asks the learners to identify the errors. Identifies the errors.

 

DEVELOPMENT

32minutes

1. Explains the errors.

2. Asks students to construct sentences given correctly.

3. Groups the learners and gives them a passage. Asks them to identify construction errors in a given passage.

4. Asks individual students to identify the construction errors in the passage.

1. Listens and seeks clarification.

2. Takes notes.

3. Identifies the construction errors in the passage.

4.Identifies the construction errors

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

(f)     Gives an exercise. (b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                      FORM 1

                                                       WRITING

Building Sentence Skills

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING

SUB-TOPIC: Problematic Sounds

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Write neatly and legibly.
  • Pronounce the sounds /l/, /r/, /t/ and /d/ correctly
  • Identify other sounds they find problematic

T/L RESOURCES: Posters with problematic sounds

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 56-57

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to mention some problematic sounds.

(b)    Tells them the reasons behind problematic sounds.

(a)    Mention the problematic sounds.

(b)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1. Read out a list of problematic sounds.

2. Tells learners to write them down in their exercise books.

3. Asks the learners to pronounce problematic sounds.

4.Summarizes how to overcome the problem of problematic sounds

1. Listens.

2. Writes down the answers.

 

 

3. Pronounces the problematic sounds

4.Listens and takes down notes

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

1. Asks some students to give more problematic sounds.

2. Gives an exercise in the students’ textbook.

1. Gives more problematic sounds.

2. Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   WORD STUDY

Problematic Sounds

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Using the Dictionary

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Familiarize themselves with the alphabetic order of words.
  • Look up words easily in a dictionary.
  • Use the dictionary effectively.

T/L RESOURCES: Textbooks, Dictionary

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 57-58

  • Head Start English Bk 1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4         minutes

(a)    Asks students if they have dictionaries.

(b)    Tells them that they would be learning how to use the dictionary.

(a)    Says if they have dictionaries.

(b)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

31     minutes

(a)    Outlines the importance of the dictionary.

(b)    Explains how to use

(c)    Explains how to locate words in a dictionary.

 

(a)    Listens and writes down notes.

(b)    Listens and writes down notes.

(c)    Writes down the notes.

CONCLUSION

5         minutes

(a)    Asks the learners to locate specific words in their dictionaries.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Locates the words.

(b)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                 Using the Dictionary

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: Gender Violence and HIV/AIDS

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 58-59

Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b)    Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)    Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification.

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)    Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

32     minutes

(a)    Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

(b)    Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

(c)    Asks students some questions on the passage.

(d)   Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

(a)    Reads the paragraphs.

(b)   Retells the passage.

(c)    Answers the questions.

(d)   Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

(a)    Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

GENDER VIOLENCE AND HIV/AIDS

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: The Simple Past Tense

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Distinguish between regular and irregular verbs in the past tense.

(b)        Form the past tense of regular and irregular verbs

(c)        Use the past tense of regular and irregular verbs correctly.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 60-62 Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Writes two sentences with regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(b)    Asks learners to identify the regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(c)    Tells them that they will be learning regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(a)    Reads the sentence.

(b)   Identifies the regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(c)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

(a)    Writes more sentences with regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(b)    Explains more examples of regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(c)    Displays the chart with regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(d)   Groups the learners and issues the handout with regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(e)   Asks learners identify the regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(a)    Identifies regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(b)   Listens and seeks clarification.

(c)    Identifies regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(d)   Identifies regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense.

(e)   Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to use regular and irregular verbs in simple past tense in sentences.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Regular and Irregular Verbs in Simple Past Tense

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Diaries

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  1. a) Write neatly and legibly.
  2. b) Demonstrate ability to write diaries.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample diaries

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 62-64

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson. Read samples diaries in class (a)    Listens and asks for clarification.

 

 

DEVELOPMENT

30    minutes

1. Explains the formats of diaries.

2. Asks students to write notes on diaries.

3. Groups the learners and tells them to write diaries following the format given.

4. Asks individual students to read their diaries.

1. Listens and seeks clarification. Takes notes.

2. Writes down notes.

3. Discusses the question.

 

4. Reads out their diaries.

CONCLUSION

5minutes

(a)    Gives an exercise. (a)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                FORM 1

                                                         WRITING

Diaries

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING

SUB-TOPIC: Debate

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Appreciate the importance of having debating skills

(b)        Acquire debating skills.

(c)        Participate in debates.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample of a myth

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 66-67

  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson. Asks learners to explain the importance of debate.

(b)    Tells the learners that they will be learning about debating skills.

(a)    Explains the importance.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

 

31    minutes

1. Outlines the importance of debate.

2. Explains the process of a debating session.

3. Groups the learners into two. Gives the learners a motion for debate. Asks learners to debate the motion according to the procedure outlined.

1. Listens and seeks for clarification.

2. Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3. Participates in debating the motion.

 

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

(a)    Asks them to prepare for a second motion.

(b)     Gives them an exercise.

(a)    Prepares for the motion.

(b)    Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         LISTENING AND SPEAKING

DEBATE

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Using the Dictionary 2

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Describe the various types of information found in a dictionary.
  • Use the dictionary effectively.

T/L RESOURCES: Textbooks, Dictionary

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 67-68

  • Head Start English Bk 1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to discuss the types of information found in the dictionary.

(b)    Tells them that they would be learning about types of information found in the dictionary.

(a)    Discusses the types of information found in dictionaries.

(b)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

(a)    Outlines the types of information found in the dictionary.

(b)    Explains how to search for specific information.

(c)    Demonstrates how to search for specific information in a dictionary.

(a)    Listens and writes down notes.

(b)    Listens and writes down notes.

(c)    Copies the actions of the teacher.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks the learners to search for specific information in their dictionaries.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Locates specific information.

(b)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                 Using the Dictionary 2

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: The Worrying Drug Problem in Kenya

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.

(b) Use new words in sentences of their own.

  • Appreciate the dangers of drug abuse.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 68-70, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b)    Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)    Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification.

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)    Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

32     minutes

(a)    Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

(b)    Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

(c)    Asks students some questions on the passage.

(d)   Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

(a)    Reads the paragraphs.

(b)   Retells the passage.

(c)    Answers the questions.

(d)   Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

(a)    Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

THE WORRYING DRUG PROBLEM IN KENYA 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: The Continuous Aspect

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Master spelling rules of present and past participle verbs.

(b)        Use the continuous and the perfect aspects correctly.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing continuous aspect in sentences.

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 70-73

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Writes two sentences continuous aspect.

(b)    Asks learners to identify the continuous aspect in the sentences.

(c)     Tells them that they will be learning about continuous aspect in sentences.

(a)    Reads the sentence.

(b)    Identifies the continuous aspect in sentences.

(c)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

(a)    Writes more sentences with continuous aspect.

(b)    Explains more examples of continuous aspect in sentences.

(c)    Displays the chart with continuous aspect in sentences.

(d)   Groups the learners and issues the handout with continuous aspect in sentences.

(e)   Asks learners identify the continuous aspect in sentences

(a)    Identifies the continuous aspect in sentences.

(b)    Listens and seeks clarification.

(c)    Identifies the continuous aspect in sentences.

(d)   Identifies the continuous aspect in sentences.

(e)   Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to use continuous aspect in sentences.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Continuous Aspect in Sentences

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Informal Letters

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  1. a) Write neatly and legibly.
  2. b) Demonstrate ability to write informal letters.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample diaries

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 73-75

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

6         minutes

(a) Reviews the previous lesson. Read samples of informal letters in class. (a)    Listens and asks for clarification.

 

 

DEVELOPMENT

31    minutes

1. Explains the formats of informal letters.

2. Asks students to write notes on informal letters.

3. Groups the learners and tells them to write informal letters following the format given.

4. Asks individual students to read their informal letters.

1. Listens and seeks clarification. Takes notes.

2. Writes down notes.

3. Discusses the question.

 

4. Reads out their informal letters.

CONCLUSION

5minutes

(a) Gives an exercise. (a) Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                FORM 1

                                                         WRITING

Informal Letters

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING

SUB-TOPIC: Intonation

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)          Use appropriate intonation in sentences correctly

(b)          Demonstrate appreciation of the fact that intonation contributes to meaning

T/L RESOURCES: Charts, blackboard

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 76-78

  • Head Start English Bk 1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson. Asks how speakers prepare to use intonation in sentences appropriately.

(b)    Tells the learners that they will be learning how to use intonation in sentences correctly.

(a)    Explains how a speaker prepares to deliver a speech.

(b)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

32 minutes

1.       Asks learners to use intonation in sentences appropriately and correctly.

2.       Explains how stress to use intonation in sentences and what dictates when to use rising or falling intonation.

3.       Groups the learners. Tell them to indicate intonation in sentences given.

4.       Asks learners present their answers.

1.       Uses intonation in sentences appropriately.

2.       Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3.       Discusses.

4.       Presents their answers.

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

a)       Review what determines the intonation to use in sentences.

b)       Writes the exercise on the chalkboard.

a)       Explains the ways.

b)      Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         LISTENING AND SPEAKING

Intonation

COMMENTS:

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

FORM THREE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 3_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC:  Studying Poetry 1

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Recognize a poem when they see one.
  • Appreciate the experience of a poem.
  • Describe the identity of the persona in a poem.

T/L RESOURCES: Poems to be read

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 3 Pg 78-80

  • Understanding Poetry
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to give the features of a poem.

(b)   Tells them that they would be learning about persona in a poem.

(a)    Gives the features of a poem.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30    minutes

1. Reads through a given poem.

2.      Identifies the key words in the poem and explains their meanings.

3.      Explains who the persona is in a poem.

4.      Groups the learners. Gives them another poem and tells them to identify the persona in the poem.

5.      Asks the groups to present their findings.

1. Listens to the poem

2. Takes down notes.

  1. Discusses the poem and writes down the key words
  2. Presents their findings

 

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Gives an exercise in the textbook. (a)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   READING

                                                                  Reading Skills

Studying Poetry

 

COMMENTS:

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: Disability is not Inability

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.
  • Appreciate that disability is not inability.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 80-82, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)    Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b)    Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)    Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)    Listens and seeks clarification.

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)    Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

32     minutes

(a)    Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

(b)    Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

(c)    Asks students some questions on the passage.

(d)   Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

(a)    Reads the paragraphs.

(b)   Retells the passage.

(c)    Answers the questions.

(d)   Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

(a)    Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

DISABILITY IS NOT INABILITY  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2019

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Adjectives

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define an adjective.

(b)        Use adjectives in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing adjectives

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 82-84

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)    Writes a sentence with an adjective.

(b)    Asks learners to identify the adjective.

(c)    Tells them that they will be learning adjectives.

(a)    Reads the sentence.

(b)   Identifies the adjective.

(c)    Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30     minutes

(a)    Writes more sentences.

(b)    Explains more examples of adjectives.

(c)     Displays the chart with the adjectives.

(d)   Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

(e)   Asks learners identify the adjectives.

(a)    Identifies adjectives.

(b)   Listens and seeks clarification.

(c)    Identifies their components.

(d)   Identifies adjectives.

(e)   Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)    Asks students to use adjectives learnt in sentences.

(b)    Gives an exercise.

(a)    Uses them in sentences.

(b)    Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

Adjectives

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

Free agriculture schemes of work Form Four, Term 1-3

Get free Form Four Agriculture schemes of work for term 1, 2 and 3.

Download a pdf and editable copy of the schemes of work here;

AGRICULTURE SCHEMES OF WORK FORM ONE TO FOUR

Free updated schemes of work for all subjects (Secondary)

Schemes of work for all subjects, free updated downloads

FORM 4 AGRICULTURE SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 1-3

SCHEME  OF  WORK           AGRICULTURE  FORM  FOUR             TERM  ONE  2021-2026  

WK/NO

L/

NO

TOPIC   /

SUBTOPIC

LESSON / SPECIFIC
OBJECTIVES
TEACHING / LEARNING
ACTIVITIES
MATERIALS

/

RESOURCES

REF. REM.

1

1

POULTRY PRODUCTION

Composition of an egg.

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Identify parts of an egg.

Describe the parts of an egg.

Drawing and labeling an egg.

Breaking an egg to examine its internal structure.

Eggs,

 

Chart – parts of an egg.

KLB BK IV

Pg 1-2

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 1-2

 

Incubation of  eggs.

Define the term incubation of eggs.

State characteristics of eggs for incubation.

Q/A and discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 3-4

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 2

 

Egg candling.

Describe candling of eggs. Practical activity. Observing internal structure of an egg.

Make deductions from the observations.

 

Cardboard boxes,

Torch, eggs.

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 4

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 3

 

2

Natural incubation.

 

 

State merits & demerits of natural incubation.

Identify management practices of an incubator.

 

Q/A & discussion.

Exposition, discussion & oral questions.

Nesting box. KLB BK IV

Pg 5-6

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 3-4

 

Artificial incubation.

Outline conditions necessary for artificial incubation.

 

    KLB BK IV

Pg 7-8

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 5-6

 

3

Management of an incubator.

 

Merits & demerits of artificial incubation.

 

Highlight management practices of an incubator.

 

State merits & demerits of artificial incubation.

 

 

Brain storming;

Probing questions;

Brief discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 8-9

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 5-6

 

Artificial brooding.

Identify requirements for an artificial brooder. Exposition;

Probing questions;

Brief discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 10-11

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 8-9

 

4

Brooder & brooder management.

Outline management practices of a brooder. Exposition;

Explanations;

 

Artificial brooder. KLB BK IV

Pg 11-13

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 8-9

 

2

1

Rearing of growers, layers and broilers.

Discuss rearing of growers, layers and broilers. Exposition;

Probing questions;

Brief discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 14

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 12-13

 

Chicken rearing systems.

 

  -Free range rearing

   system.

State factors considered when choosing a rearing system.

Identify requirements for free-range system.

State merits & demerits of free rage system.

 

Q/A & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 15-17

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 13-15

 

2

– Fold system.

Describe fold system.

State merits & demerits of fold systems.

Q/A & discussion. Chicken folds. KLB BK IV

Pg 17-18

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 15-16

 

– Deep liter system.

Describe the requirements for deep liter system of rearing chicks.

State merits & demerits of deep liter systems.

 

Q/A & brief discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 18-20

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 16-18

 

3

– Battery cage system.

Describe the requirements for battery cage system of rearing chicks.

 

Q/A & discussion. Battery cages. KLB BK IV

Pg 20-21

 

Factors affecting egg production.

Vices.

Identify causes of vices such as egg eating and cannibalism and measures taken for the vices. Discussion: causes and control of vices.   KLB BK IV

Pg 23-24

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 20-21

 

4

Stress.

State causes of stress in birds.

Outline stress management practices.

 

Q/A & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 22-23

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 20-21

 

Culling birds.

Define the term culling.

Give reasons for culling of birds.

Brain storming;

Observing characteristics of a good / bad layer.

Discussion.

 

  Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 20-21

 

3

1

Marketing eggs and chicken meat.

State factors considered in sorting and grading eggs for fresh markets.

Outline methods of killing a bird.

Describe dressing of a bird’s carcass.

Teacher’s demonstrations &  discussion.

 

Topic review questions.

 

  KLB BK IV

Pg 24-27

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 22-23

 

2

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION (CATTLE)

 

Raising of the young stock.

 

 

 

Explain the importance of feeding calves on colostrum.

Prepare artificial colostrum.

 

 

 

 

Q/A: qualities of colostrum.

Teacher’s demonstration: colostrum preparation.

 

 

 

Artificial colostrums.

 

 

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 28-29

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 25-26

 

Methods of calf rearing.

State merits & demerits of natural and artificial methods of calf rearing. Q/A & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 29-30

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 26-29

 

Weaning of calves.

Describe early & late weaning of calves. Q/A, exposition & discussion. Chart –

weaning guide.

KLB BK IV

Pg 30-32

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 29-30

 

3

Rearing replacement stock.

Describe routine management practices for rearing replacement stock.

Give reasons for carrying out varying routine practices.

Q/A: review common management routine practices.

 

Discussion & Q/A. parasite control, castration, disease control, identification, dehorning.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 32-3

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 30

 

TEST        

4

Calf housing.

Identify types of calf pens.

Outline requirements for calf pens.

Exposition of new concepts.

Q/A & explanations.

 

Calf houses. KLB BK IV

Pg 33-34

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 31

 

Routine management practices in poultry.

Analyze routine management practices in poultry. Q/A: review routine management practices in livestock.

Brief discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 34-36

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 31

 

4

1

MILK AND MILKING

Factors affecting milk composition.

 

Highlight factors affecting milk composition.

Brain storming;

Probing questions;

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 36-38

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 32

 

2

Milk secretion and let-down.

Describe the structure of the mammary gland.

Describe the flow of milk from the alveoli to the teat canal.

 

Drawing  and labeling diagram of  the udder.

Exposition of new concepts.

Chart-

Structure of the udder.

KLB BK IV

Pg 38-40

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 33-34

 

3

Clean milk.

State characteristics of clean milk.

Outline essentials of clean milk production.

 

Oral questions & brief discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 40-42

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 34-35

 

4

Milking materials and equipment.

List down necessary milking materials and equipment.

State the purpose of the milking materials and equipment.

 

Brain storming;

Probing questions;

Discussion.

Strip cup. KLB BK IV

Pg 42-44

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 35-37

 

5

MID TERM BREAK

6

1

Milking procedure and technique.

Carry out milking using the correct milking procedure and technique.

Outline rules observed when milking.

 

 

 

Practical activity: milking by hand.

 

Probing questions on milking rules.

 

Lactating cow, basic milking equipment. KLB BK IV

Pg 44-46

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 37

 

Dry cow therapy.

 

 

Milk products.

 

Marketing of milk and beef.

Explain the concept of dry cow therapy.

 

Name various milk products.

Describe marketing of milk, beef & their by-products in Kenya.

 

Explanations & brief discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 46-47

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 38-40

 

2

FARM POWER & MACHINERY.

 

Sources of power in the farm.

 

 

Describe various sources of power in the farm.

State merits & demerits of each source of power.

 

 

 

 

 

Q/A & discussion: animal power, wind power, waterpower, biogas, solar radiation, and fossil fuel.

   

 

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 50-56

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 42-53

 

The tractor:

 

Petrol & diesel engines.

Identify major parts of the tractor petrol & diesel engines.

 

Exposition of new concepts, drawing illustrative diagrams. Chart- petrol engine & diesel engine. KLB BK IV

Pg 57-58

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 53-54

 

3

The four-stroke cycle engine. Describe the four strokes in an engine

State merits & demerits of the four-stroke cycle engine.

 

Exposition of new concepts, drawing illustrative diagrams. Diagrams – The four-stroke cycle. KLB BK IV

Pg 58-61

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 54-55

 

The two- stroke cycle engine.

 

 

 

Structural and functional differences between petrol and diesel engines.

Describe the two strokes in a cycle.

State merits & demerits of two-stroke cycle engine.

 

State structural and functional differences between petrol and diesel engines.

 

Exposition of new concepts,

drawing; illustrative diagrams;

 

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 61-63

 

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 56-57

 

4

Petrol fuel system of a tractor.

Describe the petrol fuel system of a tractor.

State maintenance practices of a petrol fuel system of a tractor.

Block diagram: petrol engine fuel system.

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 63-64

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 60-61

 

Diesel fuel system of a tractor.

Describe the diesel fuel system of a tractor.

State maintenance practices of a diesel fuel system of a tractor.

Block diagram: petrol engine fuel system.

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 64-65

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 60-61

 

7

1

Electrical system of a tractor.

Name the components in the electrical system of a tractor.

Highlight methods of maintaining a tractor battery.

Refer to diagram for electrical system of a tractor;

Brief discussion.

Chart – electrical system. KLB BK IV

Pg 65-67

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 61

 

2

Tractor ignition system.

Name the components of tractor ignition system.

Correct some common faults of ignition system.

Discuss maintenance practices of the ignition system.

 

Refer to a diagram for ignition system of a tractor;

Brief discussion.

Chart – ignition system. KLB BK IV

Pg 67-69

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 62-63

 

3

Tractor cooling system.

Briefly describe air-cooled and water-cooled systems.

Discuss proper maintenance of cooling system.

 

Brief discussion. Chart- water cooling system. KLB BK IV

Pg 69-71

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 63-64

 

4

Lubrication system of an engine.

Describe the lubrication system of an engine.

Outline importance of maintaining the lubrication system.

Exposition;

Brief discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 71-72

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 64-5

   

8

1

Power transmission system of an engine.

Explain the function of power transmission system.

State the function of the clutch, gearbox and the differential.

Teacher exposes the parts of power transmission system.

Refer to diagrams to identify parts of a power transmission system;

Brief discussion.

 

Chart- power transmission

system.

KLB BK IV

Pg 72-76

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 64-65

   

2

Tractor servicing.

Describe tractor servicing and maintenance practices.

 

Brief discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 776-77

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 65-6

   

3

Tractor drawn implements.

Classify tractor drawn implements on basis of attachment to the tractor.

List down maintenance practices for a trailer.

 

Teacher’s explanations.

 

 

Q/A: maintenance practices.

Charts-

Tractor drawn implements.

KLB BK IV

Pg 77-80

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 66-7

   

4

Disc plough. Label parts of a disc plough

List down maintenance practices for a disc plough.

 

Q/A: review primary and secondary cultivation.

 

Drawing labeled diagrams.

 

Q/A & discussion.

Chart- Disc plough

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 79-80

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 68-9

   

9

1

Mould board plough. State operational differences between the disc plough and  mould board plough.

 

  Chart- Mould board plough

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 80-82

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 70-1

   

2

Harrows.

Identify types of harrows and their uses.

List down maintenance practices for harrows.

 

Drawing diagrams, Q/A & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 82-84

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 72-77

   

3

Other farm implements.

Explain the functional features of subsoilers, ridgers, rotary tillers & mowers.

List down maintenance practices for the

implements.

 

Exposition & brief discussion.

Excursion & exhibitions.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 85-91

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 78-82

   

4

Animal drawn implements.

Identify parts of animal drawn implements and state their functions.

List down maintenance practices for an ox-plough, an ox-plough, and an ox-cart.

State merits & demerits of using animal-drawn implements compared to tractor power.

 

Drawing and labeling an ox-plough;

Probing questions;

Discussion.

Chart:

An ox-plough.

KLB BK IV

Pg 91-94

 

 

Longhorn Bk IV

Pg 82-83

   

10

END  OF  TERM  ONE  EXAMINATION    

 

SCHEME  OF  WORK               AGRICULTURE  FORM  FOUR                 TERM  TWO  2020    

1

1

AGRIC. ECONOMICS III

(PRODUCTION ECONOMICS)

 

Household firm relationship.

 

Define a household and a firm as business terms.

Describe a household and a firm as producers and consumers and their role in a country’s economic growth.

Q/A: review definition of economics, production economics.

Exposition & explanations.

Q/A & discussion.

 

 

  KLB BK IV

Pg 96-97

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 20-21

   

2

Gross domestic product (GDP) and Gross National product (GNP).

 Per Capita Income.

Define the terms GDP & GNP.

Define the term gross national income (GNI).

 

 

Define the term per capita income.

 

Exposition & explanations.

 

 

 

Calculations.

 

 

  KLB BK IV

Pg 97-98

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 87-88

   

3

Contribution of Agriculture to national development. Explain contribution of Agriculture to development.

 

Brain storming;

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 98-9

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 90-91

   

4

Land as a factor of production.

Describe the economic value of production of crops and livestock and space for construction of farm buildings, agro-industries & infrastructure.

List down methods of land acquisition.

Exposition of new concepts;

Probing questions to elicit responses;

Brief discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 99-100

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 92-3

   

2

1

Labour as a factor of production.

Define the term labour as used in production.

Explain ways of improving labour productivity.

Identify types of labour.

Oral questions & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg  100-2

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 93-4

   

2

Capital.

Define the term capital.

Identify types of capital.

List sources of capital.

Oral questions, exposition & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 102-3

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 94-95

   

3

Management as a production factor.

State functions of a manager in a farm.

Identify good qualities of a manager.

Q/A & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 103-4

   

4

TEST     KLB BK IV

Pg  104-

   

3

1

Production function.

Define production function.

State characteristics of variable and fixed inputs.

Q/A: examples of inputs & outputs; variable and fixed inputs;

Brief discussion.

 

  KLB BK IV

Pg 104-6

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 96-7

   

2

Production function curves.

Illustrate and interpret input-output relationship graphically. Worked examples: supervised practice. Graph papers. KLB BK IV

Pg 106-7

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 98

   

3

Increasing returns production functions.

Illustrate and interpret Increasing returns production functions.

Give empirical examples where increasing returns production functions are experienced.

Tabulate inputs and outputs.

Graphical representation of increasing returns production functions.

Graph papers. KLB BK IV

Pg 107-8

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 99

   

4

Constant returns production functions.

Constant returns production functions.

Give empirical examples where Increasing returns production functions are experienced.

Tabulate inputs and outputs.

Graphical representation of constant returns production functions.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 108-9

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 99

   

4

1

Decreasing returns production functions.

Decreasing returns production functions.

Give empirical examples where decreasing returns production functions are experienced.

Tabulate inputs and outputs.

Graphical representation of decreasing returns production functions.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 109-10

   

2

Law of diminishing returns.

State the law oh diminishing returns. Refer to illustrative tables.

Plot graphs from the tables;

Discuss shape of the curve.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 112

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 100-1

   

3

Zones of a PF curve.

Divide a production function into three zones.

Identify rational zones of production.

Q/A: review AP, MP.

Guided discovery of the three zones.

Chart –

Curve showing 3 zones of PF.

KLB BK IV

Pg 113-5

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 101-2

   

4

The principles of substitution.

 

 

Input-input relationship.

State the principles of substitution.

Give examples illustrating principles of substitution.

Identify ways of combining inputs.

Exposition.

 

Illustrative examples, brief discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 115-6

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 102

   

5

1

Product-product relationship.

 

Supplementary and complementary products.

 

Give examples of product-product relationship.

 

Give illustrative examples depicting supplementary and complementary products.

Oral questions: joint products, competitive products.

 

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 116-7

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 103

   

2

The principle of equi-marginal returns.

 

The concept of cost.

State the principle of equi-marginal returns.

 

Determine the cost of production.

Identify the role of cost in production.

List types of costs.

Discussion.

 

 

Exposition;

Worked examples.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 117-9

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 104-5,6

   

3

Types of revenue.

Compute total revenue, net revenue and marginal revenue given the relevant information. Worked examples;

Explanations.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 119-120

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 107

   

4

Farm planning.

State factors to consider when drawing a farm plan. Exposition, Q/A & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 121-2

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 108

   

6

1

Making a farm plan.

Outline steps followed in making a farm plan. Exposition, probing questions & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 122-3

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 109

   

2

Farm budgeting.

Define a farm budget.

Analyse importance of farm budgeting.

Exposition & discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 123

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 110

 

   

3

Types of farm budgets.

Describe types of farm budgets.

Give examples of contexts where certain types of budgets are used.

Draw a partial budget.

Draw a complete budget.

 

Exposition & discussion,

Worked examples;

Supervised practice;

Written exercises.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 124-7

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 110-1

   

4

Farmer’s support services

Extension, training & banking.

 

Describe extension, training & banking as support services to the farmers.

 

Exposition & explanations.   KLB BK IV

Pg 127-8

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 112-3

   

7

1

Credit.

 

 

 

Sources of credit.

 

 

Define the term credit.

Identify types of credit.

Differentiate between hard & soft credit.

List down sources of credit.

Identify problems associated with credits.

 

Detailed discussion

& exposition of new concepts.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 128-130

 

 

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 113-5

   

2

Artificial insemination

&

Agricultural research.

Describe A.I. services provided to farmers.

Identify objectives of Agricultural research.

Give examples of Agricultural research centers in Kenya.

 

Detailed discussion

& exposition of new concepts.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 130-2

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 115-6

   

3

Marketing.

 

Farm input suppliers

Tractor hire service

Cite examples of organizations that help farmers in marketing their produce.

Cite organizations where farmers can obtain farm inputs.

State merits & demerits of tractor hire service.

Cite points of tractor hire service.

Writing initials in full e.g. KPCU.

 

Brief discussion

  KLB BK IV

Pg 132-4

 

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 112-3

 

   

4

Risks and uncertainties in farming.

Define the terms risk and uncertainty.

List types of risk and uncertainties.

 

 

 

Brain storming;

Detailed discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 134-5

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 116-7

   

8

1

Adjusting to uncertainties and risks. Outline ways of adjusting to risks and uncertainties.

 

 

 

Brain storming;

Detailed discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 135-6

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 118-9

   

2

AGRICULTURE ECONOMIC IV (FARM ACCOUNTS)

 

Financial documents.

 

 

 

 

 

Outline details contained in an invoice, receipt, delivery note and a purchase order.

 

 

 

 

Oral questions & brief discussion.

 

 

 

Invoice, receipt, delivery note and a purchase order.

 

 

 

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 139-145

 

Longhorn Bk 4

121

 

 

Books of accounts.

Describe features of the ledger and the inventory. Oral questions & brief discussion.

Illustrative tables.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 146-150

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 124

 

Cash book.

Describe features of the cash book.

Balance cash book.

Oral questions & brief discussion.

Illustrative examples.

 

Cash book. KLB BK IV

Pg 150

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 125

 

3

Journal

&

Subsidiary books of the Journal.

Describe features of the journal & subsidiary books of the journal. Oral questions & brief discussion.

Illustrative tables.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 151-3

 

 

 

 

Financial statements.

Balance sheet.

Describe features of balance sheets.

Prepare a balance sheet.

 

 

Make entries in a balance sheet.

Prepare a balance sheet.

Supervised practice.

Balance sheet. KLB BK IV

Pg 154-7

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 129-130

 

4

Solvency of a business.

Determine whether a business is solvent or insolvent.

 

    KLB BK IV

Pg 154-7

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 130

 

Profit and loss account.

Define a profit and loss account.

Draw a profit and loss A/C.

Compute net profit.

 

Teacher gives format of profit and loss A/C.

Worked examples.

Supervised practice.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 157-9

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 132-3

 

9

1,2

Cash analysis.

Define the term cash analysis.

Draw a cash analysis.

Compute total receipt and total expenditure for a given accounting period.

Worked examples.

Supervised practice.

Written exercise.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 159-162

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 133-4

 

3

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING & ORGANIZATIONS

 

Market and marketing.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Define the term market as an institution.

Distinguish between a perfect and imperfect market.

 

 

 

 

 

Q/A: definition.

Teacher’s explanations.

   

 

 

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 164

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 137

 

4

Types of markets.

 

Monopoly.

Oligopoly

     &

Monopsony.

 

Identify features of a monopolistic competition in a market, oligopolistic and monopsonistic markets.

 

Brain storming;

Exposition;

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 165-6

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 137-8

 

10

1

Price theory and demand.

Define the terms price & demand.

Sketch the demand curve.

Explain the term demand schedule.

Exposition;

Curve sketching & explanations.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 166-8

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 139-140

 

2

Factors affecting demand for a commodity.

Outline factors affecting demand for a commodity. Q/A, discussion & explanations.   KLB BK IV

Pg 168-9

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 140-2

 

3

Elasticity of demand.

Explain the concept of elasticity of demand.

Illustrate demand for a commodity.

Calculate elasticity of demand.

Identify types of elasticity of demand.

Illustrate elastic, inelastic  & unitary demand graphically.

Teacher’s explanations.

Graphical illustration.

 

Worked examples. Supervised practice.

 

 

 

Graphical representation of demand.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 170-3

 

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 142-4

 

4

Factors affecting elasticity of demand.

State factors affecting elasticity of demand. Exposition;

Explanations.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 173-4

 

 

11

END  OF  TERM TWO EXAMINATIONS    

 

FORM             FOUR            AGRICULTURE      TERM            THREE    2021  

1

1

Supply

&

Supply-price relationship.

Define the term supply.

Illustrate supply-price relationship.

Sketching supply-price curves.

Refer to supply schedules.

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 174-5

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 144-5

 

2

Factors affecting supply of a commodity.

State & explain factors affecting supply of a commodity. Q/A & detailed discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 175-7

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 145-6

 

3

Elasticity of supply (Es).

Define elasticity of supply (Es).

Calculate (Es)

Q/A: review Ed hence defines Es.

Worked examples.

Supervised activity.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 177-8

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 147

 

4

Determination of market prices.

Explain how market prices are determined.

Determine the equilibrium or market prices of a commodity in a free market.

 

Teacher’s explanation.

 

Q/A : review demand and supply curves.

Plot both curves.

Interpret the graphs.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 178-9

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 149

 

2

1

 

 

 

Price control.

 

 

Marketing and marketing function.

Explain the role of government in price control.

 

Define marketing and marketing function.describe tingfunction. a market.

Brain storming;

Exposition;

Discussion.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 179-183

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 151

 

2

Marketing organizations and agencies.

 

Wholesalers & retailers.

 

 

 

Explain the arbitrage role of a wholesaler.

Identify services provided by retailers.

 

 

 

Brain storming;

Exposition;

Discussion.

   

 

KLB BK IV

Pg 183-4

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 151

 

 

3

Itinerant traders, broker agents & commission agents.

Outline the functions of Itinerant traders, broker agents & commission agents in a market. Exposition & explanation.   KLB BK IV

Pg 184-5

 

 

 

 

4

Packers and processors, marketing boards & auctioneers.

Outline functions of packers and processors, marketing boards & auctioneers in a market. Q/A & detailed discussion.   KLB BK IV

Pg 185-6

 

3

1

Special characteristics of Agricultural products.

Describe bulkiness, weight, volume, seasonality and perishability of Agricultural products. Oral questions & detailed discussion   KLB BK IV

Pg 186-8

 

2

Agricultural organizations.

Kenya sugar authority, Horticultural crops Development Authority, AFC, ADC, and KMC.

 

 

Outline the functions of Kenya sugar authority, Horticultural crops Development Authority, AFC, ADC, and KMC. Probing questions,

Brief discussion

  KLB BK IV

Pg 189-192

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 163-4

 

3

Other Farmers’ Associations:

 KNFU, ASK, 4K-club, YF club.

Outline the functions of other Farmers’ Associations such as KNFU, ASK, 4K-club, YF club. Probing questions,

Brief discussion

Assignment.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 195-7

 

4

Co-operative societies.

Outline the principles of co-operatives.

Highlight functions of co-operatives.

 

Probing questions, brief discussion, & teacher’s explanations.   KLB BK IV

Pg 161-2

 

4

1

AGROFORESTRY

Definition of

agroforestry.

 

Forms of agroforestry.

 

 

Define the term agroforestry.

 

Describe forms of agroforestry.

 

 

 

Probing questions & explanations.

  KLB BK IV

Pg 200-1

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 166-7

 

2

Importance of agroforestry.

Explain the importance of agroforestry.     KLB BK IV

Pg 201-2

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 167-8

 

3

Tree nursery.

State factors considered when selecting the nursery site.

Describe treatment of nursery seeds.

 

 

Q/A & discussions. Tree nurseries. KLB BK IV

Pg 203-5

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 169-173

 

4

Nursery management practices

    &

Care and management of trees.

Identify practices carried out on the nursery in order to produce healthy tree seedlings.

Describe the care and management of trees.

Brain storming;

Discussion;

Practical activities – transplanting seedlings.

Tree nurseries. KLB BK IV

Pg 205-8

 

Longhorn Bk 4

Pg 173-177

 

 

SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT TEST

 

       

 

Grade 1-6, PP1 and PP2 free notes, exams and schemes

Get unlimited Free Lower Primary (Grade 1-6), PP1 and PP2 free notes and exams downloads in this site. The materials are absolutely free of charge. You can edit, save and even print these materials at no cost.

PP1 FREE NOTES AND EXAMS DOWNLOADS

PP1 ASSIGNMENTS SERIES 1

PP1-HOLIDAY-ASSIGNMENT

PP1 ASSIGNMENTS

PP2 FREE NOTES AND EXAMS DOWNLOADS

PP2-HOLIDAY-ASSIGNMENT-_

GRADE 1 FREE NOTES AND EXAMS DOWNLOADS

GRADE 1 EXAMS

ENVIRONMENTAL GRADE 1

GRADE 1 – MATHEMATICS – TERM 1(1)-1

GRADE 1 – LITERACY ACTIVITIES – TERM 3

GRADE 1 – KISWAHILI

GRADE 1 – KISWAHILI – TERM 1(1)

GRADE 1 – HYGIENE AND NUTRITION – TERM 1-1

GRADE 1 – ENVIRONMENTAL – TERM 1

GRADE 1 – ENGLISH – TERM 1(1)

GRADE 1 RELIGIOUS EDUCATION

GRADE 1 MATHS

GRADE 2 FREE NOTES AND EXAMS DOWNLOADS

GRADE 2 EXAMS 

SCHEMES-OF-WORK-LITERACY-GRADE-TWO

MATHS-2-GRADE-2-EXAM

GRADE 2 ART AND DESIGN SCHEMES

Grade 2 English Guide

GRADE 2 ART & CRAFT

GRADE 2 ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES

GRADE 2 – MATHEMATICS – TERM 1(1)

GRADE 2 – KISWAHILI – TERM 1(1)

GRADE 2

GRADE 2 RELIGIOUS EDUCATION

GRADE 2 MATHS

GRADE 2 HYGIENE

GRADE 2 KISWAHILI

GRADE 2 LANGUAGE

GRADE 2 ENVIRONMENTAL

GRADE 3 FREE NOTES AND EXAMS DOWNLOADS

CRE notes grade 3 Complete

GRADE 3 EXAMS 

GRADE 3 CREATIVE ART

GRADE 3 MUSIC SCHEMES

GRADE 3 MATHEMATICS SCHEMES

GRADE 3 KISWAHILI SCHEMES

GRADE 3 ENVIRONMENTAL SCHEMES

GRADE 3 ENGLISH SCHEMES

GRADE-3-SCHEMES-OF-WORK-KISWAHILI

GRADE-3-SCHEMES-OF-WORK-HYGIENE

GRADE-3-SCHEMES-OF-WORK-ENVIRONMENTAL-ACTIVITIES

GRADE-3-SCHEMES-OF-WORK-ENGLISH

GRADE-3-SCHEMES-OF-WORK-HYGIENE

GRADE-3-SCHEMES-OF-WORK-CRE

GRADE 3 EXAMS 


DOWNLOAD FREE PRIMARY & HIGH SCHOOL MATERIALS


FREE UPDATED NOTES

Click on the links below

FORM ONE NOTES

FORM ONE NOTES

FORM TWO NOTES

FORM THREE NOTES

FORM FOUR NOTES

FREE LATEST EXAMS WITH MARKING SCHEMES

Click on the links below;

FORM ONE EXAMS

FORM TWO EXAMS

FORM THREE EXAMS

FORM FOUR EXAMS

FORM 1-4 FREE EXAMS

SCHEMES OF WORK

KCSE REVISION MATERIALS


GRADE 4 FREE NOTES AND EXAMS DOWNLOADS

GRADE 4 SET 2 COMPREHENSIVE EXAMS

GRADE 4 EXAMS SERIES

GRADE 4 EXAMS 

GRADE 4 SOCIAL STUDIES SCHEMES

GRADE 4  PE SCHEMES

GRADE 4 MUSIC SCHEMES

GRADE 4 MATHEMATICS SCHEMES

GRADE 4 KISWAHILI SCHEMES

GRADE 4 HOME SCIENCE SCHEMES

GRADE 4 ENGLISH SCHEMES

GRADE 4 CRE SCHEMES

GRADE 4 ART & DESIGN SCHEMES (1)

Grade-4-islamic-religious-education-scheme-of-work-

Grade-4-indigenous-language-schemes-of-work-

Grade-4-hindu-religious-activities-schemes-of-work-

GRADE 4 AGRICULTURE ASSESSMENT

GRADE 4 FREE SCHEMES OF WORK.

Search for more schemes and other materials below. Simply type in the box below and click on the search button.

[ivory-search id=”14715″ title=”Default Search Form”]

GRADE 4 FREE EXAMS

OTHER LOWER PRIMARY MATERIALS

If you missed out on the materials you desired to get? Worry not. You can search them here.

And also here: A collection of Exams and Revision Materials for all subjects in all forms, classes.

SEE ALSO OTHER FREE MATERIALS HERE:

FORM 2 CHEMISTRY NOTES HANDBOOK FREE

ATOMIC STRUCTURE

The atom is the smallest particle of an element that take part in a chemical reaction. The atom is made up of three subatomic particles:

          (i)Protons

          (ii)Electrons

          (iii)Neutrons

 

(i)Protons

1.The proton is positively charged

2.Is found in the centre of an atom called nucleus

3.It has a relative  mass 1

4.The number of protons in a atom of an element is its Atomic number

 

 (ii)Electrons

1.The Electrons is negatively charged

2.Is found in fixed regions surrounding the centre of an atom called energy levels/orbitals.

3.It has a relative  mass 1/1840

4.The number of protons and electrons  in a atom of an element is always equal

 

(iii)Neutrons

1.The Neutron is neither positively or negatively charged thus neutral.

2.Like protons it is found in the centre of an atom called nucleus

3.It has a relative  mass 1

4.The number of protons and neutrons in a atom of an element is its Mass number

 

Diagram showing the relative positions of protons ,electrons and neutrons in an atom of an element

 

 

 

Diagram showing the relative positions of protons, electrons and neutrons in an atom of Carbon

 

 

 

The table below show atomic structure of the 1st twenty elements.

 


Element
Symbol Protons Electrons Neutrons Atomic
number
Mass number

 

Hydrogen H 1 1 0 1 1
Helium He 2 2 2 2 4
Lithium Li 3 3 4 3 7
Beryllium Be 4 4 5 4 9
Boron B 5 5 6 5 11
Carbon C 6 6 6 6 12
Nitrogen N 7 7 7 7 14
Oxygen O 8 8 8 8 16
Fluorine F 9 9 10 9 19
Neon Ne 10 10 10 10 20
Sodium Na 11 11 12 11 23
Magnesium Mg 12 12 12 12 24
Aluminium Al 13 13 14 13 27
Silicon Si 14 14 14 14 28
Phosphorus P 15 15 16 15 31
Sulphur S 16 16 16 16 32
Chlorine Cl 17 17 18 17 35
Argon Ar 18 18 22 18 40
Potassium K 19 19 20 19 39
Calcium Ca 20 20 20 20 40

Most atoms of elements exist as isotopes.

Isotopes are atoms of the same element, having the same number of protons/atomic number but different number of neutrons/mass number.

By convention, isotopes are written with the mass number as superscript and the atomic number as subscript to the left of the chemical symbol of the element. i.e.

mass number

atomic  number                  m n  X            symbol of element

 

Below is the conventional method of writing the 1st twenty elements showing the mass numbers and atomic numbers;

 

11H                      42He            73Li              94Be             115B                126C

 

147N                         168O           199F             2010Ne          2311Na             2412Mg

 

2713Al                    2814Si           3115P            3216S            3517Cl               4018Ar

 

3919K                     4020C

 

The table below shows some common natural isotopes of some elements

 

Element Isotopes Protons Electrons Neutrons Atomic

number

Mass

number

Hydrogen 11H

21H(deuterium)

31H(Tritium)

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

2

3

1

1

1

 

1

2

3

Chlorine 3517Cl

3717Cl

17

17

17

17

18

20

17

17

35

37

Potassium 3919K

4019K

4119K

19

19

19

19

19

19

20

21

22

19

19

19

39

40

41

Oxygen 168O

188O

8

8

8

8

8

10

8

8

16

18

Uranium 23592U

23892U

 

92

92

92

92

143

146

92

92

235

238

Neon 2210Ne

2010Ne

2110Ne

10

10

10

10

10

10

12

10

11

10

10

10

22

20

21

The mass of an average atom is very small (10-22 g).Masses of atoms are therefore expressed in relation to a chosen element.

The atom recommended is 12C isotope whose mass is arbitrarily assigned as 12.000 atomic mass units(a.m.u) .

All other atoms are compared to the mass of 12C isotope to give the relative at The relative atomic mass(RAM) is therefore defined as “the mass of average atom of an element  compared to  1/12  an atom of 12C isotope whose mass is arbitrarily fixed as 12.000 atomic mass units(a.m.u) ” i.e;

 

RAM   =      mass of  atom of an element

1/12  of one atom of 12C isotope

 

Accurate relative atomic masses (RAM) are got from the mass spectrometer. Mass spectrometer determines the isotopes of the element and their relative abundance/availability.

Using the relative abundances/availability of the isotopes, the relative atomic mass (RAM) can be determined /calculated as in the below examples.

  1. Chlorine occurs as 75% 3517Cl and 25% 3717Cl isotopes. Calculate the relative atomic mass of Chlorine.

 

Working

100 atoms of chlorine contains 75 atoms of 3517Cl isotopes

100 atoms of chlorine contains 75 atoms of 3717Cl isotopes

Therefore;

RAM  of chlorine = ( 75/100 x 35)   +  25/100  x 37 =  35.5

Note that:

Relative atomic mass has no units

More atoms of chlorine exist as 3517Cl(75%) than as 3717Cl(25%)     therefore RAM is nearer to the more abundant isotope.

 

  1. Calculate the relative atomic mass of potassium given that it exist as;

93.1%  3919K ,  0.01%  4019K  ,  6.89%  4119K ,

 

Working

100 atoms of potassium contains 93.1 atoms of 3919K isotopes

100 atoms of potassium contains 0.01 atoms of 4019K isotopes

100 atoms of potassium contains 6.89 atoms of 4119K isotopes

Therefore;

RAM  of potassium = (93.1/100 x39) + (0.01/100 x 40) +(6.89 /100 x 39)

=

Note that:

Relative atomic mass has no units

More atoms of potassium exist as 3919K (93.1%) therefore RAM is nearer to the more abundant 3919K  isotope.

 

  1. Calculate the relative atomic mass of Neon given that it exist as;

90.92%  2010Ne ,  0.26%  2110Ne  ,  8.82%  2210Ne,

 

Working

100 atoms of Neon contains 90.92 atoms of 2010Ne  isotopes

100 atoms of Neon contains 0.26 atoms of 2110Ne  isotopes

100 atoms of Neon contains 8.82 atoms of 2210 Ne  isotopes       Therefore;

RAM  of  Neon = (90.92/100 x20) + (0.26/100 x 21) +(8.82 /100 x 22)

=

Note that:

Relative atomic mass has no units

More atoms of Neon exist as 2010Ne (90.92%) therefore RAM is nearer to the more abundant 2010Ne  isotope.

 

  1. Calculate the relative atomic mass of Argon given that it exist as;

90.92%  2010Ne ,  0.26%  2110Ne  ,  8.82%  2210Ne,

NB

The relative atomic mass is a measure of the masses of atoms. The higher the relative atomic mass, the heavier the atom.

 

Electrons are found in energy levels/orbital.

An energy level is a fixed region around/surrounding the nucleus of an atom occupied by electrons of the same (potential) energy.

By convention energy levels are named 1,2,3… outwards  from the region nearest to nucleus.

 

Each energy level is occupied by a fixed number of electrons:

The 1st energy level is occupied by a maximum of two electrons

The 2nd  energy level is occupied by a maximum of eight electrons

The  3rd  energy level is occupied by a maximum of eight electrons( or   eighteen electrons if available)

The  4th   energy level is occupied by a maximum of eight electrons( or eighteen or thirty two electrons if available)

 

This arrangement of electrons in an atom is called electron configuration / structure.

By convention the electron configuration / structure of an atom of an element can be shown in form of a diagram using either cross(x) or dot() to

 

Practice examples  drawing electronic configurations

 

a)11H has – in nucleus1proton and 0 neutrons

– 1 electron in the 1st energy levels thus:

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons(represented by cross(x)

 

Electronic structure of Hydrogen is thus: 1:

                  

  1. b) 42He has – in nucleus 2 proton and 2 neutrons – 2 electron in the 1st energy levels thus:

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of Helium is thus: 2:

 

  1. c) 73Li has – in nucleus 3 proton and 4 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

1 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Lithium is thus: 2:1

 

  1. d) 94Be has – in nucleus 4 proton and 5 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

2 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

Electronic structure of  Beryllium is thus: 2:2

 

  1. e) 115B has – in nucleus 5 proton and 6 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

3 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Boron is thus: 2:3

 

  1. f)   126C  has      – in nucleus 6 proton and 6 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

4 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Carbon is thus: 2:4

 

  1. g) 147N has – in nucleus 7 proton and 7 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

5 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Nitrogen is thus: 2:5

 

  1. h) 168O has – in nucleus 8 proton and 8 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

6 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Oxygen is thus: 2:6

 

 

  1. i) 199F has – in nucleus 9 proton and 10 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

7 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

 

Electronic structure of  Fluorine is thus: 2:7

  1. i) 2010Ne has – in nucleus 10 proton and 10 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Neon is thus: 2:8

 

  1. j) 2311Na has – in nucleus 11 proton and 12 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

1 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Sodium is thus: 2:8:1

 

  1. k) 2412Mg has – in nucleus 12 proton and 12 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

2 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Magnesium is thus: 2:8:2

  1. l) 2713Al has – in nucleus 13 proton and 14 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

3 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Aluminium is thus: 2:8:3

 

  1. m) 2814Si has – in nucleus 14 proton and 14 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

4 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Silicon is thus: 2:8:4

 

  1. n) 3115P has – in nucleus 14 proton and 15 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

5 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Phosphorus is thus: 2:8:5

 

  1. o) 3216S has – in nucleus 16 proton and 16 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

6 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Sulphur is thus: 2:8:6

 

  1. p) 3517Cl has – in nucleus 18 proton and 17 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

7 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Chlorine is thus: 2:8:7

 

  1. p) 4018Ar has – in nucleus 22 proton and 18 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

8 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Argon is thus: 2:8:8

 

  1. q) 3919K has – in nucleus 20 proton and 19 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

8 electron in the 3rd   energy levels

1 electron in the 4th   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Potassium is thus: 2:8:8:1

 

  1. r) 4020Ca has – in nucleus 20 proton and 20 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

8 electron in the 3rd   energy levels

2 electron in the 4th   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Calcium is thus: 2:8:8:2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B.PERIODIC TABLE

 

There are over 100 elements so far discovered. Scientists have tried to group them together in a periodic table.

A periodic table is a horizontal and vertical arrangement of elements according to their atomic numbers.

This table was successfully arranged in 1913 by the British scientist Henry Moseley from the previous work of the Russian Scientist Dmitri Mendeleev.

The horizontal arrangement forms period. Atoms in the same period have the same the same number of energy levels in their electronic structure. i.e.

The number of energy levels in the electronic configuration of an element determine the period to which the element is in the periodic table.

e.g.

Which period of the periodic table are the following isotopes/elements/atoms?

  1. 126C

 

Electron structure 2:4 => 2 energy levels used thus Period 2

  1. 2311Na

 

Electron structure 2:8:1 => 3 energy levels used thus Period 3

  1. 3919K

 

Electron structure 2:8:8:1 => 4 energy levels used thus Period 4

  1. 11H

Electron structure 1: => 1 energy level used thus Period 1

 

The vertical arrangement of elements  forms a group. Atoms in the same have the same the same group have the same number of outer energy level electrons as  per their electronic structure. i.e.

The number of electrons in the outer energy level  an element determine the group to which the element is ,in the periodic table.

 

  1. 126C

Electron structure 2:4 => 4 electrons in outer energy level thus Group IV

  1. 2311C

Electron structure 2:8:1 => 1 electron in outer energy level thus Group I

 

  1. 3919K

 

Electron structure 2:8:8:1=>1 electron in outer energy level thus Group I

 

  1. 11H

Electron structure 1: => 1 electron in outer energy level thus Group I

 

By convention;

 (i)Periods are named using English numerals 1,2,3,4,…

(ii)Groups are named using Roman numerals I,II,III,IV,…

 

There are eighteen groups in a standard periodic table.

There are seven periods in a standard periodic table.

 

THE STANDARD PERIODIC TABLE OF ELEMENTS

 

 

When an atom has maximum number of electrons in its outer energy level, it is said to be stable.

When an atom has no maximum number of electrons in its outer energy level, it is said to be unstable.

 All stable atoms are in group 8/18 of the periodic table. All other elements are unstable.

All unstable atoms/isotopes try to be stable through chemical reactions. A chemical reaction involves gaining or losing outer electrons (electron transfer) .When electron transfer take place, an ion is formed.

 

An ion is formed when an unstable atom gain or donate electrons in its outer energy level inorder to be stable. Whether an atom gain or donate electrons depend on the relative energy required to donate or gain extra electrons i.e.

Examples

  1. 199 F has electronic structure/configuration 2:7.

It can donate the seven outer electrons to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:.

It can gain one extra electron to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:8. Gaining requires less energy, and thus  Fluorine reacts by gaining one extra electrons.

  1. 2313 Al has electronic structure/configuration 2:8:3

It can donate the three outer electrons to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:8.

It can gain five extra electrons to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:8:8. Donating requires less energy, and thus  Aluminium reacts by donating its three outer electrons.

 

Elements with less than four electrons in the outer energy level donates /lose the outer electrons to be stable and form a positively charged ion called cation.

A cation therefore has more protons(positive charge) than electrons(negative charge)

 Generally metals usually form cation

Elements with more than four electrons in the outer energy level gain /acquire extra  electrons in the outer energy level to be stable and form a negatively charged ion called anion.

An anion therefore has less protons(positive charge) than electrons(negative charge)

Generally non metals usually form anion. Except  Hydrogen

The charge carried by an ion is equal to the number of electrons gained/acquired or donated/lost.

 

Examples of ion formation

 

1.11H

H          ->             H+                +                   e

(atom)    (monovalent cation)       (electrons donated/lost)

Electronic configuration 1:                 (No electrons remains)

 

 

  1. 2713 Al

Al               ->                Al3+             +                  3e

(atom)                             (trivalent cation)  (3 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:3                                 2:8

structure   (unstable)                         (stable)

 

  1. 2311 Na

Na               ->                Na+              +                 e

(atom)                             (cation)          ( 1 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:1                                 2:8

structure   (unstable)                         (stable)

 

  1. 2412Mg

Mg              ->                Mg2+            +                 2e

(atom)                             (cation)          ( 2 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:1                                 2:8

structure   (unstable)                         (stable)

 

  1. 168O

O       +                2e                     ->                  O2-

(atom)            ( 2 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:6                                                                      2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                         (stable)

 

  1. 147N

N       +                3e                     ->                  N3-

(atom)            ( 3 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:5                                                                      2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                         (stable)

 

  1. 3115P

P       +                3e                     ->                  P3-

(atom)            ( 3 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:5                                                                      2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                         (stable)

 

  1. 199F

F       +                e                     ->                    F

(atom)            ( 1 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:7                                                                      2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                         (stable)

 

  1. 3517Cl

Cl      +                e                     ->                    Cl

(atom)            ( 1 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:8:7                                                                   2:8:8

structure   (unstable)                                                         (stable)

 

  1. 3919 K

K                ->                K+               +                 e

(atom)                             (cation)          ( 1 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:8:1                              2:8:8

structure   (unstable)                         (stable)

 

When an element donate/loses its outer electrons ,the process is called oxidation. When an element acquires/gains extra electrons in  its outer energy level,the process is called reduction.The  charge carried by an atom, cation  or anion is its oxidation state.

 

Table showing the oxidation states of some isotopes

Element Symbol of element / isotopes Charge of ion Oxidation state
Hydrogen 11H

21H(deuterium)

31H(Tritium)

H+

H+

H+

+1

+1

+1

Chlorine 3517Cl

3717Cl

 

 

Cl

Cl

-1

-1

Potassium 3919K

4019K

4119K

 

K+

K+

K+

+1

+1

+1

Oxygen 168O

188O

 

O2-

O2-

-2

-2

Magnesium 2412Mg Mg2+ +2
sodium 2311Na Na+ +1
Copper Cu Cu+

Cu2+

+1

+2

Iron   Fe2+

Fe3+

+2

+3

Lead   Pb2+

Pb4+

+2

+4

Manganese   Mn2+

Mn7+

+2

+7

Chromium   Cr3+

Cr6+

+3

+6

Sulphur   S4+

S6+

+4

+6

Carbon   C2+

C4+

+2

+4

 

Note :

Some elements can exist in  more than one oxidation state.They are said to have variable oxidation state.

Roman capital numeral is used to indicate the oxidation state of an element with a variable oxidation state in a compound.

 

Examples:

  • Copper (I) means Cu+ as in Copper(I)oxide
  • Copper (II) means Cu2+ as in Copper(II)oxide
  • Iron (II) means Fe2+ as in Iron(II)sulphide

(iv)    Iron (III) means Fe3+ as in Iron(III)chloride

  • Sulphur(VI)mean S6+ as in Iron(III)sulphate(VI)
  • Sulphur(VI)mean S6+ as in sulphur(VI)oxide
  • Sulphur(IV)mean S4+ as in sulphur(IV)oxide
  • Sulphur(IV)mean S4+ as in sodium sulphate(IV)

(ix)    Carbon(IV)mean C4+ as in carbon(IV)oxide

(x)     Carbon(IV)mean C4+ as in Lead(II)carbonate(IV)

(xi)    Carbon(II)mean C2+ as in carbon(II)oxide

(xii)   Manganese(IV)mean Mn4+ as in Manganese(IV)oxide

 

A compound is a combination of two or more elements in fixed proportions. The   ratio of the atoms making a compound is called the chemical formulae. Elements combine together to form a compound depending on their combining power.

The combining power of atoms in an element is called Valency.Valency of an element is equal to the number of:

(i)hydrogen atoms that an atom of element can combine with or displace.

(ii)electrons gained /acquired in outer energy level by non metals to be   stable/attain  duplet/octet.

(iii)electrons donated/lost by outer energy level of metals to be stable/attain octet/duplet.

(iv)charges carried by ions/cations/ions

Group of atoms that react as a unit during chemical reactions are called radicals.Elements with variable oxidation state also have more than one valency.

 

Table showing the valency of common radicals.

 

Radical name Chemical formulae Combining power / Valency
Ammonium NH4 + 1
Hydroxide OH 1
Nitrate(V) NO3 1
Hydrogen carbonate HCO3 1
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) HSO4 1
Hydrogen sulphate(IV) HSO3 1
Manganate(VII) MnO4 1
Chromate(VI) CrO42- 2
Dichromate(VI) Cr2O72- 2
Sulphate(VI) SO42- 2
Sulphate(IV) SO32- 2
Carbonate(IV) CO32- 2
Phosphate(V) PO42- 3

 

Table showing the valency of some common metal and non metals

 

Element/metal Valency Element/non metal Valency

 

Hydrogen 1 Florine 1
Lithium 1 Chlorine 1
Beryllium 2 Bromine 1
Boron 3 Iodine 1
Sodium 1 Carbon 4
Magnesium 2 Nitrogen 3
Aluminium 3 Oxygen 2
Potassium 1 Phosphorus 3
Calcium 2    
Zinc 2    
Barium 2    
Mercury 2    
Iron 2 and 3    
Copper 1 and 2    
Manganese 2 and 4    
Lead 2 and 4    

 

From the valency of elements , the chemical formular of a compound can be derived using the following procedure:

(i)Identify the elements and radicals making the compound

(ii)Write  the symbol/formular  of the elements making the compound     starting with the metallic element

(iii)Assign the valency of each element /radical as superscript.

(iv)Interchange/exchange the valencies of each element as subscript.

(v)Divide by the smallest/lowest valency to derive the smallest whole  number ratios

Ignore a valency of 1.

This is the chemical formula.

 

Practice examples

Write the chemical formula of

 (a)Aluminium oxide

 

Elements making compound Aluminium Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Al O
Assign valencies as superscript Al3 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Al2 O3
Divide by smallest valency to get whole number

 

Chemical formula of Aluminium oxide is thus: Al2 O3

This means:2atoms of Aluminium combine with 3 atoms of Oxygen

 

(b)Sodium oxide

 

Elements making compound Sodium Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Na O
Assign valencies as superscript Na1 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Na2 O1
Divide by smallest valency to get whole number

 

Chemical formula of Sodium oxide is thus: Na2 O

This means:2atoms of Sodium combine with 1 atom of Oxygen

 

(c)Calcium oxide

 

Elements making compound Calcium Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Ca O
Assign valencies as superscript Ca2 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Ca2 O2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Ca1 O1

 

Chemical formula of Calcium oxide is thus: CaO

This means:1 atom of calcium combine with 1 atom of Oxygen.

 

(d)Lead(IV)oxide

 

Elements making compound Lead Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Pb O
Assign valencies as superscript Pb4 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Pb2 O4
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Pb1 O2

 

Chemical formula of Lead(IV) oxide is thus: PbO2

This means:1 atom of lead combine with 2 atoms of Oxygen.

 

(e)Lead(II)oxide

 

Elements making compound Lead Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Pb O
Assign valencies as superscript Pb2 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Pb2 O2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Pb1 O1

 

Chemical formula of Lead(II) oxide is thus: PbO

This means:1 atom of lead combine with 1 atom of Oxygen.

 

(e)Iron(III)oxide

 

Elements making compound Iron Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Fe O
Assign valencies as superscript Fe3 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Fe2 O3
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Iron(III) oxide is thus: Fe2O3

This means:2 atom of lead combine with 3 atom of Oxygen.

 

(f)Iron(II)sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Iron sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Fe SO4
Assign valencies as superscript Fe2 SO4 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Fe2 SO4  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Fe1 SO4  1

 

Chemical formula of Iron(II) sulphate(VI) is thus: FeSO4

This means:1 atom of Iron combine with 1 sulphate(VI) radical.

 

(g)Copper(II)sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Copper sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Cu SO4
Assign valencies as superscript Cu2 SO4 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Cu2 SO4  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Cu1 SO4  1

 

Chemical formula of Cu(II)sulphate(VI) is thus: CuSO4

This means:1 atom of Copper combine with 1 sulphate(VI) radical.

 

(h)Aluminium sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Aluminium sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Al SO4
Assign valencies as superscript Al3 SO4 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Al2 SO4  3
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Aluminium sulphate(VI) is thus: Al2(SO4)3

This means:2 atom of Aluminium combine with 3 sulphate(VI) radical.

 

(i)Aluminium nitrate(V)

 

Elements making compound Aluminium nitrate(V)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Al NO3
Assign valencies as superscript Al3 NO3 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Al1 NO3  3
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Aluminium sulphate(VI) is thus: Al (NO3)3

This means:1 atom of Aluminium combine with 3 nitrate(V) radical.

 

(j)Potassium  manganate(VII)

 

Elements making compound Potassium manganate(VII)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound K MnO4
Assign valencies as superscript K 1 MnO4 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript K1 MnO4 1
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Potassium manganate(VII) is thus: KMnO4

This means:1 atom of Potassium combine with 4 manganate(VII) radical.

 

(k)Sodium  dichromate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Sodium dichromate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Na Cr2O7
Assign valencies as superscript Na 1 Cr2O7 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Na2 Cr2O7 1
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Sodium dichromate(VI) is thus: Na2 Cr2O7

This means:2 atom of Sodium combine with 1 dichromate(VI) radical.

 

(l)Calcium  hydrogen carbonate

 

Elements making compound Calcium Hydrogen carbonate
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Ca CO3
Assign valencies as superscript Ca 2 HCO3 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Ca1 HCO3  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Calcium hydrogen carbonate is thus: Ca(HCO3)2

This means:1 atom of Calcium  combine with 2 hydrogen carbonate radical.

 

(l)Magnesium  hydrogen sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Magnesium Hydrogen sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Mg HSO4
Assign valencies as superscript Mg 2 HSO4 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Mg1 HSO4  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Magnesium hydrogen sulphate(VI) is thus: Mg(HSO4)2

This means:1 atom of Magnesium  combine with 2 hydrogen sulphate(VI) radical.

 

Compounds are formed from chemical reactions. A chemical reaction is formed when atoms of the reactants break free to bond again and form products. A chemical reaction is a statement showing the movement of reactants to form products. The following procedure is used in writing a chemical  equations:

  1. Write the word equation
  2. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products
  3. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.
  4. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal. This is called balancing.

 Do not change the chemical formula of the products/reactants.

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols of the reactants and products after each chemical formula as:

(i) (s) for solids

(ii) (l) for liquids

(iii) (g) for gas

(iv) (aq) for aqueous/dissolved in water to make a solution.

 

Practice examples

Write a balanced chemical equation for the following

  • Hydrogen gas is prepared from reacting Zinc granules with dilute hydrochloric acid.

Procedure

 

  1. Write the word equation

Zinc + Hydrochloric acid -> Zinc chloride + hydrogen gas

 

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

Zn     +       HCl            ->      ZnCl2          +        H2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

      Number of atoms of Zn on the reactant side is equal to product side

     One atom of H in HCl on the reactant side is not equal to two atoms in H2 on product side.

One atom of Cl in HCl on the reactant side is not equal to two atoms in ZnCl2 on product side.

 

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

    Multiply  HCl by “2” to get “2” Hydrogen and “2” Chlorine on product and reactant side.

Zn     +       2 HCl          ->      ZnCl2          +        H2

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

Zn(s)          +       2 HCl(aq)             ->      ZnCl2 (aq)   +        H2(g)

 

  • Oxygen gas is prepared from decomposition of Hydrogen peroxide solution to water

Procedure

 

  1. Write the word equation

Hydrogen peroxide -> Water + oxygen gas

 

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

H2O2           ->      H2O            +        O2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

      Number of atoms of H on the reactant side is equal to product side

     Two atom of O in H2O2 on the reactant side is not equal to  three atoms (one in H2O and two in O2) on product side.

 

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

    Multiply  H2O2 by “2” to get “4” Hydrogen and “4” Oxygen on reactants

    Multiply  H2O  by “2” to get “4” Hydrogen and “2” Oxygen on product side

   When the “2” Oxygen in O2 and the“2” in H2O are added on product side they are equal to the“4” Oxygen on reactants side.  

2H2O2                  ->      2H2O          +        O2

 

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

2H2O2(aq)            ->      2H2O(l)                +        O2(g)

 

  • Chlorine gas is prepared from Potassium manganate(VII) reacting with hydrochloric acid to form potassium chloride solution, manganese(II) chloride solution,water and chlorine gas.

 

Procedure

  1. Write the word equation

Potassium manganate(VII) + Hydrochloric acid ->

potassium chloride + manganese(II) chloride + chlorine +water

 

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

KMnO4 + HCl     -> KCl  + MnCl2  +H2O + Cl2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

      Number of atoms of K and Mn on the reactant side is equal to product side

     Two atom of H in H2O on the product side is not equal to one atom on reactant side.

Four atom of O in KMnO4 is not equal to one in H2

One atom of Cl in HCl on reactant side is not equal to three (one in H2O and two in Cl2)

 

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

    Multiply  HCl by “16” to get “16” Hydrogen and “16” Chlorine on reactants

    Multiply  KMnO4  by “2” to get “2” Potassium and “2” manganese, “2 x4 =8” Oxygen on reactant side.

Balance the product side to get:

  

2 KMnO4 +16 HCl        -> 2 KCl  + 2 MnCl2      +8 H2O       + 5 Cl2

 

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

2KMnO4(s) +16 HCl(aq)-> 2 KCl (aq) + 2MnCl2(aq)+8 H2O(l)+5 Cl2(g)

 

(d)Carbon(IV)oxide  gas is prepared from Calcium carbonate reacting with hydrochloric acid to form calcium chloride solution, water and carbon(IV)oxide gas.

 

Procedure

  1. Write the word equation

Calcium carbonate + Hydrochloric acid ->

calcium chloride solution+ water +carbon(IV)oxide

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

CaCO3 + HCl       -> CaCl2     +H2O + CO2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

    

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

   

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

CaCO3(s)   +    2 HCl(aq)  ->   CaCl2(aq)  +  H2O(l)  +   CO2(g)

 

(d)Sodium hydroxide solution neutralizes hydrochloric acid to form salt and water.

NaOH(aq)   +     HCl(aq)  ->   NaCl (aq)  +  H2O(l)

 

(e)Sodium reacts with water to form sodium hydroxide and hydrogen gas.

2Na(s)   +     2H2O(l)  ->   2NaOH(aq)  +  H2(g)

 

          (f)Calcium reacts withwater to form calcium hydroxide and hydrogen gas

Ca(s)   +     2H2O(l)  ->   Ca(OH)2(aq)  +  H2(g)

 

          (g)Copper(II)Oxide solid reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to form copper(II)chloride and water.

CuO(s)   +     2HCl(aq)  ->   CuCl2(aq)  +  H2O(l)

 

(h)Hydrogen sulphide reacts with Oxygen to form sulphur(IV)Oxide and water.

                    2H2S(g) + 3O2(g)   ->  2SO2(g) + 2H2O(l)

 

(i)Magnesium reacts with steam to form Magnesium Oxide and Hydrogen gas.

Mg(s)   +     2H2O(g)  ->   MgO(s)  +  H2(g)

 

(j)Ethane(C2H6) gas burns in air to form Carbon(IV)Oxide and water.

2C2H6(g)  +  7O2(g)  ->  4CO2(g)  +  6H2O(l)

 

(k)Ethene(C2H4) gas burns in air to form Carbon(IV)Oxide and water.

C2H4(g)  +  3O2(g)  ->  2CO2(g)  +  2H2O(l)

 

(l)Ethyne(C2H2) gas burns in air to form Carbon(IV)Oxide and water.

2C2H2(g)  +  5O2(g)  ->  4CO2(g)  +  2H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C.PERIODICITY OF CHEMICAL FAMILES/DOWN THE GROUP.

 

The number of valence electrons and the number of occupied energy levels in an atom of an element determine the position of an element in the periodic table.i.e

The number of occupied energy levels determine the Period and the valence electrons determine the Group.

Elements in the same group have similar physical and chemical properties. The trends in physical and chemical properties of elements in the same group vary down the group. Elements in the same group thus constitute a chemical family.

 

  • Group I elements: Alkali metals

 

Group I elements are called Alkali metals except Hydrogen which is a non metal. The alkali metals include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Lithium Li 3 2:1 Li+ 1
Sodium Na 11 2:8:1 Na+ 1
Potassium K 19 2:8:8:1 K+ 1
Rubidium Rb 37 2:8:18:8:1 Rb+ 1
Caesium Cs 55 2:8:18:18:8:1 Cs+ 1
Francium Fr 87 2:8:18:32:18:8:1 Fr+ 1

 

All alkali metals atom has one electron in the outer energy level. They therefore are monovalent. They donate /lose the outer electron to have oxidation state M+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Lithium   to Francium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size of Potassium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Potassium has more/4 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic and ionic radius

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an atom and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called atomic radius. Atomic radius is measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the atomic radius the bigger /larger the atomic size.

 

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an ion and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called ionic radius. Ionic radius is also measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the ionic radius the bigger /larger the size of the ion.

Atomic radius and ionic radius depend on the number of energy levels occupied by electrons. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic /ionic radius. e.g.

The atomic radius of Francium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Francium has more/7 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkali metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkali metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because alkali metals react by losing/donating the outer electron and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of some alkali metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Lithium Li 3 0.133 0.060
Sodium Na 11 0.157 0.095
Potassium K 19 0.203 0.133

 

The atomic radius of sodium is  0.157nM .The ionic radius of Na+ is 0.095nM. This is because sodium reacts by donating/losing the outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

Electropositivity

The ease of donating/losing electrons is called electropositivity. All alkali metals are electropositive. Electropositivity  increase as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease. Francium is the most electropositive element in the periodic table because it has the highest/biggest atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

The minimum amount of energy required to remove an electron from an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st ionization energy. The SI unit of ionization energy is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 .Ionization energy depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer electrons/energy level and thus the lower the ionization energy. For alkali metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of sodium is 496 kJmole-1  while that of potassium is 419 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from sodium to Potassium. It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electrons in Potassium than in sodium.

 

Physical properties

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkali metals are soft and easy to cut with a knife. The softness and ease of cutting increase down the group from Lithium to Francium. This is because an increase in atomic radius, decreases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure

Appearance: Alkali metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when freshly cut. The surface rapidly/quickly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface rapidly/quickly reacts with elements of air/oxygen.

Melting and boiling points: Alkali metals have a relatively low melting/boiling point than common metals like Iron. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weak metallic bond/structure.

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkali metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. Metals conduct using the outer mobile delocalized electrons. The delocalized electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

 

          Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkali metals

 

Alkali metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conductivity 1st  ionization energy
Lithium Silvery white Not easy 180 1330 Good 520
Sodium Shiny grey Easy 98 890 Good 496

 

Potassium Shiny grey Very easy 64 774 Good 419

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, alkali metals reacts with the elements in the air.

Example

On exposure to air, Sodium first reacts with Oxygen to form sodium oxide.

4Na(s)         +       O2(g) ->      2Na2O(s)

The sodium oxide formed further reacts with water/moisture in the air to form sodium hydroxide solution.

            Na2O(s)      +      H2O(l)         ->     2NaOH(aq)

Sodium hydroxide solution reacts with carbon(IV)oxide in the air to form sodium carbonate.

2NaOH(aq)   +      CO2(g)        ->   Na2CO3(g)    +   H2O(l)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Lithium burns in air with a crimson/deep red flame to form Lithium oxide

4Li (s)         +       O2(g) ->      2Li2O(s)

Sodium burns in air with a yellow flame to form sodium oxide

4Na (s)        +       O2(g) ->      2Na2O(s)

Sodium burns in oxygen with a yellow flame to form sodium peroxide

2Na (s)        +       O2(g) ->      Na2O2 (s)

Potassium burns in air with a lilac/purple flame to form potassium oxide

4K (s) +       O2(g) ->      2K2O (s)

 

(iii) Reaction with water:

 

Experiment

Measure 500 cm3 of water into a beaker.

Put three drops of phenolphthalein indicator.

Put about 0.5g of Lithium metal into the beaker.

Determine the pH of final product

Repeat the experiment using about 0.1 g of Sodium and Potassium.

Caution: Keep a distance

 

Observations

Alkali metal Observations Comparative speed/rate of the reaction
Lithium -Metal floats in water

-rapid effervescence/fizzing/bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Moderately vigorous
Sodium -Metal floats in water

-very rapid effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

Very vigorous
Potassium -Metal floats in water

-explosive effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Explosive/burst into flames

 

Explanation

Alkali metals are less dense than water. They therefore float in water.They react with water to form a strongly alkaline solution of their hydroxides and producing hydrogen gas. The rate of this reaction increase down the group. i.e. Potassium is more reactive than sodium .Sodium is more reactive than Lithium.

The reactivity increases as electropositivity increases of the alkali increases. This is because as the atomic radius increases , the ease of donating/losing outer electron  increase during chemical reactions.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->      2LiOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2Na(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->      2NaOH(aq) +        H2(g)

2K(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->      2KOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

2Rb(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->      2RbOH(aq) +        H2(g)

2Cs(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->      2CsOH(aq) +        H2(g)

2Fr(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->      2FrOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

Reactivity increase down the group

 

(iv) Reaction with chlorine:

 

Experiment

Cut about 0.5g of sodium into a deflagrating spoon with a lid cover. Introduce it on a Bunsen flame until it catches fire. Quickly and carefully lower it into a gas jar containing dry chlorine to cover the gas jar.

Repeat with about 0.5g of Lithium.

Caution: This experiment should be done in fume chamber because chlorine is poisonous /toxic.

 

Observation

Sodium metal continues to burn with a yellow flame forming white solid/fumes.

Lithium metal continues to burn with a crimson flame forming white solid / fumes.

Alkali metal react with chlorine gas to form the corresponding metal chlorides. The reactivity increase as electropositivity increase down the group from Lithium to Francium.The ease of donating/losing the outer electrons increase as the atomic radius increase and the outer electron is less attracted to the nucleus.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)          +        Cl2(g)          ->      2LiCl(s)

2Na(s)         +        Cl2(g)          ->      2NaCl(s)

2K(s)          +        Cl2(g)          ->      2KCl(s)

2Rb(s)         +        Cl2(g)          ->      2RbCl(s)

2Cs(s)         +        Cl2(g)          ->      2CsCl(s)

2Fr(s)          +        Cl2(g)          ->      2FrCl(s)                                                                                    Reactivity increase down the group

 

The table below shows some compounds of the 1st three alkali metals

 

  Lithium sodium Potassium
Hydroxide LiOH NaOH KOH
Oxide Li2O Na2O K2O
Sulphide Li2S Na2S K2S
Chloride LiCl NaCl KCl
Carbonate Li2CO3 Na2CO3 K2CO3
Nitrate(V) LiNO3 NaNO3 KNO3
Nitrate(III) NaNO2 KNO2
Sulphate(VI) Li2SO4 Na2SO4 K2SO4
Sulphate(IV) Na2SO3 K2SO3
Hydrogen carbonate NaHCO3 KHCO3
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) NaHSO4 KHSO4
Hydrogen sulphate(IV) NaHSO3 KHSO3
Phosphate Na3PO4 K3PO4
Manganate(VI) NaMnO4 KMnO4
Dichromate(VI) Na2Cr2O7 K2Cr2O7
Chromate(VI) Na2CrO4 K2CrO4

 

Some uses of alkali metals include:

(i)Sodium is used in making sodium cyanide for extracting gold from gold ore.

(ii)Sodium chloride is used in seasoning food.

(iii)Molten mixture of sodium and potassium is used as coolant in nuclear reactors.

(iv)Sodium is used in making sodium hydroxide used in making soapy and soapless detergents.

(v)Sodium is used as a reducing agent for the extraction of titanium from Titanium(IV)chloride.

(vi)Lithium is used in making special high strength glasses

(vii)Lithium compounds are used to make dry cells in mobile phones and computer laptops.

 

Group II elements: Alkaline earth metals

 

Group II elements are called Alkaline earth metals . The alkaline earth metals include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Beryllium Be 4 2:2 Be2+ 2
Magnesium Mg 12 2:8:2 Mg2+ 2
Calcium Ca 20 2:8:8:2 Ca2+ 2
Strontium Sr 38 2:8:18:8:2 Sr2+ 2
Barium Ba 56 2:8:18:18:8:2 Ba2+ 2
Radium Ra 88 2:8:18:32:18:8:2 Ra2+ 2

 

All alkaline earth metal atoms have two electrons in the outer energy level. They therefore are divalent. They donate /lose the two outer electrons to have oxidation state M2+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Beryllium   to Radium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Calcium is bigger/larger than that of Magnesium because Calcium has more/4 energy levels than Magnesium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkaline earth metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkaline earth metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because they react by losing/donating the two outer electrons and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Beryllium Be 4 0.089 0.031
Magnesium Mg 12 0.136 0.065
Calcium Ca 20 0.174 0.099

The atomic radius of Magnesium is  0.136nM .The ionic radius of Mg2+ is 0.065nM. This is because Magnesium reacts by donating/losing the two outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

Electropositivity

All alkaline earth metals are also electropositive like alkali metals. The electropositivity increase with increase in atomic radius/size. Calcium is more electropositive than Magnesium. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The two outer electrons in calcium experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease because of  the higher/bigger atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

For alkaline earth metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of Magnesium  is 900 kJmole-1  while that of Calcium is 590 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from magnesium to calcium.

It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electron in calcium than in magnesium.

 

The minimum amount of energy required to remove a second electron from an ion of an element in its gaseous state is called the 2nd ionization energy.

The 2nd ionization energy is always higher /bigger than  the 1st  ionization energy.

This because once an electron is donated /lost form an atom, the overall effective nuclear attraction on the remaining electrons/energy level increase. Removing a second electron from the ion require therefore more energy than the first electron.

The atomic radius of alkali metals is higher/bigger than that of alkaline earth metals.This is because across/along the period from left to right there is an increase in nuclear charge from additional number of protons and still additional number of electrons entering the same energy level. Increase in nuclear charge increases the effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level which pulls it closer to the nucleus. e.g.

Atomic radius of Sodium (0.157nM) is higher than that of Magnesium (0.137nM). This is because Magnesium has more effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level than Sodium hence pulls outer energy level more nearer to its nucleus.

Physical properties

 

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkaline earth metals are not soft and easy to cut with a knife like alkali metals. This is because of the decrease in atomic radius of corresponding alkaline earth metal, increases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure. Alkaline earth metals are

(i)ductile(able to form wire/thin long rods)

(ii)malleable(able to be hammered into sheet/long thin plates)

(iii)have high tensile strength(able to be coiled without breaking/ not brittle/withstand stress)

 

Appearance: Alkali earth metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when their surface is freshly polished /scrubbed. The surface slowly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface slowly undergoes oxidation to form an oxide. This oxide layer should be removed before using the alkaline earth metals.

 

Melting and boiling points: Alkaline earth metals have a relatively high melting/ boiling point than alkali metals. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weaker metallic bond/structure. Alkaline earth metals use two delocalized electrons to form a stronger metallic bond /structure.

The melting and boiling points decrease down the group as the atomic radius/size increase reducing the strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure. e.g.

 

Beryllium has a melting point of 1280oC. Magnesium has a melting point of 650oC.Beryllium has a smaller atomic radius/size than magnesium .The strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure is thus stronger in beryllium.

 

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkaline earth metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. The two delocalized valence electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

Electrical conductivity increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase making the delocalized outer electrons less attracted to nucleus. Alkaline earth metals are better thermal and electrical conductors than alkali metals because they have more/two outer delocalized electrons.e.g.

Magnesium is a better conductor than sodium because it has more/two delocalized electrons than sodium. The more delocalized electrons the better the electrical conductor.

Calcium is a better conductor than magnesium.

Calcium has bigger/larger atomic radius than magnesium because the delocalized electrons are less attracted to the nucleus of calcium and thus more free /mobile and thus better the electrical conductor

Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Alkaline earth metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conduct- ivity 1st  ionization energy 2nd ionization energy
Beryllium Shiny grey Not

easy

1280 3450 Good 900 1800
Magnesium Shiny grey Not Easy 650 1110 Good 736

 

1450
calcium Shiny grey Not

easy

850 1140 Good 590 970

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, the surface of alkaline earth  metals is slowly oxidized to its oxide on prolonged exposure to air.

Example

On exposure to air, the surface of magnesium ribbon is oxidized to form a thin film of Magnesium oxide

.         2Mg(s)        +       O2(g) ->      2MgO(s)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Experiment

Hold a about 2cm length of Magnesium ribbon on a Bunsen flame. Stop heating when it catches fire/start burning.

Caution: Do not look directly at the flame

Put the products of burning into 100cm3 beaker. Add about 5cm3 of distilled water. Swirl. Test the mixture using litmus papers.
Repeat with Calcium

Observations

-Magnesium burns with a bright blindening flame

-White solid /ash produced

-Solid dissolves in water to form a colourless solution

-Blue litmus paper remain blue

-Red litmus paper turns blue

-colourless gas with pungent smell of urine

Explanation

Magnesium burns in air with  a bright blindening flame to form a mixture of Magnesium oxide and Magnesium nitride.

2Mg (s)       +       O2(g) ->      2MgO(s)

3Mg (s)       +       N2 (g)          ->      Mg3N2 (s)

Magnesium oxide dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide.

MgO(s)       +        H2O (l)        ->      Mg(OH)2(aq)

Magnesium nitride dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Mg3N2 (s)    +        6H2O(l)       ->      3Mg(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

 

Magnesium hydroxide and ammonia are weakly alkaline with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

Calcium burns in air with faint orange/red flame to form a mixture of both Calcium oxide and calcium nitride.

2Ca (s)        +       O2(g) ->      2CaO(s)

3Ca (s)        +       N2 (g)          ->      Ca3N2 (s)

 

Calcium oxide dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide.

CaO(s)        +        H2O(l)         ->      Ca(OH)2(aq)

Calcium nitride dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Ca3N2 (s)     +        6H2O(l)       ->      3Ca(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

Calcium hydroxide is also weakly alkaline solution with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

(iii)Reaction with water

 

Experiment

Measure 50 cm3 of distilled water into a beaker.

Scrub/polish with sand paper 1cm length of Magnesium ribbon

Place it in the water. Test the product-mixture with blue and red litmus papers.

Repeat with Calcium metal.

 

Observations

-Surface of magnesium covered by bubbles of colourless gas.

-Colourless solution formed.

-Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing takes place in Calcium.

-Red litmus paper turns blue.

-Blue litmus paper remains blue.

 

Explanations

Magnesium slowly reacts with cold water to form Magnesium hydroxide and bubbles of Hydrogen gas that stick on the surface of the ribbon.

 

Mg(s)  +  2H2O (l)     ->   Mg(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Calcium moderately reacts with cold water to form Calcium hydroxide and produce a steady stream of Hydrogen gas.

 

Ca(s)  +  2H2O (l)      ->   Ca(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

 

(iv)Reaction with water vapour/steam

Experiment

Put some cotton wool soaked in water/wet sand in a long boiling tube.

Coil a well polished magnesium ribbon into the boiling tube.

Ensure the coil touches the side of the boiling tube. Heat the cotton wool/sand slightly then strongly heat the Magnesium ribbon .

Set up of apparatus

 

Observations

-Magnesium glows red hot then burns with a blindening flame.

-Magnesium continues to glow/burning even without more heating.

-White solid/residue.

-colourless gas collected over water.

Explanation

On heating wet sand, steam is generated which drives out the air that would otherwise react with /oxidize the ribbon.

Magnesium burns in steam/water vapour generating enough heat that ensures the reaction goes to completion even without further heating. White Magnesium oxide is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved.

To prevent suck back, the delivery tube should be removed from the water before heating is stopped at the end of the experiment.

Mg(s)  +  H2O (l)       ->   MgO(s)   +    H2 (g)

 

(v)Reaction with chlorine gas.

 

Experiment

Lower slowly  a burning magnesium ribbon/shavings into a gas jar containing Chlorine gas. Repeat with a hot piece of calcium metal.

Observation

-Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine with a bright blindening flame.

-Calcium continues to burn for a short time.

-White solid formed .

-Pale green colour of chlorine fades.

Explanation

Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine gas forming white magnesium oxide solid.

Mg(s)  +  Cl2 (g)        ->     MgCl2 (s)

Calcium burns slightly in chlorine gas to form white calcium oxide solid. Calcium oxide formed coat unreacted Calcium stopping further reaction

Ca(s)  +  Cl2 (g)         ->     CaCl2 (s)

 

(v)Reaction with dilute acids.

Experiment

Place about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute sulphuric(VI)acid into a test tube. Add about 1.0cm length of magnesium ribbon into the test tube. Cover the mouth of the test tube using a thumb. Release the gas and test the gas using a burning splint.

Repeat with about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute hydrochloric/nitric(V) acid.

Repeat with 0.1g of Calcium in a beaker with all the above acid

Caution: Keep distance when using calcium

 

Observation

-Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with dilute sulphuric(VI) and nitric(V) acids

-Little Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with calcium and dilute sulphuric(VI) acid.

-Colourless gas produced that extinguishes a burning splint with an explosion/ “pop” sound.

-No gas is produced with Nitric(V)acid.

-Colourless solution is formed.

 

Explanation

Dilute acids react with alkaline earth metals to form a salt and produce hydrogen gas.

Nitric(V)acid is a strong oxidizing agent. It quickly oxidizes the hydrogen produced to water.

Calcium is very reactive with dilute acids and thus a very small piece of very dilute acid should be used.

Chemical equations

Mg(s)  +  H2SO4 (aq)          ->   MgSO4(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s)  +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Mg(NO3)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s) +  2HCl (aq)            ->   MgCl2(aq)         +    H2 (g)

 

Ca(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   CaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble CaSO4(s) coat/cover Ca(s))

Ca(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ca(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ca(s)  +  2HCl (aq)            ->   CaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

Ba(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   BaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble BaSO4(s) coat/cover Ba(s))

Ba(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ba(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ba(s)  +  2HCl (aq)            ->   BaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

The table below shows some compounds of some alkaline earth metals

 

  Beryllium Magnesium Calcium Barium
Hydroxide Be(OH)2 Mg(OH)2 Ca(OH)2 Ba(OH)2
Oxide BeO MgO CaO BaO
Sulphide MgS CaS BaS
Chloride BeCl2 MgCl2 CaCl2 BaCl2
Carbonate BeCO3 MgCO3 CaCO3 BaCO3
Nitrate(V) Be(NO3)2 Mg(NO3)2 Ca(NO3)2 Ba(NO3)2
Sulphate(VI) BeSO4 MgSO4 CaSO4 BaSO4
Sulphate(IV) CaSO3 BaSO3
Hydrogen carbonate Mg(HCO3)2 Ca(HCO3)2
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) Mg(HSO4)2 Ca(HSO4)2

 

Some uses of alkaline earth metals include:

(i)Magnesium hydroxide is a non-toxic/poisonous mild base used as an anti acid medicine to relieve stomach acidity.

(ii)Making duralumin. Duralumin is an alloy of Magnesium and aluminium used for making aeroplane bodies because it is light.

(iii) Making plaster of Paris-Calcium sulphate(VI) is used in hospitals to set a fractures bone.

(iii)Making cement-Calcium carbonate is mixed with clay and sand then heated to form cement for construction/building.

(iv)Raise soil pH-Quicklime/calcium oxide is added to acidic soils to neutralize and raise the soil pH in agricultural farms.

(v)As nitrogenous fertilizer-Calcium nitrate(V) is used as an agricultural fertilizer because plants require calcium for proper growth.

(vi)In the blast furnace-Limestone is added to the blast furnace to produce more  reducing agent and remove slag in the blast furnace for extraction of Iron.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c)Group VII elements: Halogens

 

Group VII elements are called Halogens. They are all non metals. They include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electronicc configuration Charge of ion Valency State at Room Temperature
Fluorine

Chlorine

Bromine

Iodine

Astatine

F

Cl

Br

I

At

9

17

35

53

85

2:7

2:8:7

2:8:18:7

2:8:18:18:7

2:8:18:32:18:7

F

Cl

Br

I

At

1

1

1

1

1

Pale yellow gas

Pale green gas

Red liquid

Grey Solid

Radioactive

 

All halogen atoms have seven electrons in the outer energy level. They acquire/gain one electron in the outer energy level to be stable. They therefore are therefore monovalent .They exist in oxidation state X

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Fluorine   to Astatine. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Chlorine is bigger/larger than that of Fluorine because Chlorine has more/3 energy levels than Fluorine (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of Halogens increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of Halogens is smaller than the ionic radius. This is because they react by gaining/acquiring extra one electron in the outer energy level. The effective nuclear attraction on the more/extra electrons decreases. The incoming extra electron is also repelled causing the outer energy level to expand to reduce the repulsion and accommodate more electrons.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of four Halogens

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Fluorine F 9 0.064 0.136
Chlorine Cl 17 0.099 0.181
Bromine Br 35 0.114 0.195
Iodine I 53 0.133 0.216

 

The atomic radius of Chlorine is  0.099nM .The ionic radius of Cl is 0.181nM. This is because Chlorine atom/molecule reacts by gaining/acquiring extra one electrons. The more/extra electrons/energy level experience less effective nuclear attraction /pull towards the nucleus .The outer enegy level expand/increase to reduce the repulsion of the existing and incoming gained /acquired electrons.

Electronegativity

The ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons is called electronegativity. All halogens are electronegative. Electronegativity decreases as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius.

The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and thus ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons decrease.

It is measured using Pauling’s scale.

Where Fluorine with Pauling scale 4.0 is the most electronegative element  and thus the highest tendency to acquire/gain extra electron.

 

Table showing the electronegativity of the halogens.

 

Halogen F Cl Br I At
Electronegativity (Pauling scale) 4.0 3.0 2.8 2.5 2.2

 

The electronegativity of the halogens decrease down the group from fluorine to Astatine. This is because atomic radius increases down the group and thus decrease electron – attracting power down the group from fluorine to astatine.

Fluorine is the most electronegative element in the periodic table because it has the small atomic radius.

 

Electron affinity

The minimum amount of energy required to gain/acquire an extra electron by  an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st electron affinity. The SI unit of electron affinity is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 . Electron affinity depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons and thus the lower the electron affinity. For halogens the 1st electron affinity decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease. Due to its small size/atomic radius Fluorine shows exceptionally low electron affinity. This is because a lot of energy is required to overcome the high repulsion of the existing and incoming electrons.

 

Table showing the election affinity of halogens for the process

X   +    e      ->      X

Halogen F Cl Br I
Electron affinity kJmole-1 -333 -364 -342 -295

 

 

 

The higher the electron affinity the more stable theion.i.e

Cl is a more stable ion than Brbecause it has a more negative / exothermic electron affinity than Br

Electron affinity  is different from:

(i) Ionization energy.

Ionization energy is the energy required to lose/donate an electron in an atom of an element in its gaseous state while electron affinity is the energy required to gain/acquire extra electron by an atom of an element in its gaseous state.

      (ii) Electronegativity.

-Electron affinity is the energy required to gain an electron in an atom of an element in gaseous state. It involves the process:

X(g)   +       e        ->      X(g)

Electronegativity is the ease/tendency of gaining/ acquiring electrons by an element during chemical reactions.

It does not involve use of energy but theoretical arbitrary Pauling’ scale of measurements.

 

Physical properties

 

State at room temperature

Fluorine and Chlorine are gases, Bromine is a liquid and Iodine is a solid. Astatine is radioactive .

All halogens exist as diatomic molecules bonded by strong covalent bond. Each molecule is joined to the other by weak intermolecular forces/ Van-der-waals forces.

Melting/Boiling point

The strength of intermolecular/Van-der-waals forces of attraction increase with increase in molecular size/atomic radius.

Iodine has therefore the largest atomic radius and thus strongest intermolecular forces to make it a solid.

Iodine sublimes when heated to form (caution: highly toxic/poisonous) purple vapour.

This is because Iodine molecules are held together by weak van-der-waals/intermolecular  forces which require little heat energy to break.

Electrical conductivity

All Halogens are  poor conductors of electricity because they have no free delocalized electrons.

Solubility in polar and non-polar solvents

All halogens are soluble in water(polar solvent).

When  a boiling tube containing either chlorine gas or bromine vapour is separately inverted in a beaker containing distilled water and tetrachloromethane (non-polar solvent), the level of solution in boiling tube rises in both water and tetrachloromethane.

This is because halogen are soluble in both polar and non-polar solvents. Solubility of halogens in water/polar solvents decrease down the group. Solubility of halogens in non-polar solvent increase down the group.

The level of water in chlorine is higher than in bromine and the level of tetrachloromethane in chlorine is lower than in bromine.

Caution: Tetrachloromethane , Bromine vapour and Chlorine gas are all highly toxic/poisonous.

 

Table showing the physical properties of Halogens

 

Halogen Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Melting point(oC) Boiling point(oC)
Fluorine F2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -238 -188
Chlorine Cl2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -101 -35
Bromine Br2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 7 59
Iodine I2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 114 sublimes

 

Chemical properties

 

(i)Displacement

 

Experiment

Place separately in test tubes about 5cm3 of sodium chloride, Sodium bromide and Sodium iodide solutions.

Add 5 drops of chlorine water to each  test tube:

Repeat with 5 drops of bromine water instead of chlorine water

Observation

Using Chlorine water

-Yellow colour of chlorine water fades in all test tubes   except with sodium chloride.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Using Bromine water

Yellow colour of bromine water fades in  test tubes containing sodium iodide.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Explanation

The halogens displace each other from their solution. The more electronegative displace the less electronegative from their solution.

  Chlorine is more electronegative than bromine and iodine.

On adding chlorine water, bromine and Iodine are displaced from their solutions by chlorine.

Bromine is more electronegative than iodide but less 6than chlorine.

On adding Bromine water, iodine is displaced from its solution but not chlorine.

 Table showing the displacement of the halogens

(V) means there is displacement (x ) means there is no displacement

                                Halogen ion in

solution

Halogen

F Cl Br I
F2 X      
Cl2 X X    
Br2 X X X  
I2 X X X X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chemical /ionic equations

With Fluorine

F2(g) +        2NaCl(aq) ->      2NaF(aq)     +        Cl2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Cl(aq)       ->      2F(aq)        +        Cl2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaBr(aq) ->      2NaF(aq)     +        Br2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Br(aq)       ->      2F(aq)        +        Br2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaI(aq)     ->      2NaF(aq)     +        I2(aq)

F2(g) +        2I(aq)         ->      2F(aq)        +        I2(aq)

 

With chlorine

Cl2(g)          +        2NaCl(aq) ->      2NaCl(aq)   +        Br2(aq)

Cl2(g)          +        2Br(aq)       ->      2Cl(aq)       +        Br2(aq)

 

Cl2(g)          +        2NaI(aq)     ->      2NaCl(aq)   +        I2(aq)

Cl2(g)          +        2I(aq)         ->      2Cl(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

With Bromine

Br2(g)          +        2NaI(aq)     ->      2NaBr(aq)   +        I2(aq)

Br2(g)          +        2I(aq)         ->      2Br(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

 

 Uses of halogens

  • Florine – manufacture of P.T.F.E (Poly tetra fluoroethene) synthetic fiber.
  • Reduce tooth decay when added in small amounts/quantities in tooth paste.

NB –large small quantities of fluorine /fluoride ions in water cause browning of teeth/flourosis.

  • Hydrogen fluoride is used to engrave words /pictures in glass.

 

  • Bromine – Silver bromide is used to make light sensitive photographic paper/films.

 

  • Iodide – Iodine dissolved in alcohol is used as medicine to kill bacteria in skin cuts. It is called tincture of iodine.

 

The table below to show some compounds of halogens.

 

 

                      Element

Halogen

H Na Mg Al Si C P
F HF NaF MgH2 AlF3 SiF4 CF4 PF3
Cl HCl NaCl MgCl AlCl3 SiCl3 CCl4 PCl3
Br HBr NaBr MgBr2 AlBr3 SiBr4 CBr4 PBr3
I Hl Nal Mgl2 All3 SiI4 Cl2 PBr3

 

 

  • Below is the table showing the bond energy of four halogens.

Bond                         Bond energy k J mole-1

Cl-Cl                                   242

Br-Br                                  193

I-I                                      151

 

  1. What do you understand by the term “bond energy”

Bond energy is the energy required to break/ form one mole of chemical bond

 

  1. Explain the trend in bond Energy of the halogens above:

Decrease down the group from chlorine to Iodine

-Atomic radius increase down the group decreasing the energy required to break the covalent bonds between the larger atom with reduced effective nuclear @ charge an outer energy level that take part in bonding.

 

(c)Group VIII elements: Noble gases

 

Group VIII elements are called Noble gases. They are all non metals. Noble gases occupy about 1.0% of the atmosphere as colourless gaseous mixture. Argon is the most abundant with 0.9%.

They exists as monatomic molecules with very weak van-der-waals /intermolecular forces holding the molecules.

They include:

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure State at room temperature
Helium He 2 2: Colourless gas
Neon Ne 10 2:8 Colourless gas
Argon Ar 18 2:8:8 Colourless gas
Krypton Kr 36 2:8:18:8 Colourless gas
Xenon Xe 54 2:8:18:18:8 Colourless gas
Radon Rn 86 2:8:18:32:18:8 Radioctive

All noble gas atoms have a stable duplet(two electrons in the 1st energy level) or octet(eight electrons in other outer energy level)in the outer energy level. They therefore do not acquire/gain extra electron in the outer energy level or donate/lose. They therefore are therefore zerovalent .

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Helium   to Randon. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size/radius. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Argon is bigger/larger than that of Neon because Argon has more/3 energy levels than Neon (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius noble gases increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

The effective nuclear attraction on the outer electrons thus decrease down the group.

 

The noble gases are generally unreactive  because the  outer energy level has the stable octet/duplet. The stable octet/duplet in noble gas atoms lead to a comparatively very high 1st ionization energy. This is because losing /donating an electron from the stable atom require a lot of energy to lose/donate and make it unstable.

As atomic radius increase down the group and the 1st ionization energy decrease, very electronegative elements like Oxygen and Fluorine are able to react and bond with lower members of the noble gases.e.g

Xenon reacts with Fluorine to form a covalent compound XeF6.This is because the outer electrons/energy level if Xenon is far from the nucleus and thus experience less effective nuclear attraction.

 

Noble gases have low melting and boiling  points. This is because they exist as monatomic molecules joined by very weak intermolecular/van-der-waals forces that require very little energy to weaken and form liquid and break to form a gas.

The intermolecular/van-der-waals forces increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase from Helium to Radon. The melting and boiling points thus increase also down the group.

Noble gases are insoluble in water and are poor conductors of electricity.

 

Element Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Atomic radius(nM) 1st ionization energy Melting point(0C) Boiling

point(0C)

Helium He Poor Insoluble 0.128 2372 -270 -269
Neon Ne Poor Insoluble 0.160 2080 -249 -246
Argon Ar Poor Insoluble 0.192 1520 -189 -186
Krypton Kr Poor Insoluble 0.197 1350 -157 -152
Xenon Xe Poor Insoluble 0.217 1170 -112 -108
Radon Rn Poor Insoluble 0.221 1134 -104 -93

 

Uses of noble gases  

Argon is used in light bulbs to provide an inert environment to prevent oxidation of the bulb filament

Argon is used in arch welding as an insulator.

Neon is used in street  and advertisement light

Helium is mixed with Oxygen during deep sea diving and mountaineering.

Helium is used in weather balloon for meteorological research instead of Hydrogen because it is unreactive/inert.Hydrogen when impure can ignite with an explosion.

Helium is used in making thermometers for measuring very low temperatures.

 

  1. PERIODICITY OF ACROSS THE PERIOD.

(See Chemical bonding and Structure)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Periodicity of CHEMICAL FAMILIES

                

 

                

 

 

 

 

 

Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

 MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   PERIODICITY OF CHEMICAL FAMILES

         (Patterns down the group)

 

The number of valence electrons and the number of occupied energy levels in an atom of an element determine the position of an element in the periodic table. i.e

The number of occupied energy levels determine the Period and the valence electrons determine the Group.

Elements in the same group have similar physical and chemical properties. The trends in physical and chemical properties of elements in the same group vary down the group. Elements in the same group thus constitute a chemical family.

 

  • Group I elements: Alkali metals

 

Group I elements are called Alkali metals except Hydrogen which is a non metal. The alkali metals include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Lithium Li 3 2:1 Li+ 1
Sodium Na 11 2:8:1 Na+ 1
Potassium K 19 2:8:8:1 K+ 1
Rubidium Rb 37 2:8:18:8:1 Rb+ 1
Caesium Cs 55 2:8:18:18:8:1 Cs+ 1
Francium Fr 87 2:8:18:32:18:8:1 Fr+ 1

 

All alkali metals atom has one electron in the outer energy level. They therefore are monovalent. They donate /lose the outer electron to have oxidation state M+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Lithium   to Francium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size of Potassium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Potassium has more/4 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic and ionic radius

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an atom and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called atomic radius. Atomic radius is measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the atomic radius the bigger /larger the atomic size.

 

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an ion and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called ionic radius. Ionic radius is also measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the ionic radius the bigger /larger the size of the ion.

Atomic radius and ionic radius depend on the number of energy levels occupied by electrons. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic /ionic radius. e.g.

The atomic radius of Francium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Francium has more/7 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkali metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkali metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because alkali metals react by losing/donating the outer electron and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of some alkali metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Lithium Li 3 0.133 0.060
Sodium Na 11 0.157 0.095
Potassium K 19 0.203 0.133

 

The atomic radius of sodium is  0.157nM .The ionic radius of Na+ is 0.095nM. This is because sodium reacts by donating/losing the outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

Electropositivity

The ease of donating/losing electrons is called electropositivity. All alkali metals are electropositive. Electropositivity  increase as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease. Francium is the most electropositive element in the periodic table because it has the highest/biggest atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

The minimum amount of energy required to remove an electron from an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st ionization energy. The SI unit of ionization energy is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 .Ionization energy depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer electrons/energy level and thus the lower the ionization energy. For alkali metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of sodium is 496 kJmole-1  while that of potassium is 419 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from sodium to Potassium. It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electrons in Potassium than in sodium.

 

Physical properties

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkali metals are soft and easy to cut with a knife. The softness and ease of cutting increase down the group from Lithium to Francium. This is because an increase in atomic radius, decreases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure

Appearance: Alkali metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when freshly cut. The surface rapidly/quickly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface rapidly/quickly reacts with elements of air/oxygen.

Melting and boiling points: Alkali metals have a relatively low melting/boiling point than common metals like Iron. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weak metallic bond/structure.

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkali metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. Metals conduct using the outer mobile delocalized electrons. The delocalized electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

 

          Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkali metals

 

Alkali metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conductivity 1st  ionization energy
Lithium Silvery white Not easy 180 1330 Good 520
Sodium Shiny grey Easy 98 890 Good 496

 

Potassium Shiny grey Very easy 64 774 Good 419

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, alkali metals reacts with the elements in the air.

Example

On exposure to air, Sodium first reacts with Oxygen to form sodium oxide.

4Na(s)         +       O2(g) ->      2Na2O(s)

The sodium oxide formed further reacts with water/moisture in the air to form sodium hydroxide solution.

            Na2O(s)      +      H2O(l)         ->     2NaOH(aq)

Sodium hydroxide solution reacts with carbon(IV)oxide in the air to form sodium carbonate.

2NaOH(aq)   +      CO2(g)        ->   Na2CO3(g)    +   H2O(l)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Lithium burns in air with a crimson/deep red flame to form Lithium oxide

4Li (s)         +       O2(g) ->      2Li2O(s)

Sodium burns in air with a yellow flame to form sodium oxide

4Na (s)        +       O2(g) ->      2Na2O(s)

Sodium burns in oxygen with a yellow flame to form sodium peroxide

2Na (s)        +       O2(g) ->      Na2O2 (s)

Potassium burns in air with a lilac/purple flame to form potassium oxide

4K (s) +       O2(g) ->      2K2O (s)

 

(iii) Reaction with water:

 

Experiment

Measure 500 cm3 of water into a beaker.

Put three drops of phenolphthalein indicator.

Put about 0.5g of Lithium metal into the beaker.

Determine the pH of final product

Repeat the experiment using about 0.1 g of Sodium and Potassium.

Caution: Keep a distance

 

Observations

 

 

 

 

 

 

Alkali metal Observations Comparative speed/rate of the reaction
Lithium -Metal floats in water

-rapid effervescence/fizzing/bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Moderately vigorous
Sodium -Metal floats in water

-very rapid effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

Very vigorous
Potassium -Metal floats in water

-explosive effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Explosive/burst into flames

 

Explanation

Alkali metals are less dense than water. They therefore float in water.They react with water to form a strongly alkaline solution of their hydroxides and producing hydrogen gas. The rate of this reaction increase down the group. i.e. Potassium is more reactive than sodium .Sodium is more reactive than Lithium.

The reactivity increases as electropositivity increases of the alkali increases. This is because as the atomic radius increases , the ease of donating/losing outer electron  increase during chemical reactions.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->      2LiOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2Na(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->      2NaOH(aq) +        H2(g)

2K(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->      2KOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

2Rb(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->      2RbOH(aq) +        H2(g)

2Cs(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->      2CsOH(aq) +        H2(g)

2Fr(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->      2FrOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

Reactivity increase down the group

 

(iv) Reaction with chlorine:

 

Experiment

Cut about 0.5g of sodium into a deflagrating spoon with a lid cover. Introduce it on a Bunsen flame until it catches fire. Quickly and carefully lower it into a gas jar containing dry chlorine to cover the gas jar.

Repeat with about 0.5g of Lithium.

Caution: This experiment should be done in fume chamber because chlorine is poisonous /toxic.

 

Observation

Sodium metal continues to burn with a yellow flame forming white solid/fumes.

Lithium metal continues to burn with a crimson flame forming white solid / fumes.

Alkali metal react with chlorine gas to form the corresponding metal chlorides. The reactivity increase as electropositivity increase down the group from Lithium to Francium.The ease of donating/losing the outer electrons increase as the atomic radius increase and the outer electron is less attracted to the nucleus.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)          +        Cl2(g)          ->      2LiCl(s)

2Na(s)         +        Cl2(g)          ->      2NaCl(s)

2K(s)          +        Cl2(g)          ->      2KCl(s)

2Rb(s)         +        Cl2(g)          ->      2RbCl(s)

2Cs(s)         +        Cl2(g)          ->      2CsCl(s)

2Fr(s)          +        Cl2(g)          ->      2FrCl(s)                                                                                    Reactivity increase down the group

 

 

 

 

The table below shows some compounds of the 1st three alkali metals

 

  Lithium sodium Potassium
Hydroxide LiOH NaOH KOH
Oxide Li2O Na2O K2O
Sulphide Li2S Na2S K2S
Chloride LiCl NaCl KCl
Carbonate Li2CO3 Na2CO3 K2CO3
Nitrate(V) LiNO3 NaNO3 KNO3
Nitrate(III) NaNO2 KNO2
Sulphate(VI) Li2SO4 Na2SO4 K2SO4
Sulphate(IV) Na2SO3 K2SO3
Hydrogen carbonate NaHCO3 KHCO3
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) NaHSO4 KHSO4
Hydrogen sulphate(IV) NaHSO3 KHSO3
Phosphate Na3PO4 K3PO4
Manganate(VI) NaMnO4 KMnO4
Dichromate(VI) Na2Cr2O7 K2Cr2O7
Chromate(VI) Na2CrO4 K2CrO4

 

Some uses of alkali metals include:

(i)Sodium is used in making sodium cyanide for extracting gold from gold ore.

(ii)Sodium chloride is used in seasoning food.

(iii)Molten mixture of sodium and potassium is used as coolant in nuclear reactors.

(iv)Sodium is used in making sodium hydroxide used in making soapy and soapless detergents.

(v)Sodium is used as a reducing agent for the extraction of titanium from Titanium(IV)chloride.

(vi)Lithium is used in making special high strength glasses

(vii)Lithium compounds are used to make dry cells in mobile phones and computer laptops.

 

Group II elements: Alkaline earth metals

 

Group II elements are called Alkaline earth metals . The alkaline earth metals include:

 

 

 

 

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Beryllium Be 4 2:2 Be2+ 2
Magnesium Mg 12 2:8:2 Mg2+ 2
Calcium Ca 20 2:8:8:2 Ca2+ 2
Strontium Sr 38 2:8:18:8:2 Sr2+ 2
Barium Ba 56 2:8:18:18:8:2 Ba2+ 2
Radium Ra 88 2:8:18:32:18:8:2 Ra2+ 2

 

All alkaline earth metal atoms have two electrons in the outer energy level. They therefore are divalent. They donate /lose the two outer electrons to have oxidation state M2+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Beryllium   to Radium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Calcium is bigger/larger than that of Magnesium because Calcium has more/4 energy levels than Magnesium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkaline earth metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkaline earth metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because they react by losing/donating the two outer electrons and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Beryllium Be 4 0.089 0.031
Magnesium Mg 12 0.136 0.065
Calcium Ca 20 0.174 0.099

The atomic radius of Magnesium is  0.136nM .The ionic radius of Mg2+ is 0.065nM. This is because Magnesium reacts by donating/losing the two outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

 

Electropositivity

All alkaline earth metals are also electropositive like alkali metals. The electropositivity increase with increase in atomic radius/size. Calcium is more electropositive than Magnesium. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The two outer electrons in calcium experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease because of  the higher/bigger atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

For alkaline earth metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of Magnesium  is 900 kJmole-1  while that of Calcium is 590 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from magnesium to calcium.

It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electron in calcium than in magnesium.

 

The minimum amount of energy required to remove a second electron from an ion of an element in its gaseous state is called the 2nd ionization energy.

The 2nd ionization energy is always higher /bigger than  the 1st  ionization energy.

This because once an electron is donated /lost form an atom, the overall effective nuclear attraction on the remaining electrons/energy level increase. Removing a second electron from the ion require therefore more energy than the first electron.

The atomic radius of alkali metals is higher/bigger than that of alkaline earth metals.This is because across/along the period from left to right there is an increase in nuclear charge from additional number of protons and still additional number of electrons entering the same energy level. Increase in nuclear charge increases the effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level which pulls it closer to the nucleus. e.g.

Atomic radius of Sodium (0.157nM) is higher than that of Magnesium (0.137nM). This is because Magnesium has more effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level than Sodium hence pulls outer energy level more nearer to its nucleus.

Physical properties

 

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkaline earth metals are not soft and easy to cut with a knife like alkali metals. This is because of the decrease in atomic radius of corresponding alkaline earth metal, increases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure. Alkaline earth metals are

(i)ductile(able to form wire/thin long rods)

(ii)malleable(able to be hammered into sheet/long thin plates)

(iii)have high tensile strength(able to be coiled without breaking/ not brittle/withstand stress)

 

Appearance: Alkali earth metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when their surface is freshly polished /scrubbed. The surface slowly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface slowly undergoes oxidation to form an oxide. This oxide layer should be removed before using the alkaline earth metals.

 

Melting and boiling points: Alkaline earth metals have a relatively high melting/ boiling point than alkali metals. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weaker metallic bond/structure. Alkaline earth metals use two delocalized electrons to form a stronger metallic bond /structure.

The melting and boiling points decrease down the group as the atomic radius/size increase reducing the strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure. e.g.

 

Beryllium has a melting point of 1280oC. Magnesium has a melting point of 650oC.Beryllium has a smaller atomic radius/size than magnesium .The strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure is thus stronger in beryllium.

 

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkaline earth metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. The two delocalized valence electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

Electrical conductivity increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase making the delocalized outer electrons less attracted to nucleus. Alkaline earth metals are better thermal and electrical conductors than alkali metals because they have more/two outer delocalized electrons.e.g.

Magnesium is a better conductor than sodium because it has more/two delocalized electrons than sodium. The more delocalized electrons the better the electrical conductor.

Calcium is a better conductor than magnesium.

Calcium has bigger/larger atomic radius than magnesium because the delocalized electrons are less attracted to the nucleus of calcium and thus more free /mobile and thus better the electrical conductor

Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Alkaline earth metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conduct- ivity 1st  ionization energy 2nd ionization energy
Beryllium Shiny grey Not

easy

1280 3450 Good 900 1800
Magnesium Shiny grey Not Easy 650 1110 Good 736

 

1450
calcium Shiny grey Not

easy

850 1140 Good 590 970

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, the surface of alkaline earth  metals is slowly oxidized to its oxide on prolonged exposure to air.

Example

On exposure to air, the surface of magnesium ribbon is oxidized to form a thin film of Magnesium oxide

.         2Mg(s)        +       O2(g) ->      2MgO(s)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Experiment

Hold a about 2cm length of Magnesium ribbon on a Bunsen flame. Stop heating when it catches fire/start burning.

Caution: Do not look directly at the flame

Put the products of burning into 100cm3 beaker. Add about 5cm3 of distilled water. Swirl. Test the mixture using litmus papers.
Repeat with Calcium

Observations

-Magnesium burns with a bright blindening flame

-White solid /ash produced

-Solid dissolves in water to form a colourless solution

-Blue litmus paper remain blue

-Red litmus paper turns blue

-colourless gas with pungent smell of urine

Explanation

Magnesium burns in air with  a bright blindening flame to form a mixture of Magnesium oxide and Magnesium nitride.

2Mg (s)       +       O2(g) ->      2MgO(s)

3Mg (s)       +       N2 (g)          ->      Mg3N2 (s)

Magnesium oxide dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide.

MgO(s)       +        H2O (l)        ->      Mg(OH)2(aq)

Magnesium nitride dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Mg3N2 (s)    +        6H2O(l)       ->      3Mg(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

 

Magnesium hydroxide and ammonia are weakly alkaline with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

Calcium burns in air with faint orange/red flame to form a mixture of both Calcium oxide and calcium nitride.

2Ca (s)        +       O2(g) ->      2CaO(s)

3Ca (s)        +       N2 (g)          ->      Ca3N2 (s)

 

Calcium oxide dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide.

CaO(s)        +        H2O(l)         ->      Ca(OH)2(aq)

Calcium nitride dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Ca3N2 (s)     +        6H2O(l)       ->      3Ca(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

Calcium hydroxide is also weakly alkaline solution with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

(iii)Reaction with water

 

Experiment

Measure 50 cm3 of distilled water into a beaker.

Scrub/polish with sand paper 1cm length of Magnesium ribbon

Place it in the water. Test the product-mixture with blue and red litmus papers.

Repeat with Calcium metal.

 

Observations

-Surface of magnesium covered by bubbles of colourless gas.

-Colourless solution formed.

-Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing takes place in Calcium.

-Red litmus paper turns blue.

-Blue litmus paper remains blue.

 

Explanations

Magnesium slowly reacts with cold water to form Magnesium hydroxide and bubbles of Hydrogen gas that stick on the surface of the ribbon.

 

Mg(s)  +  2H2O (l)     ->   Mg(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Calcium moderately reacts with cold water to form Calcium hydroxide and produce a steady stream of Hydrogen gas.

 

Ca(s)  +  2H2O (l)      ->   Ca(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

 

(iv)Reaction with water vapour/steam

Experiment

Put some cotton wool soaked in water/wet sand in a long boiling tube.

Coil a well polished magnesium ribbon into the boiling tube.

Ensure the coil touches the side of the boiling tube. Heat the cotton wool/sand slightly then strongly heat the Magnesium ribbon .

Set up of apparatus

 

 

Observations

-Magnesium glows red hot then burns with a blindening flame.

-Magnesium continues to glow/burning even without more heating.

-White solid/residue.

-colourless gas collected over water.

Explanation

On heating wet sand, steam is generated which drives out the air that would otherwise react with /oxidize the ribbon.

Magnesium burns in steam/water vapour generating enough heat that ensures the reaction goes to completion even without further heating. White Magnesium oxide is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved.

To prevent suck back, the delivery tube should be removed from the water before heating is stopped at the end of the experiment.

Mg(s)  +  H2O (l)       ->   MgO(s)   +    H2 (g)

 

(v)Reaction with chlorine gas.

 

Experiment

Lower slowly  a burning magnesium ribbon/shavings into a gas jar containing Chlorine gas. Repeat with a hot piece of calcium metal.

Observation

-Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine with a bright blindening flame.

-Calcium continues to burn for a short time.

-White solid formed .

-Pale green colour of chlorine fades.

Explanation

Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine gas forming white magnesium oxide solid.

Mg(s)  +  Cl2 (g)        ->     MgCl2 (s)

Calcium burns slightly in chlorine gas to form white calcium oxide solid. Calcium oxide formed coat unreacted Calcium stopping further reaction

Ca(s)  +  Cl2 (g)         ->     CaCl2 (s)

 

(v)Reaction with dilute acids.

Experiment

Place about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute sulphuric(VI)acid into a test tube. Add about 1.0cm length of magnesium ribbon into the test tube. Cover the mouth of the test tube using a thumb. Release the gas and test the gas using a burning splint.

Repeat with about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute hydrochloric/nitric(V) acid.

Repeat with 0.1g of Calcium in a beaker with all the above acid

Caution: Keep distance when using calcium

 

Observation

-Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with dilute sulphuric(VI) and nitric(V) acids

-Little Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with calcium and dilute sulphuric(VI) acid.

-Colourless gas produced that extinguishes a burning splint with an explosion/ “pop” sound.

-No gas is produced with Nitric(V)acid.

-Colourless solution is formed.

 

Explanation

Dilute acids react with alkaline earth metals to form a salt and produce hydrogen gas.

Nitric(V)acid is a strong oxidizing agent. It quickly oxidizes the hydrogen produced to water.

Calcium is very reactive with dilute acids and thus a very small piece of very dilute acid should be used.

Chemical equations

Mg(s)  +  H2SO4 (aq)          ->   MgSO4(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s)  +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Mg(NO3)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s) +  2HCl (aq)            ->   MgCl2(aq)         +    H2 (g)

 

Ca(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   CaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble CaSO4(s) coat/cover Ca(s))

Ca(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ca(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ca(s)  +  2HCl (aq)            ->   CaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

Ba(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   BaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble BaSO4(s) coat/cover Ba(s))

Ba(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ba(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ba(s)  +  2HCl (aq)            ->   BaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

The table below shows some compounds of some alkaline earth metals

 

  Beryllium Magnesium Calcium Barium
Hydroxide Be(OH)2 Mg(OH)2 Ca(OH)2 Ba(OH)2
Oxide BeO MgO CaO BaO
Sulphide MgS CaS BaS
Chloride BeCl2 MgCl2 CaCl2 BaCl2
Carbonate BeCO3 MgCO3 CaCO3 BaCO3
Nitrate(V) Be(NO3)2 Mg(NO3)2 Ca(NO3)2 Ba(NO3)2
Sulphate(VI) BeSO4 MgSO4 CaSO4 BaSO4
Sulphate(IV) CaSO3 BaSO3
Hydrogen carbonate Mg(HCO3)2 Ca(HCO3)2
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) Mg(HSO4)2 Ca(HSO4)2

 

Some uses of alkaline earth metals include:

(i)Magnesium hydroxide is a non-toxic/poisonous mild base used as an anti acid medicine to relieve stomach acidity.

(ii)Making duralumin. Duralumin is an alloy of Magnesium and aluminium used for making aeroplane bodies because it is light.

(iii) Making plaster of Paris-Calcium sulphate(VI) is used in hospitals to set a fractures bone.

(iii)Making cement-Calcium carbonate is mixed with clay and sand then heated to form cement for construction/building.

(iv)Raise soil pH-Quicklime/calcium oxide is added to acidic soils to neutralize and raise the soil pH in agricultural farms.

(v)As nitrogenous fertilizer-Calcium nitrate(V) is used as an agricultural fertilizer because plants require calcium for proper growth.

(vi)In the blast furnace-Limestone is added to the blast furnace to produce more  reducing agent and remove slag in the blast furnace for extraction of Iron.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c)Group VII elements: Halogens

 

Group VII elements are called Halogens. They are all non metals. They include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electronicc configuration Charge of ion Valency State at Room Temperature
Fluorine

Chlorine

Bromine

Iodine

Astatine

F

Cl

Br

I

At

9

17

35

53

85

2:7

2:8:7

2:8:18:7

2:8:18:18:7

2:8:18:32:18:7

F

Cl

Br

I

At

1

1

1

1

1

Pale yellow gas

Pale green gas

Red liquid

Grey Solid

Radioactive

 

All halogen atoms have seven electrons in the outer energy level. They acquire/gain one electron in the outer energy level to be stable. They therefore are therefore monovalent .They exist in oxidation state X

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Fluorine   to Astatine. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Chlorine is bigger/larger than that of Fluorine because Chlorine has more/3 energy levels than Fluorine (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of Halogens increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of Halogens is smaller than the ionic radius. This is because they react by gaining/acquiring extra one electron in the outer energy level. The effective nuclear attraction on the more/extra electrons decreases. The incoming extra electron is also repelled causing the outer energy level to expand to reduce the repulsion and accommodate more electrons.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of four Halogens

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Fluorine F 9 0.064 0.136
Chlorine Cl 17 0.099 0.181
Bromine Br 35 0.114 0.195
Iodine I 53 0.133 0.216

 

The atomic radius of Chlorine is  0.099nM .The ionic radius of Cl is 0.181nM. This is because Chlorine atom/molecule reacts by gaining/acquiring extra one electrons. The more/extra electrons/energy level experience less effective nuclear attraction /pull towards the nucleus .The outer enegy level expand/increase to reduce the repulsion of the existing and incoming gained /acquired electrons.

Electronegativity

The ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons is called electronegativity. All halogens are electronegative. Electronegativity decreases as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius.

The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and thus ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons decrease.

It is measured using Pauling’s scale.

Where Fluorine with Pauling scale 4.0 is the most electronegative element  and thus the highest tendency to acquire/gain extra electron.

 

Table showing the electronegativity of the halogens.

 

Halogen F Cl Br I At
Electronegativity (Pauling scale) 4.0 3.0 2.8 2.5 2.2

 

The electronegativity of the halogens decrease down the group from fluorine to Astatine. This is because atomic radius increases down the group and thus decrease electron – attracting power down the group from fluorine to astatine.

Fluorine is the most electronegative element in the periodic table because it has the small atomic radius.

 

Electron affinity

The minimum amount of energy required to gain/acquire an extra electron by  an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st electron affinity. The SI unit of electron affinity is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 . Electron affinity depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons and thus the lower the electron affinity. For halogens the 1st electron affinity decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease. Due to its small size/atomic radius Fluorine shows exceptionally low electron affinity. This is because a lot of energy is required to overcome the high repulsion of the existing and incoming electrons.

 

Table showing the election affinity of halogens for the process

X   +    e      ->      X

Halogen F Cl Br I
Electron affinity kJmole-1 -333 -364 -342 -295

 

 

 

The higher the electron affinity the more stable theion.i.e

Cl is a more stable ion than Brbecause it has a more negative / exothermic electron affinity than Br

Electron affinity  is different from:

(i) Ionization energy.

Ionization energy is the energy required to lose/donate an electron in an atom of an element in its gaseous state while electron affinity is the energy required to gain/acquire extra electron by an atom of an element in its gaseous state.

      (ii) Electronegativity.

-Electron affinity is the energy required to gain an electron in an atom of an element in gaseous state. It involves the process:

X(g)   +       e        ->      X(g)

Electronegativity is the ease/tendency of gaining/ acquiring electrons by an element during chemical reactions.

It does not involve use of energy but theoretical arbitrary Pauling’ scale of measurements.

 

Physical properties

 

State at room temperature

Fluorine and Chlorine are gases, Bromine is a liquid and Iodine is a solid. Astatine is radioactive .

All halogens exist as diatomic molecules bonded by strong covalent bond. Each molecule is joined to the other by weak intermolecular forces/ Van-der-waals forces.

Melting/Boiling point

The strength of intermolecular/Van-der-waals forces of attraction increase with increase in molecular size/atomic radius.

Iodine has therefore the largest atomic radius and thus strongest intermolecular forces to make it a solid.

Iodine sublimes when heated to form (caution: highly toxic/poisonous) purple vapour.

This is because Iodine molecules are held together by weak van-der-waals/intermolecular  forces which require little heat energy to break.

Electrical conductivity

All Halogens are  poor conductors of electricity because they have no free delocalized electrons.

Solubility in polar and non-polar solvents

All halogens are soluble in water(polar solvent).

When  a boiling tube containing either chlorine gas or bromine vapour is separately inverted in a beaker containing distilled water and tetrachloromethane (non-polar solvent), the level of solution in boiling tube rises in both water and tetrachloromethane.

This is because halogen are soluble in both polar and non-polar solvents. Solubility of halogens in water/polar solvents decrease down the group. Solubility of halogens in non-polar solvent increase down the group.

The level of water in chlorine is higher than in bromine and the level of tetrachloromethane in chlorine is lower than in bromine.

Caution: Tetrachloromethane , Bromine vapour and Chlorine gas are all highly toxic/poisonous.

 

 

 

 

Table showing the physical properties of Halogens

 

Halogen Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Melting point(oC) Boiling point(oC)
Fluorine F2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -238 -188
Chlorine Cl2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -101 -35
Bromine Br2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 7 59
Iodine I2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 114 sublimes

 

Chemical properties

 

(i)Displacement

 

Experiment

Place separately in test tubes about 5cm3 of sodium chloride, Sodium bromide and Sodium iodide solutions.

Add 5 drops of chlorine water to each  test tube:

Repeat with 5 drops of bromine water instead of chlorine water

Observation

Using Chlorine water

-Yellow colour of chlorine water fades in all test tubes   except with sodium chloride.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Using Bromine water

Yellow colour of bromine water fades in  test tubes containing sodium iodide.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Explanation

The halogens displace each other from their solution. The more electronegative displace the less electronegative from their solution.

  Chlorine is more electronegative than bromine and iodine.

On adding chlorine water, bromine and Iodine are displaced from their solutions by chlorine.

Bromine is more electronegative than iodide but less 6than chlorine.

On adding Bromine water, iodine is displaced from its solution but not chlorine.

 Table showing the displacement of the halogens

(V) means there is displacement (x ) means there is no displacement

                                Halogen ion in

solution

Halogen

F Cl Br I
F2 X      
Cl2 X X    
Br2 X X X  
I2 X X X X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chemical /ionic equations

With Fluorine

F2(g) +        2NaCl(aq) ->      2NaF(aq)     +        Cl2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Cl(aq)       ->      2F(aq)        +        Cl2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaBr(aq) ->      2NaF(aq)     +        Br2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Br(aq)       ->      2F(aq)        +        Br2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaI(aq)     ->      2NaF(aq)     +        I2(aq)

F2(g) +        2I(aq)         ->      2F(aq)        +        I2(aq)

 

With chlorine

Cl2(g)          +        2NaCl(aq) ->      2NaCl(aq)   +        Br2(aq)

Cl2(g)          +        2Br(aq)       ->      2Cl(aq)       +        Br2(aq)

 

Cl2(g)          +        2NaI(aq)     ->      2NaCl(aq)   +        I2(aq)

Cl2(g)          +        2I(aq)         ->      2Cl(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

With Bromine

Br2(g)          +        2NaI(aq)     ->      2NaBr(aq)   +        I2(aq)

Br2(g)          +        2I(aq)         ->      2Br(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

 

 

 

 

 Uses of halogens

  • Florine – manufacture of P.T.F.E (Poly tetra fluoroethene) synthetic fiber.
  • Reduce tooth decay when added in small amounts/quantities in tooth paste.

NB –large small quantities of fluorine /fluoride ions in water cause browning of teeth/flourosis.

  • Hydrogen fluoride is used to engrave words /pictures in glass.

 

  • Bromine – Silver bromide is used to make light sensitive photographic paper/films.

 

  • Iodide – Iodine dissolved in alcohol is used as medicine to kill bacteria in skin cuts. It is called tincture of iodine.

 

The table below to show some compounds of halogens.

 

 

                      Element

Halogen

H Na Mg Al Si C P
F HF NaF MgF2 AlF3 SiF4 CF4 PF3
Cl HCl NaCl MgCl2 AlCl3 SiCl 4 CCl4 PCl3
Br HBr NaBr MgBr2 AlBr3 SiBr4 CBr4 PBr3
I Hl Nal Mgl2 All3 SiI4 C l 4 PBr3

 

 

  • Below is the table showing the bond energy of four halogens.

Bond                         Bond energy k J mole-1

Cl-Cl                                   242

Br-Br                                  193

I-I                                      151

 

  • What do you understand by the term “bond energy”

Bond energy is the energy required to break/ form one mole of chemical bond

 

  1. Explain the trend in bond Energy of the halogens above:

Decrease down the group from chlorine to Iodine

-Atomic radius increase down the group decreasing the energy required to break the covalent bonds between the larger atom with reduced effective nuclear @ charge an outer energy level that take part in bonding.

 

(c)Group VIII elements: Noble gases

 

Group VIII elements are called Noble gases. They are all non metals. Noble gases occupy about 1.0% of the atmosphere as colourless gaseous mixture. Argon is the most abundant with 0.9%.

They exists as monatomic molecules with very weak van-der-waals /intermolecular forces holding the molecules.

They include:

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure State at room temperature
Helium He 2 2: Colourless gas
Neon Ne 10 2:8 Colourless gas
Argon Ar 18 2:8:8 Colourless gas
Krypton Kr 36 2:8:18:8 Colourless gas
Xenon Xe 54 2:8:18:18:8 Colourless gas
Radon Rn 86 2:8:18:32:18:8 Radioctive

All noble gas atoms have a stable duplet(two electrons in the 1st energy level) or octet(eight electrons in other outer energy level)in the outer energy level. They therefore do not acquire/gain extra electron in the outer energy level or donate/lose. They therefore are therefore zerovalent .

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Helium   to Randon. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size/radius. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Argon is bigger/larger than that of Neon because Argon has more/3 energy levels than Neon (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius noble gases increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

The effective nuclear attraction on the outer electrons thus decrease down the group.

 

The noble gases are generally unreactive  because the  outer energy level has the stable octet/duplet. The stable octet/duplet in noble gas atoms lead to a comparatively very high 1st ionization energy. This is because losing /donating an electron from the stable atom require a lot of energy to lose/donate and make it unstable.

As atomic radius increase down the group and the 1st ionization energy decrease, very electronegative elements like Oxygen and Fluorine are able to react and bond with lower members of the noble gases.e.g

Xenon reacts with Fluorine to form a covalent compound XeF6.This is because the outer electrons/energy level if Xenon is far from the nucleus and thus experience less effective nuclear attraction.

 

Noble gases have low melting and boiling  points. This is because they exist as monatomic molecules joined by very weak intermolecular/van-der-waals forces that require very little energy to weaken and form liquid and break to form a gas.

The intermolecular/van-der-waals forces increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase from Helium to Radon. The melting and boiling points thus increase also down the group.

Noble gases are insoluble in water and are poor conductors of electricity.

 

Element Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Atomic radius(nM) 1st ionization energy Melting point(0C) Boiling

point(0C)

Helium He Poor Insoluble 0.128 2372 -270 -269
Neon Ne Poor Insoluble 0.160 2080 -249 -246
Argon Ar Poor Insoluble 0.192 1520 -189 -186
Krypton Kr Poor Insoluble 0.197 1350 -157 -152
Xenon Xe Poor Insoluble 0.217 1170 -112 -108
Radon Rn Poor Insoluble 0.221 1134 -104 -93

 

Uses of noble gases 

Argon is used in light bulbs to provide an inert environment to prevent oxidation of the bulb filament

Argon is used in arch welding as an insulator.

Neon is used in street  and advertisement light

Helium is mixed with Oxygen during deep sea diving and mountaineering.

Helium is used in weather balloon for meteorological research instead of Hydrogen because it is unreactive/inert. Hydrogen when impure can ignite with an explosion.

Helium is used in making thermometers for measuring very low temperatures.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                 

FORM 2

                 

STRUCTURE & BONDING

                

 

                 

 

 

 

 

 

Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

0720096206

 

ssssss

 

 

 

 

 

CHEMICAL BONDING AND STRUCTURE

 

  1. CHEMICAL BONDING

A chemical bond is formed when atoms of the same or different elements share, gain, donate or delocalize their outer energy level electrons to combine during chemical reactions inorder to be stable.

Atoms have equal number of negatively charged electrons in the energy levels and positively charged protons in the nucleus.

Atoms are chemically stable if they have filled outer energy level. An energy level is full if it has duplet (2) or octet (8) state in outer energy level.

Noble gases have duplet /octet. All other atoms try to be like noble gases through chemical reactions and forming molecules.

Only electrons in the outer energy level take part in formation of a chemical bond. There are three main types of chemical bonds formed by atoms:

(i) covalent bond

(ii) ionic/electrovalent bond

(iii) metallic bond

 

(i)COVALENT BOND

A covalent bond is formed when atoms of the same or different element share some or all the outer energy level electrons to combine during chemical reactions inorder to attain duplet or octet.

A shared pair of electrons is attracted by the nucleus (protons) of the two atoms sharing.

Covalent bonds are mainly formed by non-metals to form molecules. A molecule is a group of atoms of the same or different elements held together by a covalent bond. The number of atoms making a molecule is called atomicity. Noble gases are monatomic because they are stable and thus do not bond with each other or other atoms. Most other gases are diatomic

The more the number of electrons shared, the stronger the covalent bond.

A pair of electrons that do not take part in the formation of a covalent bond is called a lone pair of electrons.

Mathematically, the number of electrons to be shared by an atom is equal to the number of electrons remaining for the atom to be stable/attain duplet/octet /have maximum electrons in outer energy level.

 

The following diagrams illustrate the formation of covalent bonds:

a)hydrogen molecule is made up of two hydrogen atoms in the outer energy level each requiring one electron to have a stable duplet.

To show the formation of covalent bonding in the molecule then the following data/information is required;

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               H                          H

Number of protons/electrons                                           1                           1

Electron configuration/structure                                      1:                          1:

Number of electron in outer energy level                         1                           1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          1                           1

Number of electrons not shared(lone pairs)                      0                           0

Diagram method 1

 

 

                                                                                                     

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

  ●x

H      H

 

Note:

After bonding the following intramolecular forces exist:

(i)the attraction of the shared electrons by both nucleus /protons of the atoms

(ii) the repulsion of the nucleus of one atom on the other.

(iii)balance of the attraction and repulsion is maintained inside/intramolecular/within  the molecule as follows;

 

E1

 

 

P1                                                          P1

 

 

 

E1

 

(iv)Protons(P1) from nucleus of atom 1 repel protons (P2)  from nucleus of atom 2.

(v)Electron (E1) in the energy levels of atom 1 repel electron (E2) in the energy levels of atom 2.

(vi) Protons(P1) from nucleus of atom 1 attract electron (E2) in the energy levels of atom 2.

(vii) protons (P2)  from nucleus of atom 2 attract electron (E2) in the energy levels of atom 2.

 

  1. b) Fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine molecules are made up also of two atoms sharing the outer energy level electrons to have a stable octet.

To show the formation of covalent bonding in the molecule then the following data/information is required;

(i) fluorine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               F                           F

Number of protons/electrons                                           9                           9

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:7                        2:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                         7                           7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          1                           1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs) 6                           6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) chlorine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               Cl                         Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                           17                         17

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:8:7                     2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                         7                           7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          1                           1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs) 6                           6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iii) Bromine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               Br                         Br

Number of protons/electrons                                           35                         35

Electron configuration/structure                             2:8:18:7                    2:8:18:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                         7                           7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          1                           1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs) 6                           6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

(iv) Iodine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               I                            I

Number of protons/electrons                                           53                         53

Electron configuration/structure                             2:8:18:18:7         2:8:18:18:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                         7                           7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          1                           1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs) 6                           6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

  1. c) Oxygen molecule is made up of two atoms sharing each two outer energy level electrons to have a stable octet as shown below;

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               O                          O

Number of protons/electrons                                           8                           8

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:6                          2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                         6                           6

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          2                           2

Number of outer electrons not shared( 2-lone pairs) 4                           4

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) Nitrogen and phosphorus molecule is made up of two atoms sharing each three outer energy level electrons to have a stable octet as shown below;

(i) Nitrogen

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               N                          N

Number of protons/electrons                                           7                           7

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:5                         2:5

Number of electron in outer energy level                         5                           5

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          3                           3

Number of outer electrons not shared ( 3-lone pairs)        2                           2

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

(ii) Phosphorus

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding               P                           P

Number of protons/electrons                                           15                         15

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:8:5                      2:8:5

Number of electron in outer energy level                         5                           5

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          3                           3

Number of outer electrons not shared ( 3-lone pairs)        2                           2

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Water molecule is made up of hydrogen and oxygen. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with oxygen to be stable/attain duplet. Oxygen requires to share two electrons to be stable/attain octet. Two hydrogen atoms share with one oxygen atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            O                          H

Number of protons/electrons                                           8                           1

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:6                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                         6                           1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          2                           1

Number of electrons not shared( 2-Oxygen lone pairs)     4                           0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

  1. f) Ammonia molecule is made up of Hydrogen and Nitrogen. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with Nitrogen to be stable/attain duplet. Nitrogen requires to share three electrons to be stable/attain octet. Three hydrogen atoms share with one nitrogen atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            N                          H

Number of protons/electrons                                            7                          1

Electron configuration/structure                                       2:5                          1:

Number of electron in outer energy level                         5                           1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          3                             1

Number of electrons not shared( 1-Nitrogen lone pairs)   2                             0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

g)Carbon(IV) oxide molecule is made up of carbon and oxygen. Carbon requires to share four electrons with oxygen to be stable/attain octet. Oxygen requires to share two electrons to be stable/attain octet. Two oxygen atoms share with one carbon atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            O                          C

Number of protons/electrons                                           8                           6

Electron configuration/structure                             2:6                         2:4

Number of electron in outer energy level                         6                           4

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          2                           4

2-lone pairs from each Oxygen atom)                              2                           0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. h) Methane molecule is made up of hydrogen and carbon. Hydrogen requires sharing one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires sharing four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Four hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            C                          H

Number of protons/electrons                                           6                           1

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:4                           1

Number of electron in outer energy level                         4                           1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          4                           1

Number of electrons not shared ( No lone pairs)                0                          0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Tetrachloromethane molecule is made up of chlorine and carbon. Chlorine requires sharing one electron with carbon to be stable/attain octet. Carbon requires sharing four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Four chlorine atoms share with one carbon atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            C                          Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                           6                           17

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:4                       2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                         4                           7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          4                           1

3-lone pairs from each Chlorine atom(24 electrons)           0                           6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. j) Ethane molecule is made up of six hydrogen and two carbon atoms. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires to share four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Three hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom while another three hydrogen atoms share with a different carbon atom. The two carbon atoms bond by sharing a pair of the remaining electrons as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            C                          H

Number of protons/electrons                                           6                           1

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:4                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                         4                           1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          4                           1

Number of electrons not shared( No lone pairs)                 0                          0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

  1. k) Ethene molecule is made up of four hydrogen and two carbon atoms. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires to share four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Two hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom while another two hydrogen atoms share with a different carbon atom. The two carbon atoms bond by sharing two pairs of the remaining electrons as shown below;

 

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            C                          H

Number of protons/electrons                                           6                           1

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:4                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                         4                           1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          4                           1

Number of electrons not shared( No lone pairs)                 0                          0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

  1. l) Ethyne molecule is made up of two hydrogen and two carbon atoms. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires to share four electrons to be stable/attain octet. One hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom while another hydrogen atoms share with a different carbon atom. The two carbon atoms bond by sharing three pairs of the remaining electrons as shown below;

 

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            C                          H

Number of protons/electrons                                           6                           1

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:4                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                         4                           1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared          4                           1

Number of electrons not shared( No lone pairs)                 0                          0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. j) Ethanol molecule is made up of six hydrogen one Oxygen

atom two carbon atoms.

Five Hydrogen atoms share their  one electron each with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. One Hydrogen atoms share one electron with Oxygen for both  to attain duplet/octet

Each Carbon uses  four electrons  to share with “O”and “H”attain octet/duplet.

NB: Oxygen has two lone pairs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

j)Ethanoic molecule is made up of four hydrogen two Oxygen atom two carbon atoms.

 Three Hydrogen atoms share their  one electron each with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. One Hydrogen atoms share one electron with Oxygen for both  to attain duplet/octet

 Each Carbon uses  four electrons  to share with “O”and “H”attain octet/duplet.

NB: Each Oxygen atom has two lone pairs

 

 

 

By convention (as a rule), a

(i) single covalent bond made up of two shared( a pair) electrons is represented by a dash(—)

(ii) double covalent bond made up of four shared( two pairs) electrons is represented by a double dash(==)

(iii) triple covalent bond made up of six shared( three pairs) electrons is represented by a triple dash(==)

The representation below show the molecules covered in (a) to (k) above:

 

  1. Hydrogen molecule(H2)                              H–H

 

  1. Fluorine molecule(F2)                   F–F

 

  1. Chlorine molecule(Cl2) Cl–Cl

 

  1. Bromine molecule(Br2) Br–Br

 

  1. Iodine molecule(I2) I–I

 

  1. Oxygen molecule(O2) O=O

 

  1. Nitrogen molecule(N2) N=N

 

  1. Phosphorus molecule(P2)                   P=P

 

  1. Water molecule (H2O) H–O–H

 

 

      j   Ammonia molecule(NH3)                              H–N–H

H

 

k)Carbon(IV) oxide molecule(CO2)                  O==C==O

 

H

l)Methane molecule(CH4)                                  H–C–H

H

 

Cl

m)Tetrachloromethane molecule(CCl4               Cl–C–Cl

Cl

 

H   H

n)Ethane molecule(C2H6)                                   H–C—C–H

H     H

 

p)Ethene molecule(C2H4)                                     H-C==C-H

H    H

 

q)Ethyne molecule(C2H6)                                   H-C—C-H

 

 

 

 

 

Dative /coordinate bond

A dative/coordinate bond is a covalent bond formed when a lone pair of electrons is donated then shared to an electron-deficient species/ion/atom.

During dative/coordinate bonding, all the shared pair of electrons are donated by one of the combining/bonding species/ ion/atom.

Like covalent bonding, coordinate /dative bond is mainly formed by non-metals.

 

Illustration of coordinate /dative bond                                  

a)Ammonium ion(NH4+)

The ammonium ion is made up of ammonia (NH3) molecule and hydrogen (H+) ion. (H+) ion has no electrons. NH3 is made up of covalent bonding from Nitrogen and Hydrogen. One lone pair of electrons is present in Nitrogen atom after the bonding. This lone pair is donated and shared with an electron-deficient H+ ion

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

b)Phosphine ion (PH4+)

The Phosphine ion is made up of phosphine(NH3) molecule and hydrogen (H+) ion. (H+) ion has no electrons. PH3 is made up of covalent bonding from Phosphorus and Hydrogen. One lone pair of electrons is present in Phosphorus atom. After the bonding this lone pair is donated and shared with the electron-deficient H+ ion

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. c) Hydroxonium (H3O+) ion

The hydroxonium ion is made up of water (H2O) molecule and hydrogen (H+) ion. (H+) ion has no electrons. The H2O molecule is made up of covalent bonding from Oxygen and Hydrogen. One lone pair of electrons out of the two present in Oxygen atom after the bonding is donated and shared with the electron-deficient H+ ion

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) Carbon (II) oxide (CO)

Carbon (II) oxide is made up of carbon and Oxygen atoms sharing each two outer electron and not sharing each two electrons. Oxygen with an extra lone pair of electrons donates and share with the carbon atom for both to be stable.

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Aluminium (III) chloride (AlCl3/Al2Cl6)

Aluminium (III) chloride is made up of aluminium and chlorine. One aluminium atom shares its outer electrons with three separate chlorine atoms. All chlorine atoms attain stable octet but aluminium does not. Another molecule of aluminium chloride shares its chlorine lone pair of electrons with the aluminium atom for both to be stable. This type of bond exists only in vapour phase after aluminium chloride sublimes.

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

A dative/coordinate bond is by convention represented by an arrow (→) heading from the donor of the shared pair of electrons.

Below is the representation of molecules in the above examples;

a)Ammonium ion.

H

H− N→H

H

b)Phosphine ion                                    H

H− P→H

H

 

c)Hydroxonium ion

H− O→H

H

 

d)Carbon(II) oxide                             O→C

 

 

  1. d) Aluminium(III)chloride Cl    Cl           Cl

 

Al        Al

 

Cl                   Cl           Cl

 

 

(ii)IONIC/ELECTROVALENT BOND

An ionic/electrovalent bond is extreme of a covalent bond.

During ionic/electrovalent bonding there is complete transfer of valence electrons to one electronegative atom from an electropositive atom.

All metals are electropositive and easily/readily donate/lose their valence electrons.

All non-metals are electronegative and easily/readily gain/acquire extra electrons.

Ionic/electrovalent bonding therefore mainly involves transfer of electrons from metal/metallic radical to non-metallic radical.

When an electropositive atom donates /loses the valence electrons, it forms a positively charged cation to attain stable octet/duplet.

When an electronegative atom gains /acquires extra valence electrons, it forms a negatively charged anion to attain stable octet/duplet.

The electrostatic attraction force between the stable positively charged cation and the stable negatively charged anion with opposite charges constitute the ionic bond.

Like in covalent/dative/coordinate bonding, only the outer energy level electrons take part in the formation of ionic/electrovalent bond

Like in covalent/dative/coordinate bonding, the more electrons taking part / involved  in the formation of ionic/electrovalent bond, the stronger the ionic /electrovalent bond.

 

 

Illustration of ionic /electrovalent bond

a)Sodium chloride(NaCl)

Sodium chloride(NaCl) is formed when a sodium atom donate its outer valence electrons to chlorine atom for both to attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            Na                        Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                           11                         17

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:8:1                       2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                         11                         7

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable       1                           1

New electron configuration/structure                               2:8:                       2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                              Na+                       Cl

 

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

b)Magnesium chloride(MgCl2)

Magnesium chloride (MgCl2) is formed when a magnesium atom donate its two outer valence electrons to chlorine atoms. Two chlorine atoms are required to gain each one electron. All the ions (cations and anions) attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            Mg                        Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                           11                         17

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:8:2                       2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                         2                           7

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable       2                           1

New electron configuration/structure                               2:8:                         2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                              Mg2+                     Cl

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

c)Lithium oxide(Li2O)

Lithium oxide(Li2O)is formed when a Lithium atom donate its  outer valence electrons to Oxygen atom. Two Lithium atoms are required to donate/lose each one electron and attain stable duplet. Oxygen atom acquires the two electrons and attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            Li                          O

Number of protons/electrons                                           3                           8

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:1                          2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                         1                           6

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable       1                           2

New electron configuration/structure                               2:                            2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                             Li+                        O2-

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

d)Aluminium(III) oxide(Al2O3)

Aluminium(III) oxide(Al2O3)is formed when a Aluminium atom donate its three outer valence electrons to Oxygen atom. Two Aluminium atoms are required to donate/lose each three electron and attain stable octet. Three Oxygen atoms gain/ acquire the six electrons and attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            Al                         O

Number of protons/electrons                                           13                         8

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:8:3                       2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                         3                           6

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable       3                           2

New electron configuration/structure                               2:8:                         2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                             Al3+                      O2-

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

e)Calcium oxide(CaO)

Calcium oxide(CaO)is formed when a Calcium atom donate its two outer valence electrons to Oxygen atom. Both attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            Ca                        O

Number of protons/electrons                                           20                         8

Electron configuration/structure                                      2:8:8:2                    2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                         2                           6

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable       2                           2

New electron configuration/structure                               2:8:8:                     2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                             Ca2+                      O2-

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Some compounds can be formed from ionic/electrovalent, covalent and dative/coordinate bonding within their atoms/molecules:

 

a)Formation of ammonium chloride:

Ammonium chloride is formed from the reaction of ammonia gas and hydrogen chloride gas. Both ammonia and hydrogen chloride gas are formed from covalent bonding. During the reaction of ammonia and hydrogen chloride gas to form Ammonium chloride;

-ammonia forms a dative/coordinate bond with electron deficient H+ ion from Hydrogen chloride to form ammonium ion(NH4+)ion.

-the chloride ion Cl–  and ammonium ion(NH4+)ion bond through ionic /      electrovalent bond from the electrostatic attraction between the opposite/unlike charges.

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Dissolution/dissolving of hydrogen chloride:

Hydrogen chloride is formed when hydrogen and chlorine atoms form a covalent bond. Water is formed when hydrogen and Oxygen atoms also form a covalent bond. When hydrogen chloride gas is dissolved in water;

-water molecules  forms a dative/coordinate bond with electron deficient H+ ion from Hydrogen chloride to form hydroxonium ion(H3O+)ion.

-the chloride ion Cl–  and hydroxonium ion(H3O+)ion bond through ionic /      electrovalent bond from the electrostatic attraction between the opposite/unlike charges.

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

.

 

c)Dissolution/dissolving of ammonia gas:

Ammmonia gas is formed when hydrogen and Nitrogen atoms form a covalent bond. Water is formed when hydrogen and Oxygen atoms also form a covalent bond. When Ammonia gas is dissolved in water;

-ammonia forms a dative/coordinate bond with electron deficient H+ ion from a water molecule to form ammonium ion(NH4+)ion.

-the hydroxide ion OH–  and ammonium ion(NH4+)ion bond through ionic /      electrovalent bond from the electrostatic attraction between the opposite/unlike charges.

 

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iii)METALLIC BOND

A metallic bond is formed when metallic atoms delocalize their outer electrons inorder to be stable.

Metals delocalize their outer electrons to form positively charged cation .

The electrostatic attraction force between the metallic cation and the negatively charged electrons constitute the metallic bond.

The more delocalized electrons the stonger the metallic bond.

Illustration of ionic /electrovalent bond

  1. a) Sodium (Na) is made of one valence electron. The electron is donated to form Na+ The electron is delocalized /free within many sodium ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding  Na             Na            Na

Number of protons/electrons                                  11              11             11

Electron configuration/structure                           2:8:1         2:8:1          2:8:1

Number of electron in outer energy level                1                 1              1

Number of electrons delocalized/free within          1                 1              1

New electron configuration/structure                     2:8:              2:8:           2:8:

Symbol of cation after metallic bonding                 Na+              Na+           Na+

Diagram

 

(three)Metallic cations attract

(three) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Aluminium (Al) is made of three valence electron. The three electrons are donated to form Al3+ The electrons are delocalized /free within many aluminium ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding  Al              Al             Al

Number of protons/electrons                                  13              13             13

Electron configuration/structure                             2:8:3         2:8:3          2:8:3

Number of electron in outer energy level                3                 3              3

Number of electrons delocalized/free within          3                 3              3

New electron configuration/structure                     2:8:              2:8:           2:8:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                Al3+             Al3+          Al3+

Diagram

 

(three)Metallic cations attract

                                                                    (nine) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

 

 

c)Calcium (Ca) is made of two valence electron.The two electrons are  donated to form Ca2+ ion.The electrons are delocalized /free within many Calcium  ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding  Ca             Ca            Ca

Number of protons/electrons                                  20              20             20

Electron configuration/structure                             2:8:8:2      2:8:8:2   2:8:8:2

Number of electron in outer energy level              2                 2              2

Number of electrons delocalized/free within          2                 2              2

New electron configuration/structure                     2:8:8:           2:8:8:           2:8:8:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                Ca2+            Ca2+          Ca2+

Diagram

 

(three)Metallic cations attract

(six) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

  1. d) Magnesium (Mg) is made of two valence electron. The two electrons are donated to form Mg2+The electrons are delocalized /free within many Magnesium ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding            Mg                    Mg

Number of protons/electrons                                           12                      12

Electron configuration/structure                                        2:8:2                  2:8:2

Number of electron in outer energy level                         2                         2

Number of electrons delocalized/free within                    2                         2

New electron configuration/structure                               2:8:                     2:8:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                         Mg2+                   Mg2+

Diagram

 

(two)Metallic cations attract

(four) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

e)Lithium (Li) is made of one valence electron.The  electron is donated to form Li+ ion.The electron is delocalized /free within many Lithium ions.ie;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding  Li      Li      Li     Li

Number of protons/electrons                                 3        3        3        3

Electron configuration/structure                             2:1     2:1     2:1      2:1

Number of electron in outer energy level               1        1        1        1

Number of electrons delocalized/free within 1        1        1        1

New electron configuration/structure                     2:1:    2:1:   2:1:    2:1:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                Li+        Li+    Li+        Li+

Diagram

 

(four)Metallic cations attract

                                                                    (four) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B.CHEMICAL  STRUCTURE

 

Chemical structure is the pattern/arrangement of atoms after they have bonded. There are two main types of chemical structures:

(i)simple molecular structure

     (ii) giant structures

 

(i)Simple molecular structure

Simple molecular structure is the pattern formed after atoms of non-metals have covalently bonded to form simple molecules.

Molecules are made of atoms joined together by weak intermolecular forces called Van-der-waals forces.The Van-der-waals forces hold the molecules together while the covalent bonds hold the atoms in the molecule.

 

                 Illustration of simple molecular structure

 

a)Hydrogen molecule(H2)

Hydrogen gas is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each hydrogen atom making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

 

Illustration of simple molecular structure

 

a)Hydrogen molecule(H2)

Hydrogen gas is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each hydrogen atom making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces

b)Oxygen molecule(O2)

Oxygen gas is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each Oxygen atom making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

 

Strong intramolecular forces/covalent bond

 

O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O

: :    : :    : :   : :     : :    : :                      weak intermolecular

O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O            forces/van-der-waals forces

 

c)Iodine molecule(I2)

Iodine solid crystals are made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each iodine atom making the molecule.Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

Strong intramolecular forces/covalent bond

 

I— I:::: I — I:::: I — I:::: I — I

: :    : :    : :   : :     : :    : :    : :              weak intermolecular

I — I:::: I — I:::: I — I:::: I — I          forces/van-der-waals forces

 

d)Carbon(IV) oxide molecule(CO2)

Carbon(IV) oxide gas molecule is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each Carbon and oxygen atoms making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

 

Strong intramolecular forces/covalent bond

 

O=C=O:::: O=C=O:::: O=C=O

: :               : :               : :                weak intermolecular

O=C=O:::: O=C=O:::: O=C=O           forces/van-der-waals forces

 

The following are the main characteristic properties of simple molecular structured compounds:

 

a)State

Most simple molecular substances are gases, liquid or liquids or solid that sublimes or has low boiling/melting points at room temperature (25oC) and pressure (atmospheric pressure).

Examples of simple molecular substances include:

-all gases eg Hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, carbon (IV) oxide,

          –Petroleum fractions eg Petrol, paraffin, diesel, wax,

-Solid non-metals eg Sulphur, Iodine

-Water

 

  1. b) Low melting/boiling points

Melting is the process of weakening the intermolecular/ van-der-waal forces/ of attraction between the molecules that holding the substance/compound.

Note;

(i)Melting and boiling does not involve weakening/breaking the strong intramolecular force/covalent bonds holding the atoms in the molecule.

 

(ii) Melting and boiling points increase with increase in atomic radius/size of the atoms making the molecule as the intermolecular  forces / van-der-waal forces of attraction between the molecules increase. e.g.

Iodine has a higher melting/boiling point than chlorine because it has a higher /bigger atomic radius/size than chlorine, making the molecule to have stronger intermolecular force/ van-der-waal forces of attraction between the molecules than chlorine. Iodine is hence a solid and chlorine is a gas.

 

(c)Insoluble in water/soluble in organic solvents

Polar substances dissolve in polar solvents. Water is a polar solvent .Molecular substances do not thus dissolve in water because they are non-polar. They dissolve in non-polar solvents like methylbenzene, benzene, tetrachloromethane or propanone.

 

d)Poor conductors of heat and electricity

Substances with free mobile ions or free mobile/delocalized electrons conduct electricity. Molecular substances are poor conductors of heat/electricity because their molecules have no free mobile ions/electrons. This makes them very good insulators.

 

Hydrogen bonds

 

A hydrogen bond is an intermolecular force of attraction in which a very electronegative atom attracts hydrogen atom of another molecule.

The most electronegative elements are Fluorine, Oxygen and Nitrogen .Molecular compounds made up of these elements usually have hydrogen bonds.

Hydrogen bonds are stronger than van-der-waals forces but weaker than covalent bonds. Molecular compounds with hydrogen bonds thus have higher melting/boiling points than those with van-der-waals forces.

 

Illustration of Hydrogen bonding

 

a)Water molecule

During formation of covalent bond, the oxygen atom attract/pull the shared electrons more to itself than Hydrogen creating partial negative charges(δ)in Oxygen and partial positive charges(δ+)in Hydrogen.

Two molecules attract each other at the partial charges through Hydrogen bonding.

 

 

 

 

The hydrogen bonding in water makes it;

(i)a liquid with higher boiling and melting point than simple molecular substances with higher molecular mass. e.g. Hydrogen sulphide as in the table below;

 

Influence of H-bond in water (H2O) in comparison to H2S

 

Substance Water/ H2O Hydrogen sulphide/ H2S
Relative molecular mass          18              34
Melting point(oC)           0             -85
Boiling point(oC)          100             -60

 

(ii)have higher volume in solid (ice) than liquid (water) and thus ice is less dense than water. Ice therefore floats  above liquid water.

b)Ethanol molecule

 

Like in water, the oxygen atom attracts/pulls the shared electrons in the covalent bond more to itself than Hydrogen.

This creates a partial negative charge (δ-) on oxygen and partial positive charge(δ+) on hydrogen.

Two ethanol molecules attract each other at the partial charges through Hydrogen bonding forming a dimmer.

A dimmer is a molecule formed when two molecules join together as below:

 

 

 

Hydrogen bonds             covalent bonds

 

 

R1               O δ-…………………….…H δ+                  O δ-

 

 

H δ+                                               R2

 

R1 and R2 are extensions of the molecule.

For ethanol it is made up of CH3CH2 – to make the structure:

 

Hydrogen bonds            covalent bonds

 

 

CH3CH2              O δ-………………………….…H δ+             O δ-

 

 

H δ+                                               CH2CH3

 

 

b)Ethanoic acid molecule

Like in water and ethanol above, the oxygen atom attracts/pulls the shared electrons in the covalent bond in ethanoic acid more to itself than Hydrogen.

This creates a partial negative charge (δ-)on oxygen and partial positive charge(δ+) on hydrogen.

Two ethanoic acid molecules attract each other at the partial charges through Hydrogen-bonding forming a dimer.

Hydrogen bonds            covalent bonds

 

R1         C              O δ-………………………….…H δ+            O δ-

 

O δ-              H δ+………………..….O δ-                  C            R2

 

 

 

 

R1 and 2 are extensions of the molecule.

For ethanoic acid the extension is made up of CH3 –  to make the structure;

 

Hydrogen bonds            covalent bonds

 

CH3                C               O δ-…………………………………….…H δ+            O δ-

 

 

O δ-              H δ+…………………..……..………O δ-                 C            CH3

 

 

Ethanoic acid like ethanol exists as a dimer.

Ethanoic acid has a higher melting/boiling point than ethanol .This is because ethanoic acid has two/more hydrogen bond than ethanol.

 

  1. d) Proteins and sugars in living things also have multiple/complex hydrogen bonds in their structures.

(ii) Giant structure

 

This is the pattern formed after substances /atoms /ions bond to form a long chain network.

Giant structures therefore extend in all directions to form a pattern that continues repeating itself.

There are three main giant structures.

  1. a) giant covalent/atomic structure           b)giant ionic structure

c)giant metallic structure

  1. a) giant covalent/atomic structure

 

Giant covalent/atomic structure is the pattern formed after atoms have covalently bonded to form long chain pattern consisting of indefinite number of atoms covalently bonded together.

The strong covalent bonds hold all the atoms together to form a very well packed structure. Examples of substances with giant covalent/atomic structure include:

(i) carbon-diamond

(ii) carbon-graphite

(iii)silicon

(iv) silicon(IV) oxide/sand

Carbon-graphite and carbon-diamond are allotropes of carbon.

Allotropy is the existence of an element in more than one stable physical form at the same temperature and pressure.

Allotropes are atoms of the same element existing in more than one stable physical form at the same temperature and pressure.

Other elements that exhibit/show allotropy include;

-Sulphur as monoclinic sulphur and rhombic sulphur

-Phosphorus as white phosphorus and red phosphorus

 

The structure of carbon-diamond

Carbon has four valence electrons. The four valence electrons are used to form covalent bonds.

During the formation of diamond, one carbon atom covalently bond with four other carbon atoms.

C                                        C

x                                                  x.

x  C   x    —–>      C  .x C x.   C    ——>         C        C        C

x                                                  x.

C                                        C

After the bonding, the atoms rearrange to form a regular tetrahedral in which one carbon is in the centre while four are at the apex/corners.

 

 

C

 

 

 

C

 

 

C                                    C

 

 

C

 

This pattern repeats itself to form a long chain number of atoms covalently bonded together indefinitely. The pattern is therefore called giant tetrahedral structure. It extends in all directions where one atom of carbon is always a centre of four others at the apex/corner of a regular tetrahedral.

C

 

 

C

 

C                 C

C                         C

 

C

C

 

 

 

The giant tetrahedral structure of carbon-diamond is very well/closely packed and joined/bonded together by strong covalent bond.

This makes carbon-diamond to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) High melting/boiling point.

The giant tetrahedral structure is very well packed and joined together by strong covalent bonds.

This requires a lot of energy/heat to weaken for the element to melt and break for the element to boil.

 

 

  1. b) High density.

Carbon diamond is the hardest known natural substance.

This is because the giant tetrahedral structure is a very well packed pattern/structure and joined together by strong covalent bonds.

This makes Carbon diamond be used to make drill for drilling boreholes/oil wells.

The giant tetrahedral structure of carbon diamond is a very closely packed pattern /structure such that heat transfer by conduction is possible. This makes carbon diamond a good thermal conductor.

 

  1. c) Poor conductor of electricity.

Carbon-diamond has no free/delocalized electrons within its structure and thus do not conduct electricity.

 

  1. d) Insoluble in water.

Carbon-diamond is insoluble in water because it is non-polar and do not bond with water molecules.

 

  1. e) Is abrasive/Rough.

The edges of the closely well packed pattern/structure of Carbon-diamond make its surface rough/abrasive and thus able to smoothen /cut metals and glass.

 

  1. f) Have characteristic luster.

Carbon-diamond has a high optical dispersion and thus able to disperse light to different colours .This makes Carbon-diamond one of the most popular gemstone for making jewellery.

 

The structure of carbon-graphite

 

During the formation of graphite, one carbon atom covalently bond with three other carbon atoms leaving one free/delocalized electron.

 

C                              C

x                                                  x.

x  C   x    —–>      C  .x C x    ——>      C      C x  free/delocalized electron

x                                                  x.

C                              C

 

After the bonding, the atoms rearrange and join together to form a regular hexagon in which six carbon atoms are at the apex/corners.

The regular hexagon is joined to another in layers on the same surface by van-der-waals forces.

Each layer extends to form a plane in all directions.

The fourth valence electron that does not form covalent bonding is free/mobile /delocalized within the layers.

This structure/pattern is called giant hexagonal planar structure.

 

The giant hexagonal planar structure of carbon-graphite is closely packed and joined/bonded together by strong covalent bonds. This makes carbon-graphite to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) High melting/boiling point.

The giant hexagonal planar structure of carbon-graphite is well packed and joined together by strong covalent bonds.

This requires a lot of energy/heat to weaken for the element to melt and break for the element to boil.

 

  1. b) Good conductor of electricity.

Carbon-graphite has free/delocalized 4th valence electrons within its structure and thus conducts electricity.

 

  1. c) Insoluble in water.

Carbon-graphite is insoluble in water because it is non-polar and do not bond with water molecules.

  1. d) Soft.

Layers of giant hexagonal planar structure of carbon graphite are held together by van-der-waals forces.

The van-der-waals forces easily break when pressed and reform back on releasing/reducing pressure/force thus making graphite soft.

 

  1. e) Smooth and slippery.

When pressed at an angle the van-der-waals forces easily break and slide over each other making graphite soft and slippery.

It is thus used as a dry lubricant instead of oil.

 

f)Some uses of carbon-graphite.

  1. As a dry lubricant– carbon graphite is smooth and slippery and thus better lubricant than oil.Oil heat up when reducing friction.
  2. Making Lead-pencils- When pressed at an angle on paper the van-der-waals forces easily break and slide smoothly over contrasting background producing its characteristic black background.
  3. As moderator in nuclear reactors to reduce the rate of decay/disintegration of radioactive nuclides/atoms/isotopes.
  4. As electrode in dry/wet cells/battery- carbon graphite is inert and good conductor of electricity. Current is thus able to move from one electrode/terminal to the other in dry and wet cells/batteries. Carbon graphite is also very cheap.

 

 

  1. b) giant ionic structure

 

Giant ionic structure is the pattern formed after ions have bonded through ionic/electrovalent bonding to form a long chain consisting of indefinite number of ions.

The strong ionic/electrovalent bond holds all the cations and anions together to form a very well packed structure.

Substances with giant ionic structure are mainly crystals of salts e.g. sodium chloride, Magnesium chloride, Sodium iodide, Potassium chloride, copper (II) sulphate(VI).

 

The structure of sodium chloride

 

Sodium chloride is made up of sodium (Na+) and chloride (Cl)ions.

Sodium (Na+) ion is formed when a sodium atom donate /loose/donate an electron. Chloride (Cl) ion is formed when a chlorine atom gain /acquire an extra electron from sodium atom.

Many Na+ and Cl ions then rearrange such that one Na+ ion is surrounded by six Clions and one Clion is surrounded by six Na+ ions.

The pattern formed is a giant cubic structure where Cl ion is sand witched between Na+ ions and the same to Na+ ions.

This pattern forms a crystal.

A crystal is a solid form of a substance in which particles are arranged in a definite pattern regularly repeated in three dimensions.

 

The structure of sodium chloride

The giant cubic structure/crystal of sodium chloride is as below;

 

 

The giant cubic structure/crystal of sodium chloride is very well packed and joined by strong ionic/electrovalent bonds. This makes sodium chloride and many ionic compounds to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) Have high melting /boiling points.

The giant cubic lattice structure of sodium chloride is very closely packed into a crystal that requires a lot of energy/heat to weaken and melt/boil. This applies to all crystalline ionic compounds.

  1. b) Are good conductors of electricity in molten and aqueous state but poor conductor of electricity in solid.

Ionic compounds have fused ions in solid crystalline state.

On heating and dissolving in water, the crystal is broken into free mobile ions (Na+ and Cl ions).

The free mobile ions are responsible for conducting electricity in ionic compounds in molten and aqueous states.

 

c)Soluble in water

Ionic compounds are polar and dissolve in polar water molecules.

On dissolving, the crystal breaks to free the fused ions which are then surrounded by water molecules.

 

 

  1. b) giant metallic structure

 

This is the pattern formed after metallic atoms have bonded through metallic bond.

The pattern formed is one where the metallic cations rearrange to form a cubic structure.

The cubic structure is bound together by the free delocalized electrons that move freely within.

The more delocalized electrons, the stronger the metallic bond.

 

The structure of sodium and aluminium.

 

Sodium has one valence electrons.

Aluminium has three valence electrons.

After delocalizing the valence electrons ,the metal cations (Na+ and Al3+) rearrange to the apex /corners of a regular cube that extend in all directions.

The delocalized electrons remain free and mobile as shown below:

 

 

The giant cubic structure makes metals to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) Have high melting/boiling point

The giant cubic structure is very well packed and joined/bonded together by the free delocalized electrons.

The more delocalized electrons the higher the melting/boiling point.

The larger/bigger the metallic cation ,the weaker the packing of the cations and thus the lower the melting/boiling point. e.g.

 

(i) Sodium and potassium have both one valence delocalized electron.

Atomic radius of potassium is larger/bigger than that of sodium and hence less well packed in its metallic structure.

Sodium has therefore a higher melting/boiling point than potassium.

 

(ii) Sodium has one delocalized electron.

Aluminium has three delocalized electrons.

Atomic radius of sodium is larger/bigger than that of aluminium and hence less well packed in its metallic structure.

Aluminium has therefore a higher melting/boiling point than sodium because of the smaller well packed metallic (Al3+)ions and bonded/joined by more/three delocalized electrons.

 

The table below shows the comparative melting/boiling points of some metals:

Metal Electronic structure Atomic radius(nM) Melting point(oC) Boiling point(oC)
Sodium 2:8:1 0.155 98 890
Potassium 2:8:8:1 0.203 64 774
Magnesium 2:8:2 0.136 651 1110
Aluminium 2:8:3 0.125 1083 2382

 

  1. b) Good electrical and thermal conductor/electricity.

All metals are good conductors of heat and electricity including Mercury which is a liquid.

The mobile delocalized electrons are free within the giant metallic structure to move from one end to the other transmitting heat/electric current.

The more delocalized electrons the better the thermal/electrical conductivity.

High temperatures/heating lowers the thermal/electrical conductivity of metals because the delocalized electrons vibrate and move randomly hindering transfer of heat

 

From the table above:

Compare the electrical conductivity of;

(i)Magnesium and sodium

Magnesium is a better conductor than sodium.

Magnesium has more/two delocalized electrons than sodium. The more delocalized electrons the better the electrical conductor.

(ii)Potassium and sodium

Potassium is a better conductor than sodium.

Potassium has bigger/larger atomic radius than sodium. The delocalized electrons are less attracted to the nucleus of the atom and thus more free /mobile and thus better the electrical conductor.

 

  1. c) Insoluble in water

All metals are insoluble in water because they are non polar and thus do not bond with water.

Metals higher in the reactivity/electrochemical series like; Potassium, sodium, Lithium and Calcium reacts with cold water producing hydrogen gas and forming an alkaline solution of their hydroxides.ie

2K(s)        +       2H2O(l)       ->      2KOH(aq)   +       H2(g)

2Na(s)      +       2H2O(l)       ->      2NaOH(aq) +       H2(g)

2Li(s)       +       2H2O(l)       ->      2LiOH(aq)  +       H2(g)

Ca(s)        +       2H2O(l)       ->      Ca(OH)2(aq)+       H2(g)

 

Heavy metal like Magnesium, Aluminium, Iron, Zinc and Lead react with steam/water vapour to produce hydrogen gas and form the corresponding oxide.

 

Mg(s)          +       H2O(g)        ->      MgO(s)       +       H2(g)

Fe(s)           +       H2O(g)        ->      FeO(s)         +       H2(g)

Zn(s)           +       H2O(g)        ->      ZnO(s)        +       H2(g)

Pb(s)           +       H2O(g)        ->      PbO(s)        +       H2(g)

2Al(s)          +       3H2O(g)      ->      Al2O3(s)      +       3H2(g)

 

Metals lower in the reactivity/electrochemical series than hydrogen like; copper, Mercury, Gold Silver and Platinum do not react with water/vapour.

 

  1. d) Shiny metallic-lustre

All metals have a shiny grey metallic luster except copper which is brown.

When exposed to sunlight, the delocalized electrons gain energy, they vibrate on the metal surface scattering light to appear shiny.

With time, most metals corrode and are covered by a layer of the metal oxide.

The delocalized electrons are unable to gain and scatter light and the metal surface tarnishes/become dull.

 

  1. e) Ductile and malleable

All metals are malleable (can be made into thin sheet) and ductile (can be made into wire.

When beaten/hit/pressed lengthwise the metallic cations extend and is bound /bonded by the free/mobile electrons to form a sheet.

When beaten/hit/pressed lengthwise and bredthwise the metallic cations extend and is bound /bonded by the free/mobile electrons to form a wire/thin strip.

 

  1. f) Have high tensile strength

Metals are not brittle. The free delocalized electrons bind the metal together when it is bent /coiled at any angle.

The meta thus withstand stress/coiling

 

  1. g) Form alloys

An alloy is a uniform mixture of two or more metals.

Some metals have spaces between their metallic cations which can be occupied by another metal cation with smaller atomic radius.

Common alloys include:

Brass(Zinc and Copper alloy)

Bronze(Copper and Tin alloy)

German silver

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Summary of Bonding and structure

 

  Simple molecular structure Giant covalent /atomic structure Giant ionic structure Giant metallic structure
(i)Examples

 

I2,S8,HCl,O2,CH4 Graphite,diamond

Si,SiO2

NaCl, KCl, CaO,CuSO4 Na,Fe,Cr,Hg,K
Constituent particles making structure molecules Atoms

(of non-metals)

Ions

(cation and anions)

Atoms

(of metals)

Type of substance Non-metal element/non-metal molecule/non-metal compound(electronegative elements) Group IV non-metals and some of their oxides Metal-non metal compounds(compounds of electropositive and electronegative compounds) Metallic compounds

Metallic elements (with low electonegativity and high electropositivity)

 

Bonding in solid state

-Strong covalent bonds hold atoms together within separate molecules (intramolecular forces)

-Weak van-der-waals forces hold separate molecules together (intermolecular forces)

Atoms are linked through the whole structure by very strong covalent bonds. Electrostatic attraction of cations and anions link the whole structure through strong ionic bond. EEElectrostatic

Electrostatic attraction of outer mobile electrons for positive nuclei binds atoms together though metallic bond

Properties

(i) Volatility

-Highly volatile with low melting/boiling point

-Low latent heat of fusion/vaporization

-Non volatile with very high melting/boiling points

-Low latent heat of fusion / vaporization

-Non volatile with very high melting/boiling points

-Low latent heat of fusion / vaporization

 

-Non volatile with very high melting/boiling points

-Low latent heat of fusion / vaporization

 

(ii) State at room temperature /pressure Usually gases,volatile liquids or solids that sublimes solids solids  

 

Solids except Mercury(liquid)

(iii) Hardness Soft and brittle(low tensile strength) Hard and brittle(low tensile strength) Hard and brittle(low tensile strength) Hard, malleable, ductile and have high  tensile strength
(iv) Thermal /electrical conductivity Poor thermal and electrical conductor when solid ,liquid or aqueous solutions but some dissolve and react to form electrolytes e.g.

Hydrogen chloride and ammonia gases.

Poor thermal and electrical conductor when solid ,liquid or aqueous solutions but

-Carbon-graphite is a good electrical conductor while

-Carbon-diamond is a good thermal conductor.

Poor thermal and electrical conductor when solid. Good thermal and electrical conductor in liquid/molten and aqueous states when the ions are not fused

 

Good thermal and electrical conductor in solid and liquid/molten  states  due to the free mobile /delocalized electrons

 

(v) Solubility Insoluble in polar solvents e.g. Water

Soluble in non-polar solvents e.g. tetrachloromethane, benzene, methylbenzene

Insoluble in all solvents Soluble in polar solvents e.g. Water

Insoluble in non-polar solvents e.g. tetrachloromethane, benzene, methylbenzene

Insoluble in polar/non-polar colvents.

-Some react with polar solvents

-Some metal dissolve in other metals to form alloys e.g. Brass is formed when Zinc dissolve in copper.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. PERIODICITY OF BONDING AND STRUCTURE

The periodic table does not classify elements as metals and non-metals. The table arranges

them in terms of atomic numbers.

However, based on structure and bonding of the elements in the periodic table;

(i)-the top right hand corner of about twenty elements are non-metals

(ii)-left of each non-metal is an element which shows characteristics of both metal and non-metal.

These elements are called semi-metals/metalloids. They include Boron, silicon, Germanium, Arsenic, and Terullium

(iii)-all other elements in the periodic table are metal.

(iv)-Hydrogen is a non-metal with metallic characteristic/property of donating/losing outer electron to form cation/H+ ion.

(v) –bromine is the only known natural liquid non-metal element at room temperature and pressure.

(vi) –mercury is only known natural liquid metal element at room temperature and pressure.

(vii) Carbon-graphite is a semi metals/metalloids. Carbon-diamond is a pure non-metal yet both are allotropes of carbon (same element)

 

  1. a) Sketch of the periodic table showing metals ,metalloid and non-metals

Metals                            Metalloids             Non-metals

 H   He
Li Be   B C N O F Ne
Na Mg   Al Si P S Cl Ar
K Ca  Transition metals Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Rb Sr   In Sn Sb Te I Xe
Cs Ba   Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Fr Ra              

 

 

 

b)Periodicity in the physical properties of elements across period 2 and 3

 

Study table I and II below:

 

Table I(period 2)

Property

 

Li Be B C N O F Ne

 

Melting point(oC) 180 1280 2030 3700

(graphite)

3550

(diamond)

-210 -219 -220 -250
Boiling point(oC) 1330 2480 3930 Graphite sublimes

4830

(diamond)

-200 -180 -190 -245
Density at room temperature (gcm-3) 0.50 1.85 2.55 2.25

(graphite)

3.53

(diamond)

0.81 0.14 0.11 0.021
Type of element Metal Metal Metal Metalloid Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal

 

Chemical structure Giant metallic Giant metallic Giant atomic/

covalent

Giant atomic/

covalent

Simple molecula

or molecule/ N2

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

/O2

Simple molecula

or molecule/F2

Simple molecula

or molecule/Ne

State at room temperature Solid Solid Solid Solid gas gas gas gas
Electron structure 2:1 2:2 2:3 2:4 2:5 2:6 2:7 2:8

 

 

Valency 1 2 3 4 3 2 1

 

 

Formular of ion Li+ Be2+ B3+ N3- O2- F

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table II (period 3)

Property Na Mg Al Si P(white) S(Rhombic) Cl Ar

 

Melting point(oC) 98 650 660 1410

 

44 114 -101 -189

 

Boiling point(oC) 890 1120 2450 2680 280 445 -34 -186
Density at room temperature (gcm-3) 0.97 1.74 2.70 2.33

(graphite)

3.53

(diamond)

1.82 2.07 0.157 0.011
Type of element Metal Metal Metal Metalloid Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal

 

Chemical structure Giant metallic Giant metallic Giant

metallic

Giant atomic/

covalent

Simple molecula

or molecule/ P4

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

/S8

Simple molecula

or molecule/Cl2

Simple molecula

or molecule/Ar

State at room temperature Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid gas gas
Electron structure 2:8:1 2:8:2 2:8:3 2:8:4 2:8:5 2:8:6 2:8:7 2:8:8

 

 

Valency 1 2 3 4 3 2 1

 

 

Formular of ion Na+ Mg2+ Al3+ P3- S2- Cl

 

 

 

From table I and II above:

 

  1. Explain the trend in atomic radius along /across a period in the periodic table

Observation

Atomic radius of elements in the same period decrease successively across/along a period from left to right.

Explanation

Across/along the period from left to right there is an increase in nuclear charge from additional number of protons and still additional number of electrons entering the same energy level.

Increase in nuclear charge increases the effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level pulling it closer to the nucleus successively across the period .e.g.

 

(i)From the table 1and 2 above, atomic radius of Sodium (0.157nM) is higher than that of Magnesium(0.137nM). This is because Magnesium has more effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level than Sodium hence pulls outer energy level more nearer to its nucleus than sodium.

 

(ii)The rate of decrease in the atomic radius become smaller as the atom become heavier e.g. Atomic radius of Magnesium from sodium falls by(0.157nM- 0.137nM) =0.02

Atomic radius of Chlorine from sulphur falls by(0.104nM- 0.099nM) =0.005

This is because gaining/adding one more proton to 11 already present cause greater proportional change in nuclear attraction power  to magnesium than  gaining/adding one more proton to 16 already present in sulphur to chlorine.

 

(iii)Period 3 elements have more energy levels than Period 2 elements. They have therefore bigger/larger atomic radius/size than corresponding period 2 elements in the same group.

 

2.Explain the trend in ionic radius along/across a period in the periodic table

Observation

Ionic radius of elements in the same period decrease successively across/along a period from left to right for the first three elements then increase drastically then slowly successively decrease.

 

Explanation

Across/along the period from left to right elements change form electron donors/losers (reducing agents) to electron acceptors (oxidizing agents).

(i)An atom form stable ion by either gaining/acquiring/ accepting extra electron or donating/losing outer electrons.

 

(ii)Metals form stable ions by donating/losing all the outer energy level electrons and thus also the outer energy level .i.e.

-Sodium ion has one less energy level than sodium atom. The ion is formed by sodium atom donating/losing (all) the outer energy level electron and thus also the outer energy level making the ion to have smaller ionic radius than atom.

 

(iii)Ionic radius therefore decrease across/along the period from Lithium to Boron in period 2 and from Sodium to Aluminium in period 3.This is because the number of electrons donated/lost causes increased effective nuclear attraction on remaining electrons /energy levels.

 

(iv)Non-metals form stable ion by gaining/acquiring/accepting extra electron in the outer energy level. The extra electron/s increases the repulsion among electrons and reduces the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level. The outer energy level therefore expand/enlarge/increase in order to accommodate the extra repelled electrons .The more electrons gained/accepted/acquired the more repulsion and the more expansion to accommodate them and hence bigger/larger atomic radius. e.g.

          –Nitrogen ion has three electrons more than Nitrogen atom. The outer energy level expand/enlarge/increase to accommodate the extra repelled electrons. Nitrogen atom thus has smaller atomic radius than the ionic radius of nitrogen ion.

 

(v) Ionic radius decrease from group IV onwards from left to right. This because the number of electrons gained to form ion decrease across/along the period from left to right. e.g. Nitrogen ion has bigger/larger  ionic radius than Oxygen.

 

3.Explain the trend in melting and boiling point of elements in a period in the periodic table.

Observation

The melting and boiling point of elements rise up to the elements in Group IV(Carbon/Silicon) along/across the period then continuously falls.

Explanation

Melting/boiling points depend on the packing of the structure making the element and the strength of the bond holding the atoms/molecules together.

Across/along the period (2 and 3) the structure changes from giant metallic, giant atomic/covalent to simple molecular.

(i)For metals, the number of delocalized electrons increases across/along the period and hence stronger metallic bond/structure thus requiring a lot of heat/energy to weaken.

The strength of a metallic bond also depends on the atomic radius/size. The melting /boiling point decrease as the atomic radius/size of metals increase due to decreased packing of larger atoms. e.g.

-The melting /boiling point of Lithium is lower than that of Beryllium because Beryllium has two/more delocalized electrons and hence stronger metallic structure/bond.

– The melting /boiling point of Lithium is higher than that of Sodium because the atomic radius/size Lithium is smaller and hence better packed  and hence forms stronger metallic structure/bond.

 

(ii)Carbon-graphite/carbon-diamond in period 2 and Silicon in period 3 form very well packed giant atomic/covalent structures held together by strong covalent bonds. These elements have therefore very high melting/boiling points.

Both Carbon-graphite/ carbon-diamond have smaller atomic radius/size than Silicon in period 3 and thus higher melting/boiling points due to better/closer packing of smaller atoms in their well packed giant atomic/covalent structures.

 

(ii)Non-metals from group V along/across the period form simple molecules joined by weak intermolecular /van-der-waals force. The weak intermolecular /van-der-waals force require little energy/heat to weaken leading to low melting/boiling points. The strength of the intermolecular /van-der-waals forces decrease with decrease in atomic radius/ size lowering the melting/boiling points along/across the period (and raising the melting/boiling points down the group).e.g.

-The melting /boiling point of Nitrogen is higher than that of Oxygen. This is because the atomic radius/ size of Nitrogen is higher than that of Oxygen and hence stronger intermolecular /van-der-waals forces between Nitrogen molecules.

-The melting /boiling point of Chlorine is higher than that of Fluorine. This is because the atomic radius/ size of Chlorine is higher than that of Fluorine and hence stronger intermolecular /van-der-waals forces between Chlorine molecules.

 

(iii)Rhombic sulphur exists as a puckered ring of S8atoms which are well packed. Before melting the ring break and join to very long chains that entangle each other causing the unusually high melting/boiling point of Rhombic sulphur.

 

(iv)Both sulphur and phosphorus exists as allotropes.

Sulphur exists as Rhombic-sulphur and monoclinic-sulphur. Rhombic-sulphur is the stable form of sulphur at room temperature and pressure.

Phosphorus exists as white-phosphorus and red-phosphorus.

White-phosphorus is the stable form of Phosphorus at room temperature and pressure.

 

  1. State and explain the trend in density of elements in a period in the periodic table.

Observation: Density increase upto the elements in group IV then falls across/along the period successively

Explanation:

Density is the mass per unit volume occupied by matter/particles/atoms/molecules of element.

 

(i)For metals ,the stronger metallic bond and the more delocalized electrons ensure a very well packed giant metallic structure that occupy less volume and thus higher density.

The more the number of delocalized electrons along/across the period, the higher the density. e.g.

(i)Aluminium has a higher density than sodium. This is because aluminium has more /three delocalized electrons than /one sodium thus forms a very well packed giant metallic structure that occupy less volume per given mass/density.

 

(ii)Carbon-graphite ,carbon-diamond and silicon in group IV form a well packed giant atomic/covalent structure that is continuously joined by strong covalent bonds hence occupy less volume per given mass/density.

Carbon-graphite form a less well packed giant hexagonal planar structure joined by Van-der-waals forces. Its density (2.25gcm-3) is therefore less than that of Carbon-diamond(3.53gcm-3) and silicon(2.33gcm-3).Both diamond and silicon have giant tetrahedral structure that is better packed. Carbon-diamond has smaller atomic radius/size than silicon. Its density is thus higher because of better packing and subsequently higher density. Carbon-diamond is the hardest known natural substance by having the highest density.

 

(iii)For non-metals, the strength of the intermolecular /van-der-waals forces decreases with decrease in atomic radius/size along/across the period. This decreases the mass occupied by given volume of atoms in a molecule from group VI onwards. e.g.

Phosphorus has a higher atomic radius/size than chlorine and Argon and thus stronger intermolecular/van-der-waals forces that ensure a given mass of phosphorus occupy less volume than chlorine and neon.

 

5.State and explain the trend in thermal/electrical conductivity of elements in a period in the periodic table.

Observation:

Increase along/across the period from group I, II, and III then decrease in Group IV to drastically decrease in group V to VIII (O).

Explanation

(i)Metals have free delocalized electrons that are responsible for thermal/electrical conductivity.Thermal/electrical conductivity increase  with increase in number of delocalized electrons. The thermal conductivity decrease with increase in temperature/heating. 

e.g.

Aluminium with three delocalized electrons from each atom in its metallic structure has the highest electrical /thermal conductivity in period 3.

 

(ii)Carbon-graphite has also free 4th valency electrons that are delocalized within its layers of giant hexagonal planar structure. They are responsible for the electrical conductivity of graphite.

 

(iii)Silicon and carbon diamond do not conduct electricity but conducts heat. With each atom too close to each other in their very well packed giant tetrahedral structure, heat transfer /radiate between the atoms. The thermal conductivity increase with increase in temperature/heating.

                                                                       

(iv)All other non-metals are poor /non-conductor of heat and electricity. They are made of molecules with no free /mobile delocalized electrons in their structure.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Periodicity of the oxides of elements along/across period 3

 

The table below summarizes some properties of the oxides of elements in period 3 of the periodic table.

 

Formular of oxide/

Property

Na2O MgO Al2O3 SiO2 P2O5

P4O6

SO2

SO3

Cl2O7

Cl2O

Melting

 

point(oC)

1193 3075 2045 1728

 

563 -76 -60

 

Boiling

 

point(oC)

1278 3601 2980 2231 301 -10 -9
Bond type Ionic Ionic Ionic Covalent Covalent Covalent Covalent

 

Chemical structure Giant ionic structure Giant ionic structure Giant ionic structure Giant atomic/

covalent

Simple molecula

or molecule

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

Simple molecula

or molecule

State at room

temperature

Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid gas Gas

(Cl2O7 is a liquid)

Nature of

Oxide

Basic/

alkaline

Basic/

alkaline

Amphotellic oxide 2:8:4 2:8:5 2:8:6 2:8:7
Reaction with water

 

 

React to form NaOH /alkaline solution React to form MgOH)2 /weakly alkaline solution Don’t react with water. Don’t react with water. React to form H2PO4

/weakly acidic solution

-SO2 react to form H2SO3 . H2SO3 is quickly oxidized to H2SO4

-SO2 react to form H2SO4/ strongly

acidic

-Cl2O7 reacts to form HClO4

/weakly acidic solution

Reaction with dilute acids Reacts to form salt and water Reacts to form salt and water Reacts to form salt and water No reaction No reaction No reaction No reaction

 

  1. All the oxides of elements in period 3 except those of sulphur and chlorine are solids at room temperature and pressure.
  2. Across/along the period, bonding of the oxides changes from ionic in sodium oxide magnesium oxide and aluminium oxide (show both ionic and covalent properties) to covalent in the rest of the oxides.

 

  1. Across/along the period, the structure of the oxides changes from giant ionic structure in sodium oxide, magnesium oxide and aluminium oxide to giant atomic/covalent structure in silicon (IV) oxide. The rest of the oxides form simple molecules/molecular structure.

 

  1. Sodium oxide and magnesium oxide are basic /alkaline in nature. Aluminium oxide is amphotellic in nature (shows both acidic and basic characteristics). The rest of the oxides are acidic in nature.

 

  1. Ionic compounds/oxides have very high melting/boiling points because of the strong electrostatic attraction joining the giant ionic crystal lattice.

The melting/boiling points increase from sodium oxide to aluminium oxide as the number of electrons involved in bonding increase, increasing the strength of the ionic bond/structure.

 

  1. Silicon (IV) oxide is made of a well packed giant atomic/covalent structure joined by strong covalent bonds.

This results in a solid with very high melting/boiling point.

 

7.Phosphorus (V) oxide, sulphur(IV) oxide/ sulphur (VI) oxide and dichloride heptoxide exist as simple molecules/molecular structure joined by weak van-der-waals/intermolecular forces.

This results in them existing as low melting /boiling point solids/gases.

 

  1. Ionic oxide conducts electricity in molten and aqueous states but not in solid.

In solid state the ions are fused/fixed but on heating to molten state and when dissolved in water, the ions are free / mobile.

Sodium oxide, magnesium oxide and aluminium oxide are therefore good conductors in molten and aqueous states.

 

  1. Covalent bonded oxides do not conduct electricity in solid, molten or in aqueous states.

This is because they do not have free / mobile ion. Phosphorus (V) oxide, sulphur(IV) oxide/ sulphur (VI) oxide and dichloride heptoxide are thus non-conductors/insulators.

 

  1. Silicon (IV) oxide is a poor/weak conductor of heat in solid state. This is because it has very closely packed structure for heat to radiate conduct along its structure.

 

  1. Electopositivity decrease across the period while electronegativity increase across the period. The oxides thus become less ionic and more covalent along/across the period.

12.The steady change from giant ionic structure to giant atomic/ covalent structure then simple molecular structure lead to profound differences in the reaction of the oxides with water,acids and alkalis/bases:

 

(i) Reaction with water

  1. a) Ionic oxides react with water to form alkaline solutions e.g.;

I.Sodium oxide reacts/dissolves in water forming an alkaline solution of sodium hydroxide.

Chemical equation:        Na2O(s)   +   H2O (l)     ->    2NaOH(aq)

 

  1. Magnesium oxide slightly/ slowly reacts/dissolves in water forming an alkaline solution of magnesium hydroxide

Chemical equation:        MgO(s)   +   2H2O (l)     ->    Mg(OH) 2 (aq)

 

III. Aluminium oxide does reacts/dissolves in water.

  1. b) Non-metallic oxides are acidic. They react with water to form weakly acidic solutions:
  2. Phosphorus (V) oxide readily reacts/dissolves in water forming a weak acidic solution of phosphoric (V) acid.

Chemical equation:        P4O10 (s)   +   6H2O (l)     ->    4H3PO4 (aq)

Chemical equation:        P2O5 (s)   +   3H2O (l)     ->    2H3PO4 (aq)

 

  1. Sulphur (IV) oxide readily reacts/dissolves in water forming a weak acidic solution of sulphuric (IV) acid.

Chemical equation:        SO2 (g)   +   H2O (l)     ->    H2SO3 (aq)

Sulphur (VI) oxide quickly fumes in water to form concentrated  sulphuric (VI) acid which is a strong acid.

Chemical equation:        SO3 (g)   +   H2O (l)     ->    H2SO4 (aq)

 

III. Dichlorine oxide reacts with water to form weak acidic solution of chloric(I) acid/hypochlorous acid.

Chemical equation:        Cl2O (g)   +   H2O (l)     ->   2HClO (aq)

 

  1. Dichlorine heptoxide reacts with water to form weak acidic solution of chloric(VII) acid.

Chemical equation:        Cl2O7 (l)   +   H2O (l)     ->   2HClO4 (aq)

 

  1. c) Silicon (IV) oxide does not react with water.

It reacts with hot concentrated alkalis forming silicate (IV) salts. e.g.

Silicon (IV) oxide react with hot concentrated sodium hydroxide to form sodium silicate (IV) salt.

Chemical equation:        SiO2 (s)   +   2NaOH (aq)     ->    Na2SiO3 (aq) +   H2O (l)

 

(ii) Reaction with dilute acids

  1. a) Ionic oxides react with dilute acids to form salt and water only. This is a neutralization e.g.

Chemical equation:        Na2O(s)   +   H2SO4 (aq)     ->    Na2SO4 (aq)  + H2O(l)

Chemical equation:        MgO(s)   +   2HNO3(aq)     ->    Mg (NO3) 2 (aq) + H2O(l)

Chemical equation:        Al2O3 (s) +   6HCl(aq)        ->    2AlCl3 (aq)  +  3H2O(l)

 

Aluminium oxide is amphotellic and reacts with hot concentrated strong alkalis sodium/potassium hydroxides to form complex sodium aluminate(III) and potassium aluminate(III) salt.

Chemical equation:  Al2O3 (s)   +  2NaOH(aq) +  3H2O(l)    ->   2 NaAl(OH)4 (aq)

Chemical equation:  Al2O3 (s)   +  2KOH(aq) +  3H2O(l)    ->   2 KAl(OH)4 (aq)

 

  1. b) Acidic oxides do not react with dilute acids.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

c)Periodicity of the Chlorides of elements along/across period 3

 

The table below summarizes some properties of the chlorides of elements in period 3 of the periodic table.

Formular of chloride/

Property

NaCl MgCl2 AlCl3 SiCl4 PCl5

PCl3

SCl2

S2Cl2

Cl2
Melting

 

point(oC)

801 714 Sublimes at

180 oC

-70

 

PCl5

Sublimes at

-94 oC

-78 -101

 

Boiling

 

point(oC)

1465 1418 423(as Al2Cl6

vapour

57 74(as P2Cl6

Vapour

164 (as PCl5)

 

decomposes

at 59 oC

-34
Bond type Ionic Ionic Ionic/

Covalent/

dative

Covalent Covalent Covalent Covalent

 

Chemical structure Giant ionic structure Giant ionic structure Molecular/

dimerizes

Simple molecula

or molecule

Simple molecula

or molecule

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

Simple molecula

or molecule

State at room

temperature

Solid Solid Solid liquid Liquid

PCl5

is solid

liquid Gas
Nature of

Chloride

Neutral Neutral Strongly acidic Strongly acidic Strongly acidic Strongly acidic Strongly acidic
 

pH of solution

7.0 7.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Reaction with water

 

 

Dissolve Dissolve -Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

-Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

Forms HCl and HClO
Electrical conductivity in molten/aqueous state good good poor nil nil nil nil

 

  1. Sodium Chloride, Magnesium chloride and aluminium chloride are solids at room temperature and pressure.

Silicon(IV) chloride, phosphorus(III)chloride and disulphur dichloride are liquids. Phosphorus(V)chloride is  a solid. Both chlorine and sulphur chloride are gases.

 

  1. Across/along the period bonding changes from ionic in Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride to covalent in the rest of the chlorides.

 

  1. Anhydrous aluminium chloride is also a molecular compound .Each aluminium atom is covalently bonded to three chlorine atoms.

In vapour/gaseous phase/state two molecules dimerizes to Al2O6 molecule through coordinate/dative bonding.

 

  1. Across/along the period the structure changes from giant ionic in Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride to simple molecules/molecular structure in the rest of the chlorides.

 

  1. Ionic chlorides have very high melting /boiling points because of the strong ionic bond/electrostatic attraction between the ions in their crystal lattice.The rest of the chlorides have low melting /boiling points because of the weak van-der-waal /intermolecular forces.

 

  1. Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride in molten and aqueous state have free/mobile ions and thus good electrical conductors. Aluminium chloride is a poor conductor. The rest of the chlorides do not conduct because they have no free/mobile ions.

 

  1. Ionic chloride form neutral solutions with pH =7. These chlorides ionize/dissociate completely into free cations and anions.i.e;

Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride have pH=7 because they are fully/completely ionized/dissociated into free ions.

Chemical equation          NaCl  (s)     ->      Na+(aq)       +       Cl(aq)             

Chemical equation          MgCl2  (s)   ->      Mg2+(aq)     +       2Cl(aq)

 

8 Across/along the period from aluminium chloride, hydrolysis of the chloride takes place when reacting/dissolved in water.

Hydrolysis is the reaction of a compound when dissolved in water.

 

a)Aluminium chloride is hydrolyzed by water to form aluminium hydroxide and fumes of hydrogen chloride gas. Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          AlCl3  (s)   +  3H2O(l)->    Al(OH)3(s)    +    3HCl(g)

 

b)Silicon(IV) chloride is hydrolyzed by water to form silicon(IV)oxide and fumes of hydrogen chloride gas. Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          SiCl4  (l)   +  2H2O(l)->    SiO2(s)    +  4HCl(g)

This reaction is highly exothermic producing /evolving a lot of heat that cause a rise in the temperature of the mixture.

 

  1. c) Both phosphoric (V) chloride and phosphoric (III) chloride are hydrolyzed by water to form phosphoric (V) acid and phosphoric (III) acid Fumes of hydrogen chloride gas are produced. Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          PCl5  (s)   +  4H2O(l)->    H3PO4(aq)    +       5HCl(g)

Chemical equation          PCl3  (s)   +  3H2O(l)->    H3PO4(aq)    +       3HCl(g)

 

This reaction is also highly exothermic producing /evolving a lot of heat that cause a rise in the temperature of the mixture.

 

  1. d) Disulphur dichloride similarly hydrolyzes in water to form yellow deposits of sulphur and produce a mixture of sulphur (IV) oxide and hydrogen chloride Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          2S2Cl2  (l)   +  2H2O(l)->  3S(s)  + SO2(g)  + 4HCl(g)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. COMPREHENSIVE REVISION QUESTIONS

 

1.The grid below represents periodic table.  Study it and answer the questions that follow.  The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.

 

    A
B       G   H E C
  J I L        
D N           M  

(a) (I) Indicate on the grid the position of an element represented by letter N whose electronic configuration of a divalent cation is 2:8:8 . ( 1 mark )

 

(II) Name the bond formed between D and H react. Explain your answer.(2 marks )

Ionic/electrovalent

D is electropositive thus donates two electrons to electronegative H

(III) Write an equation for the reaction between B and water.     ( 1 mark )

Chemical equation                 2B  (s)   +  2H2O(l) ->    2BOH(aq)    +  H2 (g)

(IV) How do the atomic radii of I and L compare.  Explain.                                    ( 2 marks )

 

 

 

(V) In terms of structure and bonding explain why the oxide of G has lower melting point than oxide of L.                                         ( 2 marks )

 

 

(b) Study the information given below and answer the question that follow.

 

Formula of compound N NaCl MgCl 2 Al2Cl6 SiCl4 PCl3 SCl2
B.P(0C) 1470 1420 Sublimes 60 75 60
M.P(0C) 800 710 At 8000C -70 90 -80

( I)Why is the formula of aluminium chloride given as Al2Cl6 and not AlCl3 ?                                                                                                                   ( 1 mark )

 

(II) Give two chlorides that are liquid at room temperature.  Give a reason for the answer.                                                                                                  (2 marks )

 

 

(III) Give a reason why Al2Cl6 has a lower melting point than MgCl2 although both Al and Mg are metals.                                                                          (1 mark )

 

 

(IV) Which of the chlorides would remain in liquid state for the highest temperature range explain why ?                                                            (2 mark )

 

 

(Kakamega)

  1. a) Study the information given below and answer the questions that follow.

 

Element Atomic radius (nm) Ionic radius (nm) Formula of oxide Melting point of oxide (‘C)
P

Q

R

S

T

0.364

0.830

0.592

0.381

0.762

0.421

0.711

0.485

0.446

0.676

A2O

BO2

E2O3

G2O5

JO

-119

837

1466

242

1054

(i) Which elements are non-metals? Give a reason.                           (2mks)

 

(ii) Explain why the melting point of the oxide of R is higher than that of the oxide of S.                                                                                            (2mks)

 

(iii) Give two elements that would react vigorously with each other. Explain your answer.                                                                                         (2mks)

 

 

  1. b) Study the information in the table below and answer the questions that follow (The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements)

 

 

  Ionization Energy_kJ/Mole
Element Electronic configuration   1st ionization energy 2nd ionization energy
A  2.2 900  1800
B 2.8.2 736 1450
C 2.8.8.2 590 1150

(i) What chemical family do the elements A, B and C belong?                       (1mk)

 

(ii) What is meant by the term ionization energy?                                         (1mk)

 

iii) The 2nd  ionization energy is higher that the 1st ionization energy of each. Explain

(1mk)

(iv)When a piece of element C is placed in cold water, it sinks to the bottom and an effervescence of a colourless gas that burns explosively is produced. Use a simple diagram to illustrate how this gas can be collected during this experiment.                                                                                                                     (3mks)

 

  1. The grid below represents part of the periodic table. The letters do not represent the actual symbols.

 

    A
B     X G   Z E V
  J I L   T    
D N           M  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Select the most reactive non-metal. (1mk)

 

  1. b) Write the formula of the compound consisting of

I.D and Z only.                                                                                             (2mk)

 

 

  1. X and Z

 

  1. c) Select an element that can form an ion of change +2                (1mk)

 

  1. d) Which element has the least ionization energy? Explain    (2mks)
  2. e) Suggest with reasons a likely pH value of an aqueous solution of the chlorine of:(3mks)

T.

 

B

 

X

 

  1. f) To which chemical family do the following elements belong? (2mk)

J

V

 

  1. g) An element K has relative atomic mass of 40.2.It has two isotopes of masses 39 and 42. Calculate the relative abundance of each isotope. (3mks)

4.The grid below shows part of the periodic table study it and answer the questions that follow. The letters do not represent the true symbols.

               
                 
                 
            A    
  B   C   D   E  
F G              
              H  
                 

 

\(a) Which element forms ions with charge of 2-. Explain                    (2mks)

 

(b) What is the nature of the oxide formed by C.                                 (1mk)

 

(c) How does the reactivity of H compare with that of E. Explain?      (2mks)

 

(d)Write down a balanced equation between B and Chlorine.              (1mk)

 

(e) Explain how the atomic radii of F and G compare.                        (1mk)

 

(f) If the oxides of F and D are separately dissolved in water, state and explain the effects of their aqueous solutions on litmus.                                             (3mks)

 

  1. (a) The grid below show part of the periodic table.(The letter do not represent the actual symbols).Use it to answer the questions that follow.

 

T   Q
        S   R K  
A J   Y   U   L  
W             M B
  C           N  
P                
                 

(i)Select the most reactive non-metal.                                                         (1mk)

 

(ii)Select an element that forms a divalent cation.                                       (1mk)

 

(iii)Element Z has atomic number 14.Show its position in the grid.              (1mk)

 

(iv)How do the atomic radii of U and J compare?                                       (2mks)

 

(v)How do electrical conductivity of A and Y compare?                              (2mks)

 

(vi)How does the boiling point of elements K, L and M vary? Explain        (2mks

(b) The table below gives information on four elements by letters K, L, M and N. Study it and answer the  questions that follow. The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.

 

Element Electron arrangement Atomic radius Ionic radius
K 2:8:2 0.136 0.065
L 2:8:7 0.099 0.181
M 2:8:8:1 0.203 0.133
N 2:8:8:2 0.174 0.099

 

(a) Which two elements have similar properties? Explain.              (2mks)

 

(b) Which element is a non-metal? Explain.                                   (1mk)

(c) Which one of the elements is the strongest reducing agent.     (1mk)

  1. The grid given below represents part of the periodic table study it and answer the questions that follow. (The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.)

 

    A
         B        
  C D     E    
  F              
                 

 

(i) What name is given to the group of elements to which C and F belong?    (1mk)

 

(ii) Which letter represents the element that is the least reactive?                   (1mk)

(iii) What type of bond is formed when B and E react? Explain                    (2mks)

(iv)Write formula of the compound formed where elements D and oxygen gas react.       (1mk)

 

 

(v) On the grid indicate the a tick (√) the position of element G which is in the third period of the periodic table and forms G3- ions.                                                       (1mk)

 

(b) Study the information in the table below and answer the questions that follow. (The letter do not represents the actual symbols of the substance).

 

Substance Melting point oC Boiling point oC Solubility in water Density at room. Temp/g/cm3
H -117 78.5 Very soluble 0.8
J -78 -33 Very soluble 0.77x 1-3
K -23 77 Insoluble 1.6
L – 219 -183 Slightly

Soluable

1.33 x 10-3

 

I.(i) Which substance would dissolve in water and could be separated from the solution by fractional distillation.                                                           (1mk)

 

(ii) Which substances is a liquid at room temperature and when mixed with water two layers would be formed?                                                                              (1mk)

 

  1. Which letter represents a substance that is a gas at room temperature and which can be collected ;

(i) Over water?                                                                                             (1mk)

 

(ii) By downward displacement of air? Density of air at room temperature = 1.29 x 10-3 g/C

 

(1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Introduction to SALTS

 

 

 

      

 

                 Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

INTRODUCTION TO SALTS

 

1.(a) A salt is an ionic compound formed when the cation from a base combine with the anion derived from an acid.

A salt is therefore formed when the hydrogen ions in an acid are replaced wholly/fully or partially/partly ,directly or indirectly by a metal or ammonium radical.

 

(b) The number of ionizable/replaceable hydrogen in an acid is called basicity of an acid.

Some acids are therefore:

(i)monobasic acids generally denoted HX e.g.

HCl, HNO3,HCOOH,CH3COOH.

 

(ii)dibasic acids ; generally denoted H2X e.g.

H2SO4, H2SO3, H2CO3,HOOCOOH.

 

(iii)tribasic acids ; generally denoted H3X e.g.

H3PO4.

 

(c) Some salts are normal salts while other are acid salts.

(i)A normal salt is formed when all the ionizable /replaceable hydrogen in an acid is replaced by a metal or metallic /ammonium radical.

 

(ii)An acid salt is formed when part/portion the ionizable /replaceable hydrogen in an acid is replaced by a metal or metallic /ammonium radical.

 

Table showing normal and acid salts derived from common acids

 

   Acid  name Chemical formula Basicity     Normal salt      Acid salt
Hydrochloric acid HCl Monobasic Chloride(Cl) None

 

Nitric(V)acid HNO3 Monobasic Nitrate(V)(NO3) None

 

Nitric(III)acid HNO2 Monobasic Nitrate(III)(NO2) None

 

Sulphuric(VI)acid H2SO4 Dibasic Sulphate(VI) (SO42-) Hydrogen sulphate(VI)

(HSO4)

 

Sulphuric(IV)acid H2SO3 Dibasic Sulphate(IV) (SO32-) Hydrogen sulphate(IV)

(HSO3)

 

Carbonic(IV)acid H2CO3 Dibasic Carbonate(IV)(CO32-) Hydrogen carbonate(IV)

(HCO3)

 

Phosphoric(V)

acid

H3PO4 Tribasic Phosphate(V)(PO43-) Dihydrogen phosphate(V)

(H2PO42-)

 

Hydrogen diphosphate(V)

(HP2O42-)

 

The table below show shows some examples of salts.

Base/alkali Cation Acid Anion Salt Chemical name of salts
NaOH Na+ HCl Cl NaCl Sodium(I)chloride
Mg(OH)2 Mg2+ H2SO4 SO42- MgSO4

Mg(HSO4)2

Magnesium sulphate(VI)

Magnesium hydrogen sulphate(VI)

Pb(OH)2 Pb2+ HNO3 NO3 Pb(NO3)2 Lead(II)nitrate(V)
Ba(OH)2 Ba2+ HNO3 NO3 Ba(NO3)2 Barium(II)nitrate(V)
Ca(OH)2 Ba2+ H2SO4 SO42- MgSO4 Calcium sulphate(VI)
NH4OH NH4+ H3PO4 PO43- (NH4 )3PO4

(NH4 )2HPO4

NH4 H2PO4

Ammonium phosphate(V)

Diammonium phosphate(V)

Ammonium diphosphate(V)

KOH K+ H3PO4 PO43- K3PO4 Potassium phosphate(V)
Al(OH)3 Al3+ H2SO4 SO42- Al2(SO4)2 Aluminium(III)sulphate(VI)
Fe(OH)2 Fe2+ H2SO4 SO42- FeSO4 Iron(II)sulphate(VI)
Fe(OH)3 Fe3+ H2SO4 SO42- Fe2(SO4)2 Iron(III)sulphate(VI)

 

(d) Some salts undergo hygroscopy, deliquescence and efflorescence.

(i) Hygroscopic salts /compounds are those that absorb water from the atmosphere but do not form a solution.

Some salts which are hygroscopic include anhydrous copper(II)sulphate(VI), anhydrous cobalt(II)chloride, potassium nitrate(V) common table salt.

 

(ii)Deliquescent salts /compounds are those that absorb water from the atmosphere and form a solution.

Some salts which are deliquescent include: Sodium nitrate(V),Calcium chloride, Sodium hydroxide, Iron(II)chloride, Magnesium chloride.

 

(iii)Efflorescent salts/compounds are those that lose their  water of crystallization to  the atmosphere.

Some salts which effloresces include: sodium carbonate decahydrate, Iron(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate, sodium sulphate (VI)decahydrate.

 

(e)Some salts contain water of crystallization.They are hydrated.Others do not contain water of crystallization. They are anhydrous.

 

Table showing some hydrated salts.

Name of hydrated salt Chemical formula
Copper(II)sulphate(VI)pentahydrate CuSO4.5H2O
Aluminium(III)sulphate(VI)hexahydrate Al2 (SO4) 3.6H2O
Zinc(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate ZnSO4.7H2O
Iron(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate FeSO4.7H2O
Calcium(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate CaSO4.7H2O
Magnesium(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate MgSO4.7H2O
Sodium sulphate(VI)decahydrate Na2SO4.10H2O
Sodium carbonate(IV)decahydrate Na2CO3.10H2O
Potassium carbonate(IV)decahydrate K2CO3.10H2O
Potassium sulphate(VI)decahydrate K2SO4.10H2O

 

(f)Some salts exist as a simple salt while some as complex salts. Below are some complex salts.

Table of some complex salts

 

Name of complex salt Chemical formula Colour of the complex salt
Tetraamminecopper(II)sulphate(VI) Cu(NH3) 4 SO4 H2O Royal/deep blue solution
Tetraamminezinc(II)nitrate(V) Zn(NH3) 4 (NO3 )2 Colourless solution
Tetraamminecopper(II) nitrate(V) Cu(NH3) 4 (NO3 )2 Royal/deep blue solution
Tetraamminezinc(II)sulphate(VI) Zn(NH3) 4 SO4 Colourless solution

 

(g)Some salts exist as two salts in one. They are called double salts.

 

Table of some double salts

Name of double salts Chemical formula
Trona(sodium sesquicarbonate) Na2CO3 NaHCO3.2H2O
Ammonium iron(II)sulphate(VI) FeSO4(NH4) 2SO4.2H2O
Ammonium aluminium(III)sulphate(VI) Al2(SO4) 3(NH4) 2SO4.H2O

 

(h)Some salts dissolve in water to form a solution. They are said to be soluble. Others do not dissolve in water. They form a suspension/precipitate in water.

 

Table of solubility of salts

 

          Soluble salts            Insoluble salts
All nitrate(V)salts  
All sulphate(VI)/SO42- salts          except    Barium(II) sulphate(VI)/BaSO4

Calcium(II) sulphate(VI)/CaSO4

Lead(II) sulphate(VI)/PbSO4

All sulphate(IV)/SO32- salts          except    Barium(II) sulphate(IV)/BaSO3

Calcium(II) sulphate(IV)/CaSO3

Lead(II) sulphate(IV)/PbSO3

All chlorides/Cl–                                         except   Silver chloride/AgCl

Lead(II)chloride/PbCl2(dissolves in hot water)

All phosphate(V)/PO43-  
All sodium,potassium and ammonium salts  
All hydrogen carbonates/HCO3  
All hydrogen sulphate(VI)/ HSO4  
Sodium carbonate/Na2CO3,

potassium carbonate/ K2CO3,

ammonium carbonate (NH4) 2CO3

except    All carbonates
All alkalis(KOH,NaOH, NH4OH) except     All bases

 

13 Salts can be prepared in a school laboratory by a method that uses its solubility in water.

  • Soluble salts may be prepared by using any of the following methods:

 

(i)Direct displacement/reaction of a metal with an acid.

By reacting a metal higher in the reactivity series than hydrogen with a dilute acid,a salt is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved.

Excess of the metal must be used to ensure all the acid has reacted.

When effervescence/bubbling /fizzing has stopped ,excess metal is filtered.

The filtrate is  heated to concentrate then allowed to crystallize.

Washing with distilled water then drying between filter papers produces a sample crystal of the salt. i.e.

M(s)    +   H2X      ->   MX(aq)   +    H2(g)

Examples

Mg(s)  +  H2SO4(aq)       ->  MgSO4 (aq)      + H2(g)

Zn(s)   +  H2SO4(aq)       ->  ZnSO4 (aq)       + H2(g)

Pb(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)    + H2(g)

Ca(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Ca(NO3) 2(aq)    + H2(g)

Mg(s)  +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Mg(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2(g)

Mg(s)  +  2HCl(aq)         -> MgCl 2(aq)        + H2(g)

Zn(s)   +  2HCl(aq)         -> ZnCl 2(aq)         + H2(g)

 

(ii)Reaction of an insoluble base with an acid

By adding an insoluble base (oxide/hydroxide )to a dilute acid until no more dissolves, in the acid,a salt and water are formed. Excess of the base is filtered off. The filtrate is heated to concentrate ,allowed to crystallize then washed with distilled water before drying between filter papers e.g.

PbO(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)   -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)    + H2O (l)

Pb(OH)2(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)       -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)    + 2H2O (l)

CaO (s)   +  2HNO3(aq)  -> Ca(NO3) 2(aq)    + H2O (l)

MgO (s)  +  2HNO3(aq)  -> Mg(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2O (l)

MgO (s)  +  2HCl(aq)     -> MgCl 2(aq)        + H2O (l)

ZnO (s)   +  2HCl(aq)     -> ZnCl 2(aq)         + H2O (l)

Zn(OH)2(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Zn(NO3) 2(aq)    + 2H2O (l)

CuO (s)   +  2HCl(aq)     -> CuCl 2(aq)         + H2O (l)

CuO (s)   +  H2SO4(aq)   -> CuSO4(aq)        + H2O (l)

Ag2O(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)  -> 2AgNO3(aq)      + H2O (l)

Na2O(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)  -> 2NaNO3(aq)      + H2O (l)

 

(iii)reaction of insoluble /soluble carbonate /hydrogen carbonate with an acid.

By adding an excess of a soluble /insoluble carbonate or hydrogen carbonate to adilute acid, effervescence /fizzing/bubbling out of carbon(IV)oxide gas shows the reaction is taking place. When effervescence /fizzing/bubbling out of the gas is over, excess of the insoluble carbonate is filtered off. The filtrate is heated to concentrate ,allowed to crystallize then washed with distilled water before drying between filter paper papers e.g.

PbCO3 (s)     +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)    + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

ZnCO3 (s)     +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Zn(NO3) 2(aq)    + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

CaCO3 (s)     +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Ca(NO3) 2(aq)    + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

MgCO3 (s)    + H2SO4(aq)        -> MgSO4(aq)       + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

Cu CO3 (s)    +  H2SO4(aq)       -> CuSO4(aq)        + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

Ag2CO3 (s)   +  2HNO3(aq)      -> 2AgNO3(aq)      + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

Na2CO3 (s)    +  2HNO3(aq)      -> 2NaNO3(aq)      + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

K2CO3 (s)     +  2HCl(aq)           -> 2KCl(aq)           + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

NaHCO3 (s)    +  HNO3(aq)      -> NaNO3(aq)        + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

KHCO3 (s)     +  HCl(aq)           -> KCl(aq)             + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

 

(iv)neutralization/reaction of soluble base/alkali with dilute acid

 

By adding an acid to a burette into a known volume of an alkali with 2-3 drops of an indicator, the colour of the indicator changes when the acid has completely reacted with an alkali at the end point. The procedure is then repeated without the indicator .The solution mixture is then heated to concentrate , allowed to crystallize ,washed with distilled water before drying with filter papers. e.g.

 

NaOH (aq)       +  HNO3(aq)     -> NaNO3(aq)       + H2O (l)

KOH (aq)         +  HNO3(aq)     -> KNO3(aq)         + H2O (l)

KOH (aq)         +  HCl(aq)        -> KCl(aq)            + H2O (l)

2KOH (aq)       +  H2SO4(aq)    -> K2SO4(aq)        + 2H2O (l)

2 NH4OH (aq)  +  H2SO4(aq)    -> (NH4)2SO4(aq)  + 2H2O (l)

NH4OH (aq)     +  HNO3(aq)     -> NH4NO3(aq)      +  H2O (l)

 

(iv)direct synthesis/combination.

When a metal burn in a gas jar containing a non metal , the two directly combine to form a salt. e.g.

2Na(s)         +        Cl2(g)          ->      2NaCl(s)

2K(s)          +       Cl2(g)          ->      2KCl(s)

Mg(s)          +       Cl2(g)          ->      Mg Cl2 (s)

Ca(s)           +       Cl2(g)          ->      Ca Cl2 (s)

 

Some salts once formed undergo sublimation and hydrolysis. Care should be taken to avoid water/moisture into the reaction flask during their preparation.Such salts include aluminium(III)chloride(AlCl3) and iron (III)chloride(FeCl3)

 

  1. Heated aluminium foil reacts with chlorine to form aluminium(III)chloride that sublimes away from the source of heating then deposited as solid again

2Al(s)          +       3Cl2(g)        ->      2AlCl3 (s/g)

 

Once formed  aluminium(III)chloride hydrolyses/reacts with water vapour / moisture present to form aluminium hydroxide solution and highly acidic fumes of hydrogen chloride gas.

AlCl3(s)+     3H2 O(g)      ->      Al(OH)3 (aq) + 3HCl(g)

 

  1. Heated iron filings reacts with chlorine to form iron(III)chloride that sublimes away from the source of heating then deposited as solid again

2Fe(s)          +       3Cl2(g)        ->      2FeCl3 (s/g)

 

Once formed , aluminium(III)chloride hydrolyses/reacts with water vapour / moisture present to form aluminium hydroxide solution and highly acidic fumes of hydrogen chloride gas.

FeCl3(s)+     3H2 O(g)      ->      Fe(OH)3 (aq) + 3HCl(g)

 

(b)Insoluble salts can be prepared by reacting two suitable soluble salts to form one soluble and one insoluble. This is called double decomposition or precipitation. The mixture is filtered and the residue is washed with distilled water then dried.

CuSO4(aq)        +   Na2CO3 (aq)         ->      CuCO3 (s)  +  Na2 SO4(aq)

BaCl2(aq)        +   K2SO4 (aq)            ->      BaSO4 (s)   +  2KCl (aq)

Pb(NO3)2(aq)   +   K2SO4 (aq)            ->      PbSO4 (s)   +  2KNO3 (aq)

2AgNO3(aq)      +  MgCl2 (aq)             ->      2AgCl(s)     +  Mg(NO3)2 (aq)

Pb(NO3)2(aq)   +   (NH4) 2SO4 (aq)     ->      PbSO4 (s)   +  2NH4NO 3(aq)

BaCl2(aq)        +   K2SO3 (aq)           ->      BaSO3 (s)   +  2KCl (aq)

 

  1. Salts may lose their water of crystallization , decompose ,melt or sublime on heating on a Bunsen burner flame.

The following shows the behavior of some salts on heating gently /or strongly in a laboratory school burner:

 

(a)effect of heat on chlorides

All chlorides have very high melting and boiling points and therefore are not affected by laboratory heating except ammonium chloride. Ammonium chloride sublimes on gentle heating. It dissociate into the constituent ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases on strong heating.

 

NH4Cl(s)               NH4Cl(g)                        NH3(g) + HCl(g)

(sublimation)             (dissociation)

 

(b)effect of heat on nitrate(V)

(i) Potassium nitrate(V)/KNO3 and sodium nitrate(V)/NaNO3 decompose on heating to form Potassium nitrate(III)/KNO2 and sodium nitrate(III)/NaNO2  and producing Oxygen gas in each case.

2KNO3 (s)    -> 2KNO2(s) +   O2(g)

2NaNO3 (s)  -> 2NaNO2(s) +   O2(g)

 

(ii)Heavy metal nitrates(V) salts decompose on heating to form the oxide and a mixture of brown acidic nitrogen(IV)oxide and oxygen gases. e.g.

2Ca(NO3)2 (s)         ->    2CaO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Mg(NO3)2(s)         ->    2MgO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Zn(NO3)2(s)           ->    2ZnO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Pb(NO3)2(s)           ->    2PbO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Cu(NO3)2(s)          ->    2CuO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Fe(NO3)2(s)           ->    2FeO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

 

(iii)Silver(I)nitrate(V) and mercury(II) nitrate(V) are lowest in the reactivity series. They decompose on heating to form the metal(silver and mercury)and the Nitrogen(IV)oxide and oxygen gas. i.e.

2AgNO3(s)   ->    2Ag (s)    +   2NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Hg(NO3)2 (s)          ->    2Hg (s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

 

(iv)Ammonium nitrate(V) and Ammonium nitrate(III) decompose on heating to Nitrogen(I)oxide(relights/rekindles glowing splint) and nitrogen gas respectively.Water is also formed.i.e.

NH4NO3(s)      ->      N2O (g)     +     H2O(l)

NH4NO2(s)      ->      N2 (g)        +     H2O(l)

 

(c) effect of heat on nitrate(V)

 

Only Iron(II)sulphate(VI), Iron(III)sulphate(VI) and copper(II)sulphate(VI) decompose on heating. They form the oxide, and produce highly acidic fumes of acidic sulphur(IV)oxide gas.

 

2FeSO4 (s)                ->      Fe2O3(s)      +     SO3(g) +     SO2(g)

Fe2(SO4) 3(s)              ->      Fe2O3(s)     +     SO3(g)

CuSO4 (s)                 ->      CuO(s)       +     SO3(g)

 

(d) effect of heat on carbonates(IV) and hydrogen carbonate(IV).

(i)Sodium carbonate(IV)and potassium carbonate(IV)do not decompose on heating.

(ii)Heavy metal nitrate(IV)salts decompose on heating to form the oxide and produce carbon(IV)oxide gas. Carbon (IV)oxide gas forms a white precipitate when bubbled in lime water. The white precipitate dissolves if the gas is in excess. e.g. CuCO3 (s)                 ->      CuO(s)       +     CO2(g)

CaCO3 (s)                       ->      CaO(s)       +     CO2(g)

PbCO3 (s)                       ->      PbO(s)       +     CO2(g)

FeCO3 (s)                       ->      FeO(s)       +     CO2(g)

ZnCO3 (s)                       ->      ZnO(s)       +     CO2(g)

 

(iii)Sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV) and Potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV)decompose on heating to give the corresponding carbonate (IV) and form water and carbon(IV)oxide gas. i.e.

2NaHCO 3(s)              ->      Na2CO3(s)     +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

2KHCO 3(s)                 ->      K2CO3(s)      +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

(iii) Calcium hydrogen carbonate (IV) and Magnesium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to give the corresponding carbonate (IV) and form water and carbon(IV)oxide gas. i. e.

Ca(HCO3) 2(aq)              ->      CaCO3(s)      +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

Mg(HCO3) 2(aq)             ->      MgCO3(s)     +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Introduction to ELECTROLYSIS

      

 

                

 

 

 

 

 

Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

 MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

                                      0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTROLYSIS     (ELECTROLYTIC CELL)

 

1.Electrolysis is defined simply as the decomposition of a compound by an electric current/electricity.

A compound that is decomposed by an electric current is called an electrolyte. Some electrolytes are weak while others are strong.

 

2.Strong electrolytes are those that are fully ionized/dissociated into (many) ions.    Common strong electrolytes include:

(i)all mineral acids

(ii)all strong alkalis/sodium hydroxide/potassium hydroxide.

(iii)all soluble salts

 

3.Weak electrolytes are those that are partially/partly ionized/dissociated into (few) ions.

Common weak electrolytes include:

(i)all organic acids

(ii)all bases except sodium hydroxide/potassium hydroxide.

(iii)Water

 

  1. 4. A compound that is not decomposed by an electric current is called non-electrolyte.

Non-electrolytes are those compounds /substances that exist as molecules and thus cannot ionize/dissociate into(any) ions .

Common non-electrolytes include:

(i) most organic solvents (e.g. petrol/paraffin/benzene/methylbenzene/ethanol)

(ii)all hydrocarbons(alkanes /alkenes/alkynes)

(iii)Chemicals of life(e.g. proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, starch, sugar)

 

  1. 5. An electrolytes in solid state have fused /joined ions and therefore do not conduct electricity but the ions (cations and anions) are free and mobile in molten and aqueous (solution, dissolved in water) state.

 

6.During electrolysis, the free ions are attracted to the electrodes.

An electrode is a rod through which current enter and leave the electrolyte during electrolysis.

An electrode that does not influence/alter the products of electrolysis is called an inert electrode.

 Common inert electrodes include:

(i)Platinum

(ii)Carbon graphite

Platinum is not usually used in a school laboratory because it is very expensive. Carbon graphite is easily/readily and cheaply available (from used dry cells).

 

7.The positive electrode is called Anode.The anode is the electrode through which current enter the electrolyte/electrons leave the electrolyte

8.The negative electrode is called Cathode. The cathode is the electrode through which current leave the electrolyte / electrons enter the electrolyte

 

  1. 9. During the electrolysis, free anions are attracted to the anode where they lose /donate electrons to form neutral atoms/molecules. i.e.

 

M(l)  ->      M+(l)  +  e  (for cations from molten electrolytes)

M(s)  ->      M+(aq)  +  e  (for cations from electrolytes in aqueous state / solution / dissolved in water)

 

The neutral atoms /molecules form the products of electrolysis at the anode. This is called discharge at anode

 

  1. During electrolysis, free cations are attracted to the cathode where they gain /accept/acquire electrons to form neutral atoms/molecules.

X+ (aq)  +  2e -> X(s) (for cations from electrolytes in aqueous state / solution / dissolved in water)

2X+ (l)  +  2e -> X (l)  (for cations from molten electrolytes)

 

The neutral atoms /molecules form the products of electrolysis at the cathode. This is called discharge at cathode.

 

  1. The below set up shows an electrolytic cell.

 

 

 

 

  1. For a compound /salt containing only two ion/binary salt the products of electrolysis in an electrolytic cell can be determined as in the below examples:

 

 

a)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten Lead(II)chloride

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

PbCl2 (l)        ->     Pb 2+(l)  +    2Cl(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

Pb 2+(l)    +      2e     ->    Pb (l)

(Cation / Pb 2+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

2Cl(l)      ->    Cl2 (g)  +    2e

(Anion / Cldonate/lose electrons to form free atom then a gas molecule)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid lead metal.

II.At the anode pale green chlorine gas.

 

 

b)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten Zinc bromide

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

ZnBr2 (l)        ->    Zn 2+(l)  +    2Br(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

Zn 2+(l)    +      2e     ->    Zn(l)

(Cation / Zn2+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

2Br(l)      ->    Br2 (g)  +    2e

(Anion / Brdonate/lose electrons to form free atom then a liquid molecule which change to gas on heating)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid Zinc metal.

II.At the anode red bromine liquid / red/brown bromine gas.

 

c)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten sodium chloride

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

NaCl (l)        ->      Na +(l)  +    Cl(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

2Na+(l)    +      2e     ->    Na (l)

(Cation / Na+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

2Cl(l)      ->    Cl2 (g)  +    2e

(Anion / Cldonate/lose electrons to form free atom then a gas molecule)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid sodium metal.

II.At the anode pale green chlorine gas.

 

      d)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten Aluminium (III)oxide

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

Al2O3 (l)        ->     2Al 3+(l)  +    3O2-(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

4Al 3+ (l)    +      12e     ->    4Al (l)

(Cation / Al 3+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

6O2-(l)      ->    3O2 (g)  +    12e

(Anion /6O2- donate/lose 12 electrons to form free atom then three gas molecule)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid aluminium metal.

II.At the anode colourless  gas that relights/rekindles glowing splint.

 

13.In industries electrolysis has the following uses/applications:

 

(a)Extraction of reactive metals from their ores.

Potassium, sodium ,magnesium, and aluminium  are extracted from their ores using electrolytic methods.

 

(b)Purifying copper after exraction from copper pyrites ores.

Copper obtained from copper pyrites ores is not pure. After extraction, the copper is refined by electrolysing copper(II)sulphate(VI) solution using the impure copper as anode and a thin strip of pure copper as cathode. Electrode ionization take place there:

(i)At the cathode; Cu2+ (aq)      +   2e   ->  Cu(s) (Pure copper deposits on the strip

(ii)At the anode;  Cu(s) ->Cu2+ (aq)   +   2e   (impure copper erodes/dissolves)

 

(c)Electroplating

The label EPNS(Electro Plated Nickel Silver) on some steel/metallic utensils mean they are plated/coated with silver and/or Nickel to improve their appearance(add their aesthetic value)and prevent/slow corrosion(rusting of iron). Electroplating is the process of coating a metal with another metal using an electric current. During electroplating, the cathode is made of the metal to be coated/impure.

Example:

During the electroplating of a spoon with silver

(i)the spoon/impure is placed as the cathode(negative terminal of battery)

(ii)the pure silver is placed as the anode(positive terminal of battery)

(iii)the pure silver erodes/ionizes/dissociates to release electrons:

Ag(s) ->Ag+ (aq)   +   e   (impure silver erodes/dissolves)

(iv) silver (Ag+)ions from electrolyte gain electrons to form pure silver  deposits / coat /cover the spoon/impure

Ag+ (aq)      +   e   ->Ag(s)    (pure silver deposits /coat/cover on spoon)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Chemistry of CARBON

 

 

 

 

      

 

                 Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

 MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

                                      0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

A: CARBON

Carbon is an element in Group IV(Group 4)of the Periodic table .It has atomic number 6 and electronic configuration 2:4 and thus has four valence electrons(tetravalent).It does not easily ionize but forms strong covalent bonds with other elements including itself.

 

(a)Occurrence

Carbon mainly naturally occurs as:

(i)allotropes of carbon i.e graphite, diamond and fullerenes.

(ii)amorphous carbon in coal, peat ,charcoal and coke.

(iii)carbon(IV)oxide gas accounting 0.03% by volume of normal air in the    atmosphere.

(b)Allotropes of Carbon

Carbon  naturally occur in two main crystalline allotropic forms, carbon-graphite and carbon-diamond

 

Carbon-diamond Carbon-graphite
Shiny crystalline solid Black/dull crystalline solid
Has a very high melting/boiling point because it has a very closely packed giant tetrahedral structure joined by strong covalent bonds Has a high melting/boiling point because it has a very closely packed giant hexagonal planar structure  joined by strong covalent bonds
Has very high density(Hardest known natural substance) Soft
Abrassive Slippery
Poor electrical conductor because it has no free delocalized electrons Good electrical conductor because it has free 4th valency delocalized electrons
Is used in making Jewels, drilling and cutting metals Used in making Lead-pencils,electrodes in batteries and as a lubricant
Has giant tetrahedral structure Has giant hexagonal planar structure

 

c)Properties of Carbon

(i)Physical properties of carbon

Carbon occur widely and naturally as a black solid

It is insoluble in water but soluble in carbon disulphide and organic solvents.

It is a poor electrical and thermal conductor.

(ii)Chemical properties of carbon

  1. Burning

Experiment

Introduce a small piece of charcoal on a Bunsen flame then lower it into a gas jar containing Oxygen gas. Put three drops of water. Swirl. Test the solution with blue and red litmus papers.

Observation

          -Carbon chars then burns with a blue flame

-Colourless and odourless gas produced

-Solution formed turn blue litmus paper faint red. Red litmus paper remains red.

Explanation

Carbon burns in air and faster in Oxygen with a blue non-sooty/non-smoky flame forming Carbon (IV) oxide gas. Carbon burns in limited supply of air with a blue non-sooty/non-smoky flame forming Carbon (IV) oxide gas. Carbon (IV) oxide gas dissolve in water to form weak acidic solution of Carbonic (IV)acid.

Chemical Equation

C(s)   +        O2(g)     ->   CO2(g)       (in excess air)

2C(s) +        O2(g)    ->   2CO(g)       (in limited air)

CO2(g)   +    H2O (l)  ->   H2CO3 (aq)  (very weak acid)

 

  1. Reducing agent

Experiment

Mix thoroughly equal amounts of powdered charcoal and copper (II)oxide into a crucible. Heat strongly.

Observation

Colour change from black to brown

Explanation

Carbon is a reducing agent. For ages it has been used to reducing metal oxide ores to metal, itself oxidized to carbon(IV)oxide gas. Carbon reduces black copper(II)oxide to brown copper metal

 

Chemical Equation

2CuO(s)       +       C(s)   ->     2Cu(s)         +      CO2(g)

(black)                                     (brown)

 

2PbO(s)        +       C(s)   ->     2Pb(s)         +      CO2(g)

(brown when hot/                     (grey)

yellow when cool)

 

2ZnO(s)        +       C(s)   ->     2Zn(s)         +      CO2(g)

(yellow when hot/                     (grey)

white when cool)

 

Fe2O3(s)      +       3C(s)            ->     2Fe(s) +      3CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                            (grey)

 

Fe3O4 (s)       +       4C(s)            ->     3Fe(s) +      4CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                            (grey)

 

 

 

 

B: COMPOUNDS OF CARBON

 

The following are the main compounds of Carbon

(i)Carbon(IV)Oxide(CO2)

(ii)Carbon(II)Oxide(CO)

(iii)Carbonate(IV) (CO32-)and hydrogen carbonate(IV(HCO3)

(iv)Sodium carbonate(Na2CO3)

 

(i) Carbon(IV)Oxide (CO2)

 

(a)Occurrence

 

Carbon(IV)oxide is found:

-in the air /atmosphere as 0.03% by volume.

-a solid carbon(IV)oxide mineral in Esageri near Eldame Ravine and Kerita near Limuru in Kenya.

 

(b)School Laboratory preparation

 

In the school laboratory carbon(IV)oxide can be prepared in the school laboratory from the reaction of marble chips(CaCO3)or sodium hydrogen carbonate(NaHCO3) with dilute hydrochloric acid.

 

 

 

(c)Properties of carbon(IV)oxide gas(Questions)

 

1.Write the equation for the reaction for the school laboratory preparation of carbon (IV)oxide gas.

Any carbonate reacted with dilute hydrochloric acid should be able to generate carbon (IV)oxide gas.

Chemical equations

CaCO3(s)   +    2HCl(aq)     ->     CaCO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

ZnCO3(s)   +    2HCl(aq)     ->     ZnCO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

MgCO3(s) +    2HCl(aq)     ->     MgCO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

CuCO3(s)   +    2HCl(aq)     ->     CuCO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

NaHCO3(s) +    HCl(aq)     ->       Na2CO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

KHCO3(s)   +     HCl(aq)     ->       K2CO3 (aq)     +   H2O(l)     +   CO2 (g)

2.What method of gas collection is used in preparation of Carbon(IV)oxide gas. Explain.

Downward delivery /upward displacement of air/over mercury

Carbon(IV)oxide gas is about 1½  times denser than air.

3.What is the purpose of :

(a)water?

          To absorb the more volatile hydrogen chloride fumes produced during the vigorous reaction.

 

(b)sodium hydrogen carbonate?

To absorb the more volatile hydrogen chloride fumes produced during the vigorous reaction and by reacting with the acid to produce more carbon (IV)oxide gas .

 

Chemical equation

NaHCO3(s) +    HCl(aq)     ->       Na2CO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

 

(c)concentrated sulphuric(VI)acid?

To dry the gas/as a drying agent

 

4.Describe the smell of carbon(IV)oxide gas

          Colourless and odourless

 

  1. Effect on lime water.

Experiment

Bubbled carbon(IV)oxide gas into a test tube containing lime water for about three minutes

Observation

White precipitate is formed.

White precipitate dissolved when excess carbon(IV)oxide gas is bubbled .

Explanation

Carbon(IV)oxide gas reacts with lime water(Ca(OH)2) to form an insoluble white precipitate of calcium carbonate. Calcium carbonate reacts with more Carbon(IV) oxide gas to form soluble Calcium hydrogen carbonate.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

CaCO3 (aq)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g) ->     Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

 

  1. Effects on burning Magnesium ribbon

Experiment

Lower a piece of burning magnesium ribbon into a gas jar containing carbon (IV)oxide gas.

Observation

The ribbon continues to burn with difficulty

White ash/solid is formed.

Black speck/solid/particles formed on the side of gas jar.

Explanation

Carbon(IV)oxide gas does not support combustion/burning.Magnesium burn to produce/release enough heat energy to decompose Carbon(IV) oxide gas to carbon and oxygen.Magnesium continues to burn in Oxygen forming white Magnesium Oxide solid/ash.Black speck/particle of carbon/charcoal residue forms on the sides of reaction flask. During the reaction Carbon(IV) oxide is reduced(Oxidizing agent)to carbon while Magnesium is Oxidized to Magnesium Oxide.

Chemical equation

2Mg(s)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     C (s)    +    2MgO(l)

 

  1. Dry and wet litmus papers were separately put in a gas jar containing dry carbon (IV)oxide gas. State and explain the observations made.

Observation

Blue dry litmus paper remain blue

Red dry litmus paper remain Red

Blue wet/damp/moist litmus paper turn red

Red wet/damp/moist litmus paper remain red

Explanation

Dry Carbon (IV) oxide gas is a molecular compound that does not dissociate/ionize to release H+ and thus has no effect on litmus papers.

Wet/damp/moist litmus papers contains water that dissolves/react with dry carbon (IV) oxide gas to form the weak solution of carbonic (IV) acid(H2CO3).

Carbonic (IV) acid dissociate/ionizes to a few /little free H+ and CO32-.

The few H+ (aq) ions are responsible for turning blue litmus paper to faint red showing the gas is very weakly acidic.

 

Chemical equation

H2CO3(aq)        ->     2H+ (aq)    +    CO32-(aq)

  1. Explain why Carbon (IV)oxide cannot be prepared from the reaction of:

(i) marble chips with dilute sulphuric(VI)acid.

Explanation

Reaction  forms insoluble calcium sulphate(VI)that cover/coat unreacted marble chips stopping further reaction

Chemical equation

CaCO3(s)     +    H2SO4 (aq)     ->     CaSO4 (s)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

PbCO3(s)     +    H2SO4 (aq)     ->     PbSO4 (s)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

BaCO3(s)     +    H2SO4 (aq)     ->     BaSO4 (s)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

(ii) Lead(II)carbonate with dilute Hydrochloric acid.

Reaction  forms insoluble Lead(II)Chloride that cover/coat unreacted Lead(II) carbonate stopping further reaction unless the reaction mixture is heated. Lead(II)Chloride is soluble in hot water.

Chemical equation

PbCO3(s)     +    2HCl (aq)     ->     PbCl2 (s)    +       H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

 

  1. Describe the test for the presence of Carbon (IV)oxide.

Using burning splint

Lower a burning splint into a gas jar suspected to contain Carbon (IV)oxide gas.The burning splint is extinguished.

Using Lime water.

Bubble the gas suspected to be Carbon (IV)oxide gas.A white precipitate that dissolve in excess bubbling is formed.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

CaCO3 (aq)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g) ->     Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

 

10.State three main uses of Carbon (IV)oxide gas

(i)In the Solvay process for the manufacture of soda ash/sodium carbonate

(ii)In preservation of aerated drinks

(iii)As fire extinguisher because it does not support combustion and is denser than   air.

(iv)In manufacture of Baking powder.

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Carbon(II)Oxide (CO)

(a)Occurrence

 

Carbon(II)oxide is found is found from incomplete combustion of fuels like petrol charcoal, liquefied Petroleum Gas/LPG.

 

(b)School Laboratory preparation

 

In the school laboratory carbon(II)oxide can be prepared from dehydration of methanoic acid/Formic acid(HCOOH) or Ethan-1,2-dioic acid/Oxalic acid(HOOCCOOH) using concentrated sulphuric(VI) acid. Heating is necessary.

METHOD 1:Preparation of Carbon (IV)Oxide from dehydration of Oxalic/ethan-1,2-dioic acid

 

 

 

 

METHOD 2:Preparation of Carbon (IV)Oxide from dehydration of Formic/Methanoic acid

 

 

 

 

(c)Properties of Carbon (II)Oxide(Questions)

1.Write the equation  for the reaction for the preparation of carbon(II)oxide using;

 

(i)Method 1;

Chemical equation

HOOCCOOH(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)  +  CO2 (g)   +  H2O(l)

H2C2O4(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)  +  CO2 (g)   +  H2O(l)

 

(ii)Method 2;

Chemical equation

HCOOH(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)     +  H2O(l)

H2CO2(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)      +  H2O(l)

 

2.What method of gas collection is used during the preparation of carbon (II) oxide.

Over water because the gas is insoluble in water.

Downward delivery because the gas is 1 ½ times denser than air .

 

3.What is the purpose  of :

(i) Potassium hydroxide/sodium hydroxide in Method 1

To absorb/ remove carbon (II) oxide produced during the reaction.

2KOH (aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     K2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 2NaOH (aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 

(ii) Concentrated sulphuric(VI)acid in Method 1 and 2.

          Dehydrating agent –removes the element of water (Hydrogen and Oxygen in ratio 2:1) present in both methanoic and ethan-1,2-dioic acid.

 

  1. Describe the smell of carbon(II)oxide.

          Colourless and odourless.

  1. State and explain the observation made when carbon(IV)oxide is bubbled in lime water for a long time.

          No white precipitate is formed.

 

  1. Dry and wet/moist/damp litmus papers were separately put in a gas jar containing dry carbon(IV)oxide gas. State and explain the observations made.

 

Observation

-blue dry litmus paper remains blue

-red dry litmus paper remains red

– wet/moist/damp blue litmus paper remains blue

– wet/moist/damp red litmus paper remains red

Explanation

Carbon(II)oxide gas is a molecular compound that does not dissociate /ionize to release H+ ions and thus has no effect on litmus papers. Carbon(II)oxide gas is therefore a neutral gas.

  1. Carbon (II)oxide gas was ignited at the end of a generator as below.

 

 

Flame K

 

 

 

 

 

      Dry carbon(II)oxide

 

(i)State the observations made in flame K.

          Gas burns with a blue flame

(ii)Write the equation for the reaction taking place at flame K.

                   2CO(g)   +  O2 (g) -> 2CO2 (g)

 

  1. Carbon(II)oxide is a reducing agent. Explain

 

Experiment

Pass carbon(II)oxide through glass tube containing  copper (II)oxide. Ignite any excess poisonous carbon(II)oxide.

Observation

Colour change from black to brown. Excess carbon (II)oxide burn with a blue flame.

Explanation

Carbon is a reducing agent. It is used to reduce metal oxide ores to metal, itself oxidized to carbon(IV)oxide gas. Carbon(II)Oxide  reduces black copper(II)oxide to brown copper metal

Chemical Equation

CuO(s)         +       CO(g)           ->     Cu(s) +      CO2(g)

(black)                                            (brown)

 

PbO(s)          +       CO(g)           ->     Pb(s) +      CO2(g)

(brown when hot/                               (grey)

yellow when cool)

 

ZnO(s)         +       CO(g)           ->     Zn(s) +      CO2(g)

(yellow when hot/                              (grey)

white when cool)

 

Fe2O3(s)      +       3CO(s)         ->     2Fe(s) +      3CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                            (grey)

 

Fe3O4 (s)       +       4CO(g)         ->     3Fe(s) +      4CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                            (grey)

These reaction are used during the extraction of many metals from their ore.

 

  1. Carbon (II) oxide is a pollutant. Explain.

Carbon(II)oxide is highly poisonous/toxic.It preferentially combine with haemoglobin to form stable carboxyhaemoglobin in the blood instead of oxyhaemoglobin.This reduces the free haemoglobin in the blood causing nausea , coma then death.

 

10.The diagram below show a burning charcoal stove/burner/jiko. Use it to answer the questions that follow.

 

 

Explain the changes that take place in the burner

Explanation

Charcoal stove has air holes through which air enters. Air oxidizes carbon to carbon(IV)oxide gas at region I. This reaction is exothermic(-∆H) producing more heat.

Chemical equation

C(s)  + O2(g)         -> CO2(g)

Carbon(IV)oxide gas formed rises up to meet more charcoal which reduces it to Carbon(II)oxide gas.

Chemical equation

2CO2 (g)  + O2(g)  -> 2CO (g)

At the top of burner in region II, Carbon (II)oxide gas is further oxidized to Carbon(IV)oxide gas  if there is plenty of air but escape if the air is limited poisoning the living things around.

Chemical equation

2CO (g)  + O2(g)   -> 2CO2 (g)

(excess air)

11.Describe the test for the presence of carbon(II)oxide gas.

Experiment

Burn/Ignite the pure sample of the gas. Pass/Bubble the products into lime water/Calcium hydroxide .

Observation

Colourless gas burns with a blue flame. A white precipitate is formed that dissolve on further bubbling of the products.

Chemical equation

2CO (g)  + O2(g)   -> 2CO2 (g) (gas burns with blue flame)

Chemical equation

Ca(OH) 2 (aq)  + CO2 (g) -> CaCO3 (s) + H2O(l)

Chemical equation

CO2 (g)        +   CaCO3 (s)   +   H2O(l)  -> Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

 

  1. State the main uses of carbon (II)oxide gas.

(i) As a fuel /water gas

(ii)As a reducing agent in the blast furnace for extracting iron from iron ore(Magnetite/Haematite)

(iii)As a reducing agent in extraction of Zinc from Zinc ore/Zinc blende

(iv) As a reducing agent in extraction of Lead from Lead ore/Galena

(v) As a reducing agent in extraction of Copper from Copper iron sulphide/Copper pyrites.

 

 

(iii)Carbonate(IV) (CO32-)and hydrogen carbonate(IV(HCO3)

 

1.Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) are normal salts derived from carbonic(IV)acid (H2CO3) and hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) are acid salts derived from carbonic(IV)acid.

Carbonic(IV)acid(H2CO3) is formed when carbon(IV)oxide gas is bubbled in water. It is a dibasic acid with two ionizable hydrogens.

H2CO3(aq) ->2H+(aq) + CO32-(aq)

H2CO3(aq) -> H+(aq) + HCO3(aq)

2.Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) are insoluble in water except Na2CO3 , K2CO3 and (NH4)2CO3

3.Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) are soluble in water. Only five hydrogen carbonates exist. Na HCO3 , KHCO3 ,NH4HCO3   Ca(HCO3)2 and Mg(HCO3)2

Ca(HCO3)2 and Mg(HCO3)2 exist only in aqueous solutions.

3.The following experiments show the effect of heat on Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) and Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) salts:

Experiment

In a clean dry test tube place separately about 1.0 of the following:

Zinc(II)carbonate(IV), sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV), sodium carbonate(IV), Potassium carbonate(IV) ammonium carbonate(IV), potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV), Lead(II)carbonate(IV), Iron(II)carbonate(IV), and copper(II)carbonate(IV). Heat each portion gently the strongly. Test any gases produced with lime water.

Observation

(i)Colorless droplets form on the cooler parts of test tube in case of sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV).

(ii)White residue/solid left in case of sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV), sodium carbonate(IV), Potassium carbonate(IV) and potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV).

(iii)Colour changes from blue/green to black in case of copper(II)carbonate(IV).

(iv) Colour changes from green to brown/yellow in case of Iron (II)carbonate(IV).

(v) Colour changes from white when cool to yellow when hot in case of Zinc (II) carbonate(IV).

(vi) Colour changes from yellow when cool to brown when hot in case of Lead (II) carbonate(IV).

(vii)Colourless gas produced that forms a white precipitate with lime water in all cases.

Explanation

  1. Sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV) exist as hydrated salts with 10 molecules of water of crystallization that condenses and collects on cooler parts of test tube as a colourless liquid.

Chemical equation

Na2CO3 .10H2O(s)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)     +    10H2O(l)

K2CO3 .10H2O(s)       ->     K2CO3 (s)       +    10H2O(l)

  1. Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) and Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) salts decompose on heating except Sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV).

(a) Sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV) and Potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to form sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV).Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are also produced.

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 (s)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(white)                        (white)

2KHCO3 (s)     ->     K2CO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(white)                        (white)

(b) Calcium hydrogen carbonate(IV) and Magnesium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to form insoluble Calcium carbonate(IV) and Magnesium carbonate(IV).Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are also produced.

Chemical equation

Ca(HCO3)2 (aq)          ->          CaCO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(Colourless solution)                 (white)

Mg(HCO3)2 (aq)          ->          MgCO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(Colourless solution)                 (white)

(c) Ammonium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to form ammonium carbonate(IV) .Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are also produced.

Chemical equation

2NH4HCO3 (s)     ->     (NH4)2CO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(white)                        (white)

(d)All other carbonates decompose on heating to form the metal oxide and produce carbon(IV)oxide gas e.g.

Chemical equation

MgCO3 (s)          ->          MgO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)                   (white solid)

Chemical equation

BaCO3 (s)          ->          BaO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (white solid)

Chemical equation

CaCO3 (s)          ->          CaO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (white solid)

Chemical equation

CuCO3 (s)          ->          CuO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(blue/green solid)         (black solid)

Chemical equation

ZnCO3 (s)          ->          ZnO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (white solid when cool/

Yellow solid when hot)

Chemical equation

PbCO3 (s)          ->          PbO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (yellow solid when cool/

brown solid when hot)

4.The following experiments show the presence of  Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) and Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) ions in sample of a salt:

 

(a)Using Lead(II) nitrate(V)

  1. Using a portion of salt solution in a test tube .add four drops of Lead(II)nitrate(V)solution.Preserve.

 

Observation inference
White precipitate/ppt CO32- ,SO32- ,SO42- ,Cl

  1. To the preserved solution ,add six drops of dilutte nitric(V)acid. Preserve.

 

Observation inference
White precipitate/ppt persists

 

White precipitate/ppt dissolves

SO42- ,Cl

 

CO32- ,SO32-

  1. To the preserved sample( that forms a precipitate ),heat to boil.
Observation inference
White precipitate/ppt persists

 

White precipitate/ppt dissolves

SO42-

 

Cl

 

  1. To the preserved sample( that do not form a precipitate ),add three drops of acidified potassium manganate(VII)/lime water
Observation inference
Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing colourless gas produced

Acidified KMnO4 decolorized/no white precipitate on lime water

 

Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing colourless gas produced

Acidified KMnO4 not decolorized/ white precipitate on lime water

 

SO32-

 

 

 

 

CO32-

 

 

Experiments/Observations:

(b)Using Barium(II)nitrate(V)/ Barium(II)chloride

 

  1. To about 5cm3 of a salt solution in a test tube add four drops of Barium(II) nitrate (V) / Barium(II)chloride. Preserve.

 

Observation Inference
White precipitate/ppt SO42- , SO32- , CO32- ions

 

  1. To the preserved sample in (I) above, add six drops of 2M nitric(V) acid . Preserve.

 

Observation 1

Observation Inference
White precipitate/ppt persists SO42- , ions

 

Observation 2

Observation Inference
White precipitate/ppt dissolves SO32- , CO32- , ions

 

III.To the preserved sample observation 2 in (II) above, add 4 drops of acidified potassium manganate(VII) /dichromate(VI).

 

Observation 1

Observation Inference
(i)acidified potassium manganate(VII)decolorized

(ii)Orange colour of acidified potassium

dichromate(VI) turns to green

SO32- ions

 

 

Observation 2

Observation Inference
(i)acidified potassium manganate(VII) not decolorized

(ii)Orange colour of acidified potassium

dichromate(VI) does not turns to green

 

CO32- ions

 

 

 

 

 

Explanations

 

Using Lead(II)nitrate(V)

(i)Lead(II)nitrate(V) solution reacts with chlorides(Cl), Sulphate (VI) salts (SO42- ), Sulphate (IV)salts (SO32-) and carbonates(CO32-) to form the insoluble white precipitate of Lead(II)chloride, Lead(II)sulphate(VI), Lead(II) sulphate (IV) and Lead(II)carbonate(IV).

 

Chemical/ionic equation:

Pb2+(aq)       +       Cl (aq)       ->      PbCl2(s)

Pb2+(aq)       +       SO42+ (aq)   ->      PbSO4 (s)

Pb2+(aq)       +       SO32+ (aq)   ->      PbSO3 (s)

Pb2+(aq)       +       CO32+ (aq)  ->      PbCO3 (s)

 

(ii)When the insoluble precipitates are acidified with nitric(V) acid,

– Lead(II)chloride and Lead(II)sulphate(VI) do not react with the acid and thus their white precipitates remain/ persists.

– Lead(II) sulphate (IV) and Lead(II)carbonate(IV) reacts with the acid to form soluble Lead(II) nitrate (V) and produce/effervesces/fizzes/bubbles out sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases respectively.

. Chemical/ionic equation:

PbSO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)       ->   H2 O (l)    +   Pb2+(aq)    +       SO2 (g)

PbCO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)      ->   H2 O (l)    +   Pb2+(aq)    +       CO2 (g)

 

(iii)When Lead(II)chloride and Lead(II)sulphate(VI) are heated/warmed;

– Lead(II)chloride dissolves in hot water/on boiling(recrystallizes on cooling)

– Lead(II)sulphate(VI) do not dissolve in hot water thus its white precipitate persists/remains on heating/boiling.

(iv)When sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases are produced;

sulphur(IV)oxide will decolorize acidified potassium manganate(VII)  and / or Orange colour of acidified potassium dichromate(VI) will turns to green. Carbon(IV)oxide will not.

Chemical equation:

5SO32-(aq)  +   2MnO4 (aq) +6H+(aq)   -> 5SO42-(aq) +  2Mn2+(aq) +  3H2O(l)

(purple)                                                      (colourless)

3SO32-(aq)  +   Cr2O72-(aq) +8H+(aq)   -> 3SO42-(aq) +  2Cr3+(aq) +  4H2O(l)

(Orange)                                               (green)

Carbon(IV)oxide forms an insoluble white precipitate of calcium carbonate if three drops of lime water are added into the reaction test tube when effervescence is taking place. Sulphur(IV)oxide will not.

Chemical equation:

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +   CO2 (g)    ->  CaCO3(s)  +  H2O(l)

These tests should be done immediately after acidifying to ensure the gases produced react with the oxidizing agents/lime water.

 

 

 

Using Barium(II)nitrate(V)/ Barium(II)Chloride

(i)Barium(II)nitrate(V) and/ or Barium(II)chloride solution reacts with Sulphate (VI) salts (SO42- ), Sulphate (IV)salts (SO32-) and carbonates(CO32-) to form the insoluble white precipitate of Barium(II)sulphate(VI), Barium(II) sulphate (IV) and Barium(II)carbonate(IV).

 

Chemical/ionic equation:

Ba2+(aq)      +       SO42+ (aq)   ->      BaSO4 (s)

Ba2+(aq)      +       SO32+ (aq)   ->      BaSO3 (s)

Ba2+(aq)      +       CO32+ (aq)  ->      BaCO3 (s)

 

(ii)When the insoluble precipitates are acidified with nitric(V) acid,

– Barium (II)sulphate(VI) do not react with the acid and thus its white precipitates remain/ persists.

– Barium(II) sulphate (IV) and Barium(II)carbonate(IV) reacts with the acid to form soluble Barium(II) nitrate (V) and produce /effervesces /fizzes/ bubbles out sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases respectively.

. Chemical/ionic equation:

BaSO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)       ->   H2 O (l)    +   Ba2+(aq)    +       SO2 (g)

 

BaCO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)      ->   H2 O (l)    +   Ba2+(aq)    +       CO2 (g)

 

(iii) When sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases are produced;

sulphur(IV)oxide will decolorize acidified potassium manganate(VII)  and / or Orange colour of acidified potassium dichromate(VI) will turns to green. Carbon(IV)oxide will not.

 

Chemical equation:

5SO32-(aq)  +   2MnO4 (aq) +6H+(aq)   -> 5SO42-(aq) +  2Mn2+(aq) +  3H2O(l)

(purple)                                                      (colourless)

 

3SO32-(aq)  +   Cr2O72-(aq) +8H+(aq)   -> 3SO42-(aq) +  2Cr3+(aq) +  4H2O(l)

(Orange)                                               (green)

 

Carbon(IV)oxide forms an insoluble white precipitate of calcium carbonate if three drops of lime water are added into the reaction test tube when effervescence is taking place. Sulphur(IV)oxide will not.

 

Chemical equation:

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +   CO2 (g)    ->  CaCO3(s)  +  H2O(l)

These tests should be done immediately after acidifying to ensure the gases produced react with the oxidizing agents/lime water.

 

(iii) Sodium carbonate(IV) (Na2CO3)

 

(a)Extraction of sodium carbonate from soda ash

 

Sodium carbonate naturally occurs in Lake Magadi in Kenya as Trona.trona is the double salt ; sodium sesquicarbonate. NaHCO3 .Na2CO3 .H2O.It is formed from the volcanic activity that takes place in Lake Naivasha, Nakuru ,Bogoria and Elementeita .All these lakes drain into Lake Magadi through underground rivers. Lake Magadi has no outlet.

Solubility of Trona decrease with increase in temperature.High temperature during the day causes trona to naturally crystallize .It is mechanically scooped/dredged/dug and put in a furnace.

Inside the furnace, trona decompose into soda ash/sodium carbonate.

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 .Na2CO3 .H2O (s)     ->     3Na2CO3 (s)     +    5H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(trona)                                             (soda  ash)

Soda ash is then bagged and sold as Magadi soda.It is mainly used:

(i)in making glass to lower the melting point of raw materials (sand/SiO2  from 1650oC and CaO from 2500oC  to around 1500oC)

(ii)in softening hard water

(iii)in the manufacture of soapless detergents.

(iv)Swimming pool “pH increaser”

Sodium chloride is also found dissolved in the lake. Solubility of sodium chloride decrease with decreases in temperature/ sodium chloride has lower solubility at lower temperatures. When temperatures decrease at night it crystallize out .The crystals are then mechanically dug/dredged /scooped  then packed for sale as animal/cattle feeds and seasoning food.

 

Summary flow diagram showing the extraction of Soda ash  from Trona

 

Sodium chloride and Trona dissolved in the sea
Natural fractional crystallization
Crystals of Trona (Day time)
Crystals of sodium chloride(At night)
Dredging /scooping/ digging
Crushing
Furnace (Heating)
                 Carbon(IV) oxide
Soda ash
Bagging

NaCl(s)

Bagging Na2CO3 (s)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

b)The Solvay process for industrial manufacture of sodium carbonate(IV)

(i)Raw materials.

Brine /Concentrated Sodium chloride from salty seas/lakes.

Ammonia gas from Haber.

Limestone /Calcium carbonate from chalk /limestone rich rocks.

Water from rivers/lakes.

 

(ii)Chemical processes

Ammonia gas is passed up to meet a downward flow of sodium chloride solution / brine to form ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture in the ammoniated brine chamber

The ammoniated brine mixture is then pumped up, atop the carbonator/ solvay tower.

In  the carbonator/ solvay tower, ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture slowly trickle down to meet an upward flow of carbon(IV)oxide gas.

The carbonator is shelved /packed with quartz/broken glass to

(i) reduce the rate of flow of ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture.

(ii)increase surface area of the liquid mixture to ensure a lot of ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture react with carbon(IV)oxide gas.

Insoluble sodium hydrogen carbonate and soluble ammonium chloride are formed from the reaction.

Chemical equation

CO2(g) + H2O(l) + NaCl (aq) + NH3(g) -> NaHCO3(s) + NH4Cl(aq)

 

The products are then filtered. Insoluble sodium hydrogen carbonate forms the residue while soluble ammonium chloride forms the filtrate.

 

Sodium hydrogen carbonate itself can be used:

(i)  as baking powder and preservation of some soft drinks.

(ii) as a buffer agent and antacid in animal feeds to improve fibre digestion.

(iii) making dry chemical fire extinguishers.

 

In the Solvay process Sodium hydrogen carbonate is then heated to form Sodium carbonate/soda ash, water and carbon (IV) oxide gas.

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 (s)    ->  Na2CO3(s)  +  CO2(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

Sodium carbonate is stored ready for use in:

(i) during making glass/lowering the melting point of mixture of sand/SiO2     from 1650oC and CaO from 2500oC  to around 1500oC

(ii) in softening hard water

(iii) in the manufacture of soapless detergents.

(iv) swimming pool “pH increaser”.

Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are recycled back to the ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine chamber.

More carbon(IV)oxide is produced in the kiln/furnace. Limestone is heated to decompose into Calcium oxide and carbon(IV)oxide.

Chemical equation

CaCO3 (s)    ->   CaO(s)   +    CO2(g)

 

Carbon(IV)oxide is recycled to the carbonator/solvay tower. Carbon (IV)oxide is added water in the slaker to form Calcium hydroxide. This process is called slaking.

Chemical equation

CaO(s)   +    H2O (l)    ->    Ca(OH)2 (aq)

Calcium hydroxide is mixed with ammonium chloride from the carbonator/solvay tower in the ammonia regeneration chamber to form Calcium chloride , water and more ammonia gas.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2 (aq) +2NH4Cl (aq)    ->  CaCl2(s)  +  2NH3(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

NH3(g)  and H2O(l) are recycled.

Calcium chloride may be used:

(i)as drying agent in the school laboratory during gas preparation (except ammonia gas)

(ii)to lower the melting point of solid sodium chloride / rock salt salts during the Downs process for industrial extraction of sodium metal.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Detailed Summary flow diagram of Solvay Process

 

 

 

 

 

 

Practice

 

  1. The diagram below shows part of the Solvay process used in manufacturing sodium carbonate. Use it to answer the questions that follow.
Carbon (IV)oxide

 

 

Ammonia
Process II
Sodium carbonate
Saturated sodium chloride solution
Sodium hydrogen  carbonate
Ammonium chloride
Process I

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            

 

(a)Explain how Sodium Chloride required for this process is obtained from the sea.

Sea water is pumped /scooped into shallow pods. Evaporation of most of the water takes place leaving a very concentrated solution.

(b)(i) Name process:

  1. Filtration
  2. Decomposition

(ii) Write the equation for the reaction in process:

Process I

Chemical equation

CO2(g) + H2O(l) + NaCl (aq) + NH3(g) -> NaHCO3(s) + NH4Cl(aq)

 

Process II

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 (s)    ->  Na2CO3(s)  +  CO2(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

(c)(i) Name two substances recycled in the solvay process

                   Ammonia gas , Carbon(IV)Oxide and Water.

 

(ii)Which is the by-product of this process?

                   Calcium(II)Chloride /CaCl2

 

(iii)State two uses that the by-product can be used for:

  1. As a drying agent in the school laboratory preparation of gases.
  2. In the Downs cell/process for extraction of Sodium to lower the melting point of rock salt.

 

 (iv)Write the chemical equation for the formation of the by-products in the Solvay process.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2 (aq) +2NH4Cl (aq)    ->  CaCl2(s)  +  2NH3(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

(d)In an experiment to determine the % purity of Sodium carbonate produced in the Solvay process ,2.15g of the sample reacted with exactly 40.0cm3 of 0.5M Sulphuric(VI)acid.

 

(i)Calculate the number of moles of sodium carbonate that reacted.

 

Chemical equation

Na2CO3 (aq) +H2SO4 (aq)    ->  Na2SO4 (aq)+  CO2(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

Mole ratio Na2CO3 :H2SO4  => 1:1

 

Moles H2SO4    =   Molarity  x  Volume   =>  0.5  x  40.0   = 0.02 Moles

1000                          1000

Moles of Na2CO3  = 0.02 Moles

 

(ii)Determine the % of sodium carbonate in the sample.

Molar mass of Na2CO3  = 106g

                    Mass of Na2CO3  = moles x Molar mass => 0.02   x   106    =  2.12 g

%  of Na2CO3           =            ( 2.12 g x 100)    =  98.6047%

2.15

(e) State two uses of soda ash.

(i) during making glass/lowering the melting point of mixture of sand/SiO2     from 1650oC and CaO from 2500oC  to around 1500oC

(ii) in softening hard water

(iii) in the manufacture of soapless detergents.

(iv) swimming pool “pH increaser”.

 

(f)The diagram below shows a simple ammonia soda tower used in manufacturing sodium carbonate .Use it to answer the questions that follow:

Substance A
Sodium hydrogen carbonate
Metal plates
Excess Carbon(IV)oxide
Raw materials
 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    

(i)Name the raw materials needed in the above process

          -Ammonia

-Water

-Carbon(IV)oxide

-Limestone

-Brine/ Concentrated sodium chloride

 

(ii)Identify substance A

          Ammonium chloride /NH4Cl

(iii) Write the equation for the reaction taking place in:

I.Tower.

Chemical equation

CO2(g) + NaCl (aq) + H2O(l) + NH3(g) -> NaHCO3(s) + NH4Cl(aq)

 

  1. Production of excess carbon (IV)oxide.

Chemical equation

CaCO3 (s)    ->   CaO(s)   +    CO2(g)

 

III. The regeneration of ammonia

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2 (aq) +2NH4Cl (aq)    ->  CaCl2(s)  +  2NH3(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

(iv)Give a reason for having the circular metal plates in the tower.

          -To slow the downward flow of brine.

-To increase the rate of dissolving of ammonia.

-To increase the surface area for dissolution

 

(v)Name the gases recycled in the process illustrated above.

          Ammonia gas , Carbon(IV)Oxide and Water.

 

  1. Describe how you would differentiate between carbon (IV)oxide and carbon(II)oxide using chemical method.

 

Method I

-Bubble both gases in lime water/Ca(OH)2

          -white precipitate is formed if the gas is carbon (IV) oxide

No white precipitate is formed if the gas is carbon (II) oxide

 Method II

          -ignite both gases

Carbon (IV) oxide does not burn/ignite

– Carbon (II) oxide burn with a blue non-sooty flame.

Method III

-Lower a burning splint into a gas containing each gas separately.

-burning splint is extinguished if the gas is carbon (IV) oxide

-burning splint is not extinguished if the gas is carbon (II) oxide.

3.Using Magnesium sulphate(VI)solution ,describe how you  can differentiate between a solution of sodium carbonate from a solution of sodium hydrogen carbonate

-Add Magnesium sulphate(VI) solution to separate portions of a solution of sodium carbonate and sodium hydrogen carbonate in separate test tubes

-White precipitate is formed in test tube containing sodium carbonate

-No white precipitate is formed in test tube containing sodium hydrogen carbonate.

Chemical equation 

Na2CO3 (aq) +MgSO4 (aq)    ->  Na2SO4 (aq)         +  MgCO3(s)

(white ppt)

Ionic equation 

CO32- (aq)    +        Mg2+ (aq)      ->             MgCO3(s)

(white ppt)

Chemical equation 

2NaHCO3 (aq) +MgSO4 (aq)    ->  Na2SO4 (aq)      +  Mg(HCO3)2 (aq)

(colourless solution)

 

  1. The diagram below shows a common charcoal burner .Assume the burning take place in a room with sufficient supply of air.

 

 

(a)Explain what happens around:

          (i)Layer A

Sufficient/excess air /oxygen enter through the air holes into the burner .It reacts with/oxidizes Carbon to carbon(IV)oxide

Chemical equation

          C(s)             +        O2(g)           ->      CO2 (g)

 

(ii)Layer B

Hot carbon(IV)oxide rises up and is reduced by more carbon/charcoal to carbon (II)oxide.

Chemical equation

          C(s)             +        CO2(g)         ->      2CO (g)

(ii)Layer C

 Hot carbon(II)oxide rises up and burns with a blue flame to be oxidized by the excess air to form carbon(IV)oxide.

2CO (g)       +        O2(g)           ->      2CO2(g)

 

(b)State and explain what would happen if the burner is put in an enclosed room.

The hot poisonous /toxic carbon(II)oxide rising up will not be oxidized to Carbon(IV)oxide.

 

(c)Using a chemical test , describe how you would differentiate two unlabelled black solids suspected to be charcoal and copper(II)oxide.

 

Method I

-Burn/Ignite the two substances separately.

-Charcoal burns with a blue flame

– Copper(II)oxide does not burn

 

Method II

-Add dilute sulphuric(VI)acid/Nitric(V)acid/Hydrochloric acid separately.

-Charcoal does not dissolve.

– Copper(II)oxide dissolves to form a colourless solution.

  1. Excess Carbon(II)oxide was passed over heated copper(II)oxide as in the set up shown below for five minutes.

 

(a)State and explain the observations made in the combustion tube.

Observation

Colour change from black to brown

Explanation

Carbon (II)oxide reduces  black copper(II)oxide to brown copper metal itself oxidized to Carbon(IV)oxide.

Chemical equation

CO(g)          + CuO (s)    ->        Cu(s)         +       CO2(g)

(black)               (brown)

 

(b) (i)Name the gas producing flame A

                    Carbon(II)oxide

 

(ii)Why should the gas be burnt?

                    It is toxic/poisonous

(iii)Write the chemical equation for the production of flame A

          2CO(g)                 +   O2(g)      ->      2CO2(g)

(c)State and explain what happens when carbon(IV)oxide is prepared using Barium carbonate and dilute sulphuric(VI)acid.

 

Reaction starts then stops after sometime producing small/little quantity of carbon(IV)oxide gas.

Barium carbonate react with dilute sulphuric(VI)acid to form insoluble Barium sulphate(VI) that cover/coat unreacted  Barium carbonate stopping further reaction to produce more Carbon(IV)oxide.

 

(d) Using dot () and cross(x) to represent electrons show the bonding in a molecule of :

          (i) Carbon(II)oxide

(ii) Carbon(IV)Oxide.

 

(e) Carbon (IV)oxide is an environmental pollutant of global concern. Explain.

          -It is a green house gas thus causes global warming.

-It dissolves in water to form acidic carbonic acid which causes “acid rain”

 

(f)Explain using chemical equation why lime water is used to test for the presence of Carbon (IV) oxide instead of sodium hydroxide.

 

Using lime water/calcium hydroxide:

– a visible white precipitate of calcium carbonate is formed that dissolves on  bubbling excess Carbon (IV) oxide gas

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

(white precipitate)

CaCO3 (aq)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g) ->     Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

Using sodium hydroxide:

No precipitate of sodium carbonate is formed Both sodium carbonate and sodium hydrogen carbonate are soluble salts/dissolves.

Chemical equation

2NaOH (aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

(No white precipitate)

Na2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g)     ->     2NaHCO3 (s)

 

(g)Ethan-1,2-dioic acid and methanoic acid may be used to prepare small amount of carbon(II)oxide in a school laboratory.

(i) Explain the modification in the set up when using one over the other.

Before carbon(II)oxide is collected:

-when using methanoic acid, no concentrated sodium/potassium hydroxide is needed to absorb Carbon(IV)oxide.

-when using ethan-1,2-dioic acid, concentrated sodium/potassium hydroxide is needed to absorb Carbon(IV)oxide.

 

(ii)Write the equation for the reaction for the formation of carbon(II)oxide from:

I.Methanoic acid.

Chemical equation         HCOOH(aq)   ->  CO(g) + H2O(l)

 

  1. Ethan-1,2-dioic acid

Chemical equation         HOOCCOOH(aq) -> CO2(g)+CO(g)+H2O(l)

(h)Both carbon(II)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide affect the environment. Explain why carbon(II)oxide is more toxic/poisonous.

-Both gases are colourless,denser than water and odourless.

-Carbon(II)oxide is preferentially absorbed by human/mammalian haemoglobin when inhaled forming stable carboxyhaemoglobin instead of oxyhaemoglobin.This reduces the free haemoglobin in the blood leading to suffocation and quick death.Carbon(IV)oxide is a green house gas that increases global warming.

-Carbon(II)oxide is readily oxidized to carbon(IV)oxide

 

6.Study the flow chart below and use it to answer the questions that follow.

 

 

(a)Name:

          (i)the white precipitate A

                   Calcium carbonate

(ii) solution B

                   Calcium hydrogen carbonate

(iii) gas C

                   Carbon(IV)oxide

(iv) white residue B

                   Calcium oxide

          (v) solution D

                   Calcium hydroxide/lime water

 

(b)Write a balanced chemical equation for the reaction for the formation of:

          (i) the white precipitate A from solution D

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 

(ii) the white precipitate A from solution B

Chemical equation

Ca(HCO3)2(aq)    ->     CO2 (g)     +    CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 

(iii) solution B  from the white precipitate A

Chemical equation

CO2 (g)     +    CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)   -> Ca(HCO3)2(aq)

 

(iv) white residue B from the white precipitate A

Chemical equation

CaCO3(s)    ->     CO2 (g)     +    CaO (s)

 

(iv) reaction of white residue B with water

Chemical equation

CaO (s)    +    H2O(l)   -> Ca(OH)2(aq)

KCSE REVISION AGRICULTURE FORM ONE TO FOUR TOPICS

FORM ONE TOPICS.

  1. a). What is Agriculture?

The art and Science of crop and livestock production.

b).  State the roles played by agriculture in national development

  • Food supply
  • Source of raw materials for industries
  • Employment opportunities
  • Foreign exchange earnings
  • Source of capital for development
  • Market for industrial goods.

c).  State the forms of employment in Agriculture

  1. Primary employment

–    Working on farms

  1. Secondary employment

–     In agriculture – based industries

  • Tertiary employment
  • In distribution of farm produce.

 

d).  i)  Briefly outline the problems that have hindered agricultural development

      in Kenya.

  • Lack of capital for investment
  • Pests and diseases of crops and livestock
  • Unpredictable climatic conditions
  • Fluctuation of market prices
  • Inadequate or poor storage structure leading to heavy lose
  • Inadequate technical know-how
  • Population pressure hence over-use of land
  • Poor communication
  • Perishability
  • Bulky commodity prices

 

  1. ii) Suggest ways in which these problems can be alleviated
  • Proper food preservation
  • Improved communication network
  • Industries located near bulky products
  • Extension services/ advice
  • Provide good seeds
  • Credit facilities
  • Pest and disease control
  • Irrigation
  • Proper storage facilities
  • Government price control.
  1. a) i) What are the characteristics of shifting cultivation?
  • Limited capital for investment
  • Use of rudimentary tools and equipment
  • Small land usually cultivated
  • Slash and burn technique of clearing
  • Crops not properly managed.
  1. ii) State the problems associated with shifting cultivation.
  • A wasteful method of farming
  • Slow rate of regeneration of vegetation allowing soil erosion to take place
  • No incentive to develop land
  • No permanent structures are put up hence a lot of time wasted in moving or travelling to the homestead
  • A lot of time wasted in moving from one place to another.

 

  1. What is pastoralism?
  • A major system of keeping livestock and moving with them from place of search of better pasture and water for livestock.

 

  1. State the factors to consider in choosing a type of farm
  • Type of enterprise itself
  • Environmental factors
  • Knowledge and skills of the farmer about the enterprise
  • Available resources e.g labour and capital
  • Cultural factors/ social factors
  • Governmental policy
  • Type of market he is producing for.

 

  1. What is arable farming?
  • Growing of crops only.

 

  1. i) State the limitations of mixed farming
  • The farmer will obtain sustainable income throughout the year
  • The farmer will never experience total loss
  • Animals contribute manure to crops while crops contribute/ provide crop residues fed to animals.
  • Labour is utilized efficiently throughout the year
  • Animals can be used to do work in the farm e.g oxen ploughing

 

  1. ii) State the limitations of mixed farming
  • Lack of enough land for more enterprises
  • Lack of enough capital
  • Lack of specialisation.

 

  1. i) Give the types of farming practised by small scale farmers
  • Arable farming
  • Pastoralism
  • Mixed farming

 

  1. Name the types of large scale farming
  • Plantations
  • Ranching
  • Why does the Kenya government put a lot of emphasis on ranching?
  • Because arable land is becoming smaller
  • Ranching will lead to higher production of livestock to meet the high demand for meat

 

  • State the common features of ranching as a farming system:
  • Done in marginal areas with poor pasture
  • System is extensive
  • Extension services provided
  • Improved pastures
  • Selective livestock breeding
  • High level livestock management.

 

  1. i) State the advantages of plantation farming
  • Provision of employment
  • Revenue to government
  • High outputs
  • Foreign exchange earner
  • Economies of large scale production
  • Other activities done e.g processing.

 

  1. State the disadvantages of plantations.
  • Overdependence on one enterprise
  • High initial capital required.

 

  • State the major characteristics of plantation farming.
  • Most of the work is mechanised
  • Requires skilled and qualified personnel
  • Large tracts of land used
  • Sometimes run by a company or the government or individuals
  • The aim is to produce enough for local consumption and export market.
  • Provides a lot of employment
  • High output and quality of products
  • Enjoys the economies of large scale production
  • Scientific methods of farming used
  • High investments of capital.

 

  1. a) List the ecological factors affecting agriculture.
  • Rainfall
  • Humidity
  • Soil
  • Temperature
  • Wind
  • Light
  • Topography

 

  1. Mention the aspects of rainfall which are important in crop production
  • Reliability
  • Distribution
  • Intensity of rainfall
  • Amount of rainfall

 

  1. i) What is optimal temperature?
  • Temperature at which plant growth is at its best.

 

  1. ii) State the effects of temperature on crop production.
  • Photosynthesis
  • Respiration
  • Flowering and ripening
  • Quality of the products.

 

  1. State the effects of wind to crops.
  • Physical damage
  • Stress through evaporation / chilling
  • Spread of pests, weeds, diseases
  • Soil erosion
  • Increase of water and mineral uptake by increasing transpiration.

 

  1. a). i. Define the term soil.
  • A collection of natural unconsolidated body covering the earth’s crust, where plants grow

 

ii).  Name the ways in which soil is important to growing plants.

  • Provides enchorage/ support for the plant
  • Provides nutrients
  • Provides moisture

 

b).  i)  State the factors which influence the soil forming process

  • Climatic factors e.g rainfall
  • Biotic factors e.g plants
  • Type of parent materials
  • Topography of land
  • Time taken by the process.

 

ii).  What biological agents influence the speed of the soil forming process?

  • Movement of animals in large groups
  • Man’s activities e.g cultivation, mining, road and railway construction.
  • Micro-organisms ie. Decomposing plant and animal remains and adding to soil
  • Earth worms, termites, moles etc mix up soil
  • Roots of higher plants force their way through the rock cracks and further break them physically.

 

  1. i) Define the term soil Profile
  • The vertical arrangement of soil layers

 

 

  1. ii) How does soil profile influence plant growth?
  • Availability of plant nutrients
  • Anchorage of plant
  • Root penetration into soil
  • How long soil moisture/ its availability
  • Type of crop to be grown

 

 

  1. i) List the constituents of a fertile soil
  • Soil water
  • Soil air
  • Organic matter
  • Mineral salts
  • Living organisms.

 

  1. ii) What role do micro-organisms play in soil?
  • Decompose dead organic remains and convert them into humus, a source of plant nutrients
  • Add nitrogen through nitrogen fixation.

 

  1. i) What is soil structure?
  • Aggregation of soil particles.

 

  1. ii) State the farming practices that improve soil structure.
  • Addition of organic matter
  • Fallowing
  • Mixed cropping including cereals and legumes
  • Minimum tillage
  • Good crop rotation programme
  • Cultivation at right moisture content of soil

 

iii) Why is a good soil structure desireable for growing crops.

  • Improves drainage and water infiltration.
  • Improves aeration
  • Minimises buildup of carbondioxide in the soil which becomes toxic to crops and micro-organisms.
  • Facilitates better root penetration
  • Creates favourable conditions for activity of micro-organisms
  • Ensures adequate water retention for growing crops
  • It makes tillage easier.

 

  1. i) What is soil texture?
  • Proportion of different sizes of soil particles.

 

  1. State the properties of soil that are influenced by its texture.
  • Aeration/ porosity
  • Drainage
  • Water holding capacity/ capillarity
  • Stickiness/ consistency
  • Cation exchange capacity / PH/ availability of nutrients

 

  • Give the types of soil based on texture.
  • Sandy soils
  • Clay soils
  • Loam soils

 

 

 

  1. a) State the advantages of using farm tools.
  • They make work easier i.e increase working efficiency
  • Help to avoid drudgery
  • Timeliness of operations is achieved
  • Operations e.g spraying to control pests and diseases are more exact hence effective

 

  1. List the factors that determine a farmer’s choice of tools and equipment.
  • Nature of work to be done
  • The financial status
  • Type of power used on the farm
  • Condition of land where the tool will be used.

 

  1. i) Why should tools and equipment to maintained well?
  • To reduce cost of repair/ replacement
  • To increase their durability/ last long
  • To increase work efficiency
  • Ensure safety of the user
  • To remain in good working order.

 

  1. ii) How should tools and equipment be maintained?
  • Store in sheds and racks
  • Clean and oil moving parts
  • Regularly sharpen cutting edges
  • Clean tools thoroughly after use
  • Keep metal parts rust free
  • Replace or repair broken/ wornout parts
  • Ensure there are no loose parts
  • Use tool for its intended purpose
  • Buy good quality tools and equipment
  • Always keep tools in good working condition

 

  1. List the safety precautions necessary for tools and equipment
  • Use the tool for its intended purpose
  • Sharp points should always point away from user/ people
  • Use protective clothing when working with tools
  • Always replace/ repair broken parts/ keep handles smooth
  • Handle delicate tools carefully/ store them safely.

 

  1. How is friction reduces in moving parts?
  • Apply oil
  • Apply grease
  • Generally lubricate moving parts

 

  1. Name the categories of farm tools and equipment.
  • Garden tools
  • Workshop tools
  • Livestock production tools
  • Masonery and plumbing tools

 

 

 

  1. a) State the importance of land preparation.
  • Removal of weeds
  • Breaking the soil into smaller pieces
  • Mixing organic matter into soil/ bury crop aeration
  • Improve drainage/ water holding capacity
  • Destroy pests and disease causing organisms.

 

  1. b) i) What is primary cultivation?
  • All operations carried cut in opening up land for crop promotion.

 

  1. ii) Which factors influence choice of tools for primary cultivation.
  • Type of soil
  • Availability of implements
  • Depth of ploughing
  • Type of tilth required
  • Condition of the land
  • Type of crop to be growth
  • Topography of the area
  • Financial ability of the farmer
  • Time remaining before planting

 

  1. i) What is secondary cultivation?
  • Subsequent cultivation after primary cultivation to make seedbed fine and ready for planting.

 

  1. ii) Give reasons for secondary cultivation?
  • Removing weeds which have just germinated break soil into small clods
  • Make the field level
  • Mixing organic matter with soil
  • Make land ready for planting.

 

  1. i) Define minimum tillage
  • To maintain soil structure
  • To reduce soil erosion
  • To reduce cost of seedbed preparation
  • To conserve soil moisture
  • To avoid damage to roots.

 

iii)  State reasons for practising minimum tillage.

  • Saves time
  • Reduces cost of production
  • Maintains soil structure/ controls soil erosion
  • Maintains soil moisture

 

  1. Name the factors that determine the number of tillage operations during seedbed preparation.
  • Implement used/ type of machinery used
  • The crop to be planted
  • Soil moisture
  • Initial condition of the land
  • Soil type/ soil condition
  • Skill of operator
  • Liability of soil to erosion/ topography
  • Capital available/ cost of operation
  • Time available for other operations.

 

  1. a) List the sources of water on the farm.
  • Surface water
  • Rain water/ rainfall
  • Underground/ ground water

 

  1. How is water conveyed from one point to another?
  • Transporting in containers by vehicles/ animals/ human
  • Piping
  • Use of channels

 

  1. State how water is stored on a farm
  • Use of water tank/ container
  • Use of dam/ pond

 

  1. i) Name the types of water pipes.
  • Metal pipes
  • Plastic pipes
  • Hose pipe

 

  1. ii) Mention the types of metal pipe
  • Aluminium pipes
  • Galvanised iron pipes.

 

iii)  What features are considered when buying plastic pipes?

  • Quality of material used for making the pipes
  • Size of the pipes i.e diameter/ length
  • Working pressure of the pipes.

 

  1. Name the types of water pumps to be used on the farm.
  • Centrifugal / rotodynamic
  • Semi-rotary
  • Piston/ reciprocating pumps

 

  1. i) Why should water be treated before use?
  • Kill disease causing organisms
  • Remove chemical impurities
  • Remove bad smell and taste
  • Remove sediments and other solids.

 

  1. ii) State the methods of treating water on the farm.
  • Boiling
  • Chlorination/ chemicals
  • Aeration
  • Sedimentation/ decanting
  • Filtration

iii)  How is water used on the farm?

  • Domestic use e.g drinking, washing, cooking
  • Processing farm produce
  • Cooling farm engines
  • Solution of chemicals e.g
  • Livestock drinking
  • Washing animals and farm structures
  • Mixing with building materials e.g concrete, mud
  • Irrigation purposes
  • Operating grinding mill
  • Generating hydro-electric power

 

  1. a) i) What is irrigation?
  • Artificial application of water to the soil for the purpose of supplying sufficient amount to crops.

 

  1. ii) List the factors to consider in deciding to irrigate crops.
  • Type of soil
  • Capital availability
  • Types of crops to be grown
  • Source of water/ water availability/ rainfall pattern
  • Size o land to be irrigated
  • Profitability of irrigation.

 

  1. b) List the major types of irrigation
  • Overhead/ sprinkler
  • Sub-surface
  • Surface
  • Drip/ trickle

 

  1. a) What is land reclamation?
  • The practice of putting unusable land into a form that can be used for agricultural production.

 

  1. State the importance of land reclamation
  • To make land agriculturally productive
  • To increase food production
  • To reduce population pressure/ pressure on land
  • To make uninhabitable areas habitable

 

  1. List the methods re
  • Draining swampy land
  • Irrigating dry land
  • Terracing steep land/ soil erosion
  • Afforestation/ reafforestation/ planting trees in wasteland
  • Control of tsetseflies
  • Deforestation/ bush clearance/ clearing forests.

 

  1. a) i)  What are farm
  • For planning and making decision
  • Provide information for income tax assessment
  • To determine farmer’s credit worthiness/ for loans
  • Compare performance at different times
  • Compare performance of different enterprises
  • Compare performance of different farms
  • To solve disputes when farmer dies without a will
  • Provide history of the farm
  • Determine profits and losses
  • For partners to share profit losses or bonuses.

 

  1. List types of records kept on mixed farms.
  • Production records
  • Health records
  • Field operations
  • Feeding
  • Inventory
  • Breeding records

 

  1. List types of records kept by crop farmers.
  • Field operations
  • Marketing
  • Production
  • Labour

 

  1. a) i) What are livestock
  • domesticated animals

 

  1. ii) Give examples of livestock
  • Cattle, poultry, sheep, goat, pigs, bees, fish, donkey, camel

 

  1. b) i) Explain the role of livestock in human life food supply.
  • Source of income
  • Raw materials for industry
  • Source of employment
  • Cultural uses e.g dowry, sacrifices, etc
  • Biological cooks e.g cocks
  • For sports and recreation.

 

  1. ii) List factors that affect livestock industry in Kenya.
  • Tradition and belief
  • Product/ input prices
  • Management
  • Capital
  • Selling prices marketing
  • Climatic conditions
  • Communication/ transport
  • Diseases and parasites.

 

  1. c) i) List dairy breeds of cattle
  • Friesian, Ayrshire, Guernsey, Jersey

 

  1. ii) State their characteristics.
  • Triangular shaped

Well attached udder

  • Little flesh on the body

Short, well set legs

  • Ling, thin neck

Feminine appearance

  • Wide spring of ribs

Long, thin tail.

 

  1. i) Name beef cattle breeds.
  • Boran, Aberdean Angus, Hereford, Galloway, Charolais.

 

  1. ii) What are the characteristics of beef cattle.
  • Blocky/ squared/ rectangular shape
  • Low set/ have short legs
  • Have a fleshy body
  • Have short, thin necks
  • Smaller udders.

 

  1. Name the important rabbit breeds in Kenya.
  • Chinchilla, earlops, New Zealand, White, Kenya white, Californian Angora, Flemish giant.

 

  1. i) Which is the common species of camel in Kenya?
  • Single humped/ dromedary

 

  1. ii) State the uses of camels
  • Milk production
  • Meat production
  • Provide leather, wool and
  • Transport people/ loads

 

  1. ii) State the general characteristics of camels.
  • Beast of burden
  • Provides meat, wool, milk and leather
  • Adapted to life in dry regions
  • Drink a lot of water
  • Resistant to most diseases.

 

  1. i) What is the reasons for keeping poultry?
  • For meat and egg production.

 

  1. List the characteristics of broilers.
  • Have red waxy combs and wattles
  • Beak free from yellow pigmentation
  • Abdomen soft and pliable to touch
  • Good distance between pelvic bones and breastbone
  • Well developed bones
  • Bent is crescent shaped, moist and white in colour
  • Body is light

 

  • List the characteristics of broilers.
  • Heavier and bigger than layer
  • Grow very fast
  • Females lay very few eggs.

 

  1. Name the major breeds of sheep in Kenya and indicate the purpose they are kept for
  • Hampshire down for meat
  • Corriadace for multon and wool/ dual purpose
  • Romney Marsh which is dual purpose
  • Merino kept for wool
  • South Down for mutton
  • Locals e.g Black headed persia, Maasai sheep are kept for meat and skin production.

 

  1. Name important goat breeds and their uses
  • Dairy breeds are Toggenberg and saanen
  • Dual purpose are Boer, Nubian
  • Meat is Jamnapar
  • Meat and skin is small E. A goat
  • Wool/ fur is the Angora goat.

 

  1. Name important pig breeds kept in Kenya.
  • Large white
  • Saddleback
  • Landrace
  • Hampshire

 

  1. i) Give the meanings of exotic and to indigenous breeds.
  • Exotic means imported breeds while indigenous means local breeds.

 

  1. State the characteristics of exotic cattle that make them better suited to marginal areas than exotic cattle breeds.
  • Able to walk long distances in search of pasture and water
  • Tolerate high ambient temperatures
  • Tolerate tick-borne diseases.

 

  • What are the advantages of keeping a Jersey cow instead of Friesian for production of milk?
  • Can tolerate high temperatures
  • High butter fat content
  • Small size hence less food required
  • Can utilize poor pasture well.

 

  1. i) State the general characteristics of exotic cattle breeds.
  • No humps
  • Produce more milk
  • Easily attacked by tropical diseases
  • Susceptible to tropical heat
  • Cannot tolerate hardy areas
  • Early maturing

 

  1. ii) Give the characteristics of indigenous cattle
  • Are humped
  • Produce less milk
  • Good resistance to tropical diseases like East Coast Fever
  • Tolerate hardy areas
  • Can withstand tropical heat
  • Late maturing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM TWO TOPICS.

 

 

  1. a) i)  What is soil fertility?
  • The ability of a soil to provide all the required plant nutrients thereby producing and sustaining high crop yields.

 

  1. State the characteristics of a fertile soil.
  • Suitable PH
  • Good aeration
  • Deep soil
  • Good water holding capacity
  • Good drainage
  • Free from pests and diseases.

 

  • How can a fertile soil loss its fertility
  • Soil erosion
  • Weed infestation
  • Leaching of nutrients
  • Alteration of soil PH
  • Monocropping
  • Accumulation of undesirable salts/ salination
  • Burning the land
  • Soil capping/ formation of impervious layer.

 

iv).  State the ways of maintaining or improving soil fertility

  • Improving water retention
  • Crops rotation
  • Maintain right PH value
  • Erosion control
  • Drainage to remove water logging
  • Maintain adequate nutrient level
  • Weed control
  • Irrigation to add water

 

  1. i) What are plant nutrients?
  • Minerals which constitute plant food and help to sustain plant life
  • Mainly got from the soil

 

  1. ii) Name the major plant nutrients (macro-nutrients)
  • Nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium, calcium, magnesium, sulphur.

 

  1. State the roles and deficiency of the following nutrients in plants.
  2. i) Nitrogen uses.
  • Formation of proteins
  • Part of chlorophyll
  • Vegetative growth
  • Increase grain size.

 

 

Deficiency.

  • Chlorosis/ yellowing
  • Stunted growth
  • Premature leaf fall
  • Very short roots

 

Excessive supply

  • Excessive succulency in grains
  • Lodging
  • Weak stems
  • Delayed maturity

 

  1. Phosphorous used.
  • Protein and enzyme formation
  • Shoot growth
  • Root development
  • Synthesis of sugar
  • Seed formation

 

Deficiency

  • Purplish leaves
  • Less fruit/ grain/ low yield
  • Stunted/ slow growth
  • Delayed maturity
  • Poor root development
  • Weak/ slender stems

 

  • Potassium uses.
  • Carbohydrate formation
  • Uptake of nutrients
  • Resistance against diseases
  • Strengthen straw/ cell wall
  • Development of chlorophyll
  • Neutralise organic acids.

 

Deficiency.

  • Lodging/ weak stems
  • Chlorotic leaf surface
  • Scorching at tips and margin
  • Premature defoliation
  • Mottling/ brown spots on leaves
  • Stunted growth.

 

  1. i) What is soil sampling?
  • Taking a small representative quantity of soil from an area for testing.

 

  1. List the methods of soil sampling.
  • Traverse/ diagonal pattern
  • Zigzag / random collection.

 

 

  • State the reasons for soil testing:
  • To determine nutrient status of the soil
  • To determine soil PH.

 

  1. Explain the procedure of soil sampling:
  • Clear all vegetation
  • Make a vertical cut and scoop soil at 15-25 cm depth
  • Take soil from many places/ take representative sample
  • Mix all soils thoroughly
  • Break up soil clods.
  • Get a small representative sample by quartering.

 

  1. State precautions necessary during soils sampling
  • Avoid contamination e.g by cigarette ash
  • Avoid unused areas like ant-hill manure heaps etc
  • Avoid mixing top – soil with sub-soil.

 

  1. Name the methods of detecting nutrient deficiency in crops:
  • Soil analysis
  • Leaf analysis
  • Observation of deficiency symptoms

 

  1. State the importance of soil PH to a crop:
  • Determines availability of nutrients in a place
  • Determines presence / activity of micro-organisms in soil
  • Influences soil structure.

 

  1. a) i)  Differentiate between manure and fertilizer:
  • Manures are organic substances which contain plant nutrients
  • Fertilizers are inorganic manures usually prepared artificially and sold commercially.

 

  1. List the common organic manures
  • Farm yard manure
  • Green manure
  • Compost manure
  • Organic mulches.

 

b). i)  What is organic matter?

  • Part of soil formed from dead and decomposed plant and animal remains.

 

  1. State the importance of organic matter
  • Improves soil aeration
  • Improves soil structure
  • Improves water infiltration and retention in soil
  • Adds nutrients after decomposition
  • Reduces soil erosion
  • Modify soil temperature

 

  • How can organic matter be added to soil?
  • Incorporating crop remains, weeds, etc
  • Adding organic manure
  • Mulching using organic materials

 

  1. c) i) Describe how to make farm Yard manure:
  • Place plant materials in inside a shed on the floor
  • Animals defecate on it and mix it with urine and dung
  • Remove it from pen and heap it outside for 6 months
  • Cover the heap with soil and polythene sheet to prevent leaching of nutrients
  • Consolidate heap to prevent entry of water
  • Allow it to rot completely before being used.

 

  1. ii) State the factors determining quality of farm yard manure
  • Age of Farm Yard Manure
  • Age of animal producing the waste
  • Materials used for bedding
  • Methods of storage
  • Species of animal/ type
  • Type of feed given to animals

 

iii)  Give the advantages of using Farm Yard Manure over fertilizer:

  • Improves soil structure
  • Has longer residual effect
  • Supplies more than one plant nutrient
  • Promotes microbial activity in the soil
  • It is locally available
  • Imparts dark colour to the soil which raises / moderates soil temperature
  • It buffers soil PH increases cation exchange capacity

 

  1. Give the disadvantages of using farm yard manure
  • Is bulky hence difficult to apply / laborious
  • Has less nutrients for given volume
  • May spread weeds
  • Releases nutrients slowly
  • May spread diseases e.g black scurf disease in potatoes

 

  1. d) i) State the factors to consider when citing a compost pit.
  • Nearness to the place where compost will be used
  • Distance to the place where compost will be used
  • Direction of prevailing winds in relation to the position of homestead/ milking shed
  • In a well drained place
  • In a sheltered place
  • Accessibility to the site

 

  1. Describe how to make compost manure
  • Materials are put in a pit or pits 1.2 x 1.2 x 60cm depth
  • Chop large pieces into small pieces
  • Keep compost well moistened and well aerated
  • Add organic materials in layers
  • Add some soil to provide micro-organisms
  • Add ash to provide potash and sulphure
  • Insert a stick to allow free air circulation, test temperature and to test degree of decomposition.
  • Turn compost every two to three weeks to facilitate air
  • Add water whenever compost becomes dry
  • Keep the center warm
  • Avoid contraction or waterlogging
  • Do not use material infested with pests or disease
  • Protect from rain and sun
  • Materials include crop residues, animal waste, old manure, farm yard manure, inorganic fertilizers and top soil.

 

  1. i) How is green manuring done on the farm?
  • A crop is grown and then ploughed under to be incorporated in the soil while it is still green.

 

  1. List the characteristics of green manure crops:
  • Fast growth rate
  • Preferably a legume
  • Leafy / high foliage ratio
  • Ability to rot rapidly

 

  • What are the advantages of green manuring?
  • Fixation of atmospheric nitrogen into the soil
  • Improves soil aeration, water infiltration and absorption
  • Increases organic matter and humus content of the soil
  • Increases crop yields.

 

  1. a) Classify fertilizers by nutrient content.
  • Straight fertilizers contain one type of nutrient e.g nitrogenous, potassic or phosphatic
  • Compound contains two or more e.g DAP, MAP and NPK

 

  1. b) i) Name the common nitrogenous fertilizers.
  • They supply nitrogen and include sulphate of ammonia, ammonium sulphate nitrate, ammonium nitrate, urea and calcium ammonium nitrate.

 

  1. State properties of nitrogenous fertilizers/ (characteristics)
  • Highly soluble in water/ easily leached/ no residual effect
  • Have a scorching / burning effect on plants
  • They are volatile/ change into gaseous form
  • Hygroscopic/ absorb moisture from the atmosphere/ cake easily.

 

  • When are they applied and why at that time?
  • When the crop is already growing e.g for maize at 30-45 cm height
  • At this stage the crop has well developed roots to absorb dissolved nitrogen fertilizer.
  • The crop has well developed leaves for foliar feed
  • Crop is growing fast and required a lot of nitrogen.

 

  1. c) i) Name the common phosphatic fertilizers:
  • They supply phosphorous and include DSP, SSP and TSP

 

  1. When are they applied and why at the time?
  • Applied at planting time
  • Applied for formation, development and early establishment of roots.
  • Has long residual effect/ stays long in the soil
  • Have low mobility
  • Rather insoluble

 

  1. i) Name the common potassic fertilizers
  • supply potassium and include potassium chloride (kcl) and muriate of potash.

 

  1. Characteristics:
  • Easily soluble
  • Mobile
  • No fixation hence
  • Easily absorbed
  • Easily leached
  • Have searching effect.

 

  1. i) What is fertilizer application?
  • Restoring soil fertility by supplying growing plants with nutrients that may be lacking in the soil.

 

  1. List the methods of fertilizer application:
  • Broadcasting
  • Row application
  • Top dressing
  • Side dressing
  • Foliar spraying

 

  • What is top dressing?

 

  1. i) Calculate the amount of K2O (potassium chloride) contained in 400 kg of a compound fertilizer 25:10:5 – 5kg of K2O is contained in 100kg of 25:10:5

Therefore:       400kg of fertilizer contains (400 x 5) = 20kg of K2O

100

  1. A farmer is to apply a compound fertilizer 20:30:10 on a vegetable plot measuring 5 metres long by 4 metres wide, at the rate of 200kg per hectare.
  2. Calculate the amount of the fertilizer the farmer would require for the plot. (show your working)
  • 10,000 sq. m require 200kg of fertilizer
  • therefore 5 x 4 sq. m would require
  • 20 x 200 = 0.4 kg / 400gm

10,000

 

  1. What do the figures 20, 30 and 10 in the fertilizer stand for
  • 20 stands for the ratio of N2 (Nitrogen)
  • 30 stands for the ratio for phosphorous
  • 10 stands for the ratio of potassium

 

  • How much of a fertilizer labeled (20:20:10) should be applied to a plot which requires 30 kg P2O5?
  • 20 kg P2O5 are contained in 100 kg NPK (20:20:10)
  • 30 kg P2O5 contain 100 x 30 = 150 kg NPK

20

  1. a) i) State the importance of the nitrogen cycle
  • Makes available compound nitrogen for use by plants
  • Improves soil fertility

 

  1. Describe the nitrogen cycle:
Nitrogen in atmosphere

 

 

 

Denitrifying

bacteria

 

Animals
Nitrate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Nitrogen is fixed by electrical charge into nitrates
  • Nitrogen dissolve and is absorbed by plants
  • Plants are fed on by animals and release ammonium compounds
  • Nitrifying bacteria/ nitrosmonas change ammonia into nitrite then into nitrate
  • Nitrite then into nitrate
  • The nitrate releases nitrogen into the air or is used up by plants.

 

  • What happens to nitrogen in the soil?
  • May evaporate / volatilize
  • Used up by micro-organisms
  • May be used up by plants
  • May be released into atmosphere by bacteria
  • In the process of denitrification
  • May be leached
  • May be eroded.

 

  1. b) i) State the importance of carbon cycle
  • Provides carbon dioxide for photosynthesis
  • Production of energy for plant and animal use.

 

  1. Describe the carbon

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Compounds in plant residues digested/ oxidised to release carbon dioxide
  • Carbon dioxide in the soil produces carbonic acid, carbonates and bicarbonates.
  • Animals release carbon dioxide to the atmosphere during respiration
  • Plants also release carbon dioxide to the atmosphere during respiration.

 

  • How is carbon lost?
  • Leaching
  • Used by higher plants

 

  1. How can carbon be restored to the atmosphere?
  • Enhancing process of photosynthesis
  • Burning hydrocarbons
  • During plant and animal respiration.

 

  1. a) i) Define crop propagation.
  • Development and multiplication of new individual crops from existing ones.

 

  1. What are the methods of crop propagation?
  • Seeds
  • Vegetative materials

 

  1. b) i) List the different methods of vegetative propagation:
  • Use of cuttings
  • Layering
  • Grafting
  • Budding/ bud grafting
  • Use of storage organs

 

  1. State advantages of vegetative propagation.
  • Desirable characteristics reserved
  • Disease resistance imported from some crops
  • Short period to maturity
  • Quick way of multiplication of low viability plants
  • Gives more than one variety on one crop
  • Short period to maturity
  • Quick way of multiplication of low viability plants
  • Gives more than one variety on one crop.

 

  • State its disadvantages.
  • Cannot produce new varieties
  • Difficult to keep materials free from diseases
  • Vegetative materials cannot be stored for long.

 

  1. i) What are the advantages of seed propagation
  • Easy to store large number of seeds
  • Plant can produce large number of seeds
  • Can produce new plant varieties

 

 

 

 

  1. State the disadvantages of seed propagation
  • Do not breed true to type
  • Some seeds have long dormancy periods
  • Seed may spread undesirable genes quickly
  • Crops may take too long to produce fruits
  • Seeds may be attacked by pests/ diseases

 

  1. i) Give the advantages of early planting
  • Crops make good use of available rainfall
  • Establishment is early hence withstand competition from weeds
  • Crops escape attack by pests and diseases
  • Crops use nutrients well before leaching e.g nitrogen
  • Crops reach market early hence get good market
  • Reduces labour competition for various operations

 

  1. State the factors to consider when selecting seeds or other planting materials for planting
  • Quality of parent plant e.g high yielding, vigorous growth
  • Disease and pest resistance
  • Free from weeds and pest/ disease damage
  • Early maturing/ suitable to the area
  • High quality products/ good size and grade
  • Should be viable

 

  • What are the reasons for seed selection?
  • To obtain high crop yields
  • Reducing chances of disease / pest attack
  • Obtain viable seeds
  • Obtain high quality produce
  • To get seeds suitable to the area

 

  1. What practices are carried out for seeds to ensure that they germinate?
  • Proper seed selection
  • Planting at same depth
  • Proper seedbed preparation
  • Planting at proper moisture content
  • Treating seeds to break dormancy
  • Treating soil against pests and diseases
  • Plant at correct depth.

 

  1. i) List the methods of planting
  • Dibbling
  • Broadcasting
  • Row planting
  • Drilling

 

  1. State the advantages of row planting.
  • Saves on seeds/ economy on seeds
  • Easy to get correct spacing
  • Makes subsequent operations easier

 

  • State the factors which influence planting depth.
  • Soil moisture
  • Soil type
  • Size of seeds.

 

  1. What factors determine crop spacing?
  • Fertility status of soil
  • Moisture content of soil
  • Use to which crop is to be put
  • Machinery to be used in subsequent operations
  • Growth habit of crop
  • Number of seeds per hole
  • Prevalence of certain diseases/ pests
  • Method of planting

 

  1. State the advantages of correct spacing
  • Avoid competition for nutrients, light, water, space
  • Obtain adequate plant population
  • Controls spread of pests and diseases
  • Easy to carry out subsequent operations/ easy to mechanics

 

  1. Why is correct plant population necessary?
  • To obtain high quality crops
  • Helps a farmer to control weeds / pest/ diseases
  • Helps in soil and water conservation
  • To obtain high yields

 

  1. Name the treatments necessary on planting materials before planting?
  • Legume seed inoculation
  • Seed dressing
  • Breaking dormancy of seeds
  • Pre-conditioning seeds

 

  1. List the field practices on crops;
  • Thinning
  • Gapping
  • Pruning
  • Roguing
  • Staking/ training/ propping
  • Earthing

 

  1. i) What is crop rotation?
  • Growing of different crops in an orderly sequence on the same field/ seedbed

 

  1. Why is crop rotation important?
  • Maintains soil fertility/ improves soil structure, aeration, water infiltration, addition of nitrogen by legumes
  • Controls pests/ diseases
  • Makes maximum use of soil nutrients
  • Reduces chance of erosion
  • Controls weeds.

 

  • State the factors to consider when planning a crop rotation system:
  • Nutrient requirement of different crops in the sequence
  • The need to include grass loys in the programme
  • Prevalent pests and diseases
  • Types of crops in the sequence
  • Growth habit of the different crops included.

 

  1. Why is it important to include a grass loy in a rotation programme?
  • Grass loy improves soil structure/ maintains it
  • They add organic matter in the soil/ increase fertility.

 

  1. i) What factors influence the time and stage at which crops are harvested?
  • Purpose of the crop / intended use
  • Kind of storage facilities available
  • Method of harvesting the crop
  • Type of crop to be harvested
  • Moisture content e.g grains

 

  1. Mention the harvesting methods
  • Manual / by hand
  • Mechanical / using machines

 

  • How can crops be prepared before storage?
  • Processing / to put in usable/ acceptable form
  • Inspection and sorting out into grades
  • Hardening of fruits and root crops
  • Drying or freezing to reduce spoilage rate
  • Chemical treatment
  • Adding preservatives.

 

  1. Why dry grains before storage?
  • Prevents germination/ sprouting in storage
  • Reduces pests/ disease attack
  • Reduces attack by fungi.

 

  1. What factors are considered when grading crops for market?
  • Size
  • Colour
  • Shape
  • Dryness
  • Damages on crops

 

  1. i) List the various storage structures on farms
  • Traditional granaries
  • Maize crib
  • Bags
  • Bulk storage e.g silos

 

 

 

  1. State the problems farmers face in storage of produce from farms.
  • Vermin’s, insects and fungi
  • Dampness in stores causes rot
  • Storage facilities are poor
  • Little knowledge on treatment before storage
  • Lack of capital to construct good structures and buy chemicals.

 

  • List the features a good crop storage structure has
  • Raised from the ground adequately
  • Leak-proof roof/ water proof roof
  • Clean or easy to clean
  • Vermin proof
  • Strong enough to support the produce in store
  • Strong enough to keep away thieves
  • Well ventilated
  • Easy to load/ unload

 

  1. a) What is a nursery?
  • A place where seeds are grown to get special attention before being transferred into the main field/ seedbed

 

  1. State the reasons for using a nursery.
  • When seeds are too small
  • Easy to handle/ take care of seedlings
  • Easy to select seedlings
  • Some seeds are delicate hence not viable and require proper care
  • Pest control is easy
  • It is possible to carry out watering
  • Uniformity of plants in the field
  • For bulking up as in the case of sugarcane planting.

 

  1. State the nurseries management practices.
  • Proper watering
  • Hardening off
  • Controlling pests and diseases
  • Thinning or pricking out

 

  1. Explain the following nursery practices.
  2. i) Pricking out.
  • Done to enable seedling to grow vigorously and healthy/avoid overcrowding

 

  1. Hardening off.
  • Carried out to make the seedlings to get used to the actual field conditions.

 

  • Removal of diseased crop plants

 

  1. a) i)  What is health and  diseases
  • Health is the state of the body in which all body organs and systems are functioning normally and are normal.
  • Disease is any alteration in the state of the body or any organs or systems which would interfere with or interrupt the proper functioning.

 

  1. State the importance of keeping livestock healthy
  • To increase quantity of livestock products
  • To increase quality of livestock products
  • To increase profit level/ reduce cost of production
  • To prevent the spread of diseases
  • To increase productive life of an animal
  • To enable them to breed regularly.

 

  • State the signs of illness in cattle
  • Dullness
  • Abnormal urination e.g red water
  • Rough hair-coat / hair falls off
  • Abnormal respiration rate
  • Dry mucus membrane
  • Abnormally low or high temperature
  • Loss of appetite
  • Abnormal pulse rate
  • Decline in production
  • Abnormal defalcation e.g diarrhoea/ constipation
  • Aggressive when approached.

 

  1. List the causes of animal diseases:
  • nutritional cause
  • chemical causes
  • physical cause
  • living organisms.

 

  1. What are the categories of diseases?
  • Bacterial
  • Viral
  • Ricketsial
  • Fungal
  • Protozoan

 

  1. State the general methods of disease control.
  • Use of prophylactic drugs e.g antibiotics/ prophylaxis
  • Proper sanitation/ farm hygiene
  • Use of antiseptics and disinfectants for cleaning
  • Quarantine and isolation to reduce spread
  • Slaughtering, culling or killing affected animals
  • Routine vaccination to prevent infection
  • Killing vectors e.g ticks, tsetsefly, etc
  • Proper nutrition/ feed properly
  • Use proper technique of milking to control mastitis
  • Artificial insemination to avoid breeding disease e.g contagious abortion
  • Proper disposal of carcass e.g for Anthrax
  • Proper housing / avoid overcrowding
  • Treat affected animals to avoid infecting others
  • Avoid injuring animals
  • Rotational grazing to control parasites / internal parasites
  • Prevent / avoid factors causing stress.

 

  1. a) What is a parasite?
  • Any organism that depends on another organism, called host, for nutritional and protective purposes.

 

  1. i) What are external parasites?
  • Live on the host at lease for part of its life cycle.

 

  1. State examples of external parasites:
  • Ticks, tsetsefly, mites, lice, fleas, keds

 

  • State the signs of infestation by external parasites:
  • Anaemia
  • Irritation/ scratching
  • Loss of hair
  • Sores/ wounds on skin
  • Presence of parasites on animals body

 

  1. List the harmful effects of external parasites.
  • Transmit diseases/ cause diseases
  • Suck blood and cause anaemia
  • Irritation and discomfort
  • Poor quality hides and skins
  • Increase production costs.

 

  1. i) State the categories of tick.
  • One-host
  • Two-host
  • Three-host

 

  1. ii) Give the stage of tick’s life cycle in proper order
  • Egg, larva, nymph, adult.

 

iii)  How are ticks controlled?

  • Use of chemicals/ acarioides
  • Ploughing the pastures or crop
  • Burning infested pasture
  • Hand picking and killing
  • Rotational grazing
  • Fencing the farm

 

  1. i) What are internal parasites?
  • Stay inside body of host.

 

  1. Give examples of internal parasites
  • Round worms
  • Flukes/ liver fluke
  • Tapeworms
  • List the harmful effects of internal parasites:
  • Retarded growth/ malnutrition/ emaciation
  • Lower production rate
  • Diarrhoea/ constipation
  • Damage to the organs/ blindness/ pneumonia
  • Blockage of organs
  • Irritation / coughing
  • Anaemia
  • Death

 

  1. State the methods of controlling internal parasites of livestock.
  • Regular drenching / deworming
  • Rotational grazing
  • Draining of swampy areas
  • Proper sanitation in livestock houses
  • Spraying swampy areas with appropriate chemicals
  • Burning pastures t kill eggs
  • Plough the pastures to bury eggs

 

  1. a) Name intermediate hosts for:
  2. i) Tape worm
  • Pig/ cattle
  1. Liver fluke
  • Snail/ mud or vaster snail

 

  1. Why should drenching alone not be an affective control measure for livestock
  • It does not destroy intermediate hosts
  • It does not destroy other stages of the parasites

 

  1. a) What is nutrition?
  • Process by which an animal takes in, digests and assimilates food

 

  1. Describe the various nutritional elements:
  2. i) Carbohydrates
  • Are energy foods
  • Produces heat for all body processes
  • Produces energy for maintaining animal alive
  • Crude fibre in carbohydrates prevents constipation
  • Excess converted to fats and stored
  • Source includes roughage, cereals, tubers, lactose from milk.

 

  1. Proteins
  • Are body building feeds
  • Provides raw materials for synthesis of animal
  • Products e.g milk, eggs, etc
  • Used in synthesis/ growth of cells
  • Used to produce energy
  • For formation of enzymes and antibodies
  • Maintain body tissues/ repair and replacement
  • Deficiency leads to stunted growth, low fertility, low production, wearing out of body tissues and poor resistance to diseases.
  • Fats
  • Source of energy
  • Sources include sunflower, fish meal, seeds, etc

 

  • Classified as water soluble or fat soluble
  • Functions are to promote growth, help in blood clotting, bone formation, muscular activities, prevent diseases and act as catalysts.
  • Sources are most food eaten.

 

  • Maintain osmotic pressure, regulate metabolism, bone formation and development, teeth development, increase food conversion, increase in appetite.
  • Deficiency leads to reduced appetite, loss of weight, decrease in production, poor growth and loss of condition.
  • Sources include mineral supplements.

 

  1. Water

Functions:

  • Regulation of body temperature
  • Make cells turgid and maintain body shape
  • Transport of nutrients
  • Biochemical reactions
  • As a lubricant

 

  • Factors influencing intake.
  • Size of animal
  • Productivity e.g milk
  • Type of food given to animal
  • Physiological status of animal e.g pregnant
  • Ambient temperature
  • Species/ kind of animal

 

  1. Explain what the following means:
  2. i) Concentrates
  • A feed with high protein and/ or energy content but low in fibre
  • Have high available nutrients per unit weight
  • Compact in form mashes/ powder, granules, salt and mineral blocks, etc
  • Fed in small amounts.

 

  1. Roughage
  • A feed with high fibre contents and / or low energy
  • Are bulky, of low digestibility, low in protein, and of plant origin e.g pasture, hay, silage, fodder.

 

  1. What is a ration?
  • Amount of food that will produce essential nutrients to an animal to enable animal nest its nutritional requirements.

 

 

 

  1. Explain the meaning and importance of.
  2. i) Balanced ration
  • Contains all nutritional requirements of animals

 

  1. Production ration:
  • Feed given to an animal over and above the maintenance ration to produce a given product
  • Used for production of products like milk, meat, also for foetal development, work and growth of young animals.

 

  • Maintenance ration.
  • The portion of a feed required by an animal to continue with the vital body processes

 

  1. State the desirable characteristics of a livestock ration:
  • Balanced in terms of nutrients
  • Palatable to the animals
  • Highly digestible
  • Free from poisonous materials/ free of contamination

 

  1. a) i)  Outline the main differences between ruminants and non-ruminants
  • Ruminants have four stomach compartments while non-ruminants have only one.
  • Ruminants chew cud while non-ruminants do not chew cud
  • Absence of ptyalin in ruminant saliva and presence in non-ruminant saliva
  • Ruminant digest a lot of cellulose while non-ruminants digest only a little cellulose.

 

  1. Draw a ruminant stomach e.g cow and explain the functions of the four chambers.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rumen:

  • First chamber
  • Stores and softens food
  • Microbial action of food takes places here

 

Reticulum

  • Separates coarse food from fine food particles

 

Omasum

  • Grinds food and reduces water content

 

Abomasum

  • Has enzymes which act on food thus causing food digestion

 

  1. How is grass digested in the rumen of an adult ruminant?
  • Food is stored in the rumen
  • Coarse grass is regurgitated from the rumen for further chewing in the mouth i.e chewing cud.
  • Saliva that is mixed with feed when chewing cud creates alkaline PH suitable for bacterial action in the rumen.
  • Food undergoes microbial fermentation in the rumen
  • In the rumen carbohydrates are broken down into volatile fatty acids/ acetic acid and butyric acid.
  • Gases like methane, carbon dioxide and hydrogen are released.
  • Proteins are broken down into peptides/ amino acids
  • Amino acids/ essential amino acids are synthesized from ammonia and other non-protein nitrogen by micro-organisms.
  • Micro-organisms also synthesize certain vitamins e.g vitamin B complex, vitamin K.
  • Much of the volatile fatty acids and ammonia are absorbed through bolching i.e carbon dioxide and methane.

 

  1. State the functions of the following parts of poultry digestive system.
  2. i) Crop
  • Softening food
  • Storage of food

 

  1. ii) Gizzard
  • Contains small stones which help to grind food and break down cellulose.

 

  1. a) i) Draw the reproductive system of a hen and explain the stage taken during

         the formation of an egg.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ovary

  • Produces ova

 

Infindibulum

  • Site of fertilization and storage of sperm calls
  • Yolk takes 15 minutes here

 

Magnum

  • Albumen is added
  • Egg takes 3 hours here

 

Isthmus

  • Secretes the shell membrane
  • Water, minerals and vitamins
  • Process takes 1 ¼ hours

 

Uterus/ shell gland
  • Has calcium deposits
  • Shell added round eggs
  • Completes the addition of albumen
  • Process takes 18 – 22 hours

 

Vagina
  • Pigmentation of egg takes place here
  • Socrates mucus which reduces friction and facilitates expulsion of the egg
  • Takes 1. 10 minutes

 

Cloaca
  • Delivers the egg out gently.

 

  • Draw a clearly labeled diagram to show the reproductive system of a cow and state the functions of the labeled parts.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fallopian tube.

  • This is a passage through which ova pass from the ovary.
  • This is where fertilization takes place as the ovum passes to the uterus.

 

Ovary.

  • Produce ova
  • Produce sex hormones e.g oestrogen, progesterone

 

Uterus

  • After fertilization foetus develops until birth here.

 

Vagina and Vulva.

  • Receive male’s sperms
  • Aid in expulsion of young from the womb during birth

 

  1. b) i) What is selection in animal breeding?
  • The process of allowing certain animals to be parents of future generations.

 

  1. State the factors to consider during selection.
  • Increase in yield
  • Improved quality of products
  • Resistance against diseases
  • Resistance to heat or dry conditions
  • Reduced maturity age.

 

  1. i) What is breeding?
  • It involves mating of desirable males and females

 

  1. ii) State the importance of breeding.
  • To obtain high quality products
  • Increase production capacity
  • Import disease resistance
  • Increase tolerance to high ambient temperature
  • To reduce maturity age.

 

  • Give the methods of mating cattle
  • Artificial insemination / AI
  • Natural method

 

  1. i) What is natural mating?
  • Taking a bull to serve cow

 

  1. State its advantages
  • Heat detection by bull
  • Bull stays with cow on heat
  • No need for harder to detect heat.

 

  • State the disadvantages of natural mating?
  • May cause inbreeding if bull is not controlled
  • Expensive/ uneconomical to keep a bull
  • There is a risk of transmission of breeding diseases
  • A bull may cause physical injury to a cow/ handler
  • Only a limited number/ few cows can be mated by one bull within a given period of time.

 

  1. Explain the main systems of breeding.
  2. i) Grading up
  • The process of crossing until an animal having desirable characteristics is obtained.
  • Example is mating Boran bull to Friesian cow to obtain increased production and disease resistance.

 

  1. Line breeding
  • Is the mating of two individuals originating from one ancestor or same line of breeding.

 

  • Cross breeding

Meaning:

  • Mating two pure breeds belonging to different breeds/ mating a pure bred sire of one breed to a high quality grade female of another breed.

 

Reasons:

  • To produce a hybrid with hybrid vigour
  • Imparts desirable genes from either of the parents.

 

What is hybrid vigour?

  • The increased ability and performance of the offspring above the average of the two unrelated parents.

 

  1. Outcrossing
  • Mating two unrelated animals of the same breed

 

 

Meaning.

  • Mating of closely related animals

 

Aim

  • To retain/ preserve certain desirable qualities

 

Disadvantages

  • Increases embryonic mortality/ abortion
  • Reduces disease resistance ability
  • Reduces the vigour of the animal / causes weakness/ abnormality
  • Reduces yield.

 

  1. i) What is artificial insemination?
  • Obtaining semen from males and depositing it in female’s reproductive canal by artificial means.

 

  1. State its advantages.
  • Cheap / can be afforded by many farmers
  • Controls breeding diseases /
  • One male can serve many females
  • Makes use of good bulls/ quick way of improvement
  • Young/ small females not injured
  • Used to prevent inbreeding
  • Semen can be used in distant places

 

  • Give the disadvantages.
  • Can quickly spread undesirable genetic traits
  • Requires special equipment and good communication network
  • Timing of optimum period is difficult
  • Not readily available to small scale farmers.

 

  1. a) Discuss sheep management from selection of breeding stock to lambing.
  2. i) Selection of breeding stock.
  • High fertility and regular breeding
  • Good quality products
  • Fast growing/ early maturing
  • Healthy stock
  • Good mothering instinct
  • Good body conformation/ not physically deformed.

 

  1. Breeding
  • Flush owes by giving extra concentrates/ high plant nutrition
  • Flushing should be started about 3 weeks before mating and continued for three weeks after mating
  • Clip wool around vulva for easy mating/ do crouching
  • Raddling of rams before mating
  • Use one ram for 35 – 60 owes
  • Mating time for lambing to coincide with the season when there is enough pasture.
  • If more than one ram used, use different colour of paste for each ram.
  • Remove rams from owes after mating.

 

  • Management during gestation
  • Food owes on good pasture / concentrates 3 – 4 weeks before lambing / steam up
  • Move owes to clean pasture three weeks before lambing
  • Deworm owes 2 –3 weeks before lambing
  • Vaccinate owes 2 –3 weeks before lambing against common diseases
  • Provide clean water.

 

  1. Lambing management.
  • Observe signs of lambing and supervise/ assist when necessary
  • Disinfect navel cord immediately after lambing
  • Ensure lambs suckle within first 1-2 hours
  • Dagging / clipping of wool around teats after lambing
  • Owes that give birth to more than one lamb should be given extra feeding.

 

  1. Disease the management of lambs from birth upto and including weaning.
  • Weak lambs should be artificially reared
  • Rejected/ orphaned lambs should be given to faster mothers
  • Keep lambs and the owe on good pastures
  • Dock the lambs within the first 2 weeks
  • Castrate male lambs not needed for breeding within the first two weeks
  • Introduce creep feed to the lambs from 6 weeks
  • Dip/ spray / dust sheep as necessary against octoparasites
  • Treat sick animals
  • Wean lambs between 4 – 5 months or when 22kg live weight
  • Put identification marks before weaning
  • Trim hooves before mating
  • Deworm lambs before weaning
  • Keep records

 

  1. a) i) Describe the factors to consider when selecting a gilt for breeding.
  • Maturity ie. Proper age / 12 months or 90 –100 kg live weight
  • Good mothering instinct
  • Fast growth rate
  • Lack of physical defects
  • Healthy i.e lacking history of many diseases

 

 

  1. What characteristics should be considered when selecting a breeding boar?
  • Docile/ good temperament
  • Good body conformation for the breed
  • Lack of physical deformities
  • Strong back and legs
  • Fast growing/ early maturing

 

  1. What preparations should be carried out for a sow one weak before she farrows?
  • Clean and disinfect the farrowing pen
  • Wash / clean and disinfect the sow
  • Treat the sow against external parasites
  • Move the sow to farrowing pen/ orate within a week/ separate from the rest
  • Reduce sow’s ration a day before farrowing
  • Provide heat in the farrowing pen/ creep area
  • Provide clean bedding material
  • Provide bran to the sow as a laxative.

 

  1. Discuss the management of piglets from farrowing to weaning time.
  • Keep watch over farrowing process/ help in the farrowing process
  • Remove mucus and any foreign materials around piglet’s nostrils
  • Put piglet in a safe warm place
  • Tie/ out and disinfect umbilical cord
  • Dispose of afterbirth/ stillborns
  • Ensure piglets suckle colestrum/ piglets suckle immediately after birth
  • Got rid of excess piglets/ rear excess piglets artificially/ give excess piglets to a foster mother
  • Clip off the needle tooth
  • Give piglets iron injection or iron paste to control anaemia
  • Provide croop food to the piglets
  • Give sow extra food according to the number of piglets sucking it
  • Castrate male piglets not intended for breeding at about 3 weeks of age
  • Put identification marks on piglet/ identify piglets using appropriate method
  • Weigh piglets regularly weekly and later monthly
  • Remove sow from farrowing pen to wean piglets
  • Select the piglets to be used for breeding
  • Provide piglets with extra food and water at weaning
  • Keep farrowing pen clean throughout the rearing period
  • Wean between 4 – 8 weeks of age
  • Keep appropriate records
  • Deworm piglets at weaning time
  • Provide adequate water
  • Control diseases as necessary/ vaccination
  • Control external parasites

 

  1. How would you rear a gilt from weaning time to the time it farrows?
  • Food gilt on atleast 3 kg of sow and weaner meal daily
  • Provide clean drinking water
  • Vaccinate the gilt to control common diseases
  • Control external parasites by dusting with pesticides
  • Treat gilt of sick
  • House the gilt next to a boar at age of 12 months
  • Ready to be served/ serve it at right age and weight
  • Keep the pen clean by maintaining clean litter
  • Flush gilt 3-4 weeks before service by feed on high quality diet
  • Take gilt to the boars pen for service and let it stay for at least 12 hours.
  • Observe the return to heat, if any, after three weeks, and repeat the service if necessary.
  • Steaming up should start 1 ½ months before farrowing by giving 3-4 kg of feed
  • 7-10 days before farrowing, the gilt should be washed and moved into a clean and disinfected farrowing pen.
  • Sow and weaner meal should be reduced three days before farrowing
  • Observe the signs of farrowing, and supervise the farrowing process.
  • Deworm the gilt 7-10 days before farrowing.

 

  1. i) Give the reasons for culling a breeding boar.
  • When the boar is old
  • When the health of the boar is poor/ injury
  • When the offsprings are being used as replacement stock/ to stop inbreeding
  • When the bear is too fat and lazy/ back leg weakness
  • When the performance of offsprings is poor
  • When the bear lacks libido / infertile

 

  1. Why should a breeding sow be culled?
  • Goats are browsers/ require less food
  • They can do with little water
  • They are easy to manage
  • Less attack by diseases
  • Good walkers/ good climbers.

 

  1. a) Why are goats suited to most parts of Kenya?
  • Goats are browsers/ require less food
  • They can do with little water
  • They are easy to manage
  • Less attack by diseases
  • Good walkers/ good climbers

 

  1. What are the various management practices a goat farmer should carry out?
  • If goats are kept for milk, the kids should be removed from their mother and fed from a bucket or a bottle
  • The kid should be fed three times a day
  • Solid food should be introduces at 2-3 weeks old
  • Regular vaccination should be carried out after weaning
  • Hoof trimming
  • Confined meat producing goats may be fed on out forage
  • Food on sweet potato vines, napier grass or green maize
  • In addition to grazing, dairy goats food on roughage such as silage
  • Concentrates must be fed to lactating goats to correct any mineral deficiency in roughage / provide mineral lick
  • Proper records on various operations should be kept
  • Spraying against external parasites/ farm hygiene
  • Identification operations e.g tagging, branding, ear-notching tatooing
  • Castrate males not required for breeding

 

 

  1. Give the methods of improving dairy goats.
  • Proper selection/ bulling
  • Proper breeding upgrading/ cross breeding
  • Maintaining good health
  • Proper feeding
  • Proper milking methods
  • Proper housing.

 

  1. a) State the factors that should be considered when selecting rabbits for breeding.
  • Good body size
  • Breeding efficiency
  • Good body conformation
  • Growth rate
  • Good health
  • Freedom from physical deformities.

 

  1. Why is it important that rabbits are fed on a balanced diet?
  • For quick growth
  • To prevent mineral deficiency
  • To give good quality products
  • To give maximum yield
  • Prevention from diseases

 

  1. List the heat signs in a doe.
  • Restlessness
  • Rubs itself against any object
  • Vulva swells
  • Interested in other rabbits
  • May lie on her side

 

  1. Name the types of rabbits keeping.
  • Rabbitry and hutches
  • Mordant i.e movable rabbit house built of light materials
  • Warren
  • Colony system.

 

  1. State the general routine management practices necessary to protect rabbits from diseases and parasites.
  • Cleanliness in the housing units
  • Do not feed on contaminated food
  • Isolation and treatment of sick ones
  • Disinfect cages, water and feed troughs
  • Impose quarantine of two weeks on new rabbits.

 

  1. a) State the uses of bees on the farm.
  • Pollination of flowers
  • Production of honey and wax

 

 

 

  1. Give the functions of the various classes of bees found in a beehive.
  • Queen is fertile and lays egg
  • Drones are fertile males and mate with queen to fertilize the eggs
  • Works are sterile male who take care of all other bees and the hive, and also offer protection to the hive.

 

  1. How can bees be attracted to a hive?
  • Using honey
  • Smear sugar syrup on hive
  • Use of molasses.

 

  1. i) When is it recommended to harvest honey?
  • Late in the evening
  • Early in the morning

 

  1. State why smoke should be used when harvesting honey, but not fire.
  • Smoke makes bees loss aggressive/ less active
  • It does not kill bees/ breed
  • Quality of honey obtained is sufficiently high

 

  • What precautions are necessary when harvesting honey?
  • Avoid excess smoke getting into the hive
  • Prevent rain water from getting into hive
  • Use clean utensils to avoid contamination
  • Use of protective clothes

 

  1. i) Name diseases of bees.
  • Acorive disease
  • Foul breath disease

 

  1. Give examples of pests of bees.
  • Safari ants
  • Bee lose
  • Private wasps
  • Wax moth
  • Birds
  • Honey badger
  • Beetles
  • Robber bees

 

  1. What makes the camel suited to living and working in desert conditions?
  • Can tolerate high temperature
  • A browser which survives well on scanty vegetation
  • Travels long distance and for several days without water
  • Hooves are suited to walk on sand

 

  1. Mention the uses of donkeys.
  • Transportation
  • Work e.g pulling ox-ploughs for cultivation.

 

 

  1. b) What management practices are necessary to enable a donkey work

efficiently?

  • Proper harnessing to avoid injuries
  • Foot care and hoof trimming when necessary
  • Proper feeding
  • Enough rest after work
  • Treat when sick
  • Drenching using horse dewormer.

 

  1. a) i)  Explain cropping in fish farming.
  • The removal of marketable size of fish from the pond to provide more food for those left behind.

 

  1. What is fish harvesting?
  • Removal of all fish from the pond

 

  1. List the features that are necessary in fish-pond construction.
  • Inlet for fresh water
  • Spillway to remove excess/ overflow water
  • Outlet for drainage e.g when harvesting fish or replacing water
  • Fence to keep away predators/ thieves
  • Screen to prevent fish from escaping.

 

  1. Explain the maintenance practices necessary for a fish pond.
  • Maintain optimum level of water by regulating inflow and outflow of water
  • Immediate blockage of water leakages
  • Remove any debris
  • Out weeds or grass growing around pond
  • Fertilize pond regularly
  • Provide enough food to fish

 

  1. a) i)  How can skin of an animal be damaged while animal is still alive?
  • Poor branding
  • Scratching by sharp objects such as wires / whipping/ injury by other animals
  • Skin diseases
  • Bites by parasites.

 

  1. State the treatment given to hides and skins after flaying.
  • Washing
  • Trimming
  • Tanning
  • Draining and fleshing
  • Preserving by salting

 

  • What are the uses of hides and skins?
  • Source of revenue
  • Used to make items e.g shoes, etc

 

  1. b) i) Give reasons why honey harvesting at night is not encouraged.
  • To avoid bush fires
  • Because one may not distinguish between honey combs and brood combs
  • Loss damage to combs
  • Little contamination of honey
  • To avoid killing bees.

 

  1. Describe the procedure of harvesting honey.
  • Wear protective clothing
  • Approach beehive from behind
  • Move smoothly
  • Puff smoke, using smoker, into entrance holes
  • Inspect combs thoroughly
  • Harvest only where scaled combs
  • Leave enough combs with honey, especially in dry season, to avoid starving bees
  • Brush out bees from honey combs
  • Avoid crushing bees.

 

  • State the methods of extracting honey from honey combs
  • Using heat method
  • Crush and strain
  • Using of extraction.

 

  1. iv) What factors influence the quality of honey?
  • Presence of impurities/ foreign materials
  • Source of nectar / food type
  • Stage of ripening/ maturity / under 17% moisture content
  • Season of the year/ rainy season/ flowering
  • Method of extraction.

 

  1. c) Describe hoe to kill and prepare a rabbit carcass
  • Kill by dislocating the neck
  • Hold by back legs in the hand
  • Strike a sharp blow with edge of hand, at base of skull behind the ears
  • This causes bone separation and breaks blood vessels of the neck
  • Hook up rabbit immediately by one leg
  • Remove head to assist bleeding
  • Slit abdominal wall and eviscerate / remove visceran/ remove internal organs
  • Dry the skin using appropriate method
  • Sell meat locally.

 

  1. i) State the difference between wool and hair.
  • Wool is outer coat of sheep made of many fibres with crimp
  • Appearance that make the fibres elastic
  • Hair is smooth, lacks waviness and is inelastic

 

  1. What is fleece?
  • Wool which has been shorn/ out from sheep

 

  • Give the qualities of good wool.
  • Clean / loss
  • Long
  • Fine/soft/wool count
  • Be of pure colour/white
  • Strong
  • Elasticity/ crimpy.

 

  1. List the precautions to be taken during the sheep shearing process to ensure good quality wool
  • Shearing on dry and fine weather/ season
  • Use clean floor to avoid fouling of wool
  • Avoid half cut wool as this lowers quality

 

  1. How are fish processed before cooking?
  • Scaling
  • Removal of offal’s/ eviscerating
  • Sun drying or smoking to slow down deterioration

 

  1. ii) List the methods of preserving fish before sale to consumers
  • Splitting then drying in the sun
  • Smoking

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM THREE TOPICS

 

  1. a) Define farm layout
  • refers to how land on the farm is allocated to various uses.

 

  1. What is a good layout
  • One which allows easy management of various enterprises on the farm
  • One which satisfies the farmer and give him comfort.

 

  1. State the factors to consider when planning the layout of a mixed farm.
  • Slope of land/ drainage / topography
  • Direction of prevailing winds
  • Type of soil
  • Type of enterprises required/ other enterprises on farm
  • Infrastructure/ accessibility/ other enterprises on farm
  • Government regulation
  • Existing permanent structures on the farm
  • Land size
  • Security of enterprises
  • Existing ammonites e.g electricity, water
  • Panoramic view

 

  1. a) List the common structures found on the farm.
  • Nursery beds –  Beehives
  • Crushes –  silo
  • Calf pens –  Compost heap/ pit
  • Fish ponds –  Store
  • Dairy shed / milking parlour –  rabbitry and hutches
  • Fences
  • Dips
  • Pig sty

 

  1. Explain the factors to be considered in constructing a farm structure
  2. i) Sitting
  • Sitting the structure in rotation to other buildings/ farm activities/ considering security/ accessibility/ topography/ drainage

 

  • Orientation of the building in relation to wind direction/ light/ topography

 

  • Design / purpose
  • Design of the structure to fit the intended purpose or use/ to fit the climate of the area/ size of enterprise.

 

  1. Materials
  • Choice of building materials considering type/ cost/ durability/ availability.
  • Cost of structure/ finances available to put up the structure.

 

 

  • Alternative uses of the structure

 

  • Construction skills
  • Availability of needed skills

 

  • Governments regulations
  • e follow the legal government regulations

 

  1. Type of building
  • Permanent or temporary

 

  1. Future expansion
  • Should consider space for future expansion.

 

  1. State the factors to consider when selecting materials to construct farm structures.
  • Durability of materials
  • Cost of materials
  • Availability of skilled labour for construction
  • Capital available
  • Availability of materials
  • Strength of materials

 

  1. i) Name the types of fences used on farms.
  • Barbed wire fence
  • Wooven wire/ wire knotting/ chicken wire fence
  • Electric fence
  • Pole fence/ timber / wooden/ post and rail fence
  • Wall fence/ stone fence
  • Plain wire fence
  • Hedges/ live fence.

 

  1. State the advantages of barbed wire fence and any of its disadvantages in livestock farming.

Advantages

  • Effective in stopping animals from forcing their way out.

Disadvantages.

  • May injure animals
  • Expensive per unit weight or per given gauge

 

  • How are fences constructed?
  • Locate the corners
  • Clear the fencing area
  • Make corners, strainers and passes
  • Dig holes to specified depths
  • Firm the posts by use of concrete mixtures
  • Drill holes on the posts and fix the wires
  • Strain the wires and fix onto the posts
  • Fix the droppers to reinforce the wires.

 

 

  1. Describe the uses of farm fences.
  • Provide security from thieves, wildlife/ control trespassers
  • Enable paddocking/ rotational grazing/ mixed farming
  • Control pests and diseases by keeping away other animals from the farm
  • Demarcate boundaries
  • Live fences act as windbreaks/shelter belts
  • Provide aesthotic value to the farm
  • Increase farm/ land value
  • Help n soil and water observation in case of hedges
  • Hedges may be a source of fruits and their trimmings may be a source of fodder or firewood or compost manure
  • Isolate animals for different purposes e.g sick, bulls, calves, pregnant etc.
  • Provide privacy.

 

  1. What maintenance practices are carried out on farm fences?
  • Replacing broken posts, droppers etc
  • Replacing / tightening loose wires
  • Control termites and fungi from causing damage
  • Replace struts if broken.

 

  1. State the uses of a crush.
  • Hand spraying or hand dressing to control ticks
  • Drenching or deworming against internal parasites
  • Artificial insemination
  • Applying identification marks
  • Taking temperature
  • Pregnancy diagnosis
  • Milking
  • Dehorning
  • Castration

 

  1. (i) Name the main sections of a cattle dip stating its functions.
  • Assembly yard is a waiting area for holding the animals before dipping
  • Footbath for washing mud from cattle hooves to prevent dip contamination’s
  • Dip tank which contains dip wash into which cattle got immersed
  • Draining race/ drying race for holding animals after dipping to let the dip wash drip.

 

  1. State the main use of a dip.
  • Where animals are immersed in a solution of acaricide and water/ dipwash to control external parasites e.g ticks.

 

  1. State the factors to consider when planning to construct a grain store.
  • Sited on a well-drained ground
  • Free ventilation without draughts
  • Rainproof/ leakproof
  • Adequate floor space
  • Easy to clean
  • Vermin/ pest proof/ have rat guards
  • Keep away thieves/ predators.

 

 

  1. i) State the features of an ideal calf porn
  • Well ventilated
  • Leakproof
  • Well drained floor
  • Clean
  • Draught free
  • Enough space for calf

 

  1. What facts influence siting of calf pens?
  • Topography / drainage of land
  • Accessibility of pen
  • Location of existing farm structures/ amenities
  • Wind direction
  • security

 

  • Give the maintenance practices of a permanent calf pen.
  • Repair / replace worn-out parts
  • Whitewash walls of calf pens
  • Regularly clean and disinfect the calf pen
  • Ensure that the drainage system is working.

 

  1. Name the types of calf pens.
  • Movable pen
  • Permanent

 

  1. i) What are the requirements for constructing a poultry house for deep litter   system?
  • Roof to discourage insects
  • Properly managed litter
  • Enough space at food and water troughs
  • Provide nests
  • Provide perch.

 

  1. Give the maintenance practices necessary in a dip litter poultry house.
  • Repair broken parts of the house
  • Clean and remove the cobwebs and any dirt
  • Improve drainage
  • Fumigate against pests and diseases
  • Paint some parts of the house.

 

  1. i) State the factors to consider in siting a rabbit hutch.
  • The site should be safe and secure especially in or near a homestead
  • It should be sized in an accessible place
  • The place should be sheltered from strong prevailing winds
  • The area should be well drained
  • It should be located on the leeward side of the farm to avoid bad smell

 

  1. What factors should be considered in selecting the construction materials?
  • Consider availability or materials
  • Durable materials are preferred
  • Consider cost of the material to use
  • Select roofing materials that can keep off rain
  • Some materials for the walls should allow enough light and ventilation
  • Select some materials for the floor that will allow drainage of urine and from passage of droppings.

 

  • Give the environment of a rabbit hutch.
  • Lack proof
  • Easy to clean
  • Free from strong wind/ draught
  • Safe from prodiors/ raised above ground level
  • Floor to allow from drainage of urine and droppings
  • Well ventilated
  • Adequate space.

 

  1. State the reasons for raising rabbit hutches above ground level.
  • To ensure security from attack by dogs, cats, etc
  • To hasten drying of bedding
  • To avoid dampness from the ground

 

  1. i) State the factors to consider when designing a piggery to ensure good health of pigs.
  • Ventilation
  • Space requirements according to recommended stocking rate
  • Basking/ exercise area
  • Security of piglets e.g constructing guard rails
  • Drainage
  • Position of food troughs and water troughs in relation to dunging area.

 

  1. a) State the reasons why maintenance of farm structures is important.
  • Avoid accidents when using them
  • Ensure efficiency of usage of structure
  • Prolong the life of the structure/ farm

 

  1. a) i)  What is land tenure?
  • Ownership of rights to the use of land

 

  1. List the land tenure
  • Collective e.g communal and cooperative tenure
  • Individual e.g owner-occupier, company and tenancy and landlordism/ lease held system

 

  1. i) What is land refers?
  • Any organised action taken to improve the structure of land tenure and land use/ deliberate change in the land tenure system

 

  1. State the methods of land refers.
  • Land consolidation
  • Land subdivision/ fragmentation
  • Land adjudication and registration/ demarcation
  • Settlement and resettlement

 

 

  1. i) Distinguish between settlement and resettlement.
  • Settlement is planned transfer of population from one area to another
  • Resettlement is transferring population from more densely populated area to less populated one.

 

  1. State the objectives of settlement and resettlement
  • To settle the land lost
  • To make use of idle land
  • To create self employment
  • To relieve population pressure
  • To increase agricultural population.

 

  • What were the contributions of settlement schemes?
  • Have increased production
  • Better use of extension services
  • Increased agricultural credit
  • Marketing cooperatives are being used
  • There are more improved livestock
  • Acceleration in development of infrastructure

 

  1. a) i)  What is soil erosion?
  • Detachment and carrying away of top soil by wind and water.

 

  1. Name the types of soil erosion.
  • Splash/ raindrop erosion
  • Gully erosion
  • Streambank erosion
  • Rill erosion
  • Shoot erosion

 

  • State the factors which influence the rate of soil erosion.
  • Amount and intensity of rainfall
  • Slope/ topography
  • Vegetation cover
  • Ploughing up and down the slope
  • Soil type
  • Soil depth

 

  1. i) What is soil conservation
  • The use of resource without rendering them unproductive due to erosion or depletion of plant nutrients.

 

  1. State the reasons for soil conservation
  • Prevent loss of plant nutrients from the soil/ to maintain the soil fertility
  • Maintain soil structure.

 

  1. List the methods of soil and water conservation.
  • Filter strips
  • Out-off drains
  • Grassed waterways
  • Mulching
  • Trash/ stone lines
  • Ridging
  • Terraces
  • Diversion waterways
  • Contour farming
  • Forests/ afforestation
  • Gabbions/ check dams/ porous dams
  • Dams and reservoirs
  • Bunds

 

  1. a) What is a weed?
  • Any plant growing where it is not required and has more disadvantages than advantages

 

  1. How are weed classified?
  • Life cycle
  • Morphology
  • Habitat

 

  1. List the economic classes caused by weeds.
  • Compete with crops are nutrients, space, light, water
  • Reduce quality of products
  • Some are
  • Some block irrigation channels and deprive fish of oxygen
  • Some lower quality of pasture
  • They increase production costs

 

  1. Describe the wed control methods
  2. Cultural

Includes mulching, cover cropping, field hygiene, timely planting, crop rotation, using clean planting materials, etc.

 

  1. Mechanical:
  • By use of tillage, cultivation, slashing / defoliation and uprooting weeds

 

  • Biological
  • Deliberate use of a biological agent e.g insect, virus, fungi animal to reduce the population of a target weed.

 

  • Use of herbicides to kill weeds
  • Herbicides are chemicals which kill plants.

 

  1. a) i)  What is a crop pest?
  • Any organism that destroys/ is a nuisance to crops, either directly xxxxx, by feeding on tem or introducing disease causing

 

  1. ii) Name the categories of crop pest?
  • Insects –  Micro-organisms
  • Mites –  Higher animals
  • Birds –  Molasses
  • Nematodes –  Rodents
  • How can pests be controlled on the farm?
  • By use of chemical e.g pesticides
  • Early planting of crops
  • Field hygiene e.g destruction of affected crop residues
  • Use of trap crops, trap cropping
  • Close season
  • Crop rotation
  • Growing resistant varieties
  • Trapping and killing pest.

 

  1. What is integrated pest management?
  • The use of a combination of various control methods

 

  1. i) What is a plant disease.
  • Any alteration in the state of a plant or of its parts, which interrupts or disturbs the proper performance of functions of its parts.

 

  1. Name the disease causing factors in crops.
  • Viruses
  • Mineral deficiency / nutritional in balance
  • Bacterial
  • Fungi
  • Physiological disorders

 

  • List the various practices carried out in the field to control crop diseases.
  • Crop rotation
  • Close season
  • Roguing/ destroying infected
  • Planting disease free plants/ use of certified seeds
  • Early planting/ timely planting
  • Pruning/ proper spacing
  • Weed control
  • Use of resistance varieties
  • Quarantine
  • Application of appropriate chemicals
  • Use of clean equipment
  • Heat treatment.

 

  1. Discuss the growing of the following crops.
  2. Sorghum
  3. i) Seedbed preparation
  • Clearing land
  • Cultivating the land to get rid of perennial weeds
  • Harrow the land to fine tilth

 

  1. Planting
  • Planting at beginning of rains
  • Plant in rows/ broadcast seeds
  • Spacing 60 x 1 cm
  • 3 – 5 seeds per hole
  • depth 2-5-5 cm
  • seedrate 2-15 kg per hectare
  • apply phosphatic fertilizers at planting at a rate of 20-40 kg per hectare

 

  • Weeding
  • Keep them weed free from early stages
  • Cultivate regularly to control weeds
  • Apply herbicides especially on breed leafed weeds

 

  1. Field management practices
  • Thinning/ thin and leave two vigorous plants
  • Thin when 5 cm long/ tall

 

  1. Pests and diseases.
  • Scare the birds
  • Apply appropriate insecticides to control stalk bearer
  • Fungal disease control/ use resistant varieties, plant certified seeds

 

  1. Harvesting
  • Ready 3-9 months depending on variety
  • Cut head/ panicle

 

  1. Maize
  2. i) Seedbed preparation
  • Clear land early before the rains
  • Harrow the land to medium tilth
  • Cultivate land to get rid of parannial weeds and allow vegetation to rot.

 

  1. Planting
  • Done at the beginning of rains
  • Dry planting is recommended
  • Spacing varies with variety i.e 23-30 cm x 57 – 90 cm
  • Plant seed at 2.5 – 10 cm deep
  • Planting manually or mechanically
  • Apply DAP at 100 – 150 kg/ hectare in planting hole
  • Top dress with CAN at 200kg / hectare

 

  • Weeding
  • Weed at early stage to reduce competition for moisture
  • Hand weeding done
  • Herbicides sometimes used e.g simazine/ artrazine before germination and MCPA / 2,40 after germination.

 

  1. Field management
  • Thinning done early to get consistent growth
  • Gapping done early

 

  1. Pests control
  • Scare birds e.g quellea and weaver birds
  • Use appropriate control of pests e.g aphids, army worm e.g insecticides.

 

 

  1. Disease control
  • Use appropriate control e.g fungicides for smut, rust and maize stork

 

  • Harvesting
  • Depending on altitude and variety
  • Stock out maize or harvest cabs when dry in field

 

  1. Cassava
  2. i) Basic requirements
  • Requires altitude of below 1500m.
  • Moderate rainfall/ drought resistant
  • Sandy soils / free draining soils

 

  1. Seedbed preparation and planting
  • Deep ploughing recommended/ prepare ridges
  • Plant stem cuttings 40cm long at 45o or less
  • Spacing is 1.5m x 0.9m
  • Bury half stem in soil.

 

  • Field management
  • Control weeds at early stages of growth.

 

  1. Pest control
  • White scale controlled by clean planting materials.

 

  • Mosaic disease causes melting of leaves and deformed tubers
  • Control by planting resistant varieties.

 

  1. Harvesting
  • Remove individual tubers or uproot whole plant
  • Use stick or forked jembes to harvest
  • Yields about 7-10 tons per hectare

 

  1. Millet
  2. i) Basic requirements
  • Altitude from 0-1200m
  • Rainfall of 500-600mm per annum
  • Light sandy soils

 

  1. Seedbed preparation and planting
  • Prepare seedbed of fine tilth
  • Spacing is 60 x 30 cm
  • Sometimes interplanted with other crops

 

  • Field management
  • Top dress with nitrogenous fertilizer when 30cm long
  • Weeding done upto tillering stage

 

 

 

  1. Pest control
  • Quelea birds cat seeds at miling stage
  • Controlled by scaring

 

  1. Disease control
  • Dowry mildow control using fungicides and crop rotation
  1. Harvesting
  • Individual heads out using knife or sickle

 

  1. Sweet potatoes
  2. i) Basic requirements
  • Altitude of C-2400m
  • 750 mm of rainfall per year / drought resistant
  • wide variety of soils
  • warm to cool climate

 

  1. Seedbed preparation and planting
  • Prepare flat seedbed/ ridges
  • Plant cutting in form of apical pieces of vines
  • Bury atleast half of vine.

 

  • Field management
  • Gives good yield with farm yard manure
  • Weeding in early stages only as later covers soil

 

  1. Pest and disease control
  • Control sweet potato weevils with insecticides and crop rotation
  • Virus B transmitted by white flies causes stunting
  • Control by planting resistant varieties

 

  • Harvest few tubers at a time because of storage problem
  • Use sticks for harvesting
  • Good yield is 38 tones per hectare.

 

  1. i) Areas where grown
  • Kano plains (Ahero), Mwea Tabere, Bunyala Irrigation Scheme.

 

  1. Conditions necessary for growing rice.
  • Availability of water for irrigation
  • Topography flat land
  • Good soil type – with good water holding
  • Favourable temperature/ warm and humid
  • Availability of labour.

 

  • Planting / transplanting.
  • In flooded field
  • Flood 1/3 of height of seedlings
  • Spacing 10 x 10 cm or 10 x 20 cm or 20 x 10cm
  • Seedlings 15 – 20cm in height/ after 1 – 1 ½ months
  1. Fertilizers
  • Phosphates at planting at 55kg/ ha P2O5
  • Nitrogen at planting at 15 kg/ha N
  • Top dress 3 weeks after applying N at rate of 15kg/ ha N.

 

  1. Weeds
  • Uproot woods
  • Use chemical herbicides (2,4 – N)
  • Start with clean field

 

Pests Control
–     Birds –     Scaring
–     Rice hispid, stem –     Spray with BHC, DDT dimention
–     Field rats –     Field rat poison
   

 

Diseases Control
–   Rice blast –     Use loss nitrogen
–     Use resistant varieties
–   yellow mottling –     Quarantine.

 

  • Water regulation.
  • Maintain water depth at 1/3 height of plant throughout growing period
  • Ensure fresh water supply
  • Drain off water 3 weeks before harvesting.

 

  1. Harvesting
  • Rice reaches maturity at 4-5 months/ harvest when dry
  • Out stem at base/ any correct method
  • Dry to 12-14% moisture content
  • Bag for dispatch.

 

  1. a) What do the following terms mean?
  2. i) Pasture
  • A cover of grass or legume or grass and legume used for feeding livestock.

 

  1. Forage Crop
  • A plant which either grows naturally or is cultivated by farmers and used for feeding livestock.

 

  • A forage plant that is grown, harvested and given to livestock when ready.

 

  1. Outline the methods that can be used to improve permanent potatoes.
  • Irrigation
  • Control weeds
  • Top dress with N-fertilizers to avoid denudation
  • Reseeding
  • Out back dry and unpalatable atoms with tractor mower to encourage fresh regrowth after grazing cycle
  • Controlled grazing.

 

  1. What factors determine the forage crop species to be established at a place?
  • Yield of forage species in terms of herbage is quantity per unit of land
  • Resistance to pests and diseases
  • Adaptability to the area where it is established
  • Ease with which it can be established and eradicated
  • Whether pure or mixed stand
  • Growth rate and fast establishment

 

  1. i) In which form can pasture be considered?
  • Silage
  • Hay
  • Standing hay

 

  1. Why is it important to conserve pasture?
  • To distribute available forage for livestock throughout the year
  • To provide feed for dry season
  • To ensure better and full utilization of the available land
  • Conserved forage can be sold for money.

 

  1. a) List the routes though which pathogens can enter the body of an animal.
  • Skin, eye, nose, mouth, anus, ear, genital organs, mammary glands, navel cord.

 

  1. i) What is immunity?
  • The ability of an animal to resist infection by disease

 

  1. Name the types of immunity.
  • Natural immunity
  • Artificial immunity

 

  • What is a vector?
  • A carrier of disease from one organism to another. It does not cause disease itself.

 

  1. Explain the term incubation in livestock diseases
  • Period between infection by pathogen and showing of symptoms of the disease.

 

  1. Discuss the following diseases under appropriate sub-headings.
  2. Red water
  3. i) Causal agent
  • Protozoa / bibesia bigomina

 

  1. Symptoms
  • Red urine
  • Fever/ high temperature
  • Loss of appetite
  • Anaemia
  • Loss of production
  • Jaundice
  • Swollen lymph glands
  • Licking soil
  • Increased breathing

 

  • Control measures
  • Tick control e.g spraying, dipping, fencing, etc

 

  1. Anthrax
  2. i) Causal agent
  • Bacteria / bacillus enthracis

 

  1. Symptoms
  • Sudden death
  • Bleeding form external crifices
  • Bleated carcass
  • High temperature/ shivering
  • Dullness
  • Bloody diarrhoea / milk ha blood stains
  • Non-clotting blood
  • Lack of rigor nortis
  • Loss of appetite

 

  • Control measures
  • Vaccination
  • Quarantine/ isolation
  • Treatment of the herd/ tread early with antibiotics
  • Proper disposal/ burying/ burning
  • Public education

 

  1. Newcastle
  2. i) Causal agent
  • Virus

 

  1. Symptoms
  • Watery diarrhoea
  • Staggering with dreeping wings and bent neck
  • Soft-shelled eggs
  • Sneezing
  • Sudden death
  • Nervousness/ restlessness
  • Loss of production
  • Thick mucus discharge from nostrils/ difficulty in breathing.

 

  • Control measures.
  • Vaccination
  • Disinfection/ proper hygiene
  • Quarantine
  • Proper disposal / killing the flock
  • Use birds that are certified to be clean
  • Examination and treatment of suspected birds.
  1. East Cost Fever (ECF)
  2. i) Causal organism
  • Protozoa/ theilleria parva

 

  1. Symptoms
  • Loss of appetite
  • Fever/ high temperature
  • Loss of production
  • Loss of condition
  • Small hemorrhages in vulva
  • Oral mucus discharge
  • Swelling of lymph glands/ nodes
  • Coughing
  • Dullness
  • Lachrimation/ running eyes/ tears
  • Diarrhoae
  • Partial blindness

 

  • Control
  • Use appropriate drugs e.g clexen
  • Control ticks

 

  1. Foot and Mouth Disease (FMD)
  2. i) Causal agent
  • Virus

 

  1. Symptoms
  • Dullness
  • Loss of appetite / difficulty in eating
  • Profuse and continous salivation
  • Lameness / wounds on heaves
  • Loss of milk
  • Wounds/ blisters on tongue, gums and udder
  • Snacking of mouth
  • Loss of condition

 

  • Control
  • Slaughter affected animals
  • Quarantine/ isolation
  • Regular vaccination

 

  1. Foot rot disease
  2. i) Cause
  • A bacterium or virus/ fusifermis SPP

 

  1. Symptoms
  • Lameness/ inability to walk
  • Selling of affected feet
  • Wound and ulcers/ pus/ foul smelling in affected feet
  • Anorexia/ loss of appetite
  • Loss of weight/ emaciation
  • Control
  • Trim heaves regularly
  • Keep grazing land free from sharp objects
  • Avoid grazing sheep in swampy areas
  • Apply feet bath using a disinfectant e.g copper sulphate solution
  • Isolate sick ones from healthy ones
  • Treat affected sheep to avoid spread

 

  1. Brucellesis (contagious abortion)
  2. i) Cause
  • Bacterial (Brucella abortus)

 

  1. Symptoms
  • Premature birth of young
  • Abortion at 5-7 months
  • Retained placenta
  • Placenta when left will show aedema, necrosis and appears bloody
  • Barrenness
  • Yellow and brown sticky odourless discharge from vulva

 

  • Control
  • Use of artificial insemination
  • Vaccination
  • Test culling and slaughter infected females
  • Clean animal dwelling houses
  • Boil milk
  • Aborted foetuses should not be touched using bare hands

 

  1. a) i)  Name the sources of farm power
  • Human power
  • Wind power
  • Animal power
  • Oil/ fuel power/ gas/ paraffin
  • Electricity
  • Solar energy
  • Wood/ charcoal
  • Biogas power
  • Nuclear energy

 

  1. Mention the ways in which solar energy is used on the farm.
  • Production of electric energy by use of photo-electric cell panel
  • Electricity used for lighting, pumping water, healing etc
  • Direct drying of crops
  • Water heating
  • Cooking

 

  • Give the disadvantages of using wood fuel or charcoal as a source of power.
  • Inefficient use of energy
  • Leads to destruction of environment through indiscriminate felling of trees
  • Snake produced pollutes environment
  • Exhaustible source of power
  1. i) What are the requirements for animals used as a source of farm power?
  • Good health/ healthy
  • Fully grown/ maturing
  • Well fed.

 

  1. Give the benefits of using animal power on the farm.
  • Cheaper t buy than machines
  • Loss time used than using human power
  • Wider range of relief than tractor e.g hills
  • Loss maintenance cost e.g no fuel needed
  • Does more work than human power
  • Not much skill and training needed to operate them
  • Animals can provide manure

 

  • State the limitations of using animal power
  • Low work output than tractor power
  • Extra piece of land required to grow forage for them
  • Animals cannot be used in use tsetsefly infested areas
  • Animals tire quickly
  • Tiresome since it also requires two handlers
  • Requires time to train animals and handlers
  • Theft and production problems
  • Slower rate of work therefore not suitable in large scale farming
  • Cause damage to crops when used in weeding.

 

  1. i) State the advantages of farm mechanization.
  • The rate at which a job can be completed is increased/ improves efficiency
  • Number of man-days involved is reduces/ labour saving
  • Products harvested mechanically are more uniform
  • Uniformly harvested products are more acceptable to consumers
  • Timeliness of operations
  • Contributes to increased farm production
  • Contributes to increased farm productivity
  • Uniformity of operations e.g ploughing, planting
  • Less labour / easy

 

  1. What are its disadvantages?
  • Capital outlay on machinery is high
  • May lead to problem of soil capping
  • Mechanization is more worthwhile in large scale farming enterprises
  • Maintenance is expensive
  • May create an unemployment problem
  • Requires skilled manpower
  • Requires uniform produce
  • Tractors and ox-ploughs can not be used on steep land

 

  • Why is mechanisation on small scale farming not worthwhile?
  • Low level of capital investment
  • Use of machinery is uneconomical
  • No efficiency in farm operations.

 

  1. i) Name the tractor drawn implements.
  • Trailers, ploughs (disc and mouldboard), harrows and mowers

 

  1. Name the animal drawn implements.
  • Ox – plough, ox-time cultivator, ex-cart

 

  1. State the functions of the following parts of a mouldboard plough.
  2. i) Landside
  • Stabilises the plough/ absorbs side thrust caused by furrow slice

 

  1. Mouldboard
  • Inverts furrow slice/ buries woods/ trash

 

  • Coulter
  • Vertically cuts the soil or trash

 

  1. Share point.
  • Digs/ opens/ cuts or breaks the ground

 

  1. Frog
  • Holds the frame onto the moldboard, landslide and share.

 

  1. State the functions of the following principal parts of a disc plough.
  2. i)
  • Part of the plough on which all parts are joined

 

  1. Hitch most.
  • Point at which the top link is connected to tractor

 

  • Scrapper
  • Inverting furrow slice/ cleans disc

 

  • Cutting the ground/ ploughing/ inverting/ overturning

 

  1. Hub
  • Contains roller bearings that allow the disc to roll while in operation.

 

  1. Standard
  • Holds the discs

 

  • Springs
  • Absorbs vertical shock of plough

 

  • Furrow wheel
  • Absorbs side thrust/ used for adjusting the depth of ploughing.

 

  1. Crossbar
  • Attachment for left and right arm
  1. Hitch point
  • Where plough is attached to tractor.
  1. i) State the sources of tractor hire services
  • Government hire services
  • Private contractors
  • Individual farmers
  • Some cooperatives

 

  1. Give the advantages of tractor hire services.
  • A farmer does not incur cost of buying tractor
  • No cost of maintenance by farmer
  • No risks of owning a tractor
  • The farmer is able to carry out the task faster

 

  • What are its disadvantages?
  • May not be available when required
  • May be very expensive to hire
  • Some operators can produce poor quality work.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORM FOUR TOPICS.

 

  1. a) Discuss the management of dairy cattle to ensure high milk production.
  2. i) Selection
  • Select good animals on the basis of high yield
  • Select healthy animals
  • Select animals with good body conformation
  • Should be of high fertility level
  • To have good temperament it docile cattle
  • Poor animals should be coulled
  • Selecting and culling should be a continous exercise

 

  1. Breeding management
  • Use superior bulls or semen from superior bulls
  • Breed heifers when fully mature i.e right age and size
  • Breed cows 60-90 days after calving to maintain a calving internal of 1 year.

 

  • Feeding management.
  • Feed on a balanced diet, water, minerals, vitamins
  • Give adequate fee
  • Feed should be clean and free from contamination.

 

  1. Housing
  • Provide proper housing i.e well drained, clean, well ventilated, well lit
  • Avoid overcrowding it provide enough space.

 

  1. Disease and parasite control
  • Keep animals healthy by routine vaccination
  • Control external parasites by spraying using appropriate drugs e.g acaricides
  • Control internal parasites by routines drenching using appropriate drugs
  • Treat sick animals
  • Isolate and put new animals under quarantine
  • Avoid physical injuries to animals by avoiding sharp objects or holes and using plain wires, not barbed
  • Improve sanitation i.e hygiene or cleanliness in the farm

 

  1. General management practices.
  • Milk at regular intervals
  • Use proper milking techniques
  • Observe heat signs and signs of disease closely
  • Handle animals properly
  • Keep proper and good records and use them to evaluate the herd.

 

  1. Describe the management of a dairy cow from the time of conception until calving (gestation period)
  • Small breeds like Jersey and Guernsey should be served at 15-18 months of age having attained 250-270 kgs
  • Large breeds at 18-20 months of age or 280 –320kg live weight
  • Milking is done for 7 months after conception
  • Pregnancy diagnosis ie. Checking conception is carried out in the fourth month after insemination.
  • Drying off of incalf cow at 2 months before calving i.e in 7th month of gestation by skip milking or partial milking
  • Mastities control antibiotics applied into feat canal i.e carry out dry cow therapy
  • Drying up build body reserves hence increases milk production in the next location period
  • The foetus also gets sufficient food hence born strong and healthy
  • Food reserves are used to synthesize colostrum
  • Initiate steaming up in order to give dam enough energy during calving
  • Steaming up should include high quality pastures, concentrates and minerals
  • Do not dip incalf cow in plunge dip to avoid abortion due to shock.
  • Spraying the incalf cow
  • Avoid drenching toward the end of gestation as this may be dangerous to foetus
  • In preparation for parturition, the incalf should be taken to a parturition pen next to homestead and wait for parturition signs
  • Parturition signs include disterned udder, enlarged vulva, clear mucus discharge from vulva, slackening of pelvic girdle muscles i.e relaxing of hip muscles, sometimes colostrum drips out of teats and dam frequently bellows
  • Leave the cow to calve undisturbed
  • Watch for malpresention, if present seek assistance of veterinarian
  • Allow the dam to lick its calf clean of mucus or wipe mucus from nostril and mouth to allow it breath
  • Artificial respiration may be performed when breathing is delayed
  • The naval cord is out and tied and wound sterilized using iodine or methylated spirit to avoid infection.
  • Separate the calf from the dam after it has been licked and take to a warm calf pen
  • Check and ensure that the placenta comes out a few hours after birth but if not, consult a veterinarian.

 

  1. Explain the management practices of a dairy calf from birth until it is ready for the first service.
  • Clean mucus from the calf as soon as it is born or ensure cow licks its calf dry
  • Ensure the calf is breathing or administer artificial respiration if necessary
  • Cut and disinfect umbilical cord
  • Ensure the calf suckles the mother within the first 8 hours to get colostrum
  • Feed the calf on colostrum for the first 4-7days
  • Keep records on the performance of the calf
  • Introduce feeding of whole milk or milk replacer from the 4th day
  • Feed the calf with warm milk upto weaning time
  • Observe strict hygiene in the calf pen
  • Protect the calf against adverse weather conditions e.g wind by providing housing
  • Provide adequate clean water from the third week
  • Introduce palatable dry foods e.g concentrates and good quality out grass from the third week
  • Provide mineral supplements
  • Keep calf in individual pens until it is 3-4 months
  • Spray or dip the calf against external parasites
  • Release the calf occasionally for exercise
  • Wean the calf at 8 weeks or late weaning at 16 weeks
  • Drench or deworm the calf against internal parasites
  • Vaccinate calf against prevalent diseases
  • Release the calf occasionally for exercise
  • Wean the calf at 8 weeks or late weaning at 16 weeks
  • Dehorn the calf using appropriate method
  • Graze the calf on good quality pasture, preferably ahead of mature animals
  • Separate heifer calves from bull calves at puberty to avoid inbreeding
  • Remove extra teats if necessary
  • Any change of feeding should be done gradually to avoid feeding disorders
  • Serve at the right age i.e at 15-20 months of 250-280 kg live weight
  • Treat against disease when sick
  • Weigh the calf regularly

 

  1. Describe the procedure of training a calf to drink milk from a bucked after separating it from its mother.
  • Put 3 –4 fingers in the calf’s mouth]
  • Let the calf suck the fingers
  • Place a bucket of milk at a convenient raised position
  • Gently lower the fingers into the bucket of milk while the calf is still sucking the milk
  • Repeat the procedure until the calf is able to drink from the bucket on its own.

 

  1. What is zero grazing?
  • The practice of rearing animals under confinement in stalls whereby food and water are brought to the animals.

 

  1. State the advantages of zero grazing
  • Easy to control livestock diseases
  • High production per unit area of land
  • Proper utilization of pasture i.e no trampling or fouling
  • Animals do not waste a lot of energy in walking
  • Good method of accumulation and collection of farm yard manure for plant and dung for biogas
  • Possible to keep livestock where there is bad terrain eg. Swampy, stony or steep slopes.
  • Possible to keep livestock where land is limited
  • High level of stocking rate achieved.

 

  • List the limitation of zero grazing
  • Expensive as it requires high initial capital
  • Labour intensive i.e a lot of labour required
  • May not be possible where there is in adequate water
  • Requires a lot of technical sills to manage well.

 

  1. Discuss the management of beef cattle from birth until it is ready to be sold as steer.
  • As soon as the calf is born ensure that it is breathing e.g by tickling the nose with straw
  • If not, help the calf to start breathing by applying artificial respiration method
  • Remove any foreign bodies from the mouth and nostrils e.g mucus and phlegm
  • Disinfect to avoid infection
  • Ensure that the calf is licked dry by mother or wipe the calf clean
  • Ensure that the suckles colostrum within the first 12 hours of birth by helping weak ones
  • Leave the calf to stay with its dam to suckle milk at will
  • Ensure that disowned calves are given to foster mothers or prepare artificial colostrum where a foster mother is not producing colostrum
  • Wean the calf when 6-8 months old
  • Separate weaners to graze on good quality pasture after weaning
  • Spray calves up to weaning time after which they can be dipped to control external parasites
  • Dehorn calves within first two weeks to 4 months
  • Castrate bull calves not intended for breeding at weaning time i.e 6-8 months age
  • Identify calves as early as possible after birth
  • Separate castrated bulls from heifers at weaning time
  • Give mineral supplements when necessary
  • Deworm ewaners regularly to control internal parasites
  • Give supplementary feed in dry seasons
  • Provide adequate clean water
  • Vaccinate calves and weaners against prevalent diseases
  • Observe and treat sick animals
  • Animals should be ready for market between 12-30 months depending on breed
  • Keep appropriate records.

 

  1. a) Describe the preparations one would make before the arrival of day old chicks on the farm.
  • A poultry house should be constructed
  • The house should be well ventilated and should not allow draught inside
  • A brooder should be ready 2-3 days before chicks arrive
  • A coccidiostat should be bought ready for use in case acoccidiosis attacks chicks
  • Put newspapers on the floor of the brooder to prevent chicks from eating litter e.g saw dust.
  • Spread food on the newspapers and some on feeders
  • Avail proteins (DCP) and vitamins A and B.
  • The protein and vitamin A encourage faster growth rate/ provide chick starter mash
  • Provide feeders and waterers
  • The farmer should ensure that the poultry house has a door to keep of predators like wild cats, jackals and foxes
  • The door also keeps of cold wind entering the house.

 

  1. Discuss the artificial rearing of layer chicks from day old upto the end of brooding.
  • This is between hatching time upto 3 weeks old
  • Ensure brooder corners are rounded
  • Provide enough brooding space according to the number and age of the chicks
  • Clean and disinfect the brooder and house
  • Provide proper litter on the floor e.g wood shavings
  • Maintain appropriate range of temperatures according to the age of the chicks
  • Temperature during the first week should be 32 – 35oC then reduce accordingly
  • Provide fresh, adequate and quality feed e.g chick mash
  • Provide brood with reliable and appropriate lighting
  • Provide adequate and appropriate waterers according to age.
  • Control diseases using appropriate methods e.g vaccination against Newcastle, fowl pox and marcocks diseases.
  • Isolate and treat the sick chicks immediately
  • Keep proper records
  • Debeaking should be done 8 – 10 days towards the end of breeding

 

 

  1. i) What are growers?
  • These are chicks that are between 9 – 22 weeks old

 

  1. Discuss briefly the rearing of growers upto the point of lay
  • Provide adequate floor space i.e 18 – 20 cm sq per 100 birds
  • Provide enough space at water and feed throughs and at roosts
  • The house should be disinfected
  • Provide enough clean litter on the floor
  • Provide growers mash ( 16 – 17% protein)
  • Provide insoluble grit for digestion
  • Hang green vegetables e.g cabbage leaves to keep birds busy
  • Provide plenty of clean water
  • Vaccinate against fowl typhoid, newcastle diseases when necessary
  • Keep a high level of hygiene
  • Keep litter dry to avoid disease out break and change as necessary
  • Control external parasites

 

  1. Describe the management of layers in deep litter system starting from the point of lay.
  • The space in the house should be adequate for the number of layers kept
  • This should range from 0.3 – 0.5 sq. m per layer or at least 0.2 – 0.3m 1 ½
  • The litter should be kept dry i.e avoid dampness and dust by turning the litter adding unhydrated lime and providing movable perches
  • Perches or roosters should be adequate and well spaced in the house
  • Provide enough waterers which should be well distributed in the house
  • Always provide clean and adequate water
  • Keep the waterers and all the other equipment clean
  • Replenish soft litter in the nests to prevent egg breakages
  • Ensure the nest is dark enough to avoid cannibalism.
  • Collect eggs frequently, atleast twice a day
  • Provide atleast 20g of layers mash per bird per day
  • Ensure the birds have enough calcium by providing oyster shell
  • Supply some grits to help in digestion
  • Ensure enough supply of grits or vitamins
  • Cull poor layers and diseased birds
  • Debeak birds to prevent cannibalism or egg eating if necessary
  • Vaccinate birds regularly against predominant diseases or give prophylactic drugs
  • Check birds for disease symptoms
  • Check for occurrence of pests and apply appropriate pesticides.
  • Avoid stress factors e.g noise, disturbance, etc
  • Discourage broodiness among a the layers
  • Maintain and repair the house and equipment as the need arises
  • Provide enough feed throughs
  • Provide grains in the litter to keep birds busy
  • Isolate and treat sick birds
  • Keep appropriate records
  • Dispose off the dead birds by burying or burning and also dispose off broken eggs or shells
  • Maintain correct concentration of disinfectant at foot bath.

 

 

  1. a) State the tests that should be carried out to determine the quality of fresh eggs.
  • Candling
  • Physical observation
  • Floatation
  • Shaking lightly.

 

  1. List the factors that should be considered when grading eggs for marketing.
  • Size, weight or volume of egg
  • Colour
  • Shell quality e.g rough or broken
  • Shape of egg

 

  1. i) What is candling?
  • Examining an egg for abnormalities by looking at it against a strong source of light.

 

  1. Describe how to candle an egg
  • Put a strong light under the egg and look at it contents
  • Look at the external and internal contents
  • If abnormalities are seen discord the egg

 

  • State the reasons for candling an egg
  • To check for fertility
  • To confirm presence of chick during incubation

 

  1. Explain the occurrence of double yolked eggs
  • A yolk delays in the infindibulum and is joined by the next yolk
  • The two yolks travel together to the magnum
  • They are then enclosed by one albumen and one shell

 

  1. a) What is milk?
  • The white substance secreted in the mammary system of female mammals.

 

  1. Draw a well labelled diagram of a mammary glad.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. What is milk let-down?
  • The flow of milk from the upper region of the udder (alveolar region) to the gland and test cistern.

 

  1. State the essentials of clean milk production.
  • The milkmen should be clean
  • Test for mastitis before milking
  • Ensure clean milking utensils and equipment
  • Have a clean milking parlour i.e shed
  • Ensure the cows are free from diseases e.g T.B.
  • Cows with mastitis should be milked last
  • Clean the udder
  • Sieve the milk

 

  • Explain the procedure of hand milking
  • Collect all milking equipment around so that you do not need to move unnecessarily once milking has started
  • Restrain the cow
  • Give some feeds
  • Clean the udder with a clean towel
  • Squeeze test to extract milk within 7 –8 minutes
  • Strip the udder dry
  • Apply milking jelly
  • Dip the test in anti-mastitis solution
  • Release the cow
  • Weigh the milk
  • Filtering and sieving
  • Cooling or storage in cool place.

 

  1. e) State the factors which influence the amount of milk produced by a cow.
  • Breed of animal
  • Age of animal
  • Period of lactation
  • Health of the animal
  • Temperament of the cow
  • Feed and water supply
  • Season of the year
  • Animal handling during milking

 

  1. Discuss the field production of the following crops.
  2. Tea
  3. i) Biological requirements
  • At least 1400mm rainfall per annum
  • Altitude of 1900 – 2200m
  • Soils should be well drained, fertile, deep slighly acidic.
  1. Land preparation
  • Clear land well
  • Remove all tree stumps to prevent almillaria
  • Remove all parannial weeds
  • Make cut off drains to divert storm water
  • Terrace where land is steep
  • Ring back trees six months before cutting

 

 

 

 

  • Transplanting
  • Dig holes 30 x 45cm
  • Spacing of 1.2 x 0.9 m or 1.5 x 0.75m or 1.2 x 0.7m
  • Plant when there is enough moisture in soil
  • Apply phosphatic fertilizer in planting hole
  • Apply shade when necessary
  • Water when necessary
  • Avoid planting in unusual places.

 

  1. Field management.
  • Establish plucking table by frame formation or pegging
  • Cutting back done after 4 years

 

  1. Pests and diseases control
  • Control pests e.g. black tea thrips using insecticides
  • Control armillaria root not by proper seedbed preparation

 

  1. Harvesting
  • By plucking two leaves and a bud every 10 days
  • Keep plucked tea in the shade
  • Take to factory on the same day.

 

  1. Cotton
  2. i) Ecological requirements
  • Requires 500 – 100mm, well distributed rainfall
  • Altitude of 0-1500m
  • Temperature above 15.5co but below 30oc
  • Soils well drained with PH above 5 i.e alkalinic
  • Black cotton soil or clay soil preferable

 

  1. Land preparation
  • Clear the site of vegetation
  • Remove all stumps and roots
  • Remove all perennial or grass weeds
  • Planting holes spaced at 30 x 90cm or 45 x 90cm-

 

  • Plant early in the main rainy season
  • Put one seed in spacing of 30 x 90 cm or two seeds in a spacing of 45 x 90 cm
  • Apply DAP fertilizer at planting time at the recommended rate
  • Initially plant 20 seeds per hole.

 

  1. Field management
  • Keep field weed free
  • Thin out plants not required

 

  1. Pests include cotton stainers, American Bellworm, pink bellworms and cotton lygus.
  • They are controlled by using insecticides
  • Control bacterial blight by using cultural means and jusarium with disease by using appropriate fungicides.
  • Pick cotton in dry season when lint is dry
  • Sort out into grade A and B
  • Use clean hands when harvesting
  • Pick only clean cotton
  • Avoid sisal bags and any form of contamination.

 

  • Ecological requirements
  • Rainfall of 1500 – 2000 mm per year, which is well distributed
  • Well drained, fertile, deep volcanic soils having 5.3 – 6.0 PH
  • Altitude of 1400 – 2000m
  • Prefers cloudy conditions so provide shade trees

 

  1. Land Preparation.
  • Prepare land six months early
  • Remove roots to prevent armillarial disease
  • Carry out soil conservation e.g terracing
  • Holes dug 3 months early
  • Dimensions of holes are 60 x 60 x 60 cm
  • Spacing at 2. X 2.7m or 1.3 x 1.3 m depending on a variety

 

  • Transplanting
  • Coffee is first planted in nurseries
  • Transplant at onset of rains
  • Holes reopened immediately before transplanting
  • Spread roots well and place at same depth like in nursery or sleeves
  • Apply mulch and fertilizers
  • Water well after planting
  • Provide shade.

 

  1. Field management
  • Mulching at all stages to control weeds and water conservation
  • Proper weed control by slashing, mechanically and use of herbicides
  • Pruning by single or multiple stem facilitates picking, disease and pest disease and pest control, spraying of chemicals, avoids overbearing and die – back of roots and lateral buds.

 

  1. Pests and diseases
  • Major pests are leaf miner and antestia bug both controlled chemically and culturally
  • Major coffee diseases are coffee berry disease (CBD) and leaf rust both controlled by applying fungicides and planting resistant varieties.

 

  • Done by hand
  • Pick only crops berries or cherries
  • Deliver to factory some day
  • Harvest early to avoid loss of fruit through pests and over-ripening (overripe as” MBUNI”)

 

 

  1. i) Biological factors
  • At least 1000mm rainfall yearly
  • Short period of dry weather for high quality
  • Altitude of 1500 – 3000m
  • Temperature of 15.5oC
  • Fertile, well drained soils with good water retention and PH of 5.6

 

  1. Land preparation
  • Early land preparation
  • Eradication of perennial weeds e.g grasses
  • Dig deep
  • Make ridges 60 – 90cm apart
  • Spacing of 90 x 60cm on ridges

 

  • Selection of planting materials
  • From high yielding mother plant
  • Pest free
  • Disease free
  • Vigorous
  • Use splits instead of roots

 

  1. Transplanting
  • At the onset of the rains
  • Dig holes 10 – 15 cm deep
  • Add 1 teaspoonful of TSP i.e 15gm or 30g DSP
  • Mix fertiliser with soil
  • Place splits as they were in the nursery
  • Fill soil bit by bit
  • Firm the soil around the roots

 

  1. Field practices.
  • Weed using forked jembe
  • Cutting back at end of dry period using sickle
  • Crop rotation improves yield and prevents diseases

 

  1. Pests and diseases control
  • Control root knot nematodes by crop rotation, soil fumigation, field hygiene and use of clean planting materials.
  • Control pyrethrum thrips by insecticide spray
  • Control red spider mites using appropriate chemicals

 

  • Harvesting
  • Starts 3 –4 months after transplanting
  • Pick only flowers with horizontal ray forests
  • Pick at intervals of 14-21 days
  • Twist the flowers with fingers
  • Use open or wooven baskets which are well ventilated to avoid fermentation
  • Wet heads should not be picked
  • Pick when the weather is dry
  • Dry immediately after picking
  • Do not press in the basket

 

  1. Coconut
  2. i) Ecology
  • Altitude of 0-1000
  • 1250mm – 2500mm annual rainfall
  • deep, fertile, well drained soils with 5.0 – 8.0 PH

 

  1. Land preparation and planting
  • Seeds first planted in nursery for 9 – 12 months
  • Transplanting at ouset of rains
  • Dig holes 60 x 60 x 60 cm in advance
  • Plant nuts 30 – 40cm deep
  • Spacing is 8 x 8m or 9 x 9m depending on variety

 

  • Field Management
  • Good fertilizer application to encourage growth
  • Weeding in the first few years

 

  1. Pests and Diseases
  • Rhinocerous beetle destroys growing points and can be controlled by field hygiene
  • Bole rot causes wilting and is controlled by careful cultivation to avoid root damage.
  • Coveid bug attacks young nuts and has no effective control
  • Termites controlled by applying insecticides

 

  1. Harvesting
  • Matures from 5 – 10 years after transplanting
  • Nuts picked 7 – 10 months after flowering

 

  1. Citrus
  2. i) Ecology
  • Altitude of 0 – 2000m
  • Atleast 900mm, well distributed rainfall annually
  • Deep, well drained soils with PH 5.0 – 7.0

 

  1. Land preparation and planting
  • Plant by budding
  • Buds mature early, are less thorny, seedless
  • Rough lemon commonly used as root stock
  • Nursery managed for 12 – 18 months before transplanting
  • Holes are 60 x 60 x 60cm
  • Refill holes with top soil, farm yard manure, and add phosphate fertilizer
  • Spacing is 6 x 4 m

 

  • Field Management
  • Control weeds by mulching, chemicals, mechanically
  • Apply compound fertilizers at recommended rate
  • Mulch young plants
  • Remove any flower appearing upto 2 yars
  • After transplanting
  • Remove suckers.

 

  1. Pests and Diseases
  • Citrus aphids, false codling moth, fruit flies, scale, insects and mites are controlled using appropriate chemicals
  • Gummosis and citrus tristeza controlled by use of resistant rootstock

 

  1. Harvesting
  • Harvest by picking the fruits by hand
  • Harvesting starts after 2 ½ years
  • Avoid damage by bruising
  • Pack fruits well.

 

  1. a) What do the following terms mean?
  2. i) Total digestible nutrients (T.D.N)
  • The sum of all digestible organic nutrients i.e carbohydrates, proteins and fats in a feed.

 

  1. Starch Equivalent (S.E)
  • Amount of pure starch which has the same energy as 100kg of that feed

 

  • Digestible crude protein (DCP)
  • Sum of all nitrogenous compounds in feed or total amount of proteins in a feed

 

  1. Dry matter (DM)
  • Also called digestible matter
  • This is the actual percentage of proteins, carbohydrates and minerals in a feed

 

  1. Crude fibre
  • Cellulose and other carbohydrates resistant and insoluble that are not dissolved by weak acids and alkalis

 

  1. State the factors that would affect the degree to which a given foodstuff would be digested by a
  • Chemical composition of feed e.g celluse, lignin
  • Physical form of food e.g crushing of food, etc
  • Amount of food an animal has eaten
  • Rate of feeding
  • Method of preparing the food i.e quality of food ratio of energy to protein (more energy loss digestibility)

 

  1. State the factors to consider when preparing foodstuffs for livestock
  • Weight of the animals
  • Age of the animal
  • Level of production
  • Availability of various food components
  • Species of animals
  • Cost of food
  • Physical and processing characteristics.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A foodstuff contains 7% digestible crude protein (DCP) while another contains 62% D.C.P. Calculate the amount of foodstuff, in kilograms required to prepare 100kg of poultry feed containing 20% D.C.P by using the pearson square method

7                                             42

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • 13

55

Quantity of first foodstuff – 42/55 x 100 = 76.4kg

Quantity of second foodstuff = 13/55 x 100 = 23.6 kg

Total = 76.4 + 23.6 = 100kg.

 

  1. a) i)  What is agricultural economics?
  • The art and science of organising limited resources to achieve maximum returns

 

  1. Explain the meaning of scarcity and chice
  • Productive resources are scarce in relation to demand i.e goods and services produced are not enough to satisfy human wants
  • Therefore, a choice has to be made on which goods and services should be produced using the limited resources.

 

  1. Explain how the house hold and firm are both producers and consumers.
  • The household demands goods and services and supplies labour and raw materials to firms
  • Firms convert the raw materials and supplies finished goods to households.
  • The relationship generates money to both sides therefore both are producers and consumers.

 

  1. What do the following terms mean?
  2. i) Gross domestic product (G.D.P)
  • The sum total of goods and services produced by a country within one year.

 

  1. Gross national product (GNP)
  • Total output from resources owned by the nationals of a country both within and outside the country within a year.

 

  • Per capital income
  • Gross national income divided by total population

 

  1. i) What does the term opportunity cost in farming mean?
  • Cost of the foregone alternative when we make a choice.
  • Example is choosing to grow maize instead of wheat.
  • Opportunity cost is the value of wheat
  • Opportunity cost only exists where there are alternatives.

 

 

  1. State the main implications of opportunity cost in farming.
  • Poor decision leads to losses
  • Correct decision leads to good profits

 

  • When is opportunity cost nil or zero?
  • When supply is unlimited
  • When goods are free
  • When there are no alternatives

 

  1. a) i)  What is production?
  • The process of transforming productive resources e.g land, labour and capital into consumption resources e.g potatoes, maize and milk over a period of time.

 

  1. State the factors of production.
  • Land (provides space for production)
  • Labour (human effort)
  • Capital (man made to assist other factors)
  • Management (organises other factors)

 

  1. i) Name the sources of capital for farming.
  • Leading a genoies
  • Personal savings and earnings
  • Inherited property.

 

  1. How is labour classified?
  • Permanent
  • Casual
  • Family

 

  • State the functions of farm manager
  • Planning
  • Gathering information
  • Comparing levels of production with those of neighbouring farms
  • Detecting weaknesses and constraints and finding ways and means of overcoming them
  • Keeping up to date farm records
  • Implementing farm management decisions
  • Taking responsibilities

 

  1. i) State the law of diminishing returns
  • In a production process, if variable additional units of an input are increased while all other factors are held constant, there will be an increase in additional output until a point is reached when the additional output per additional units of input declines.

 

  1. State agricultural examples of this law.
  • Use of varying units of labour on a fixed unit of land
  • Feeding dairy cattle with varying units of feed for milk production
  • Using varying units of fertilizer in the production of a given crop

 

 

 

 

  1. i) What is production function?
  • The relationship between the units of input that a farmer employs in production and the corresponding units of output
  • The out put depends on inputs hence output is a function inputs.

 

  1. Name the types of production function?
  • Increasing returns
  • Constant returns
  • Decreasing returns

 

  • What is a decreasing returns to a production function?
  • A production function where each additional unit of input results into a smaller increase in output than the proceeding unit of input.

 

  1. State the ways in which farmers may improve the production efficiency in farming.
  • Following proper livestock production practices
  • Efficient use of labour
  • Following proper crop rotation practices e.g spacing and control of pests and diseases
  • Mechanization of farm operations
  • Adoption of new techniques and methods of production
  • Organising marketing activities to realize high prices as possible
  • Revising farm plans when necessary
  • Proper enterprise selection

 

  1. i) State the risks and uncertainties in farming
  • Weather changes
  • Disease and pest outbreaks
  • Natural calamities e.g earthquakes
  • Obsolescence (becoming out of date) g farm machinery
  • New production techniques
  • Changing prices of commodities
  • Low or high yields of production
  • Theft cases
  • Change in government policy
  • Fire outbreaks
  • Sickness, injury or death.

 

  1. Give the ways through which farmers may adjust to risks and uncertainties.
  • Diversification
  • Selecting a more certain (promising) enterprise
  • Contracting (giving contracts)
  • Insurance e.g crops and livestock
  • Input rationing
  • Adopting modern methods of production
  • Flexibility in production methods

 

  • State how the government helps farmers to overcome risks and uncertainties
  • Weather forecasts
  • Providing extension services and advice
  • Adjusting future commodity prices
  • Giving farmers loans
  • Price stabilization to avoid price fluctuation
  • Research in crops and livestock
  • Provide and subsidise agricultural inputs

 

  1. i) What is gross margin?
  • Total output (income) less variable costs

 

  1. Use the information provided below to calculate the gross margin of beans per hectare.
–   Crop yields 20 bags
–   Price per bag Shs. 2000
–   Casual labour Shs. 1,000
–   Purchase of seeds Shs. 3,000
–   Purchase of fertilizers Shs. 1,200
–   Ploughing Shs. 1,000
–   Purchase of gunny bags Shs.    300

 

Gross margin = gross output – variable costs

 

Gross output = yield x price

20 bags x shs. 2000/=

= shs. 40,000

 

Total variable costs = shs. (1000 + 3000 + 1200 + 1000 + 300 = 6,500)

Gross margin  =  shs. 40,000 – 6,500 = 33,500/=

 

  • What are the uses of gross margin analysis?
  • To compare performance of one farm and another
  • To compare the performance of the farm between one season and another
  • To compare the contribution of one enterprise and another in the same farm
  • To act as a measure of profit in a farm.

 

  1. i) What is budgeting?
  • The estimation of inputs and outputs both physically and financially, in a production process.

 

  1. Name the types of farm budgets.
  • Complete budget prepared for each enterprise on the farm
  • Partial budget prepared for specific enterprises when there is a minor change required.

 

  • State the importance of budgeting in farming
  • Assists the farmer to estimate the required production resources e.g labour, capital etc
  • Assists in making farm management decisions when comparing alternative
  • Helps to reduce uncertainty in the farming process
  • Encourage farmers to be efficient with the hope of meeting the project targets
  • Show progress or lack of progress in the farm business i.e focus profit or foresee losses

 

  1. What factors should be considered when selecting a farm enterprise?
  • Availability of market for the produce
  • Prevailing climate
  • Size of land available for the enterprise
  • Common pests and diseases that may hinder implementation
  • Technical skills that may be required to manage the enterprise
  • Profit margin in relation to price fluctuation at different times of the season
  • Availability of infrastructure to allow good communication
  • Availability of labour according to requirements of the enterprise
  • Availability of enough security
  • Suitability of soil to the enterprise
  • Socio-cultural factors.

 

  1. Name the sources of agricultural support services available to farmers.
  • Extension services
  • Research services
  • Training services
  • Veterinary services
  • Artificial insemination services / bull camps
  • Credit services
  • Marketing services
  • Tractor hire services
  • Banking
  • Farm input supplies
  • Insurance services

 

  1. i) What is agricultural credit?
  • Borrowed capital resources to be invested in agricultural projects

 

  1. Name types of agricultural credit and state their uses.

 SHORT TERM

  • A credit for seasonal purchases of seed, fertilizers, chemicals, livestock feeds, fuel, etc
  • Usually repaid within one year.

 

MEDIUM TERM.

  • Used for the purpose of minor land improvement e.g fencing and purchase of machinery
  • Repaid in 2-5 years

 

LONG TERM

  • Used for long lasting projects like land purchase, and major improvement within the farm e.g soil conservation and irrigation.
  • Repaid in 6-15 or more years.

 

  1. a) State the uses of the following financial documents
  2. i) Invoices
  • A document issued by a seller to a buyer for goods taken on credit

 

  1. Receipts
  • A document issued as evidence when goods and services rendered are paid for

 

  • Delivery notes
  • A financial document given by the seller to the buyer as an evidence of goods supplied.

 

 

  1. Purchase order
  • A document issued for requesting for the supply of goods or services on credit.

 

  1. What are the uses of the following financial books?
  2. i) Ledger
  • The principal book of account where all entries contained in other books are recorded.

 

  1. Journal
  • A financial book in which daily farm transactions are entered as they occur

 

  • Inventory
  • A financial book which shows all assets of the farm at a particular time
  • It gives an estimated value of all farm assets and also enables him to know that is missing, stolen or lost

 

  1. Cash book
  • A financial book where all transaction which involve cash receipts and payments are recorded.

 

  1. List the financial statements which are usually prepared on a farm.
  • Balance sheet
  • Profit and loss account or a training account
  • Cash analysis

 

  1. i) What is a balance sheet?
  • A statement which shows the financial position of the farm at a given date and is made at the end of the year.

 

  1. State the uses of a balance sheet
  • Shows farm assets and liabilities
  • Shows farm network and can therefore be used to negotiate for a loan or for correct income tax assessment.
  • Can be used for decision making concerning the farm

 

  1. i) State the uses of a profit and loss account
  • It shows all purchases and receipts made during a particular accounting period

 

  1. What is opening valuation in profit and loss account?
  • A financial statement showing the worth of all assets one has at the beginning of the accounting period.

 

  1. Name the various columns that should be shown in a cash analysis.
  • Sales and receipts
  • Purchases and expenses
  • Details or particulars
  • Types of enterprises
  • Money value

 

  1. i) What is a statement in financial accounts
  • Document issued by a supplier to a buyer which summarises all transactions that have taken place and not yet paid for in a certain period e.g end of month.
  1. Explain the meaning of solvent and insolvent in a farming situation
  • Solvent means the farm is able to pay up all its debts
  • Insolvent means the farm is unable to pay up all debts owed by it to other people or farms.

 

  1. a) Explain the following terms.
  2. i) Market
  • Market is a place where buyers and sellers meet to sell and buy goods
  • Performance of business activities that direct the flow of goods and services from producers and consumers.

 

  1. State the following laws.
  2. i) Law of demand
  • States that as price increases quantity of a good bought declines and as price decreases the quantity of goods bought increases.

 

  1. Law of supply
  • At higher prices more quantity of goods are supplied and at lower prices less quantity is supplied.

 

  1. State the factors which affect price of goods
  • Demand
  • Cost of production
  • Supply
  • Government control policies
  • Quality of the produce

 

  1. What is equilibrium price?
  • A point at which quantity of demand equals quantity of supply

 

  1. State the various marketing functions
  • Buying
  • Selling
  • Assembling by traders or middlemen
  • Transportation i.e distribution
  • Standardization by grading and sorting out
  • Storage facilities
  • Processing
  • Packing or packaging
  • Advertising i.e sales promotion
  • Financing i.e provide credit to farmers
  • Risk bearing
  • Market research

 

  1. List the problems of marketing agricultural goods
  • Perishability of agricultural products
  • Bulkiness hence storage problems
  • Poor transport network
  • Seasonality of production
  • Difficulty in storage and handling
  1. Name the agents and institutions that are involved in marketing agricultural products.
  • Itinerant traders or middlemen
  • Processors or manufacturing companies buy produce to process
  • Wholesalers buy produce in bulk from farmers or processors and resell
  • Brokers or commission agents act on behalf of other businessmen for a fee called commission
  • Cooperative societies and unions buy farm produce locally
  • Marketing boards created by acts of parliament to promote production and marketing of agricultural produce i.e buy produce from farmers

 

  1. a) i)   what is a cooperative?
  • An organisation of people with a common aim who pool their resources together to achieve a common objective e.g to market or purchase agricultural goods and services

 

  1. Outline the procedure of forming a cooperative society
  • People or a person put the idea to others and they discuss
  • Meetings are held and interim committee formed
  • Committee draws up a constitution
  • Committee registers cooperative with commissioner of cooperatives through local cooperative officer
  • Minimum number is ten adult members.

 

  • State the principles that govern the operations of farmers cooperative societies.
  • Open membership which voluntary
  • Equal rights e.g one person, one vote
  • Share buying is limited
  • Dividends distributed according to contribution
  • Withdrawal is voluntary
  • Sale of produce only through cooperative
  • Total loyalty of members to the cooperative
  • Education to members
  • Non-profit motive by cooperative
  • Cooperation with other cooperative organizations
  • Only cash sale of produce
  • Continous expansion
  • Neutrality e.g in religion, politics or language

 

  1. State the functions of cooperative societies
  • Marketing facilities
  • Provision of inputs on credits
  • Provide expert advice
  • Storage of inputs and produce
  • Giving loans all credit to farmers
  • Educating for fair prices of inputs and produce
  • Keep proper records of all activities
  • Provide banking services to members.

 

 

 

 

  1. What problems are faced by cooperative societies?
  • Poor management i.e administrative problems
  • Shortage of capital
  • Disloyalty of members
  • Political interference.

 

  1. i) What is a statutory board?
  • An organisation established by an act of parliament to run or manage an industry e.g KTDA, NCPB, CBK, etc

 

  1. State the functions of statutory boards
  • Promote and regulate production of crops
  • Carry out research
  • Provide bulk planting materials
  • Marketing i.e selling crops for farmers
  • Represents government in international issues
  • Provide licences for crops and processing factories
  • Provide inputs
  • Regulate prices of farm produce
  • Quality control e.g inspect and maintain quality
  • Provide storage facilities
  • Risk bearing by sharing overhead costs
  • Provide market information
  • Provide credit to farmers
  • Process farm produce
  • Grade and standardize farm produce
  • Storage of farm produce
  • Packaging function
  • Invest profits for benefit of farmers
  • Advertisement i.e sales promotion

 

  1. State the functions of each of the following farmers organisations
  2. i) Kenya farmers National Union (KNFU)
  • Better prices of farm produce
  • Adequate supply of farm inputs at reasonable prices
  • Better terms of loans
  • Good roads and infrastructure to improve farming
  • Adequate control of livestock and crop pests and diseases
  • Education to farmers

 

  1. Agricultural society of Kenya (ASK)
  • Organise agricultural shows and exhibitions
  • Assist in administration of milk records schemes
  • Publishes Kenya Study book and the Kenya Farmers magazine
  • Organise national ploughing completion.

 

  • 4 – K CLUBS
  • Means Kuungana, Kuanya, Kusaidia Kenya
  • Teaching youth to like agriculture
  • Showing youth new techniques of farming

 

  • Teaching youth on leadership qualities
  • Participation in competitive shows

 

  1. Young farmers Clubs (YFC)
  • Participating in shows and competitions
  • Hold workshops and seminars in agriculture
  • Organise youth exchange programmes
  • Develop sense of self reliance and individual responsibility in the youth.

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT REVISION BOOKLET (ALL TOPICS)

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT

REVISION BOOKLET

 7 Sample Papers complete with their Marking Schemes

HISTORY & GOVT I

PAPER 1 

SECTION A (COMPULSORY)

  1. Name two sources of Kenyan History.       (2mks)
  2. Give two ways in which Islam was spread in Kenya.       (2mks)
  3. Name two Coastal settlements in Kenya before 1500 AD.       (2mks)
  4. Who appoints District Commissioners in Kenya?       (1mk)
  5. What was the main Provision of the Carter Land Commission of 1932?       (1mk)
  6. State two reasons why the Colonial Government in Kenya built roads.       (2mks)
  7. State two reasons why Africans were not allowed to grow cash crops in Kenya. (2mks)
  8. What was the main feature of African Education in Kenya during the Colonial Period. (1mk)
  9. Name two independent churches which came up in Western Kenya during the

independence struggle.                                                                                                     (2mks)

  1. Name one political movement which was formed in Kenya between 1919 and 1930. (1mk)
  2. State two situations which may lead to by-elections in Kenya. (2mks)
  3. Give two roles of the local native councils in the Colonial administration of Kenya. (2mks)

 

SECTION B (30 MARKS)

 

13(a) State five reasons for the Bantu migrations into Kenya in the Pre-Colonial era.            (5mks)

  • Describe five political activities the Agikuyu community in the Pre-colonial period.                 (10mks)

14(a) List three ways in which the Christian activities facilitated the British Colonization of

Kenya.                                                                                                                         (3mks)

  • Describe briefly how the Central government was organized in Colonial Kenya. (12mks)

15(a) State five immediate causes of the MAU MAU movement.                                       (5mks)

  • Explain five problems which faced African nationalists in Kenya before 1945. (10mks)

 

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

16.(a) What was the I.P.P.G in full?                                                                                      (1mk)

  • Outline two ways in which the advent of Multiparty Politics has led to tribal

animosity in Kenya since 1991.                                                                             (2mks)

(c)  What is the role of Political parties in Kenya’s development.                                  (12mks)

17(a) What is an election Petition?                                                                                       (2mks)

Outline in a Chronological order the law making process in Kenya.                     (3mks)

  • Discuss the functions of the Electoral Commission of Kenya.                       (10mks)

18(a) Name any two new districts created in Nyanza Province between 1997 and mid 1998.

(2mks)

  • What is the main reason for the creation of new administrative units in Kenya’s

Provincial administration since independence?                                                      (1mk)

(c) Explain six duties of District Commissioner  in Kenya.                                            (12mks)

 

HISTORY & GOVT I

PAPER I

MARKING SCHEME

 

  1. Sources of Kenyan History
  • – Archaeology
  • – Anthropology
  • – Linguistics
  • – Oral traditions
  • – Genetic studies / Zoology / Biology / Botany
  • – Written materials
  • Any 2 points, 1 mark each        

 

  1. Ways in which Islam was spread.
  • – Through Jihad’s / Holy wars
  • – Through conquests
  • – Through Trade / Commerce
  • – Through inter-marriages between the Arabs and Africans.
  • – Through Education
  • Through Political administration / Sharia Any 2 points, 1 mark each    

                                                           

The Coastal settlements in Kenya before 1500 AD.

  • – Mombasa
  • – Lamu
  • – Pate
  • – Malindi
  • – Vumba
  • – Gedi
  • – Manda
  • – Fazza
  • Kilifi Any 2 points, 1 mark each.                            

 

  1. The District Commissioners in Kenya are appointed by:
  • – The president.
  1. The main Provision of the Carter Land Commission of 1932.
  • – It fixed the boundaries of the White Highlands and removed Africans from there.

 

  1. Reasons why the colonial government in Kenya built roads.

To facilitate transportation of goods from the rural farms to the Urban Centres / Foods

To provide links between individual European farms and the railway lines.

To facilitate effective administrative control of the Kenya colony.

To open up the African districts for labour supply.

Any 2 points, 1 mark each (2marks)

 

  1. Reasons why Africans were not allowed to grow cash crops in Kenya:-
  • – To avoid competition with the settlers
  • – To enable them tap cheap African labour from the reserves
  • – To render Africans poor so as to be completely dependent on the Whitemen
  • – To avoid rivalry in trade from such products.

Any 2 points, 1 mark              

  1. The main feature of African education in Kenya during the Colonial period.
  • – It was elementary and Craft-Oriented. 1 Point                                                                                       
  1. The independent Churches which came up in Western Kenya during the independence Struggle:-

Nomiya Luo Church

Dini ya Musambwa

The Christian Universal Evangelist Union

Dini ya Roho

African Independent Pentecostal Church  Any 2 points, 1 mark each                                 

  1. The political movements which were formed in Kenya between 1919 and 1930.
  • The East African Association
  • The Kikuyu Association
  • The Young Kikuyu Association
  • The Young Kavirondo Association
  • The Kavirondo Tax payers Welfare Association
  • – The Kikuyu Central Association Any 1 point, 1 mark each                                   
  1. Situations which may lead to by-elections in Kenya:-
  • When a member withdraws his citizenship or is grabbed by a Court of Law.
  • When an incumbent member of parliament dies
  • When an MP receives a jail term exceeding 12 months or receives death penalty from court of law
  • When a member resigns from the party which sponsored him.
  • When an MP resigns from the Parliament
  • When a member is proved to have committed an election offence.
  • When an MP is declared bankrupt by a Court of Law.
  • When an MP fails to attend eight consecutive parliamentary sessions without a valid reason.

Any 2 points, 1 mark each.                

 

  1. The roles of the Local Native Councils in Colonial Kenya:-
  • – To provide a means through which the government could come to understand the African and be able to contain him.
  • – To encourage and develop a sense of responsibility and duty towards the state among the African leaders.
  • – To provide a forum through which Africans of all status could express themselves but be restricted to the district level.

Any 2 points, 1 mark each.    

                                   

SECTION B (30 MARKS)

 

13(a) Reasons for the Bantu migrations into Kenya in the Pre-colonial Period.

  • – Population pressure at their original homelands
  • – The iron technology enabled them to fight away their enemies and produce more food hence expansion began to chase their enemies and expand agriculture.
  • – Internal pressure caused by family quarrels
  • – Natural calamities like diseases, famines and drought befell them.

 

 

 

  • – The spirit of adventure
  • – External pressure by warring neighbours

Any 5 points, 1 mark each                                                     

 

  • The political activities of the Agikuyu in the Pre-Colonial Period:-
  • – The Agikuyu were organized into clans
  • – The clan was the highest Political unit
  • – The members of a clan occupied a single territorial called mbari, usually one ridge.
  • – Each clan was led by a council of elders, Kiama which had a Chairman called, Muthamaki
  • – Muthamaki emerged due to his personality and leadership potentials.
  • – The senior council of elders, i.e. the Kiama performed both religious and judicial roles
  • – The council ensured that law and order was maintained and settled disputes.
  • – The Riika (age-set) was a very vital unifying sector in the clan.
  • – Its members considered each other as brothers. They jointly received military training and thereafter made up a single fighting unit.
  • – During peace times performed tasks like the construction of paths, bridges and houses.
  • – The Kikuyu system was basically a decentralized type of Political Organization.

Any 5 points, 2 marks each

 

  1. (a) Ways in which the Christian Missionary activities facilitated the British Colonization

            of Kenya:-

  • – They built schools where Africans were taught Western culture and education hence Africans were pacified.
  • – The abolished slavery which had been on for years hence Africans saw their government to be a better one.
  • – They also provided free health services to Africans, hence many diseases could be treated, thus better partners
  • – Due to African hostility to them in some areas, they called for their governments to come for their protection. Any 3 points, 1 mark each       

 

  • How the central Government was organized in Colonial Kenya:-
  • – At the head of the Colonial administration was the Colonial Secretary based in London.
  • – At first the Headquarters was in Zanzibar. By 1900 it was transferred to Mombasa.
  • – The Governor was the head of the Colony.
  • – He was advised by an Advisory Council set up later.
  • – An executive council also emerged to ensure implementation of colonial policies
  • – A legislative council was set up in 1907 to make colonial laws with the governors assent.
  • – For easy centralization of authority, the colony was divided into administrative provinces headed by Provincial Commissioners
  • – Provinces were further divided into districts under District Commissioners and Officers, Manned by White Officers.
  • – Below them were the Chief heading locations under the Chiefs, Authority Act – They were Africans.
  • – Under them were the village headmen.

N/B The Chiefs main duties were to collect taxes, recruit African labour and maintain law

and order at grassroots.

– There was a very strict chain of command.

Any 6 points, 2 marks each                                      

 

 

 

15.(a) The immediate causes of the MAU MAU movement:-

  • – Pressure from the ex-world War II servicemen who demanded for fair rewards in 1947.
  • – The massacre of striking workers by the British Police at the Uplands Bacon Factory in 1947
  • – The brutal eviction of African residents at the Olenguruone settlement scheme by the Colonial government / The Olenguruone episode of 1947.
  • – The Urban crisis whereby the dwellers stayed in pathetic conditions i.e. unemployment, discrimination, poor housing etc.
  • – The closure of the vegetable factory at Karatina which led to loss of revenue and unemployment there, hence the farmers were really affected / The Karatina Factory incident.

Any 5 points, 1 mark each

           

  • Problems which African nationalists in Kenya before 1945:-
  • – They applied primitive fighting tactics compared to Britain who had better trained soldiers.
  • – They had communication problems as they did not have a lingua Franca and yet each tribe had its own language.
  • – The White government controlled the Mass Media against their wishes hence difficult to disseminate their grievances.
  • – Their was no adequate international support to add necessary pressure on the colonialists e.g. UNO & OAU.
  • – The African freedom to move within the country was curtailed by the Kipande system hence affecting their activities.
  • – The Africans also lacked the firearms which were widely used by the White army, hence they relied on weaker and proper types of weapons.
  • – Due to little or no formal education, some of them could not understand the need for national unity against a common enemy-the British
  • – Tribal feelings were strong in them at this time, hence they had very localized demands e.g. Luos, Agikuyu, Akamba e.t..c. Any 5 points, 2 marks each  

      

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

16.(a) The I.P.P.G. in full:-

  • – The Inter-Parties Parliamentary Group.

 

  • Ways in which the advent of Multiparty politics has caused tribal animosity in Kenya since 1991:-
  • – It has led to ethnic clashes in various parts of the country.
  • – Each tribe became suspicious of another as far as national leadership is concerned since 1992.
  • – Mushrooming of tribal-oriented Political parties
  • – Appointments to national top jobs is based on Political Affiliations/Tribal overlordship

Any 2 points, 1mark each                              

 

(c ) The role of Political in Kenya’s development:

  • – They participate in educating Kenyans about their democrative rights
  • – They teach Kenyans about their Policies and Manifestos so as to enable them choose which one to belong.
  • – They groom people who undertake national leadership roles e.g. President.
  • – They contribute to economic development by raising funds for the needy people or for building development projects e.g. schools, cooperatives, health centres, etc.
  • – The opposition put checks and balances on the ruling party which has to deliver to survive / can pass a vote of no confidence on an unpopular government.
  • – Political parties through parliament reduces the excesses of the Chief executive / abuse of power
  • – They also participate in preaching peace and harmony among Kenyans in their various constituencies.
  • – They discuss and make or amend the laws governing the country the August House.

Any 6 points, 2 marks each                                       

 

  1. (a) An election petition defined:-
  • This is a legal complaint raised against a person who is suspected to have committed an election offence during an election in a country. The competent court of law has to try such a case e.g. High Court. A good definition                                               

 

(b) The law – Making process in Kenya takes an elaborate process going through several

            stages:-

  • – The first reading
  • – The second reading
  • – The committee stage
  • – The third reading
  • – The Residential Assent
  • – The Kenya Gazette

N/B The Chronology must be checked.

 

  • Functions of the Electoral commission of Kenya:-
  • – Preparation of nomination papers, voting cards and ballot boxes country wide
  • – Distribution of nomination papers, voting cards and ballot boxes to the voting stations.
  • – Supervising the voting in various polling stations.
  • – Counting of votes after the voting exercise is over.
  • – Fixing voting stations in every constituency throughout the country.
  • – Appointing returning officers to represent him in each constituency.
  • – Organizing a fresh register of voters
  • Fixing new electoral boundaries Any 5 points, 2 marks each                                                   
  1. (a) The new districts created in Nyanza province between 1997 and Mid 1998.
  • – Gucha District
  • – Nyando District
  • – Bondo District Any 2 points, 1 mark each     

 

(b) Main reason for the creation of new administrative units in Kenya:-

  • – To bring government services closer to the local residents.

 

  • Duties of District Commissioners in Kenya:-
  • – To represent the President in his area of Jurisdiction e.g. during Public holidays
  • – To link the district residents with the government.
  • – To co-ordinate government administration in his district.
  • – To coordinate development projects in the District as the Chairman of the District Development committee.
  • – To intregret/ explain government policies at the district level.
  • – He is the chairman of the District liquor licensing Board
  • – He is the Chairman of the District land control board.
  • – He ensures that government policies are implemented at the district level.

 

  • – He is the chairman of the District Trade Licensing Board.
  • – He issues permits / licenses for Public meetings in the district.
  • – He is an ex-office member if the District country councils hence oversees their administrations.
  • – He may administer civil marriages on behalf of the state.
  • – He administers district revenue to ensure transparency and accountability in their use.
  • – He co-ordinates the works of all the government ministries and the NGO’s in his district.

Any 6 points, 2 marks each   

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT I

PAPER II

 

SECTION A (COMPULSORY)

 

  1. State two social activities of the early man during the Middle stone age.       (2mks)
  2. How did religion contribute to early Urbanization in Africa?       (2mks)
  3. Give two raw materials which could be combined into bronze metal.       (2mks)
  4. Give one way in which magazines and newspapers are useful to the modern man. (1mk)
  5. Name one missionary society who visited Buganda Kingdom before 1900.       (1mk)
  6. List two differences between Islam and Christianity.       (2mks)
  7. Give two advantages of road over railway transport.       (2mks)
  8. What was the main reason for Menelik’s resistance against the Italians?       (1mk)
  9. State two ways in which the opening of the Suez canal in 1869 contributed to the scramble

for African Colonies.                                                                                                       (2mks)

  1. What is balance of trade? (1mk)
  2. List the two theories of agricultural origins and development in the world. (2mks)
  3. Give two social effects of the Trans-Saharan Trade on west African people. (2mks)

 

SECTION B (30 MARKS)

 

13.(a) State three factors which have facilitated industrialization in the third World since Mid 20th.

(3mks)

  • Explain six factors which have hindered rapid industrialization in the third World countries.

                         (12mks)

14.(a) Give three factors for the development of trade between the West African Coast and the

outside World.                                                                                                                        (3mks)

  • Outline three ways in which slaves were acquired during the Trans Atlantic Slave trade.

(3mks)

  • Discuss the economic impact of the Trans-Atlantic Trade.   (9mks)

 

15.(a) State three reasons for Samori Toure’s resistance against the French Colonialists.            (3mks)

(b) Explain six factors for the protraction of this resistance                                            (12mks)

 

 

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

16(a) State three reasons for early agriculture in India.                                                       (3mks)

  • Discuss the effects of inherent food shortages on the economies of African countries        (12mks)

 

17(a) Name three gods among the Maya Society.                                                                (3mks)

  • Explain the six roles of traditional religion among the Maya of Central America (12mks)

18(a) Name any three iron working sites in Africa.                                                             (3mks)

  • Explain six results of the discovery and use of iron in Africa.                       (12mks)

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT I

PAPER II

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A (20 MARKS)

 

  1. The social activities of the early man during the Middle Stone Age Period.
  • Early man had fully developed language
  • He wore animal skins
  • Painted their bodies with red ochre and soils
  • Had developed religious practices, e.g. burrying the dead.

Any 2 points, 1 mark each

 

  1. How religion contributed to early Urbanization in Africa:-
  • – The areas of worship were built with very strong and magnificent architectural designs/temples/shrines.
  • – Religion attracted hundreds of worshipers to regions of worship hence contributing to urbanization.
  • – Religious centres were generally sacred, hence enhancing unity and peace in such centres which was necessary for development e.g. in the East Coast of Africa / City States grew due to Islamic influence. Any 2 points, 1 mark each

 

  1. The two raw materials which could be combined into bronze metal are:-
  • – Tin
  • – Copper Any 2point, each 1 mark

 

The ways in which magazines and newspapers are useful to the modern man.

  • – Sources of leisure / entertainment
  • – Provision of news
  • – Provision of advertising facilities / trade Any 1 point, 1mark    

 

  1. The Missionary Societies which visited Buganda Kingdom before 1900.
  • – The Church Missionary Society
  • – The Holy Ghost White Fathers / Roman Catholics.

Any 1 point

           

  1. Differences between Islam and Christianity.
  • – Mohammed was the lost prophet while Jesus one of the many prophets
  • – Islamic Doctrines allow for Polygamy while Christian one do not.
  • – The Holy book in Christianity is the Bible while Muslims use the Koran
  • – Islamic doctrines are more rigid while Christian ones are relaxed.

Any 2 points, 1 mark each     

 

 

 

  1. The advantages of road over railway transport:-
  • – Road transport is faster than railway transport where there are no electric trains.
  • – Railways are more expensive to construct compared to roads
  • – The wagons are more expensive to buy compared to vehicles
  • – Rails are less flexible compared to roads

Any 2 points, 1 mark each

 

  1. The main reason for Menelik’s resistance against the Italians.
  • – To preserve Ethiopia’s national sovereignty / independence.

Only 1 point

 

  1. Ways in which the opening of the Suez Canal in 1869 contributed to the Scramble for African colonies.
  • – It provided the shortest sea route to India
  • – Whoever controlled Egypt obviously controlled the Suez Canal.
  • – Whoever controlled the Nile waters also controlled Egypt and the Suez Canal and thus facilitated Colonization of Uganda
  • – Kenya was colonized as a route to India
  • Countries who funded the construction of the Canal claimed refund in the name of colonizing Egypt. Any 2 points, 1 mark each                               

 

  1. Balance of trade definition.
  • – This refers to the money value difference between the exports and imports of a Country.

A good definition.      

 

  1. The theories of agricultural origins and development in the World:-
  • – The one area (centrifugal) theory which holds that agriculture first developed in a single place and then spread to other parts of the World.
  • – The independent theory which holds that the agrarian systems developed independently in different areas of the World. 2 points, 1 mark each

 

  1. The Social effects of the Trans Saharan Trade on West African People:-
  • – The introduction and spread of Islamic religion in Western Sudan
  • – It encouraged intermarriages between the peoples of North Africa and Western Sudan
  • – It led to Warfare as rulers built their armies to defeat one another.
  • – It led to the growth and development of towns and cities in West Africa e.g. Jenne, Gao, Timbuktu, etc.
  • – The Islamic type of Education was introduced where even schools and Universities were built.
  • – Diplomatic relations between the Western Sudan and North Africa improved.
  • – New architectural designs were copied by the people of Western Sudan.
  • – Islamic scholars were also employed in western Sudan.

Any 2 points, 1 mark each                             

 

SECTION B (30 MARKS)

 

13.(a) The factors which have facilitated industrialization in the Third World since Mid 20th.

  • – Availability of cheap labour.
  • – Availability of necessary raw materials e.g. agricultural and minerals.
  • – Acquisition of relevant technological know-how
  • – Existence of some indigenous industries which provided the foundation for the process of industrialization.
  • – Demand for the products both locally and in other countries
  • – Availability of capital from World Bank, IMF etc.
  • – Existence of a developed infrastructural facilities e.g. roads, railways, banks, insurance, etc.
  • – Availability of power e.g. Coal, HEP, oil, etc.
  • – Encouragement of foreign investment in the third World.
  • – Political Stability/Sound economic planning.

Any 3 points, 1 mark each     

 

  • Factors which have hindered rapid industrialization in the third world countries:-
  • – The large scale poverty which befalls such countries e.g. India.
  • – Political turmoil which leaves no room for meaningful development.
  • – Stiff competition from the developed world e.g. the USA.
  • – High population growth rates which differ to the national revenue to only feeding and social welfare activities.
  • – Poor network of transport and communication in such nations.
  • – Inadequate capital for industrial investment.
  • – Poor planning, hence less emphasis on the industrial sector.
  • – The bulk of the labour force is illiterate or semi-literate, hence the needed expertise and skills are lacking.
  • – Widespread restrictive and protective policies which don’t encourage private enterprise and investors.
  • – These countries lack the necessary natural resources e.g. minerals.
  • – Some lack the necessary power. Most of the tropical rivers have not been harnessed for HEP generation. any 6 points, 2marks each     

 

  1. (a) Factors for the development of trade between the West African Coast and the outside
     World:-
  • – High demand for the foreign goods in W. Africa and demand for Western goods too in the New World and Europe.
  • – Existence of local trade in the area
  • – Accessibility of the regions through the Atlantic Ocean
  • – Existence of a strong economy based on agriculture / availability of goods.
  • – Presence of good and able leaders who provided security to traders.
  • – Existence of rich merchants who invested in the trade.
  • – The availability of slaves which later became a vital trade commodity from the forest belt.

Any 3 points, 1 mark each

 

  • How slaves were acquired during the Trans Atlantic Slave Trade:-
  • – Organized raids by individual traders and chiefs.
  • – Warfare, through sale of war captives
  • – Through leaders selling out subjects
  • – Though kidnapping
  • – Through enticing e.g. with sweets
  • – Through panjaring / seizing of a debtor. Any 3 points, 1 mark

 

 

 

 

 

(c) The economic impact of the Trans Atlantic trade:-

  • – Slave trade stimulated the growth of trade between Europe and West Africa e.g. guns & cloth were brought into West Africa.
  • – Houses were destroyed and farms were burnt, while animals were killed hence destruction of property.
  • – It led to the decline of the famous Trans- Saharan trade.
  • – It led to economic underdevelopment and the strong men and women were taken away to captivity during slavery.
  • – The importation of manufactured goods led to the decline of local industry.
  • – The Africans developed a taste for the Western manufactured goods e.g. cloth, rum and glassware.
  • – It led to the emergence of a wealthy class of merchants who acquired wealth from the trade e.g. John Hawkins, Jaja of Opobo, Samori Toure, etc.
  • – It helped the United States to rise and grow as an industrial power using the skilled European and unskilled African slave labour
  • – It led to underdevelopment and overexploitation of resources in Africa and America by the Europeans. any 6 points, 1½ marks each             

 

15(a) Reasons for Samori Toure’s resistance against the French Colonialists:-

  • – To end the French Colonialists
  • – To end the French attempt to extend their pendence of the Mandinka Empire
  • – To enable him maintain his throne
  • – To defend the areas claimed by him
  • – The French violation of their treaty of friendship – BISANDUGU

any 3 points, 1 mark each

 

  • Factors for the protraction of this resistance.
  • – Samori had acquired a lot of wealth from trade and hence was capable of maintaining his workers and soldiers.
  • – He had a very strong standing army of about 12,000 regular and 90,000 reserves.
  • – His capability to manufacture most of his weapons locally including supplement from abroad / well equipped army.
  • – He had a determination of retaining and safeguarding his independence inspite of the foreign threats to occupy and rule it.
  • – Samori was a staunch Muslim, thus he waged a jihad against the infidels / pagan French Christians / Mass religions support.
  • – He had very good organizational skills hence was able to create highly swift and agile guerilla units within his army.
  • – He applied the scorched earth policy against the French.
  • – The creation of Boles United the Mandinka.

any 6 points, 2 marks each

 

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

16.(a) Reasons for early Agriculture in India:-

  • – Availability of water from R. Ganges and Indus for irrigation farmlands
  • – Existence of fertile soils which were deposited along river valleys.
  • – Existence of indigenous crops in the area.
  • – Establishment of settlements along river valleys created more demand for food / High population / high demand for food.
  • – Decrease in food supply from the natural environment led to starvation.
  • – Availability of farm labour
  • – Availability of storage facilities
  • – Availability of means of transport of wooden wheeled carts
  • – Use of good tools e.g. wooden plough
  • – Use of improved methods of irrigation e.g. earth dams and dykes
  • – Availability of adequate rainfall during certain times of the year promoted farming.
  • – Immigrants from Middle East who had agricultural knowledge introduced farming.

any 3 points, 1 mark each

 

  • Effects of inherent food shortages on the economies of African countries:-
  • It has led to high mortality rates due to either lack of food or malnutrition
  • Huge sums of money are spent on food importation / hinders industrialization
  • It leads to very high food prices, hence many poor remain hungry.
  • It sometimes causes political inrest due to soaring food prices e.g. Sudan, Somali, Ethiopia, etc.
  • It worsens the refugee problem is some countries. People move to the neighbouring nations in search of food and due to civil wars.
  • Countries remain, dependent on the West for food aid.
  • It extends the effects of neo-colonialism from the Western Capitalists.

Any 6 points, 2 marks each                            (12marks)

 

17.(a) The three gods according to the MAYA of Central America:-

  • Kunab Ku – Supreme god
  • Yum Kax – god of maize
  • Pipil – sun god
  • Chec – god of rain

Any 3 points, 1 mark each                              (3marks)

 

  • The roles of traditional religion among the Maya of Central America:-
  • Religion provided spiritual care to the members of the society.
  • Religion set moral standards in the society
  • It promoted unity and harmony in the society
  • Religious leaders played advisory roles in matters affecting the society.
  • Religion provided the basis for secular law
  • It was used to unite them against foreign invasion
  • It served as a link between the Spiritual world and man
  • It provided answers to the mysteries of nature
  • Medicinemen relied on religion to treat the sick.

any 6 points, 2 marks each                             (12 marks)

 

  1. (a) The iron working sites in Africa:-

– Nok               – Bahaya          – Taruga

– Meroe           – Aksum          – Winam Gulf

– Carthage       – Kwale

any 3 points, 1 mark each                              (3marks)

 

  • Results of the discovery and use of iron in Africa:-
  • The discovery of iron technology led to the manufacture of better and efficient tools for farming e.g. iron hoes and pangas
  • The use of iron tools enabled people to clear natural vegetation and bring more land under cultivation / increased food production.
  • The demand for iron ore and iron tools led to the development of trade between communities.
  • The development of iron technology led to the job specialization, iron smiths became very respectable members of the society.
  • The use of iron weapons in warfare intensified inter-community conflicts. The stronger communities conquered and absorbed the weaker ones
  • The possession of iron weapons made it possible for communities to improve their system of defence.
  • Possession of iron weapons led to the emergence of states through conquest e.g. Mali, Songhai, Ghana etc.
  • Possession of iron weapons and implements facilitated immigration of people – they were better armed and could face the dangers on the way.

any 6 points, 2 marks each                             (12 marks)

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT II

PAPER ONE

 

SECTION A: (25 MARKS)

 

  1. Give two examples of unwritten sources of history.       (2mks)
  2. State three characteristics that distinguish man from other primates.       (3mks)
  3. Identify two archeological sites in Tanzania.       (2mks)
  4. Give the major areas of study in history.       (2mks)
  5. Give two methods used by the archeologists to determine the age of fossils.       (2mks)
  6. State the theories put forward to explain the origin of man.       (2mks)
  7. State two economic activities of the Homo sapiens.       (2mks)
  8. Give reasons why Africa is considered the cradle of mankind.       (2mks)
  9. State two characteristics of Homo – sapiens.       (2mks)
  10. State two factors which contributed to the development of early agriculture in ancient

Egypt.                                                                                                                               (2mks)

  1. Identify the main impacts of early agriculture in India.       (2mks)
  2. State two ways in which the Agrarian Revolution contributed to the development of urban centres in Europe.                                                                   (2mks)

 

SECTION B (45 MARKS)

 

  1. (a) Discuss the factors which led to agrarian revolution in America.       (10mks)

(b) State five effects of food shortages in Africa.                                                                 (5mks)

 

  1. (a) Give five characteristics of industrial Revolution in Europe.       (5mks)

(b) What factors favoured the development of industries in Britain?                      (10mks)

 

  1. (a) Discuss the consequences of the use of Iran in Africa.       (10mks)

(b) What was the use of gold in Africa?                                                                    (5mks)

 

  1. (a) State three advantages of petroleum as a source of energy.       (3mks)

(b) What problems have faced Brazil in her efforts to industrialize?                      (5mks)

  • What was the role of priests in Ancient Egypt?             (5mks)
  • State two uses of modern wind energy.             (2mks)

 

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

  1. (a) Identify five factors that led to the rise of Asante Empire.       (5mks)

(b) Identify the main sources of the British constitution.                                                     (8mks)

  • What was the importance of the Odwira festival.             (2mks)

 

  1. (a) State some of the problems that European companies faced in Africa during the

19th century.                                                                                                                (5mks)

  • Identify the causes of the Chimurenge war.             (10mks)

 

  1. (a) What led to the downfall of Samouri Toure after keeping the French at bay for 15 years?

(10mks)

(b)  Why did Menelik fight the Italians at the battle of Adowa.                                     (5mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT II

PAPER ONE

MARKING SCHEME

 

  1. – Oral traditions –  Customs handed down from one generation to another by word of mouth.
  • Anthropology – Study of present day organisation of communities
  • Linguistics – Careful analysis of a peoples language will reveal the peoples past development.
  • Archeology – Study of mans past by scientific analysis of the material remains of his culture.
  • Paleontology – They deal with fossils to provide information about the physical characteristics of earlier farms of humanity. any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Development of speech
  • Development of brain
  • The upright posture. 1 x 3 = 3mks

 

  1. – Garusi
  • Olduvai Gorge
  • Peninj
  • Apis Rock
  • Isimila
  • any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Political history
  • Social history
  • Economic History. any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Carbon 14 method
  • Potassium organ method
  • Palea – magnetic dating
  •                                                             any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Creation
  • Evolution
  • Mythical (traditional theories.) any 2 x 1 = 2mks
  1. – He was a tool maker
  • He hunted and gathered wild animals and roots
  • He was also a fisherman
  • He practised agriculture
  • He kept animals
  • He also made baskets, pots and made clothes. any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Mans eaniest remains have been found in Africa.
  • Mans eaniest material culture has been found in Africa any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Sloping forehead / thick forehead
  • Large brain 1000cm3 – 1800cm3 or thinking man
  • Walked upright
  • Had refined speech
  • Had smaller jaws compared to earlier farms.
  • Had well – developed thumb for grasping
  • Thick and heavily built any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Fertile deposits of silt left by the flooding of the annually
  • Availability of water for irrigation form the Nile.
  • The improvement of basin irrigation by the invention of the shadoof
  • Shadoof irrigation made if possible to grow crops of grains annually
  • The invention of ox-drawn ploughs increased agricultural production.

any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Adequate food led to population increase.
  • Indian society was highly stratified especially in cities. Most of the people were labourers either in agriculture or performing low jobs in trade.  The wealthy few and administrators or kings and priest were merchants.
  • A type of writing consisting of pictograms was developed.

any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – The enclosure system forced the landless peasants to migrate to urban centres to look for

wage labour.

  • Mechanization in agriculture also forced many peasants from the farms into the towns to seek employment. any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

SECTION B ( 45 MKS)

 

  1. a) –  Immigrants from Britain due to enclosure system found fertile grounds in America to

practice their farming  skills.

  • Introduction of slave labour in the 16th century slaves cleared bushes and provided labour in the farms.
  • In America crops were grown in areas that favoured them eg. Carn in carn belt, wheat in wheat belt etc.
  • Introduction of plantation farming brought large areas under farming
  • Increased demand for raw materials for European industries encouraged expansion in agriculture
  • American government gave aid to farmers eg. 1860 homestead Act, which legalised land ownership and authorised the federal government to give loans to farmers.
  • Scientific inventions eg. Cotton gin in 1793 and John Deere’s Steel plough.
  • Application of new and improved farming methods
  • The development of food preservation methods eg. Canning and refrigeration
  • Development of good transport and communication network e.g roads and railway.

1 x 10 = 10mks

 

  1. – Many countries spend their foreign reserves on importing food stuff.  This has reduced capital investment in other industrial sector.
  • Due to food shortage, food prices go up thus forcing many people to go hungry
  • Some countries have been faced with political instability due to food shortage and high prices e.g Sudan, Tunisia in 1980s
  • Frequent food shortages force people to become refugees in neighbouring countries
  • Many countries faced with food shortage have to rely on aid from developed countries. Aid is usually given with certain conditions which affects that country politically and economically.
  • Death caused by lack of food or proper diet are high in such countries.

any 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. a) –  The use of machines to replace human labour
  • Use of steam power to replace water, wind and animal power
  • Made use of loan and steel in many fields such as building of houses, machines instead of wood and iron.
  • Rise of factory system in towns instead of the cottage industries at home.
  • High standards of living
  • Development of science and the intensive application of scientific knowledge in production.
  • Growth of modern capitalism
  • Production of good in large quantities. 1 x 5 = 5mks

 

  1. – Britain had accumulated wealth from her trade with other countries and her colonies.  She was able to invest this capital in industry.
  • She had a powerful navy which she used to protect her merchants
  • She had a large population that provided labour in the industries as well as large market for her manufactured goods
  • She had valuable minerals like coal and iron ore that were very important for industrialization.
  • Existence of capitalists / entrepreneurs who were willing to invest in the industries.
  • Well developed transport and communication system eg. Good roads and railway system
  • Political stability and good leadership provided a good atmosphere for industrial growth
  • Availability of skilled labour
  • She had no internal custom barriers which could negatively affect industrialization.
  • Existence of banking and insurance system gave financial help and security to the industrialists
  • Scientific revolution led to improvement and expansion of industries.

any 10 x 1 = 10mks

 

  1. (a) Discuss the consequences of the use of Iran in Africa.
  • With new tools forests were cleared for cultivation and livestock rearing.
  • With new tools for cultivation food production increased.
  • Destruction of forests influenced environmental and climatic changes.
  • With increased food production migrants, took place leading to the settlement of wide areas.
  • Powerful states based on Iron technology know how arose e.g. Nubia and kush along Nile in Sudan and Azom and Ghana.
  • Kingdoms also rose as a result of use of Iron weapons e.g. Mwene Mtapa, Buganda and Bungaro kingdoms.
  • It led to rise of a special class of people – the blacksmiths.
  • It enhanced trade between different communities through trade.
  • Iran implements were also used as medium of exchange.
  • Use of Iran weapons intensified inter – communities conflicts. The stronger ones conquered the weaker ones. (10×1 = 10marks)

 

  • What was the use of Gold in Africa.
  • Decorations and making ornaments e.g. Jewellery, utensils, for kings in Egypt rings and bangles.
  • It was used to make coins in Egypt and Mesopotamia.
  • The rich in Egypt use it to make handles for their swords.
  • It was a measure of wealth due to the fact that it was a precious metal.
  • It was a trading commodity in central and West Africa.
  • It was used to make swords and blades. (Any 5×1 = 5marks)

 

  1. (a) State three advantages of petroleum as a source of energy.
  • It is cheap for the countries that produce it.
  • It is easy to transport.
  • It can be put into many uses e.g. kerosene, aviation fuel, petrol and cooking gas.

(1 x 3 = 3marks)

 

  • What problems have faced Brazil in her efforts to industrialize?
  • Internal poverty affecting 40% of the population such that they cannot buy the manufactured goods.
  • Inability to fully exploit her natural resources especially in the Amazon forest and Malo arosso plain. They are sparsely coastal belt.
  • Inadequate transport problems makes things worse.
  • High rate of inflation which makes goods very expensive.
  • High foreign debt is another problem. (1×5 = 5marks)

 

  • What was the role of the priests in Ancient Egypt?
  • Maintaining temples.
  • Presiding the future e.g. when floods or drought occur.
  • Advising pharaoh’s on administrative and religious issues.
  • Taught the pharaoh’s how to read, write hunt and turaws javelin.
  • They hatmarized different agricultural activities such as weeding planting and harvesting. (Any 5×1 = 5marks)

 

  • Uses of modern wing energy
  • Pump water
  • Generate electricity. (Any 1×2 = 2marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (a) Identify five factors that led to rise of Asante Empire.

Several small Asante states emerged around Kumasi. They gave support to each other when need arose mainly because they belonged to Oyoko clan.

They got a lot of wealth from the Trans-Atlantic slave trade which she used to strengthen the kingdom.

Asante acquired guns ammunition from Europeans which she used to conquer other states.

Centralization of authority under the Asanthene have ensured effective administration.

Asante kingdom was endowed with very important items of trade e.g. gold and kola – nuts.

The area was fertile and ideal for mixed farming thus plenty of food for the population.                                                                                                (Any 5×1 = 5marks)

 

  • Identify main sources of the British constitution.
  • Decisions made by the British carts of law.
  • Writings of political twinkers
  • Bio graphics of statesmen
  • Textbooks
  • The Hansard
  • Government publications.
  • Historical documents
  • Parliamentary acts. (1 x 8 = 8marks)

 

  • What was the importance of the Odwira festival.
  • The kings (state) met in Kumasi and pledged to the Asantehene.
  • Honoured the dead
  • Settled any disputes among themselves. (Any 2×1 = 2marks)

 

  1. (a) State some of the problems that European companies faced in Africa during the 19th
  • They had anticipated to get a lot of profit from trade only to discover there was very little trade.
  • Most became bankrupt due to lack of revenue.
  • They encountered serious resistance from the Africans which made administration very expensive.
  • Transport was a big problem because most rivers were not navigable and other means were not developed e.g. roads and railway.
  • Lack of experienced staff – they employed soldiers who had no knowledge of administration. (1×5 = 5marks)

 

  • Identify the causes of the Chimurenge war.
  • Loss of independence. Both Shana and the Ndebele had lost their independence to the British.
  • Loss of their king. The Ndebele had lost their king Lobengula during 1893 war.
  • Loss of land. Most of the fertile land had been taken by the British and the Africans were pushed into unproductive reserves that had no water or were infested with tsetse fly e.g. Gwaii and Shangani.
  • Forced labour: The Shana were forcibly recruited to provide cheap labour in settler farms.
  • Africans were forced to pay taxes to the white government.
  • The Shona had always traded with the Portuguese but this had been disrupted by the British who took over the trade.
  • Material disaster such as famine, drought, locust, rinder pest were given a religious interpretation. To the priests their god mwari was annoyed with the presence of the whiteman.
  • Loss of cattle – The British confiscated cattle from the Ndebele and the Shona.
  • The Ndebele were annoyed because they had lost the Shona as their subject. They could no longer use them as (Holi) slaves.
  • Use of mashona police. The Ndebele angered them because the Shona were their subjects.             (1×1- = 10marks)

 

  1. (a) What led to the downfall of Samouri Toure after keeping the French at bay for 15 years?
  • He failed to achieve unity from the African e.g. Ahmad of Tokolor Empire and Tieba of Sikasso.
  • The French had powerful weapons.
  • The French army was well trained and well disciplined and equipped.
  • He moved his empire eastwards thus lost the Buremines which were a source of revenue for him.
  • His people got tired of being moved from place to place and started supporting the French.
  • The adoption of the scorched earth policy by Samori against local rulers made some people hostile towards him and helped the French.
  • Sierra Leone was declared a British protectorate: he could not impart arms any more.
  • He failed to get support of the British who bargained with the Mandinka for French concessions elsewhere in Africa.
  • As the war progressed the wanted more money and therefore imposed heavy taxes on his people. This made him very unpopular. (1×10 = 10marks)

 

  • Why did Menelik fight the Italians at the battle of Adowa.
  • He wanted to preserve the independence of his kingdom.
  • To protest against Italy’s claim that Ethiopia was their protectorate
  • Italy had annexed northern part of Ethiopia.
  • Italians had made effort to divide Ethiopian rulers by inciting the Northern chiefs against Menelik.
  • Their efforts to deter him from holding negotiations with Russia and France.

(1×5 = 5marks)

 

HISTORY & GOVT II

PAPER II

 

SECTION A.

 

  1. State the methods the historians have used to obtain the historical information concerning

their country.                                                                                                                    (2mks)

  1. What are the most common features of the political organisation of most Bantu communities.

(3mks)

  1. State three economic activities of the Kalenjin in Kenya during the pre-colonial period.

(3mks)

  1. State three reasons behind the Maasai migration during the pre-colonial period       (3mks)
  2. Describe the economic organisation of the Somali in pre-colonial period.       (3mks)

 

 

  1. What religious functions did the Orokoiyot of the Nandi perform during the pre-colonial

period?                                                                                                                             (3mks)

  1. State two religious practices of the Agikuyu.       (2mks)
  2. Give two reasons why the British allowed the Imperial British East Africa Company to administer their possession in East Africa during the 19th                       (2mks)
  3. Give two reasons why the Turkana were able to resist the incoming of the British for such

along time.                                                                                                                        (2mks)

  1. What were the reasons behind the construction of the Kenyan Uganda railway. (2mks)

 

 SECTION B  (45 MARKS)

 

  1. (a) What were the effects of the Maasai migration during the pre-colonial period? (7mks)

(b) What was the role of the council of elders among the Kenyan communities during the

pre-colonial period?.                                                                                                 (8mks)

 

  1. (a) What were the sources of information about the Kenyan Coast by the 16th (5mks)

(b) Describe the characteristics of Coastal towns by 1500.                                      (10mks)

 

  1. (a) What factors led to the Mau Mau uprising in colonial Kenya?           (10mks)

(b) Name five African leaders who were detained with the declaration of a state of emergency

in Kenya.                                                                                                                     (5mks)

 

  1. (a) In what ways did the colonial government provide settler agriculture?       (9mks)

(b) Name some of the enterpreneurial activities Africans engaged in during the Colonial

period in Kenya.                                                                                                        (6mks)

 

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

  1. (a) What are the duties and functions of the District Commissioners?       (9mks)

(b) Identify six categories of people whose personal liberty is limited.                   (6mks)

 

  1. (a) Identify the rules of using the wheel on people who used it.       (5mks)

(b) What is the role of KANU in government?                                                             (10mks)

 

  1. (a) Identify several types of elections in Kenya.       (6mks)

(b) State the conditions necessary for one to qualify to be elected as a member of parliament.

(9mks)

 

HISTORY & GOVT II

PAPER II

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A (25 MARKS)

 

  1. Methods the historians used to obtain the historical information concerning their

Archeology

Anthropology

Written records

Oral traditions

Linguistics                                                            Any 2×1 = 2marks

 

  1. Features of the political organisation of most Bantu communities.

The Bantu were organized into clans.

They had age-set and the kinship systems.

Most of the Bantu societies were decentralized.

They had councils of elders who acted as the highest political constitutions.

They had warriors who defended each community.

Any 3×1 = 3marks

 

  1. Economic activities of the Kalenjin in Kenya during the pre-colonial period.
  • They were farmers growing millet & sorghum
  • They practised livestock keeping.
  • They were iron workers making iron tools and weapons.
  • Hunted and gathered wild fruits and roots.
  • Traded with neighbours e.g. Luo, Maasai and Abaluyia.
  • Had Craft Industry which included pottery and basketry and leather work.

Any 3×1 = 3marks

 

  1. Reasons behind the Maasai migration during the pre-colonial period.
  • Population increase / pressure.
  • Search for pasture for their animals.
  • Drought and famine.
  • Internal quarrels / civil wars.
  • External pressure / war with neighbours e.g. the Iteso, Turkana and Karamajong’.

Any 3×1 = 3marks

 

  1. Economic organisation of the Somali in pre-colonial period.
  • They were nomadic pastrolists who kept camels, cattle, goats and sheep.
  • They also practised smithing, pottery and weaving & other crafts.
  • Hunting and gathering. any 3×1 = 3marks

 

  1. Functions the Orokoiyot of the Nandi perform during the pre-colonial period
  • Acting as a priest / mediating between people and God.
  • Offering sacrifices to God on behalf of the people.
  • Blessing people before they undertook special activities e.g. blessing warriors before a raid.                                                                               any 1x 3 = 3marks
  1. Religious practices of the Agikuyu.
  • Ancestral worship
  • Worshipped God in sacred places
  • They offered sacrifices to God. any 2×1 = 2marks

 

Reasons why the British allowed the Imperial British East Africa Company to administer their possession in East Africa during the 19th Century.

It would have been very expensive for the British tax payers to sustain.

The company officials were familiar with the region based in their trading experience in the area.

British government did not have enough personnel for administration.

any 2×1 = 2marks

 

 

 

 

Reasons why the Turkana were able to resist the incoming of the British for such along time.

–    Their country was hilly, rocky and dry therefore they were able to relocate their

animals and  homesteads as soon as they sighted the British.

  • They knew their terrain better than the British.
  • They acquired arms from Ethiopia through their agents like the Dangiro and Merille.

Any 2×1 = 2marks

 

Reasons behind the construction of the Kenyan Uganda railway.

  • To establish effective control over British East Africa.
  • To stop slave trade and promote legitimate trade.
  • To facilitate the movement of troops and government administrators.
  • To link Uganda with the East Coast and the outside world for greater economic growth. Any 2×1 = 2marks

 

SECTION B  (45 MARKS)

 

(a) Effects of the Maasai migration during the pre-colonial period

  • Increase in population in Kenya.
  • Split of Maasai into two Ilmaasai and Iloikop.
  • Kwari took over cultivation. They were partly influenced by their agricultural neighbours and favourable climate and soil.
  • A number of communities were displaced by the Maasai e.g. Abagusii.
  • They intermarried with their neighbours e.g. Agikuyu, Gusii.
  • They traded with their neighbours i.e. Gusii, Agikuyu and Akamba.
  • They influenced improvements in the military techniques of their neighbours.

1×8 = 8marks

 

(b) Role of the council of elders among the Kenyan communities during the pre-colonial period.

Maintenance of law and order.

Settlement of disputes.

Presiding over religious ceremonies.

Dealt with war affairs & epidemics

Ensured peaceful relations with other communities by setting boundaries.

Determined inter-tribal marriages.

Declared times for social functions such as initiation.

Declared ware and make peace neighbours.           1×8 = 8marks

 

  1. (a) Sources of information about the Kenyan Coast by the 16th century
  • Greco Roman documentary that only makes indirect references to the Coast.
  • The periplus of the Erythrean sea written in Greek around 120 A.D. describing commercial voyage along the coast.
  • Geography – a title of a book written by Claudius Atolemy on the 5th It describes regular and busy commerce between outsiders and the local population.
  • Documents by Arab merchants such as Ibu-Batula and Al Masudi provide some information.
  • Several Swahili histories (chronicles) which have come down from early time e.g. the history of pate, Lamu and Mombasa.
  • Archeological evidence which include remains of pottery iron tools and coins which support the existence of international trade. Any 5×1 = 10 marks

(b) The characteristics of Coastal towns by 1500.

Kiswahili was the language of communication.

Islam was the common religion.

Architecture was African but with influence from Arabian, Persian and Indian designs.

Islamic law was used in administration

Prosperity was based on commerce across the Indian Ocean.

Trade was the main economic activity in the towns.

A sultan, Sheikh or diwan headed a city state government which was independent.

Towns were centres of commerce, religion and administration.

Competition among the city states for wealth and power was common.

Towns minted and used their own coins / money.

People wore woven and silk clothes.                  Any 10×1 = 10marks

 

  1. (a) Factors that led to he Mau Mau uprising in colonial Kenya
  • Loss of independence to Europeans
  • Failure by the colonial government to fulfil the promises made during recruitment of the war effort e.g. employment.
  • There was growing unemployment as well as deteriorating living and working conditions for African workers
  • Oppression by cruel chiefs and colonial police
  • Land alienation.
  • Refusal by the Colonial government to introduce political reforms.
  • Discrimination in the provision of Social services.
  • Police opening fire on upland Bacon factory workers who were on strike killing and wounding some.
  • The Olong episode October 1949 in Seme arid Yatta.
  • Taxation
  • Poor wages
  • Forced labour
  • European cultural arrogance.                       Any 10x = 10marks

 

(b) African leaders who were detained with the declaration of a state of emergency in Kenya.

–     Jomo Kenyatta

  • Bildad Kagia
  • Fred Kubai
  • Paul Ngei
  • Achieng Oneko
  • Kungu Karumba Any 5×1 = 5marks

 

  1. (a) In what ways did the colonial government provide settler agriculture?
  • They provided the settlers with land.
  • They provided continuos flow of labour.
  • African agricultural activities were controlled to reduce competition for markets e.g. Africans were not allowed to grow coffee until 1930’s.
  • They provided adequate transport network to ease marketing of produce and delivery of farm inputs e.g. roads were constructed and railway extended.
  • They established research stations to facilitate the development of better breeds for better yields.
  • The Colonial government established banks where the settlers got loans.
  • They encouraged settlers to form co-operatives for better marketing of their produce.
  • Through political representation in the legislative council they managed to get many Concessions from the government such as tariff barriers and removal of custom duties.
  • The Ministry of Agriculture was established to co-ordinate their agricultural activities. 1×9 = 9marks

 

(b) Name some of the enterpreneurial activities Africans engaged in during the Colonial period

in Kenya.

–     Food processing.

  • Trade
  • Mining
  • Beer brewing
  • Tailoring
  • Sheep keeping
  • Commercial transport. Any 6×1 = 6marks

 

 

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

  1. (a) The duties and functions of the district commissioners
  • He represents the president in National Celebrations at the district level.
  • He is responsible for the maintenance of law and order.
  • He Co-ordinates all government departments in the district. As such he guides and supervises the work of departmental heads.
  • He explains government policies to the people.
  • He also ensures that all government projects are implemented.
  • He is a member of local authorities in the district and therefore ensures that councils carry out their duties.
  • He issues licences and trade permits for example he is the chairman of liquor licencing board and the District Trade Licencing Board.
  • He administers marriages on behalf of the state.
  • He administers district revenue and Co-ordinate the functions of various non-government organisations. 1×9 = 9marks

 

(b) Identify six categories of people whose personal liberty is limited.

  • Convicted criminals
  • A person suspected of having committed or about to commit a criminal offence.
  • A person of unsound mind.
  • A drug addict.
  • A vagrant.
  • A young person under 18 years of age may be denied personal liberty for the purpose of his education and welfare.
  • A person with an infection or contagious disease be detained to prevent spread.

Any 6×1 = 6marks

 

  1. (a) Identify the rules of law that limit free speech.
  • If one makes or publishes openly false statement about another person, he commits a circuit offence.
  • It is an offence for anyone to disclose confidential information relating to the government e.g. National Security and defence.
  • It is an offence to incite people against the government or promote hostility among Kenyans.
  • Law prevents people from publishing anything which the courts and parliament consider as interference with their functions.
  • It is an offence to publish obscene matters. 5×1 = 5marks

 

(b) What is the role of KANU in government?

  • Promote the country’s economic and social development.
  • The party decides and formulates policy objectives within the government works.
  • The party keeps the government informed of the feelings of the people towards the establishment.
  • The party implements its policies through the civil service.
  • KANU officials advise the government on policies that are popular with the masses.
  • The party lays down policy to guide its members of parliament.
  • The party decides and proposes the various development project to be undertaken by the government.
  • Maintaining law and order.
  • Formulate foreign policies. 1x 10 = 10marks

 

  1. (a) Identify several types of elections in Kenya.
  • Civic elections i.e. Local government.
  • Presidential election.
  • General elections / parliamentary.
  • Elections of the speaker / Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly.
  • Party election.
  • By election. 1×6 = 6marks

 

(b) State the conditions necessary for one to qualify to be elected as a member of   

parliament.

  • Must be a Kenyan citizen.
  • Must be 21 years and above.
  • Be registered as a voter in the constituency one wants to contest in the election.
  • Be able to read and write in English and Kiswahili.
  • Must have been in the country for at least 6 months prior to the elections.
  • Be registered member of a registered political party.
  • Should not be one who has been declared bankrupt.
  • Must not hold other posts in the civil service.
  • Must not be insane.
  • Must pay 10,000/- shilling deposit.
  • Must not have been in jail or the last 6 months.
  • Must have either been born there or has an asset in the constituency or staying there.

Any 9×1 = 9marks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT III

PAPER II

 

SECTION A (25 MARKS)

 

  1. What does the term Pre-History mean.       (1mk)
  2. Why are written records important as a source of information on History?       (1mk)
  3. How is Geology related to the study of History?       (1mk)
  4. What does the term “Homind” mean?       (1mk)
  5. What is the other name for Dryopithecus?       (1mk)
  6. Give three distinct characteristics of Homosapiens.       (3mks)
  7. What factors favoured the beginning of agriculture during the New Stone Age? (3mks)
  8. Name two early forms of energy.       (2mks)
  9. Name three forms of early transport.                                                                       (3mks)
  10. Give three reasons why Seyyid Said made Zanzibar his capital.       (3mks)
  11. Give two characteristics of Agrarian Revolution.       (2mks)
  12. What role does adequate population play in the industrial development of a country? (2mks)
  13. Why was Uganda important to the British during the scramble and partition of Africa?(2mks)

 

SECTION B (45 MARKS)

 

  1. (a) State factors that contributed to the development of early Agriculture in Ancient Egypt.

(5mks)

Explain the effects of the development of early Agriculture in Ancient Egypt.      (6mks)

  1. (a) Give five factors that led to rapid development of urban centres in Europe in the

19th Century.                                                                                                               (5mks)

Explain the results of urbanization in Europe in the 19th Century.                           (10mks)

 

  1. (a) What was the effect of the use wheel on people who used it?                           (8mks)

(b) Explain the impact of railway transport on society.                                           (7mks)

 

  1. (a) What methods are used by the European powers to occupy Africa during the 19th?

(10mks)

(b) State five reasons why African leaders collaborated with the Europeans.              (5mks)

 

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

  1. (a) Describe the political organisation of the Ndebele during the Pre-Colonial period.      (9mks)

(b) Identify factors that led to the rise of the Asante Empire.                                 (6mks)

 

  1. (a) State some of the problems that European companies faced in Africa during the

19thC                                                                                                                           (5mks)

(b) Explain the consequences of indirect rule in Nigeria.                                            (10mks)

 

  1. (a) Discuss the causes of the Temne-mende Revolt.                                                    (10mks)

(b) What was the significance of the Buganda Agreement?                                    (5mks)

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT III

PAPER TWO

MARKING SCHEME

 

Pre-History:  Refers to history of man before written records were made.

(1×1 = 1mark)

Written records are  important as a source of information on History

Because they are permanent records for future reference.                      (1×1 = 1mark)

Geology related to the study of History

  • It is a study of fossils which are used to restructure history. (1×1 = 1mark)

 

 

“Homind” means :  Man – like creature.                                                     (1×1 = 1mark)

 

Other name for Dryopithecus  :  Pron consul / woodland ape                     (1×1 = 1mark)

 

Characteristics of Homosapiens.

  • A big brain (about 1000CC)
  • Walked upright / Bipedal
  • Had a more refined speech.
  • Had ability to grasp objects (3×1 = 3marks)

 

Factors favoured the beginning of agriculture during the New Stone Age

  • Development of tools
  • Development of settled life.
  • Increase in population leading to high demand for food.
  • Change in weather / climate conditions made wild food scarce.

Hunting and gathering were becoming tiresome.

Availability of variety of cereals e.g. wheat, barley.

(Any 3×1 = 3marks)

Forms of energy.

  • Wood
  • Wind
  • Solar
  • Water (Any 2×1 = 2marks)

 

Forms of  early transport.

Human transport

Animal transport

Water transport

Land transport.                                                                             (Any 3×1 = 3marks)

 

Reasons why Seyyid Said made Zanzibar his capital.

Zanzibar supported his efforts.

Green and pleasant Island with better climate than Muscat.

Had good habours where ships could anchor.

Had fresh water and fertile soil  (suitable for cultivating cloves).

To control Indian Ocean Trade.                                                   (Any 3×1 = 3marks

 

Characteristics of Agrarian Revolution.

Invention and use of machines

Increased productivity of food.

Use of fertilizers / pesticides / control of livestock diseases.                 (Any 2×1 = 2marks)

 

Role the  adequate population play in the industrial development of a country

Provides adequate supply of labour as industrial workers.

Provides ample market for manufactured goods of trade.                      (Any 2×1 = 2marks)

 

Uganda importance to the British during the scramble and partition of Africa?

  • The strategy of the River Nile with its source in Uganda but strategic in Egypt because of the British occupation of Egypt and shares of the Suez Canal.
  • Concern for missionaries who were being massacred in Buganda e.g. Bishop Hannington of C.M.S.             (2×1 = 2marks)
SECTON B  (45 MARKS)

 

(a)  Factors that contributed to the development of early agriculture in ancient Egypt.

–       Availability of  reliable source of water from the river Nile

Existence of fertile soils along the river Nile – i.e  Silt /  Alluvial soils

The invention and use of Shadoof / canals / Irrigation methods

Existence of a stable government under the pharaoh / political able leaders

Existence writing helped them to keep accurate records of seasons and volume of floods

Use of slave labour on farms

Invention and use of farm implements e.g the Ox –drawn plough to replace sticks and

bronze drawn hoes

Foreign influence from South west Asia  where crop farming was first practised

Building of food stores / storage facilities encouraged  expansion of Agriculture .

                         ( Any 9×1= 9mks ) 

 

  • Effects of the development of early agriculture in Ancient Egypt
  • Improved farming methods led increased food production and high population
  • Farmers became settled down / permanency / led to free time to specialise in craft
  • activities such as pottery/containers.
  • Led to trade in food surplus due to increased food production .
  • Led to development of towns /urban centres like Memphis, Akhetetan, Thebes of
  • Aswan as food production centres along the river Nile valley
  • Led to development of writing (Thieroglyphics) Arithmetic geometry and the calender
  • which facilitated keeping of seasons etc
  • Leadership developed – pharaohs took charge both over Urban and rural areas
  • Agriculture influenced the development of religion . The pharaoh was regarded as the
  • god ruling  over humans . Religious ceremonies were held in temples e.g for good
  • harvests e.tc.                                                            ( any 6 x1 = 6marks)

 

(a)  Factors that led to rapid development of urban centres in Europe in the 19th c.            

Establishment of Industries / rapid industrialisation

Enclosure system created a class of landless people who migrated to urban centres in search of waged labour

Increased mining  activities mining industry facilitated rise Urban centres.

Expansion of  transport system – led to rise of urban centres as railway stations at crossroads

Expansion of trade with the Outside world /international  trade

Availability of capital for investment led to business activities and rise of towns to accommodate  such activities.

Existence of enterpreneurs who were willing to invest surplus capital facilitated the rise of urban centres

People moved into towns and concentration of population /labour force led to rapid development of towns                                      ( Any 5 x1 = 5mks )

 

(b)    The results of urbanization in Europe in the 19th Century.

Poor recreational and amusement facilities

Long working hours for low wage bracket for men women and children

Migrants of many people to towns led to overcrowding in Urban centres

Increased urban population put pressure on limited social amenities such as schools and hospitals

It led to the  development of slums especially for those who could not afford to pay house rents – leading to epidemics –Cholera Typhoid  etc

Led to environmental pollution due to uncontrolled disposal of  industrial and domestic wastes – leading to ill health (etc)

Crime increased with the increasing number of unemployed people in the urban centres

Establishment of industries in Urban centres created employment opportunities for rural craftsmen who moved to town for better wages

Led to improvement of communication infrastructure such as postal services

Led to expansion of commercial activities such as  banking and trade

Too much rural urban migration led to Unemployment

The demand for  raw materials  led to the expansion  in Agriculture

Urbanisation led to the interaction between different communities from different parts of Europe in urban centres . This promoted political awareness among masses.

Urbanisation led to Agricultural land being encroached upon as the urban centres expanded

Poor working conditions urban dwellers

Inadequate medical services and no insurance compensation for factory injuries

Low wages in relation to cost of living in urban centres

( Any 10 x1 = 10mks )  

     

16 .(a)  Effects of the use of the wheel on people who used it.

People made wagons pulled by pack animals for transport of people and  goods of trade

Roads developed for wheeled wagons to travel on

Encouraged migration of people to borders and other regions

Influenced the invention of spoked wheels which replaced solid wheels, Spoked wheels influenced development of war Chariots

The wheel was adopted by potters to fashion day by Chinese and Sumerians

Water wheels ere used to generate energy in early industries in Europe/ led to improved industrial output .

Wheels were used to draw water from wells, facilitated irrigation process

In locomotives using steam engines to facilitate faster transport

( 1x 8 = 8mks )  

(b) The impacts of railway transport on society.

Led to expansion of trade in Europe and the rest of the world

Facilitated the movement of people and promoted greater integration .

Promoted agriculture and assured farmers of means of transport for their farm produce

Provided employment opportunities for people in the society

Led to growth and expansion of urban centres .

Facilitated industrial process by providing quick and cheap means of transport for raw materials, manufactured goods and industrial workers .

Environmental pollution through emission of large amounts of carbon –dioxide/smoke into the atmosphere.

Reduced transport cost of goods of trade.

Paved the interior of man countries of the world  to mining and farming

Paved way for colonisation and exploitation of overseas countries of their resources

Led to migrations and  settlements of people in new lands and consequence development of these lands                              (Any  7×1 = 7mk s ) 

 

17(a)  Methods used by the European powers to occupy Africa during the 19th Century.

Used chartered companies of traders to pioneer European motives e.g British South

African company and central  Africa .

Used diplomatic negotiations using tactics including trickery to win over Africans

Signed treaties both agreement and forced threats to have African lands.

Persuaded  Africans using lavish promises, giving presents gifts to lure chiefs to allow them to occupy their lands – Lozi and Buganda .

Promised Africans protection and trade benefits to have treaties signed e.g with or between Lobengula and Moffat of British S.A company

Some established mission stations trading posts, military posts etc as bases to operate from.

Politicians in Europe made claims over large areas in Africa for their countries on information of men on the sport.

Used divide and rule methods/ played one  society against the other caused friction/defeat  e.g  Fante against Asante.

Annexed land bases e.g Lagos to control hinterland

Forcefully conquered and occupied areas of resistance e.g in Matebele land .

Pressurised rulers to stop slave trade hence started legitimate trade as a means of occupation.

Used Benin Conference to determine the occupation of the interior during the scramble                                                                                                       (Any 10 x 1 = 10mks)     

  

Reasons why African leaders collaborated with the Europeans.

Many African leaders did not understand the intentions of Europeans and assumed they  would soon leave .

Some wanted protection against their enemies

They hoped to save their independence

The leaders wanted to retain their positions

Material gains from the  Europeans

Influence from the missionaries  already present in their country.

( Any 5 x1 =5mks)

 

SECTION  C  ( 30 MARKS)

 

  1. The political organisation of the Ndebele during the pre-colonial period.

It was a kingdom headed by a king

The king was a supreme judge and commander in chief of the army

The kingdom was divided into a number of military towns

Each settlement was headed by an Induna .

The Indunas were governed  merely by enforcing the rulers directives

The settlements ( regimental towns ) were further divided into units ruled by Junior officers

The King kept a standing army

The King  provided the soldiers with  shields ,short stabbing  spears (a segai ) as well as feeding the regiments .

Soldiers remained in active service until 40 years when they were released to go and marry.                                                                    ( 9 x1 = 9 marks )

 

  • Factors that led to the rise of the Asante Empire.

Several small Asante states emerged around Kumasi . They gave support to each other   when need arose mainly because they belonged to Oyoko clan .

They got a lot of wealth from the Trans Atlantic slave trade which she used to strengthen  the Kingdom .

Asante acquired guns and ammunition from Europeans which she used to conquer other states

Centralisation of the authority under the Asantehene ensured effective administration .

 

 

Asante Kingdom was endowed with very important items  of trade e.g gold  and Kola nuts

The area was fertile and ideal for mixed farming thus plenty of food for the population .                                                                                                 (1 x 6 = 6mks )   

 

  1. 19. (a) Problems that European companies faced in Africa during the 19th

They had anticipated to get a lot of profit from trade only to discover there was very

little  trade

Most became bankrupt due to lack of revenue

They encountered serious resistance from the Africans which made administration very expensive

Transport was a very big problem because most rivers were not navigable and other means  were not developed e.g  roads and railway

Lack of experienced staff: They employed soldiers who had no knowledge of administration                                                                      (1 x 5 = 5mks)

 

  • The consequences of indirect rule.

It led to erosion of the traditional powers of the emirs and other African rulers

In  South Nigeria the warrant chiefs who had been appointed were non-existent contributed  to the  modernisation of the region .

In south Nigeria the Missionaries built schools and hospitals and this helped raise the standards of living of he people

The introduction of law courts in the south helped to prevent people from taking law into their hands and traditional  practices such as mutilation of limbs and human sacrifice were banned.

The North remained backward and conservative because missionaries were officially discouraged from going there: Education and health lagged behind.

Lack of skilled manpower in the North led to influx of southerners to work as teachers, clerks e.t.c . They dominated the Southerners which later brought about friction

The Emirs gained more power over people than before

In the North the system was successful because the subject felt that their traditions had been justly protected and were still ruled by their leaders

Indirect rule helped to spread the use of modern currency

It led to rise of Nationalism. The system had ignored elite and so were not happy . They spearheaded the development of nationalist movements.                        

 (1 x10 = 10 mks)

 

20.(a)   The causes of the Temnemende revolt.

  • British extension of the protectorate to include interior Temne and Mende .
  • Use of Creoles in their occupation . Africans hated them because they despised their culture
  • Traditional chiefs had lost their power
  • Police force – The people despised the presence of police among them . They always interfered with the internal politics of African government. They lacked respect for chiefs
  • Loss of Independence
  • Abolition of slave trade – It was their source of livelihood.
  • Loss of land : their land was declared crown land
  • Introduction of hut – tax system – African would not understand the concept of paying for houses they had  built
  • Forced labour – to build barracks, roads
  • Flogging of chiefs in public   ( 1×10 = 10mks )     

 

The significance of the Buganda Agreement.

It gave legitimacy to British claim over Buganda

  • It gave them a basis for the  administration of Buganda, whose position in the  protectorate was strengthened
  • Kabakas powers were considerably reduced e.g chiefs did not have to rely on is patronage since they were British administrators
  • Saza chiefs were the real beneficiaries . The new land tenure gave them  land  right to impose land rent

The increase Sazas of from 1 to 20 by the confirmation of Buganda’s recent annexation of several countries from Bunyoro caused friction later with Bunyoro over her “lost  countries”                                                       (1 x 5= 5mks)  

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT IV

PAPER ONE

 

SECTION A (  25 MKS)

 

What is the meaning of Government?                                                                             2mks

Give two reasons why the Africans were against the provision of labour for settlers.      2mks

Name two independent religious movements, which were established in Kenya by 1930.                                                                                                                                     2mks

State two factors that led to the migration of the Bantu people into Kenya.                 2mks

What were the reasons behind the construction of Kenya – Uganda railway?               2mks

State two economic activities of the Akamba.                                                                2mks

Trace the administration system of the Mijikenda.                                                  2mks

Apart from trade, give two reasons why Arabs came to the Kenyan coast by 1500      2mks

Name two city states that existed, flourished and declined on the Kenyan coast.   2mks

State the significance of the presence of the Portuguese at the Kenyan coast between

the 15th and 17th centuries.                                                                                               2nks

Mention two symbols of national unity in Kenya.                                                    2mks

Mention two methods used by European relations to establish their rule in Africa       2mks

 

 

SECTION B  (  45 MKS)

 

  1. a) Name three officials of IBEACo. Other than William Mackinnan.       3mks
  2. b) For what aims was the IBEA Co. formed in Kenya       5mks
  3. c) What part did William Mackinon play in encouraging the British interest in Kenya.                                                                                                                                                            7mks
  4. a) Mention four present day Oromo speakers in Kenya.       4mks
  5. b) What were the reasons for migration of the Oromo from their original homeland? 6mks
  6. c) Give and explain the consequencies of the expansion of the Oromo into Kenya by

1800                                                                                                                      5mks

 

  1. a) Give five reasons for the Akamba resistance against the British.       5mks

Discuss the reasons for the failure of armed resistance against the British by Kenyan

communities.                                                                                                       10mks

 

  1. a) Why did the Maasai collaborate with the British?       5mks
  2. b) What were the results of the collaborations?       10mks

SECTION C  (  30 MKS)

 

  1. a) Define Provincial Administration.       3mks
  2. b) Explain the functions of the chief.       12mks

 

  1. a) Name three occasions when the Kenyan National anthem is sung.       3mks
  2. b) Explain six factors that promote National Unity       12mks

 

  1. a) Name three types of local authorities in Kenya. 3mks
  2. b) What services are provided by Local Authorities in Kenya.       12mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT IV

PAPER ONE

MARKING SCHEME

 

  1. Meaning of Government.

Is a group of people who govern a nation or state.

Is an organised political community with the apparatus from the state.

 

  1. Reasons why the Africans were against the provision of labour for settlers.
  • Africans attached no importance to money
  • Many did not like to leave their families inorder to work for the Europeans.
  • The wages provided by the settlers were low
  • The poor and harsh conditions that Africans were subjected to by the white employers eg. Corporal punishment. 1 x 2 = 2mks

                                                           

  1. The independent religious movements which were established in Kenya by
  • Momiya Luo Mission
  • Christian universal Evangelical union
  • Kilumi movement
  • African independent Pentecostal church
  • African Orthodox church

–     Mumbo cult.                                                               Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Factors that led to the migration of the Bantu people into Kenya.

Population pressure

Search for pasture

Search of land for cultivation / farming

Iron work stimulated them as they were able to clear big portions of land.

Spirit of adventure / wander lust.                           Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. The reasons behind the construction of Kenya – Uganda railway
  • To establish effective control over British East Africa
  • To stop slave and promote legitimate trade
  • To facilitate the movement of troops and government administrators.
  • To link Uganda with the East Coast and outside world for greater economic growth.                                                1 x 2 = 2mks

 

 

 

  1. Economic activities of the Akamba

Kept livestock

They were hunters

They were traders / practised commerce

They were also cultivators.                                              Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. The administration system of the Mijikenda.

the political set up of the mijikenda was controlled by the clans.

The elders of the clan sorted all matters belonging to their Kaya

The clan leaders held some rituals of the Kaya

Oath taking was also administered by the elders.                       Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Reasons why Arabs came to the Kenyan coast by 1500

Some fled to the Kenya Coast as a result of religious and political persecution at home.

To spread Islam

To establish settlements

To explore the region

Adventure excitement.                                                     Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. City states that existed, flourished and declined on the Kenyan coast.

Vumba

Gedi

Mombasa

Lamu

 

  1. The significance of the presence of the Portuguese at the Kenyan coast between the 15th and 17th

Building of Fort Jesus which became a historical site

They brought to the coast crops such as maize, groundnuts, sweet potatoes, cassava, pineapples, paw-paws and guavas.

Some of their words were added to Kiswahili

Formation of strong links with India

They introduced Christianity at the coast though it never had any impact on the local people

Their presence reduced the spread of Islam at the coast.

Any 3 x 1 = 3mks

  1. Symbols of National unity in Kenya.

The Kenya flag

The coat of arms

The loyalty pledge

The National Anthem

National awards                                                                any  2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Methods used by European Nations to establish their rule in Africa.

Signing of treaties with African rulers

European nations came in to protect their nationals ie traders, missionaries etc

The Europeans used military action to force the acceptance of their colonial rule by Africans.                                                                                 Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

 

 

SECTION B  ( 45 MKS)

 

  1. a) Officials of IBEA Co. other than William Mackinnon

Lord Lugard

Makenzie

Jackson

 

  1. IBEA Co. aims in Kenya.

To open up trade in the British territory with Sir William Mackinnon as its chairman

To help abolish slave trade in the interior of East Africa using the railway as a means of transport into the interior

To establish British influence and administration inland, particularly in Uganda region.

To assist in the exploration of East Africa so as to provide incentives for the Europeans to come and invest

To build the Uganda railway as a means of transport to the interior so as to exploit the resources.

To  prevent the German encirclement of the British sphere of influence from within and the South of Kenya                                                                 Any 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. Role of William Mackinnon in encouraging the British interest in Kenya.

Started the “British Indian Steamship company” which made friendship with the Sultans of Zanzibar which led to British protectorate over sultans territories.

Being a man of mixed motives;  –  Religious philanthropist and commercial, he was part of businessmen in Europe who formed companies that financed missionaries to Africa e.g his IBEA Co. intervened in the case of missionary work in Uganda, – Kenya – Uganda protectorate was created.

His activities led to the signing of the Heligoland Treaty ( 1890) which divided E. Africa between Germany and Britain giving Kenya to Britain.

He encouraged investors from Europe to come to East Africa and help finance the building of the Kenya – Uganda Railway.

Urged the British Government for assistance to complete the railway.  Though reluctant at first, the British consented later.

His company the IBEA Co. was used by the British to rule the Kenya protectorate and the government only took over when the company became bankrupt.

Because of the problems encountered by IBEA Co. eg. Keeping officials like captain lord Lugard being too expensive; the British govt decided to take over the rule.  Invited the settlers to come and assist in raising revenue to help pay for the cost of building the railway and of administration.

Established a chain of forts and trading post from the coast to Uganda this gave the British a prospective view of the interior for exploitation purposes.

His company helped to soften the African response to British colonial advance eg.  He made treaties with several rulers of the interior.

 

  1. a) Mention four present day Oromo speakers in Kenya.

Orma / Galla

Borana

Burji

Gabbra                                                                                          1 x 4 = 4mks

 

 

 

  1. Reasons for migrations of the Oromo from their original homeland.

Search for pasture for their cattle

Oromo were running away from their enemies

They were forced to move because of cattle diseases

Natural calamities such as famine and draught forced them to migrate

They migrated in search for water for their animals

Family / clan feuds                                                           1 x 6 = 6mks

 

  1. The consequencies of the expansion of the Oromo into Kenya by 1800

Through their expansion and settlement in Kenya, a new community, the Oromo came to exist in Kenya.

Expansion of Oromo into Kenya brought about population re-distribution.  Some, weaker communities were displaced by the incoming Oromo.  Eg.  Segeju were forced to flee their original homeland to Lamu Islands, Mwangea Hills in malindi and Lower Tana.

Oromo attacked Shungwaya the mythical settlement of the Eastern Bantu speakers dislodged them and forced them to migrate further South to safer areas such as Taita Hills and Mt. Kilimanjaro area.

Expansion of the Oromo into North Eastern Kenya intensified intercommunity conflicts over pastureland and water rights in the region.  Eg.  Galla – Somali wars over pastureland.

Incoming Oromo communities intermarried with some of the Bantu communities eg.  Mijikenda and Pokomo

Interaction between the Oromo and the Eastern Bantu groups brought about cultural fusion eg. Pokomo language has borrowed words from Oromo languages.

Any 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. a) Reasons for the Akamba resistance against the British.

The British presence after the establishment of an administration station at Machakos adversely affected trade between the Akamba, and the coast.  The British interfered with their trading activities, hence resistance.

The British porters and Askaris who were used by the British stole, raped and destroyed Akamba property.

The British had no respect for Akamba traditions.  In 1890 the local British administrator, George Leith committed religious sacrilege by cutting down a tree form an “Ithembo” ( a sacred place) and using it as a flag pol.

British attempts to stop Akamba raiding activities on the Agikuyu caused discontent.

The British forces, who were stationed at their garrisons at Mwala and Mukuyuni were unpopular among the local communities as they looted and raped women.

1 x 5 = 5mks

 

Reasons for the failure of armed resistance against the British by Kenyan communities

Disunity among the Kenyan communities.  They at times fought one another,  thus giving room to the British to concentrate their soldiers in an area at a time and play one community against another.

Africans lacked modern weapons, thus while the British were using the machine gun they used spears, bow and arrows.

African warriors were not trained prior to their military encounters with the  British.  Instead they were hapharzadly gathered in times of need.

 

 

 

Some communities had been reduced in population by epidemics and other natural calamities.  So they were unable to offer effective resistance to the British.

Poor leadership  –  Some leaders were even bribed with gifts eg. The Kamba leader accepted gifts of livestock and firearms to give up the armed struggle.

5 x 2 = 10mks

  1. a) Maasai collaboration with British.

The rise of the Nandi in the 1850’s due to political centralisation had greatly weakened the Maasai.  The Nandi began to raid the communities that the Maasai raided before and even the Maasai themselves with their power and wealth, they could not offer any resistance.

The 19th century Maasai civil wars and succession disputes had further weakened them.  The maasai fought amongst each other due to succession disputes.

Natural calamities e.g locust invasion, cholera epidemic ( 1869) pneumonia (1880s small pox and rinderpest weakened the Maasai.

Towards the end of the 19th century there was famine in Maasailand lenana therefore took some of his people to British forces and Gikuyu land to save them from imminent death.  After the famine, he went for his people only to learn that they had been sold to slavery by the Agikuyu.  He was forced to seek help from the British.

The Kendong massacre where as a result of the killing of 650 Agikuyu and Swahili porters by the Maasai, the Maasai and the British were drawn together.  After the attack two Europeans organised a counter- attack on the Maasai and 100 of them were shot to death.  The Maasai were impressed by the military might of the Europeans hence collaboration                                                                                                          5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. Results of collaborations?

The Maasai warriors were used to fight other uncooperative communities as auxiliaries and mercenaries.

Lenana was made “paramount chief of the Maasai.

The British used the existing friendship to negotiate for land concessions in 1904 and 1911.  In 1904 the Maasai were settled in two reserves, the Laikipia and Ngong and a corridor was created to link the two.  In 1911 complaints from the settlers to the effect that Massai cattle were spreading diseases to their cattle led to the resettlement of the Maasai in one reserve Ngong.

The Maasai were given a favoured status by the British

They were rewarded with cattle acquired from uncooperative peoples

The Maasai were used to pacify resisting communities e.g Nandi, Luo, Bukusu.

The Maasai not only lost land but they also lost independence.

They were displaced and manipulated.                1 x 5 = 5mks

 

SECTION C.  ( 30 MKS)

 

  1. a) Provincial Administration.

Is part of the executive branch of the Central government, which operates at the provincial level.

It is composed of the provincial commissioner, District commissioner, District officers, Chiefs and Assistant chiefs.

 

The functions of the Chief

Is the main link between the government and the people at the location level

Ensures that law and order are maintained.  He is empowered to arrest law breakers with the help of administration police.

 

Explains government policies to the people in the location through public barazas.

Issues permits for both private and public functions.

Controls the use of dangerous drugs. Eg. Bhang, and the brewing of illegal drinks

Settles minor disputes involving people in his location.

He is the chairman of the locational development committee so promotes development projects in his location.

Mobilises wananchi to participate in public works eg the building of access roads bridges etc.

Checks on the payment of taxes eg. Coffee levy, radio, and bicycle licences.

Reports births and deaths and the outbreak of infectious diseases as soon as they occur.                                                                                                            1 x 12 = 12mks

 

  1. a) Occasions when the Kenya National Anthem is sung.

National celebrations eg. National days like Madaraka Day,  Kenyatta day, Jamuhuri Day.

During functions that are presided over by the head of state and other dignataries.

The state opening of parliament

In schools during assemblies at least once a week.

 

Factors that promote national unity in Kenya.

Kenya is a unitary state, and the constitution protects all Kenyans from all types of discrimination.  It  also guarantees equality of opportunity to all Kenyans.

The government pursues the policy of fair and equitable distribution of resources.  Social amenities such as schools, hospitals, are not based on race, religion or ethnic group.

Kenya offers the same education for all children in public schools.  They use the same curriculum.

Social interactions in games, cultural activities, inter-communal marriages and in places of work promote national unity

Trade between different communities promotes national unity

A national language helps to foster national unity.  In 1975 kiswahili was made the national language of Kenya.  It is a language which is spoken by Kenyans of different ethnic backgrounds, thus it promotes national unity.                    2 x 6 = 12mks

 

  1. a) Types of local Authorities in Kenya

Municipal councils

Urban councils

Area/ county councils

Town councils                                                                              1 x 3 = 3mks

 

  1. Services provided by local authorities in Kenya.

They serve the needs of the local people eg. In urban areas they provide markets and market facilities.

In rural areas they provided such services as the construction of cattle dips

They supplement government efforts by supplying certain services that the government is unable to provide

They help in development of participatory democracy as members of local authorities are elected

They provide employment opportunities for many eg. as councillors, administrators, clerks

They provide solutions to local problems since they are in a better position to understand them than the central government.

 

 

They pass by-laws for the smooth running of the local authority eg. For prohibiting rubbish dumping and hawking certain areas.

They bury destitute persons who die within their areas of jurisdiction and have no relating

They issue trade and business licences in their areas of Jurisdiction.

6 x 2 = 12mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT IV

PAPER TWO

 

SECTION A  ( 25MKS)

 

  1. Give short comings of oral traditions as a source of History.       2mks
  2. What is the stone Age?       1mk
  3. Give the names of the three main periods or phases of the stone Age.       3mks
  4. What was the differences between Olduwan and Acheulian tools?       1mk
  5. List the main uses of Acheulian hand axes.       3mks
  6. Which of the pithecines or hominids was also known as proconsul Man?       1mk
  7. Which type of tools is most typical of the late stone Age?       1mk
  8. What do historians call the first tool-making man?       1mk
  9. What was the capital of the Songhai Empire?       1mk
  10. Of which empire of the Western Sudan was Niani the capital?       1mk
  11. Who built boats using bundles of reeds?       1mk
  12. In Africa, drums were often used to send signals. In which country were talking drums

found?                                                                                                                               1mk

  1. What was Shungwaya?       1mk
  2. Which is the other name for the Oromo speaking people?       1mk
  3. Name three inventions which were made by Sir Isaac Newton       3mks
  4. State three results of the interaction between the Shona and the Ndebele during the

pre-colonial period.                                                                                                          3mks

 

SECTION B  (45 MKS)

 

  1. a) How did one become the King of the Asante in the 19th Century?                      1mk
  2. b) State seven economic activities of the Ndebele during the Nineteenth Century 7mks
  3. c) Discuss the social organization of the Buganda       7mks
  4. a) Identify five factors that led to rise of Asante empire.                                        5mks
  5. b) Describe the political organisation of the Asante.       10mks
  6. a) Explain the causes of the Maji Maji rebellion                                                                 6mks
  7. b) Give the reasons for the failure of the Maji Maji uprising.       9mks
  8. a) State three privileges enjoyed by the assimilated Africans.                               6mks
  9. b) Why did the policy of Assimilation fail?       9mks

 

SECTION C  ( 30 MKS)

 

  1. a) Give reasons for the rise and growth of the Buganda kingdom                           6mks
  2. b) Give an account of the establishment of European settlements in Africa before 1870

9mks

  1. a) Name three major world religions                                                                       3mks
  2. b) Discuss the role of religion in society       12mks

 

  1. a) Give reasons why European interest in Africa increased after 1850                   10mks
  2. Identify the factors that facilitated European conquest of African countries in the

19th century.                                                                                                          5mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT IV

PAPER II

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A  ( 25MKS)

 

Short comings of oral traditions as a source of History.                                        

The information may be distorted due to exaggerations

The giver might be biased

Inaccurate

It may be difficult to distinguish what is real from what is imaginary

Failure of memory may lead to omission of facts.

Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

Stone Age :  Is the name historians have given that long period of mans history in which stone was the most important material used in the manufacture of tools and weapons

 

Periods or phases of the stone Age.                        

Early or old stone Age ( lower palaeolithic)

The middle stone Age ( middle palaeolithic)

The late stone age / upper palaeolethic.                          1 x 3 = 3mks

 

Differences between Olduwan and Acheulian tools                                   

Oldowan tools were fairly crude while Acheulian tools were made using more advanced stare working techniques.

 

Main uses of Acheulian hand axes.                                                              

Skinning animals

Cutting and shaping bone and wood

Scraping animal skins

Gathering wild vegetable foods

Crushing bones for marrow

Digging.                                                                            Any 3 x 1 = 3mks

 

Dryopithecus Africanus                                                                     1 x 1 = 1mk

 

Tools is most typical of the late stone Age                                     

Microlith

 

What  historians call the first tool-making man                                                     

Homohabilis

 

The capital of the Songhai Empire

Gao

 

 

The  empire of the Western Sudan capital Miani   

Mali

 

The Egyptians  built boats using bundles of reeds

 

The  country where talking drums were found                                                                   

Ghana

 

Shungwaya –  A Bantu settlement and point of dispersal     1 x 1 = 1mk    

The other name for the Oromo speaking people – Galla

Inventions which were made by Sir Isaac Newton                                     

He discovered force of gravity

He discovered the nature of light and the speed at which it travels

He discovered the reflecting telescope and colours of the spectrum.

1 x 3 = 3mks

 

Results of the interaction between the Shona and the Ndebele during the

pre-colonial period.

The Ndebele adopted Shona God Mwari

Ndebele began to participate in long distance trade

The shona were led by the Ndebele ie became their subject.

1 x 3 = 3mks

 

SECTION B  (45 MKS)

 

  1. a) How one became the King of the Asante in the 19th Century

Elected by the state kings (Omanihenas)

 

  1. b) Economic activities of the Ndebele during the Nineteenth Century

They were cattle keepers

They grew crops such a maize, cassava and millet

They were raiders, raising their neighbours for cattle

They traded with their neighbours

They were hunters and gatherers

They made pots and baskets

They were also iron workers.                                                       1 x 7 = 7mks

 

  1. The social organization of the Buganda

They were organised into clans

The Kabaka was regarded as a semi-god

They have symbols of unity such as royal drums spears stools and throne

The umbilical cords of the Kabaka were preserved and the royal bones and tombs.

They worshipped their god – Katonda

They also practised ancestral worship

They had medicine men and sorcerers                            1 x 7 = 7mks

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Factors that led to rise of Asante empire.

Several small Asante states emerged around  Kumasi.  They gave supports to each other when need arose mainly because they belonged to Oyoko clan.

They got a lot of wealth from the Trans-Atlantic slave trade which she used to strengthen the kingdom

Asante acquired guns and ammunition from Europeans which she used to conquer other states

Centralization of authority under the Asantehene  have ensured effective administration

Asante kingdom was endowed with very important items of trade eg gold and Kola – nuts

The area was fertile and ideal for mixed farming thus plenty of food for the population                                                                                                1 x 5 = 5mks

 

  1. b) The political organisation of the Asante.

The Asante empire was ruled by a king / Asantehene.

He ruled with the advice of a confederacy or union council consisting of kings of the states forming the union

These state kings were called Omanhenes.

Each of these kings was required to swear an oath of allegiance to the Asantehene and had to give up the right of declaring war at will on a fellow king

Each king was required to give a contingent of soldiers when called upon to do so by the Asantehene

Asante states were bound together by the golden stool.  It was the symbol of unity.

Each Omanhene was given a black stool

Each state had to pay tribute during wars and national emergencies.

The annual Odwira festival further strengthened the spirit of solidarity and nationhood.

The Asante had a strong military organisation

Each member state of the union was assigned a place in command of one of the wings.

The empire consisted of three divisions.

Kumasi –  directly under the Asantehene

Amatoo or states outside Kumasi but which were part of the original union and lay 80km radius of modern Kumasi.

Conquered states which were considered as provincial and loosely bound to the Asantehene and the union

Asantehene appointed officers who represented him in the conquered states and in the diplomatic service.                                                     1 x 10 = 10mks

 

  1. a) The causes of the Maji Maji rebellion

Germans were hated because of the way they treated the Africans

They imposed hut tax which was collected with a lot of ruthlessness

The use of the Arab and Swahili as Jumbos and Akidas was resented by the Tanzanians.

Africans were against forced labour.  They were forced to work in public projects such as road construction or carrying timber from the forest.

Germans had no respect for African culture eg in Ugindo they slept with Mgindo women

African land was taken and given settlers

Desire by Africans to regain their independence.

Cotton scheme:  Africans got little pay for the work eg. Zaramo got 35 cents after a whole years work                                                                               1 x 8 = 8mks

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Reasons for the failure of the Maji Maji uprising.

Germans had superior weapons compared to the Africans who used bows arrows and spears

Germans soldiers were well trained while the African used warriors who were only used to fighting when raiding for defending community.  They had no military experience.

Germans were able to get reinforcement form Germany

The scorched earth policy used by the Germans destroyed corps, livestock leading to starvation of many Africans.  This weakened their resistance.

Lack of unity among Africans

Lack of co-ordination by the Africans.  Each tribe fought on its own.

The warriors got demoralised when the magic water failed to work

Many warriors get demoralised when leaders were captured and executed.

Some of the African communities collaborated with the Germans while others refused to join the uprising                                         1 x 9 = 9mks

 

  1. a) Privileges enjoyed by the assimilated Africans.

They enjoyed some civil and political rights as French men

They could vote and be voted for

They could become members of the French chamber of deputies

They were protected by French laws hence were not discriminated against

They could become French citizens

They were exempted from forced labour            1 x 6 = 6mks

 

Why the policy of Assimilation failed                                                    

The school system did not indoctrinate the African sufficiently on the value of the policy.  The schools were missionaries and were interested in converting the Africans to Christianity than in turning them into French man.

Cultural transformation takes generations to occur.  Colonial rule lasted about

50 years.

French anthropologist rejected the ideas of assimilation.  They argued that African culture and traditions should be respected.

Africans were strongly attracted to their own cultural values and therefore opposed the cultural imperialism e.g land ownership and polygamy

French businessmen saw Africans as a source of cheap labour and disapproved assimilation.

Assimilation was too expensive

Most Africans were Muslims and were not willing to change to Christianity.

French men believed in racial superiority

The assimilated Africans were alienated from the rest of the society

1 x 9 = 9mks.

 

SECTION C  ( 30 MKS)

 

  1. a) Reasons for the rise and growth of the Buganda kingdom

Steady food supply.  The Baganda cultivated plantains in the fertile interlacustrine soils.  They also kept livestock.  These ensured a steady food supply.

The fall of the Chwezi dynasty.  The Chwezi rule in the 15th century paved way for the rise of Buganda which had been under them.  The Kabaka of Buganda rallied his people behind him to annex some fertile pasturelands from neighbouring Bunyoro.

Iron – working:  When Buganda took some areas from Bunyoro, the kingdom embarked on serious working and smelting.  This increased the provision of weapons for the kingdoms army agricultural implements and items of trade.

Expansion of trade – Buganda grew as a result of its trade relations with the coastal Arabs and swahili who entered the kingdom in the mid – 19th century.  Contact with the Arabs made Buganda acquire firearms which were used in territorial annexation campaigns.

Political organisation:  The successes of Buganda’s expansion was due to its stable centralised government.  It was centred on the Kabaka who extended his relations to all countries through marriages.

Strong standing army:  unlike many chiefdoms of that time, the Baganda had a strong army led by skilled commanders.  The leader of the army, Mujuzi instilled good discipline in the soldiers.  A steady food supply                                           1 x 6 = 6mks

 

  1. b) Establishment of European settlements in Africa before 1870

The main European powers that set up settlement in Africa before 1870 were Britain, Portugal, France, Spain and Holland (the Netherlands)

The settlements were mainly along the coasts where the Europeans settled as traders.

The settling up of trading posts in places like the West African Coast, the Cape and along the Mediterranean coast.

They also settled on Islands such as the Canaries, madeira, Sao Tome in the Atlantic ocean and Mauritius, Madagascar and Seychelles in the Indian ocean.

By 1850 the Dutch (Boer) Trekkers had set up their republics in the interior of South Africa following the Great Trek events ( 1825 – 1840)

Trading posts were set up to link with the economically viable hinterland as was seen along the grain, ivory and slave coasts in West Africa.

Mission stations were set up in the interior as well as along the coast eg Abeokuta in Nigeria.

The construction of military forts and garrisons such as Fort Jesus provided security to Europeans settlers and traders.

Other settlements were set up as refreshment centres as was the case of the cape in 1652 by Jan Van Rieback’s group.                                                 1 x 9 = 9mks

 

  1. a) Major world religions

Christianity

Islam

Hinduism

Buddhism                                                             any 3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. b) Roles of religion in society

Religion promotes unity in society since people who belong to the same religion are bound together by their religion.

Religion provides leadership in society.  Early political leaders were also religious leaders.

Religion has played an important role in education.  The first centres of learning in Europe were monasteries.  The first universities in Europe and Asia started as centers of religious studies.

Religious principles and laws from the foundation of modern law.  Religious laws eg. The Decalogue ( ten commandments are among the earliest written laws and they have helped to lay a foundation for the development of modern law.

Religion has influenced architecture e.g Egyptian temples

 

 

Religion has contributed to poetry.  Religious texts provide rich poetry e.g the songs of Solomon in the bible, the vedas.

Religion has led to a class of religious leaders eg priests, diviners and medicinemen.  Because of their special roles in society, they have become important and highly political leaders eg. The pope

Religion has helped in the development of art eg painting, sculpture of religious scenes.

Religion provides comfort to man in times of problems and despair.

Any 6 x 2 = 12mks

 

  1. a) Reasons why European interest in Africa increased after 1850

European traders wanted trading partners.

Search for market for the industrial goods

They wanted a source of raw materials for the industrial goods

Prestige  –  they considered colonies as a source of wealth hence a sing of great prestige.

Loss of America by Europe following the Manroe Doctrine of 1823 reduces European influence in America and increased their interest in Africa.

Emergence of Belgium, Italy and Germany as powers made them to take interest in Africa.

The spread of Christianity to check Islamic influence in Africa.  Missionary societies urged their mother governments to give them protection against the Against the Africans who were hostile.

Surplus population in Europe including freed slaves necessitated search for new areas to resettle this population.  Africa was regarded as having “vacant” land

Increased geographical knowledge of Africa.

The discovery of quinine

Improvement in transport eg. Railway and canal construction increased European interest in Africa.

Role of explorers and imperialists urged their mother governments to annex their African areas of interest.                                                                    Any 10 x 1 = 10mks

 

  1. Factors that facilitated European conquest of African countries in the 19th century.

Poor military tactics which could not match with modern weapons of the Europeans

Poor military strategies

Inferiority of weapons

Disunity among the African communities

Luring of the Africans by the Europeans

Divided loyalty with the African communities

Punitive expeditions by the Europeans to suppress initial resistance scared the other communities.                                                              5 x 1 = 5mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT V

PAPER I

 

SECTION A  ( 25 MARKS)

 

Give two functions of the council of elders among the Akamba during the pre-colonial

period.                                                                                                                                     2mks

State two functions of the Nabongo of Wanga kingdom during the pre-colonial period.     2mks

Identify two factors which encouraged the spread of Islam in Kenya by 1500.                         2mks

State two seasons why the Portuguese were able to conquer the coastal settlements by

1500                                                                                                                                        2mks

Give two social effects of missionary activities in Kenya in the nineteenth century.               2mks

Identify two methods which were used by the British to establish colonial rule in Kenya.  2mks

State two methods which were used by the colonial administration to attract white settlers

in Kenya.                                                                                                                            2mks

List down two problems which were experienced by early political associations in Kenya.

2mks

State two objectives of education offered by Christian missionaries in Kenya during the

colonial period.                                                                                                                  2mks

State two factors which led to the formation of Taita Hills Association.                                2mks

Which provision in the Kenyan constitution protects the wealth of the individual in

Kenya.                                                                                                                                 2mks

Identify two causes of division within opposition political parties in Kenya.                       2mks

Identify two situations which may lead to a by-election in Kenya                             2mks

 

SECTION B  ( 45 MKS)

 

  1. a) Why did the Eastern Cushites migrate into Kenya before 1800?                5mks
  2. b) Explain the results of the migration and settlement of Eastern cushites in Kenya. 10mks

 

  1. a) What factors enabled the Akamba to participate in the long distance trade in the

nineteenth  century?                                                                                                5mks

  1. b) Explain the impact of the long distance trade to the people of Kenya.        10mks

 

  1. a) What were the terms the 1890 Anglo – German agreement.         5mks
  2. b) Discuss the factors which undermined IBEA Company activities in Kenya. 10mks

 

  1. a) How did the Kenya African Union (KAU) promote nationalism in Kenya between

1944 and 1953?                                                                                                      5mks

  1. Explain five constitutional changes which took place in Kenya between 1954 and
  2. 10mks

 

SECTION C ( 30 MARKS)

 

  1. a) What factors facilitated the introduction of many political parties in Kenya in 1991.

5mks

  1. b) Explain the role of opposition parties in government and nation building              10mks

 

  1. a) Why are parliamentary elections held regularly in Kenya                            5mks
  2. b) Explain five powers that the constitution of Kenya gives the president of Kenya.   10mks

 

  1. a) What are the branches of the local government in Kenya              5mks
  2. b) Explain the benefits of local authorities in Kenya             10mks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT V

PAPER I

MARKING SCHEME.

 

  1. – Ruled the community / settled disputes
  • Offered advice to the community
  • Prepared youth for war
  • Presided over religious ceremonies
  • Were the custodians of the social code of ethics/ moral values among the Akamba

Any  2 pts = 1mk each

  1. – Leader of the Buganda Kingdom
  • Appointed administrative officials in the kingdom
  • Controlled trade in the kingdom
  • Was the symbol of unity in the kingdom. 2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

  1. – Arab settlements along the coast
  • Intermarriages between Arabs and the local communities
  • Islam was more accommodating to African culture
  • Commercial activities between Arabs and Africans 2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

  1. – The Portuguese had superior arms
  • The coastal settlements were disunited
  • Portuguese got reinforcement from Goa / India
  • They were ruthless in their attacks. 2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

  1. – They introduced Western education
  • Introduced Western medicine / medical facilities
  • Fought against slave trade
  • Undermined African culture e.g polygamy 2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

  1. – Signing friendship treaties with the local rulers
  • Military force
  • Constructing operational bases
  • Building administrative posts
  • Constructing lines of communication e.g roads and railways
  • Trickery / luring African chiefs
  • Signing partition treaties eg 1886 and 1890 Anglo – German agreements.

2 x 1 = 2 mks

  1. – Giving them loans
  • Providing transport facilities
  • Advertising the availability of free land in Kenya
  • Assuring them about the existence of free / cheap labour

2 x 1 = 2 mks

  1. – Disunity among leaders
  • Inadequate funds to support their activities
  • Opposition by the colonial government
  • Arrest / detention of leaders. 2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

  1. – To teach Africans basic technical skills
  • To train African catechists
  • Civilize Africans
  • Teach Africans basic literacy and numeracy skills
  • Teach Africans better farming methods. 2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

  1. – To oppose the kipande system
  • To oppose the colonial policy of destocking
  • To oppose government move to relocate the Wadawida from Taita Hills to Samburu district.
  • To fight for their land that had been taken by white settlers

2 x 1 = 2 mks

  1. – The right to own property                                                         1 x 1 = 1mk

 

  1. – Personality differences
  • Rivalry over leadership
  • Ethnic affiliation
  • Ideological differences
  • Selfish motives
  • External interference                                                             2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

  1. – Death of a member of parliament (M.P)
  • Imprisonment of an M.P
  • When an M.P resigns from the party that sponsors him to parliament
  • Failure to attend parliamentary sessions for eight consecutive meetings
  • Nullification of election results by a court of law. 2 x 1 = 2 mks

 

SECTION B.

 

  1. a) –  Population pressure
  • They were searching for water and pasture for their livestock
  • External attack by hostile neighbours
  • Outbreak of cattle and human diseases
  • Search for cultivate land
  • Internal quarrels
  • Spirit of adventure. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – They introduced livestock farming in the areas they settled
  • They increased human population in the areas they settled.
  • Their settlement led to increased rivalry and conflict over land ownership
  • They spread Islam religion in the areas they settled
  • They intermarried with the communities they came into contact with e.g the coastal Bantu and Samburu.
  • A new community i.e cushites was introduced in Kenya
  • They established trading contacts with the communities they came into contact with e.g they sold milk and butter to the Bantus in exchange for grains.
  • They attacked the Eastern Bantu communities at Shungwaya, thereby forcing them to migrate to their present homeland
  • They introduced new cultural practices to the Bantu communities eg circumcision.
  • Some sections of the cushites acquired the art of iron working from the Bantu communities
  • Some sections of the cushites became mixed farmers eg those who settled along river Tana.

5 x 2 = 10mks

 

 

  1. a) They had good hunting skills which enabled them to acquire ivory and animal skins which

were in great demand at the coast.

  • Their participation in the local trade gave them experience which enabled them to take part in the long distance trade
  • They were strategically located between the coastal Arab and Swahili communities and the

interior  communities  e.g the Agikuyu.

  • Rise of enterprising merchants among the Kamba e.g Kiboi and Munyanya.
  • Existence of good relationship between the Kamba and their neighbours eg Agikuyu and Ameru.
  • The Kamba had skilled worriers (Athiani) who protected their traders during their journey to and from the coast
  • Existence of Kamba settlements / communities at the coast

5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. b) – Led to the introduction of Islam religion in the interior parts of Kenya.
  • Led to the introduction of new crops in the interior e.g maize
  • Islam religion was introduced in the interior
  • Increased local trade between the interior communities e.g the Kamba, Agikuyu, Aembu and Ameru.
  • Interior communities acquired a taste for imported goods e.g cotton clothes and beads
  • Led to the development of lines of communication between the interior and the coast
  • Led to the introduction of slavery in the interior parts of Kenya.
  • Led to the introduction of fire arms / guns in the interior
  • Led to intercommunity wars in the interior due to the introduction of arms

5 x 2 = 10mks

  1. a) –  Uganda came under the British sphere of influence
  • Zanzibar and Pemba came under Britain
  • Boundary between Germany East Africa and British East Africa was extended to the Congo Free State.
  • Germany gave up her claims over the territory of Witu
  • Germany got the Sultan claims along the coast of Tanganyika
  • The sultan of Zanzibar was given a 16km ( 10 mile) coastal strip along the Kenyan coast
  • Britain gave the North Sea Island (Heligoland) to Germany.

5 x 1 = 5mks

  1. – Lack of adequate capital to carry out its activities
  • Kenya lacked adequate commodities for export
  • Poor coordination between its local agents in Kenya and the headquarters in Britain.
  • Inadequate managerial skills among its agents in Kenya
  • Corruption / embezzlement of funds by its agents
  • Commercial competition from Swahili, Arabs and Indian merchants.

5 x 2 = 10mks

  1. a) –  KAU supported trade Union activities in the country
  • It influenced the British colonial government to increase African representation in the legislature council (Legco)
  • Supported Eliud Mathu who had been appointed to the legco.
  • Published its own paper, Sauti ya Mwafrika to popularize its objectives throughout the country.
  • Presented African grievances in the international force
  • Supported the activities of Mau Mau freedom fighters by giving them moral and material support.

 

  • Provided leadership for the nationalist struggle
  • Organised rallies in most parts of the country to create awareness on the rights of Africans
  • Held discussions with the colonial government about Kenya’s political future.
  • Laid the foundation for the formation of KANU which led Kenya to independence
  • Opened up branches in various parts of the country to educate the Africans on the need to unite against European imperialists. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – The Lyttleton constitution of 1954 led to the appointment of the first African minister

and  nomination of other African leaders to the Legco.

  • In 1957 the first all races elections were held and Africans were elected in 8 constituencies
  • The Lennox Boyd constitution gave more seats to Africans – from 8 to 14 members. For the first time more Africans were elected to the legco.
  • The first Lancaster House Conference (LHC) of 1960 gave Africans more seats in the Legco. Thus African representation moved form 14 to 33 members.
  • In 1960 the state of emergency was lifted and Africans were allowed to form country wide political parties KANU and KADU were thus formed.
  • The second LHC drew up the independence constitution whereby Kenya became a Majimbo / federal state.
  • In 1961 the first general elections were held and KANU won but refused to form the government until the release of Kenyatta. KADU formed the government with Ngala as the leader of government business.
  • KANU and KADU formed a coalition government whereby Ngala and Kenyatta became the two leaders of the government.
  • On June 1st 1963 Kenya got internal self – government with Kenyatta as the first prime minister
  • On December 12th 1963, Kenya attained full independence. 5 x 2 = 10mks

 

SECTION C.

 

  1. a) –  Economic hardships in the country i.e unemployment and inflation.
  • External pressure from the international community
  • Internal agitation for change by multi – party activists eg. Clergymen and lawyers.
  • Repealing of section 2 (A) in the Kenya constitution which legalized the formation of many political parties in the country.
  • End of the cold war. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – They provide basis for peaceful solution of problems in Kenya.
  • Ensure that government of the day does not misuse its power.
  • Offer alternative programmes (policies to those of the ruling party.
  • Keeps the government of the day on its toes by pinpointing out its shortcomings.
  • Educate the masses on their rights
  • Ensure proper utilization of public funds through public investment committee (PIC).
  • Contribute to the process of law making
  • Mobilize people for participation in the political / democratic process.

5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. a) –  Elections are held regularly in line with what is stated / stipulated in the constitution of

Kenya.

  • In order for the sitting members of parliament (MPs) to effectively address the needs of the electorate

 

  • It is a way of giving people the mandate to the party of their choice to rule.
  • Gives Kenyans a chance to elect people of their choice
  • Gives the electorate an opportunity to chose leaders whom they have confidence in.
  • Gives Kenyans a chance to exercise their constitutional right of participating in the democratic process. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – Power to prolong parliament
  • Power to dissolve parliament
  • Power to appoint and dismiss the vice president
  • Power to appoint and dismiss senior public officials / servants
  • Power to pardon criminals who are convicted in a court of law.
  • Power to maintain peace in the country by upholding the rule of law.
  • Power to preserve public security through declaring the state of emergency.
  • Power to permit ministers and other officers in the civil services to be out of the country.
  • Power to form government after a general election.
  • Power to declare war or make peace with enemies
  • Power to establish commissions of inquiry to investigate issues of national importance.
  • Powers to perform the official opening of parliament after general elections
  • Powers to nominate MPs after a general election. 5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. a) –  City councils
  • Municipal councils
  • Urban councils
  • Area councils
  • Town councils
  • County councils             5 x 1 = 5mks

 

–  They provide essential services to the people e.g marketing, medical and educational facilities

  • Give people a chance to exercise their democratic rights of choosing leaders.
  • Offer job opportunities eg. Employ clerks, and manual workers
  • Help to solve local problems e.g pollution of the environment
  • Pass by –laws which regulate public life in their local areas
  • Facilitate commercial activities in their local areas through provision of trade licences.

5 x 2 = 10mks

 

HISTORY & GOVT V

PAPER II

 

SECTION A  (  25 MARKS)

 

Give two limitations of using written records as a source of African history.                        2mks

State two characteristics of Homo Sapiens                                                                   2mks

Give two reasons why early man cultivated crops                                                        2mks

Identify two factors which favoured the development of crop growing in ancient Egypt  2mks

Give two uses of Bronze in Ancient Benin                                                                  2mks

Give two advantages of drum beating as a form of communication over the use of

smoke signals in Africa during the pre-colonial periods                                                                2mks

Name two ways in which railway transport contributed to the Agrarian Revolution in

North America.                                                                                                                      2mks

Give two limitations of using barter as a form of trade.                                                            2mks

Identify two factors which led to the decline of the Trans-saharan trade                                 2mks

State two government policies which have contributed to Industrialization in India.              2mks

Give two functions of Buganda traditional parliament.                                                             2mks

State the main reason why Samori Toure resisted the French                                                   2mks

Name two systems of colonial administration which were used by the British to

administer their colonies in Africa.                                                                                     2mks

 

SECTION B.  ( 45 MARKS).

 

  1. a) What were the features of religion in ancient Egypt                 5mks
  2. Explain the impact of the spread of Islam religion in Africa during the pre-colonial

period.                                                                                                                            10mks

  1. a) What factors undermine the process of industrialization in the Third World Countries?

5mks

Explain five factors which led to the emergence of Japan as an industrial power after

  1.                           10mks
  2. a) What factors facilitated the rise and development of Trans-atlantic trade              5mks

Explain five ways in which Trans-Atlantic trade affected West African communities

10mks

  1. a) Why did some African communities resist European imperialists in the nineteenth

Century?                                                                                                                             5mks

  1. Discuss five problems which faced the Algerians during their struggle for independence.

5mks

 

SECTION C:  30 MKS.

 

  1. a) What were the economic activities of the Ndebele people during the pre- colonial

period?                                                                                                                                    5mks

  1. b) Describe the features of government in the pre-colonial Ndebele Kingdom                        10mks

 

  1. a) Why were African independent churches established? 3mks
  2. Explain six factors which promoted Christian missionary activities in Africa

during the nineteeth century.                                                                               12mks

 

  1. a) What are the sources of the British Constitution?       5mks
  2. b) Explain five functions of the Prime Minister in Britain.       10mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT V

PAPER II

MARKING SCHEME

 

  1. – Some contain inaccurate information.
  • Some records are biased
  • Some are not readily available
  • Some are written in foreign languages
  • Some have inadequate information
  • Some limited only to those who can read and write. 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

 

  1. – Had a large brain
  • Walked upright
  • Had a speech for communication
  • Had smaller jaws
  • Had a thick skull
  • Had a slopy forehead
  • Had a well developed thumb for grasping objects
  • Was heavily built. 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Need to feed in creased population
  • Hunting and gathering was becoming tiresome
  • Scarcity of wild crops due to climatic changes 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Availability of cheap labour
  • Invention and use of farming tools eg wood plough and hoe
  • Existence of indigenous type of grains eg oat and barley
  • Existence of fertile soil along the Nile valley
  • Availability of water for irrigation from the R. Nile
  • Existence of a stable government
  • Invention and use of the shadoof method of irrigation
  • Invention of a writing system which enabled the Egyptians to record their produce.
  • Invention of weather forecasting techniques
  • Influence from the far East ie. Mesopotamia. 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Making royal regalia
  • Making weapons
  • Making statues of rulers, noblemen and worriors
  • Making ornaments
  • Making religious figures eg gods
  • Was used as an item of trade. 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Drum beating could be used at any time – both day and night whereas smoke signals could

only be used during the day.

  • Drum beats relayed specific messages whereas smoke relayed different messages
  • Drum beats unlike smoke signals could be used during wet and dry seasons
  • Drum beats relayed messages faster than smoke
  • Drum beats unlike smoke spread messages over a wider area.

2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Provided transport for farm machinery and such inputs as fertilizers
  • Provided an efficient and reliable means of transport for agricultural produce
  • Provided cheap transport for farm labour / workers.

2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Some commodities are difficult to transport for they are either heavy or bulky.
  • It is not easy to establish the exchange rate of commodities
  • Perishable goods are likely to go to waste if negotiations are not done in time.
  • Requires double coincidence of need / demand
  • Some commodities are not divisible into smaller units

2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Competition from the Trans Atlantic trade
  • Shortage of trading items eg salt
  • Insecurity along the trade routes
  • Political instability in Western Sudan
  • Lack of adequate funds among traders to both buy goods and pay taxes.

2 x 1 = 2mks

  1. – Restriction of imported goods
  • Promotion of technical and scientific education
  • Development of heavy industries by state / government
  • Emphasis on industrialization in the five year development plans
  • Encouragement of foreign investment in the country

2 x 1 = 2mks

  1. – Made laws for the kingdom
  • Checked on the activities of government
  • Advised the Kabaka
  • Represented the interests of the people
  • Acted as a court of appeal / settling disputes
  • Planned government expenditure besides directing tax collection.

2 x 1 = 2mks

  1. – To preserve the independence of the Mandika Kingdom                    1mk

 

  1. – Indirect rule
  • Direct rule 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. a) –  It was polytheistic
  • People believed in life after death
  • Religion controlled all aspects of peoples lives
  • Egyptians had priests who conducted religious ceremonies
  • They buried the dead with their property
  • The Egyptians offered sacrifices to the gods
  • They believed in the day of judgement
  • Pharoah / King was viewed as a god
  • They worshipped in temples. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – Indigenous religion was replaced in some areas
  • Muslim system of government (Sharia) was introduced in some areas eg Western Sudan
  • Muslim traders introduced new crops in some areas
  • Led to intermarriages between Muslims and the indigenous communities
  • New / Arabic words were introduced into the local languages eg. Kiswahili
  • Arabic literacy skills were introduced in some areas
  • Arabic and Persian architecture was introduced in some areas eg West Africa and the Coast of E. Africa.
  • Led to the introduction of slave trade
  • Arabic / muslim culture was introduced in various parts of Africa e.g wearing of caps and veils among men and women respectively.
  • Islam became a unifying factor in some areas. 5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. a) –  Inadequate capital
  • Political instability
  • Competition from the developed nations
  • Poorly developed transport and communication facilities
  • Poor industrial development policies / programmes
  • Lack of adequate skilled human resources / manpower. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – Emphasis on technical education
  • Existence of labour force with industrial knowhow
  • Favourable government policy e.g the government offers subsidies to industrial entrepreneurs
  • A well established industrial base which formed a foundation for Industrial growth after 1945
  • Availability of raw materials in the country eg silk
  • Availability of local and external market
  • Good industrial relations
  • Japanese work ethics which encourages hard work
  • Japanese goods are cheap and hence competitive in the international market
  • Scarcity of farming land
  • Good natural harbours
  • The government has a lot of investments in foreign countries
  • The government encourages foreign investments.
  • Japan received both technical and financial aid from USA after 1945.

5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. a) –  Demand for slave labour in America and the Caribbean
  • Demand for imported goods e.g cotton clothes, spirits and firearms in West Africa.
  • Availability of trading items in West Africa e.g slaves, Ivory, gold and animal skins
  • Decline of Trans-Saharan trade
  • Accessibility of the West African Coast by Sea.
  • Existence of strong states such as Denkyra, Ekwapin and Asante which provided a conducive atmosphere for the trade.                                      5 x 1 = 5mks

 

–  Many people lost their lives due to slave raiding activities

  • Some areas were depopulated due to slave trading activities
  • Created fear and insecurity in some areas
  • Led to the rise of rich African merchants e.g Jaja of Opobo
  • Slave raiding activities creates war and mistrust between communities.
  • Attracted European missionaries in West Africa, spread Christianity in the area.
  • Led to intermarriages between European traders and the local people.
  • West Africans acquired a taste for imported goods e.g spirits and cotton clothes
  • Led to the emergence of urban centers eg Lagos along the coast of West Africa.
  • Slave raiding disrupted productive economic activities eg farming thereby increasing incidence of famine in some areas. 5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. a) –  Some communities resisted to safeguard their independence
  • Some resisted for they undermined the military strength of the European imperialists
  • Some wanted to protect their land
  • Come communities resisted for they had a strong economic base to sustain the resistance
  • Some resisted to safeguard their economic structure e.g trade
  • Some communities resisted for they were assured of winning the war by their religious leaders
  • Some resisted to preserve their culture
  • Some were against the imposition of taxes and forced labour

5 x 1 = 5mks

  1. b) – Many Algerian nationalists were arrested and detained by the French colonial government
  • The nationalists had limited access to media hence were unable to effectively sell their policies to the people
  • The French colonial government used violence e.g murder against the nationalists
  • Inadequate funds to finance their nationalism activities eg purchase of arms
  • The nationalists were denied the right to hold meetings to sell their ideas to the people
  • Opposition from the white settlers (colons) in the country
  • Lack of a well trained army to challenge the French colonial government.
  • The French colonial government bought some nationalists who gave information to the government which was detrimental to the nationalist struggle
  • Banning of nationalist political parties by the French colonial government.

5 x 2 = 10mks

  1. a) –  The Ndebele kept cattle and goats
  • They grew crops eg millet and sorghum
  • They hunted wild animals for hides and meat
  • They gathered wild fruits and vegetables
  • They traded with their neighbour eg. Shona
  • They smelted iron
  • They made iron weapons and farming tools
  • They raided cattle from their neighbours. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – Ndebele Kingdom was a centralized military state
  • The kingdom was headed by a king whose post was hereditary
  • The kingdom was divided into four administrative units /provinces
  • Each administrative unit was divided into regimental / military town under a chief / induna
  • The indunas were responsible for the maintenance of law and order in their respective areas
  • The kingdom had a regular army whose role was to protect the kingdom from external attack and punish uncooperative communities
  • Conquered people were allowed to retain their independence as long as they paid annual tribute to the Ndebele king. 5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. a) –  To incorporate some African cultural practices into Christianity
  • To provide leadership opportunities to the African clergy
  • Africans wanted to be independent from European domination in the church.
  • Africans wanted to force themselves from the rigidity of European missionaries.
  • To provide educational opportunities to the Africans
  • To protest against colonialism
  • Some Africans claimed to have had a vision in which they were instructed to start their own church. 3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. – Existence of already established trade routes which facilitated the movement of missionaries
  • Use of African guides and porters which facilitated the movement of missionaries and the transportation of their luggage
  • The learning of local languages by the missionaries
  • Translation of the Bible into local languages
  • The discovery of cure for some tropical diseases eg quinine which helped to treat malaria which reduced the number of death cases among the missionaries
  • Missionaries were protected by some local rulers

 

 

  • Support given to the missionaries by the colonial government
  • The existence of displaced people eg. Freed slaves who readily accepted Christianity.
  • The establishment of mission stations which acted as operational bases for the missionaries.

6 x 2 = 12 mks

 

  1. a) – Act of parliament eg the Magna Carta and the 1911 parliament Act
  • The British conventions, e.g those which protect the British citizens against the excess of the executive
  • Decisions made by British law courts from time to time become part of the British constitution.
  • Legal publications by reputable authorities eg lawyers, scholars, statesmen and political thinkers.
  • Hansard / parliamentary reports
  • Royal prerogatives eg to declare war or treaties. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. – The prime minister (PM) is the leader of the House of Commons
  • Is the head of the British government
  • Chairs cabinet meetings
  • Appoints and also dismisses ministers
  • Initiates both domestic and foreign policies
  • Represents Britain in international from. 5 x 2 = 10mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT VI

PAPER I

 

SECTION A :            ( 25 MKS)

 

  1. Give two reasons which led to the migration of the Luo into Kenya.       2mks
  2. What were the effects of their migration into Kenya.       2mks
  3. Why did the Bantu migrate from their coastal settlement at Shungwaya in the sixteenth century?                                                                                                                      2mks
  4. State two religious practices of the Agikuyu.       2mks
  5. Identify the main way in which Islam spread in the interior of Kenya            2mks
  6. Give two reasons why the British allowed the Imperial British East Africa to administer

their possession in East Africa during the 19th Century                                                 2mks

  1. What were the reasons behind Wanga’s collaboration?       2mks
  2. What were the reasons behind the construction of Kenya – Uganda railway?       2mks
  3. Give two reasons why the Africans were against the provision of labour for settlers. 2mks
  4. What grievances did Asians have against the colonial government in Kenya?. 2mks
  5. Why is the Devonshire White paper regarded as a turning point in the colony’s

development.                                                                                                                   2mks

  1. Name two independent religious movements which were established in Kenya by 1930.       2mks
  2. Name any one officer of the Provincial Administration who is appointed by the Public

Service Commission.                                                                                                       1mk

 

 

 

 

 

SECTION B. (45 MKS)

 

  1. a) Explain the factors which led to the collapse of Portuguese rule by 18th              10mks
  2. Give five reasons why the Omani Arabs were interested in establishing their control

over the Kenyan Coast.                                                                                        5mks

 

  1. a) Explain the factors that led to the establishment of the independent churches and

schools.                                                                                                                      10mks

  1. b) State five problems that faced the independent schools in colonial Kenya.             5mks

 

  1. a) Explain the problems that faced early political and social movements up to 1939. 3mks
  2. b) What led to the formation of trade unions in colonial Kenya.?       7mks
  3. Identify ways in which trade union movement contributed to the struggle for

independence in Kenya.                                                                                      5mks

 

  1. a) What was the significance of the Mau mau uprising.                                                      5mks
  2. b) Explain the results of the uprising          10mks

 

SECTION C.  (30MKS)

 

  1. a) Identify five categories of people whose personal liberty is limited.                             5mks
  2. b) What are the constitutional powers of a president in Kenya.           10mks

 

 

  1. a) Give any one type of a case handled by the judiciary in Kenya.                               1mk
  2. Identify the five branches of the Kenya police             5mks
  3. State the functions of the Armed forces in Kenya.             9mks

 

  1. a) What are the special courts and tribunals in Kenya.                                            5mks
  2. b) Identify the sources of revenue for local authorities.           10mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT VI

PAPER I

MARKING SCHEME.

 

SECTION A :            ( 25 MKS)

 

  1. Reasons which led to the migration of the Luo into Kenya.
  • Over population
  • Internal conflicts
  • External attacks
  • Spirits of adventure
  • Overstocking hence the need for new grazing lands. 1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. Effects of their migration into Kenya.
  • Redistribution of people in Western Kenya
  • The Gusii were forced to mover from their homelands to other areas.
  • There were inter-marriages with their neighbours eg the Samia, Abagusii and Abakuria.

 

 

  • Some communities adapted some aspects of Luo culture eg. Abasuba and some Luyia groups adapted Luo words and customs.
  • The occupation of fertile land influenced some to take up farming.
  • They established trading links with their neighbours eg. Abagusii and Abaluyia.
  • There was population increase in Western Kenya.

1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. Why the Bantu migrated from their coastal settlement at Shungwaya in the 16th century

–     Invasion of the settlement by the Oromo (Galla).

  • Internal conflicts
  • Population increase
  • Natural calamities e.g outbreak of diseases epidermic/ drought
  • Search for more land for settlement and pasture. 1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. The religious practices of the Agikuyu.
  • Ancestral worship
  • Worshipped God in sacred places
  • They offered sacrifices to God. Any  2 x 1= 2mks

 

  1. Ways in which Islam spread in the Interior of Kenya

–   Through the influence of Arab and Swahili traders who were muslims.

                                                                                                                  Any  1x 2= 2mks

 

  1. Reasons why the British allowed the imperial British East to administer their possession in East Africa during the 19th
  • It would have been very expensive for the British Tax payers to sustain the administration of the colony.
  • The company officials were familiar with the region based in their trading experience in the area.
  • British government did not have enough personnel for administration.

Any  2 x 1= 2mks

  1. Reasons behind Wanga’s collaboration
  • He wanted to consolidate his position and that of his kingdom
  • He wanted to secure military support against his enemies, Luo, Abagusii and Bukusu.
  • He hoped to obtain material benefits from the British
  • He wanted to acquire military support to expand his kingdom.
  • He wanted to gain fame and prestige by associating with the British.

1x 2 = 2mks

  1. The reasons behind the construction of Kenya – Uganda railway
  • To establish effective control over British East Africa
  • To stop slave and promote legitimate trade
  • To facilitate the movement of troops and government administrators.
  • To link Uganda with the East Coast and outside world for greater economic growth. 1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. Reasons why the Africans were against the provision of labour for settlers.
  • Africans attached no importance to money
  • Many did not like to leave their families inorder to work for the Europeans.
  • The wages provided by the settlers were low
  • The poor and harsh conditions that Africans were subjected to by the white employers eg. Corporal punishment. 1 x 2 = 2mks
  1. Grievances did Asians have against the colonial government in Kenya.
  • Exclusion from the Highlands
  • Various farms of segregation especially in the urban centres
  • Equality with Europeans in matters of politics and economic opportunities.                                                                                                                                     1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. Why the Devonshire White paper is regarded as a turning point in the colony’s development.
  • It pleased neither the Europeans nor the Asians. The settlers realised they would never be able to achieve their goal of self government.
  • The Asians were bitter since they did not acquire equality with the settlers.
  • They refused to take upseats in the legco until 1933
  • Africans although not represented in the conference were the main beneficiaries.                                                                                                             1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. The independent religious movements which were established in Kenya by
  • Momiya Luo Mission
  • Christian universal Evangelical union
  • Kilumi movement
  • African independent Pentecostal church
  • African Orthodox church
  • Mumbo cult. Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Any officer of the Provincial Administration who is appointed by the Public Service Commission.
  • The chief
  • The District officer
  • The Assistant Chief. Any 1 x 1 = 1mks

 

SECTION B. (45 MKS)

 

  1. a) The factors which led to the collapse of Portuguese rule by 18th

–    Portugal was a small country with a small population and could not supply enough

administrators and soldiers to administer her overseas territory.

  • The Coastal communities organised constant rebellions against them which made them weak.
  • Portuguese administrators were corrupt greedy and inefficient. Their aim was to enrich themselves.  They embezzled funds meant for administration.
  • Trade along the Kenyan Coast declined due to constant wars and heavy taxation imposed on trading goods by the Portuguese. They suffered lack of revenue.
  • Their settlements were attacked by the Zimba from lower Zambezi valley, who looted property and killed people.
  • They were attacked by tropical diseases such as malaria which killed many of them.
  • The distance between Portugal the Coast was another problem. It delayed reinforcement.
  • Gold trade which had attracted them declined as traders diverted their route away from Portuguese controlled areas. This meant lack of revenue.
  • They were further weakened by commercial competitions between them and other Europeans eg Dutch, British and French.
  • The coastal communities obtained support against them from the Turks

 

 

  • The final blow was the attack by the Omani Arabs. They sieged Fort Jesus for 33 months finally forcing the portuguese to surrender due to hunger and disease.

Any  10 x 1= 10mks

 

  1. Reasons why the Omani Arabs were interested in establishing their control over the Kenyan Coast.
  • To control trade
  • To establish political control over the Kenyan Coast
  • Coast had a pleasant climate compared to Muscat which was hot and dry.
  • Good fertile soils for growing crops
  • Deep natural harbours for ships to anchor
  • Adequate water. Any 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. a) Factors that led to the establishment of the independent churches and schools.
  • Cultural preservation – Africans were opposed to European attempt to eradicate essential cultural practices.
  • Paternalism –  Africans were regarded as incapable of leadership in churches administration, education etc.  they were considered immature and had to be led.  They resented this kind of attitude.
  • Discrimination / Segregation – Missionaries betrayed the Christian principle of love by considering Africans as primitive, backward, barbaric and needing salvation.
  • Denominationalism –  Africans received an already divided church.
  • Nationalism – They wanted to regain their lost independence and cultural heritage which had been eroded
  • They resented land grabbing
  • They did not want the 2nd class type of education offered to them.
  • They resented land grabbing
  • Doctrinal differences leading to many divisions especially in Protestant churches encouraged Africans to start their own
  • Africans were faced to work for Europeans at low wages
  • Taxation growing of cash crops and Kipande system.

Any 10 x 1 = 10mks

 

  1. b) Problems that faced the independent schools in colonial Kenya.
  • Organisation and planning e.g problems of quality of buildings, teaching material and teaching staff.
  • Opening of more schools had been prohibited by the colonial government.
  • The level at which to start the teaching of English in primary schools.
  • Which syllabus to follow
  • Lack of trained teachers
  • Lack of co-ordination. Any 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. a) Problems that faced early political and social movements up to 1939.
  • Hostility from colonial government e.g leaders of political parties were arrested and departed.
  • The colonial government created local native councils as rival bodies through which African politicians channelled thereby weakening and even causing the extinction of the associations.
  • They were tribal based and became ineffective.

 

 

  • Leadership and membership was confined to the Western educated elite
  • There were constant conflicts and rivalry between the government
  • They lacked funds to promote their activities.

Any 3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. b) Factors which led to the formation of trade unions in colonial Kenya.
  • Laws enacted to legalise provision of labour eg. Hit tax ordinance of 1901 vagrancy ordinance of 1896, native registration ordinance of 1915 (Kipande system)
  • Conditions of employment were pathetic – overworked and underpaid
  • Introduction of poll tax
  • Improvement in housing, food rations, medical facilities etc.
  • Low wages
  • Racial discrimination – Africans doing the same job with white was paid less because of his race.
  • Partiality and disrespect shown to African workers whenever they were employed. 1 x 7 = 7mks

 

  1. Ways in which trade union movement contributed to the struggle for independence in Kenya.
  • Trade unions sensitized workers about the importance of joining political parties that struggled for independence.
  • They organised strikes and boycotts to oppose some policies of colonial government.
  • They contributed money to political parties to enable them sustain the struggle for independence.
  • They provided relevant training ground for nationalist leaders eg. Shikuku, Tom Mboya.
  • When political parties were banned trade unions continued with the nationalist activities.
  • Release of political prisoners e.g Harry Thuku.

1 x 5 = 5mks

  1. a) The significance of the Mau mau uprising.
  • The movement demonstrated that the minority settler government could not rule Kenya. This was because troops had to come from Britain to support the colonial government in Kenya.
  • The colonial administration realized that it had a wrong approach in its administration.
  • The movement focused international attention on Kenya. The international community was keen on finding out how the Africans were being treated by the whites in Kenya.  This forced them to improve African conditions.
  • The uprising caused a lot of suffering for many African communities e.g hunger, loss of lives, displacement and bitterness.
  • The Kikuyu community was divided into loyalist (home guards/ and Mau mau supporters. 1 x 5 = 5mks
  1. Explain the results of the uprising          
  • Many people lost their lives
  • The conflict resulted in a lot of destruction of property
  • Many people were arrested ad detained
  • The conflict created civil war in Kikuyu land between the loyalists and supporters of Mau Mau. The government fully supported the loyalists and encouraged them to form the home guard movement to protect their property.
  • The war drew the attention of the British people to the crimes which Africans suffered at the hands of the colonial government.

 

 

  • The rebellion struck a decisive blow at the political dominance of European settlers
  • The war speeded up the March to independence
  • It also led to restriction of political activities. African political parties were banned eg. K.A.U.
  • Britain was alerted to the fact that Kenya could no longer be denied a representative government.
  • It led to establishment of emergency villages, which were created to alienate the civil societies from Mau mau fighters
  • It led to the declaration of a state of emergency as a result of which curfews and other restrictions became the order of the day.
  • It led to political awakening of Africans of all ethnic groups.

Any 10 x 1 = 10mks

 

SECTION C.  (30MKS)

 

  1. a) Categories of people whose personal liberty is limited.                 
  • Convicted criminals
  • A person suspected of having committed or about to commit a criminal offence.
  • A person suspected of having committed or about to commit a criminal offence.
  • A person of unsound mind
  • A drug addict
  • A vagrant
  • A young person under 18years of age may be denied personal liberty for the purpose of his education and welfare.
  • A person with an infection or contagious disease be detained to prevent him from spreading it. Any 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. b) The constitutional powers of a president in Kenya.
  • He must protect the rights and freedoms of citizens ie incase of a serious security threat he can declare a state of emergency.
  • Attend parliamentary proceedings as a member of parliament
  • Dissolves parliament if the situation demands so
  • Has the power to appoint senior government officials such as ministers, provincial and District Commissioners, permanent secretaries.
  • He nominates members of parliament. He can give clemancy to people condemned to death offer other appeals have failed.
  • Gives assent to bills before they become Acts of parliament
  • He has power to appoint special commissions and boards to investigate matters of a public interest and to name members of such commissions.
  • He is the leader of the National Assembly ( he usually appoints the V.P. to be on his behalf.
  • He grants honours to deserving citizens on national days eg. Honour of elder of the Burning spear, Morans of the burning spear etc.
  • Hires assent to bills before they become Acts of parliament.

1 x 10 = 10mks   

  1. a) Type of a case handled by the judiciary in Kenya.
  • Criminal
  • Civil any 1 x 1 = 1mk

 

 

 

  1. Branches of the Kenya police
  • Regular police
  • Traffic police
  • Anti – stock theft unit
  • Police air wing
  • General service unit
  • Special branch
  • Criminal Investigations Department (CID) Any 5 X 1 = 5mks

 

  1. Functions of the Armed forces in Kenya.
  • Defend a Kenya from external invasions
  • The navy is responsible for dealing with illegal docking and departures of sea vessels
  • The navy protects marine life and prevent unauthorised fishing in Kenyan waters by foreign vessels.
  • They help in suppressing riots and other disturbances which the polices are unable to handle
  • They also build roads and bridges hence contributing towards national development.
  • They also help to put out forest fires
  • They also help in the evacuation of civilians from floods and other natural calamities.
  • They participate in the United Nations sponsored peace keeping missions
  • They organise parades during national celebrations.

1 x 10 = 10mks

  1. a) The special courts and tribunals in Kenya.
  • The industrial court
  • The rent Business tribunal
  • The Khadhis Court
  • The Court martial
  • The rent restriction tribunal. 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. b) The sources of revenue for local authorities.
  • Fees for all services rendered e.g Mortuary services health services and sewage disposal.
  • Service charge by resident of various authorities
  • Rates from property owners
  • Rent charged on the authority houses and offices space belonging to them.
  • Sale of licences
  • Fines imposed on offenders
  • Donations loans from donors
  • Less on crops like coffee and tea in areas where such crops are grown.
  • Grants from central government
  • Returns from investments they have made. 1 x 10 = 10mks                      

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT VI

PAPER II

 

SECTION A ( 25MKS)

 

  1. Identify the two areas of the study of History.       2mks
  2. What is the meaning of government.       1mk
  3. Identify any two forms of government       2mks

 

  1. State any two sources of information on History and Government.       2mks
  2. Identify any one archaeological site in Tanzania.       1mk
  3. State two characteristics that distinguish man from other primates.       2mks
  4. List down any two theories that have been put forward to explain the origin of man 2mks
  5. Identify any two uses of bronze in the Kingdom of Benin.       2mks
  6. List two early sources of energy       2mks
  7. State two ways in which slaves were obtained in West Africa.       2mks
  8. State two objectives of international trade Agreements.       2mks
  9. Why were the Ghanians opposed to the Burns Constitution of 1946.       1mk
  10. State two problems facing the Pan African movement       2mks
  11. Give two reasons why Hitler was interested in Russia at the beginning of the 2nd World

War                                                                                                                                   2mks

 

SECTION B (45MKS)

 

  1. a) Explain seven ways in which Homo Erectus attempted to improve his way of life.      7mks
  2. Why did the early man change from hunting and gathering to plant and animal

production?                                                                                                           8mks

  1. a) Identify five ways in which research and development has benefited agriculture.      5mks
  2. b) Explain the factors that have led to inadequate food supply in Africa       10mks

 

  1. a) State five inventions during the 18th century which improved the textile industry in

Britain.                                                                                                                        5mks

  1. b) State the social problems brought about by the Industrial Revolution in Europe.            10mks

 

  1. a) Identify five early forms of communication.                                                       5mks
  2. b) Discuss the factors that led to the decline of Trans-Saharan Trade.       10mks

 

SECTION C  (30 MKS)

 

  1. a) Identify the organs of E.CO.W.A.S.                                                                     5mks
  2. b) Explain factors that led to the collapse of the East African Community.       10mks

 

  1. a) What did the league of nations achieve.                                                               10mks
  2. b) Mention five essential principles of the league of Nations Covenant.       5mks

 

  1. a) Identify three privileges enjoyed by members of the British parliament.          3mks
  2. b) Discuss the factors that might limit parliamentary supremacy in Britain.       5mks
  3. c) What are the powers of a Prime Minister in Britain.       7mks

 

HISTORY & GOVT VI

PAPER II

MARKING SCHEME.

 

SECTION A ( 25MKS)

 

  1. Areas of the study of History.
  • Political history
  • Social history
  • Economic history. Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. The meaning of Government.
  • Forms of organised control
  • A group of people within a state or country who are vested with power to organise, direct and control the affairs of that country.

Any 1 x 1 = 1mk

  1. Forms of government
  • Democratic
  • Aristocracy
  • Monarchy
  • Dictatorship
  • Anarchy any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Sources of information on History and Government.
  • Oral tradition
  • Archaeology
  • Written materials
  • Palaeonthropology / anthropology
  • Linquistics
  • Geology
  • Genetics
  • Electronic sources
  • Rock paintings
  • Palaeontology Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Archaeological site in Tanzania.

 

  1. Characteristics that distinguish man from other primates.
  • Development of speech
  • Development of brain
  • The upright posture. Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Theories that have been put forward to explain the origin of man
  • The creation theory
  • The evolution theory
  • Traditional / mythical theory. Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Uses of bronze in the Kingdom of Benin.
  • To make weapons
  • To make decorations / ornaments
  • Used as currency
  • Used as a trade item Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

           

  1. Early sources of energy
  • wood
  • wind Any 2 x 1 = 2mks       

           

  1. Ways in which slaves were obtained in West Africa.
  • Powerful rulers waged constant warfare to get slaves from the defeated state.
  • Raids were organised by individual traders or chiefs
  • Some people kidnapped others and sold them as slaves

 

 

  • Criminals and outcasts were also sold as slaves
  • Prisoners of war were also given out as slaves
  • Panyarring – seizure of a debtor or sometimes an innocent third party, who was held until a debt was paid.
  • Leaders also sold their subjects as slaves.    Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. The objectives of international trade Agreements.
  • To regulate trade transactions among members
  • Control unfair competition of trade among members states
  • Promote trade relations through dialogue
  • To control restrictions on trade among members.

Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Why the Ghanians opposed to the Burns Constitution of 1946.
  • It provided for the election of 18 Africans to the Legco, 13 of who were to be chiefs elected by other chiefs. Therefore only five were popularly elected.

1 x 1 = 1mk.

 

  1. Problems facing the Pan African movement
  • From 1960’s the movement has been limited to the African continent. Black American involvement in African affairs has been slow.
  • 1960 it split into two camps
  • quarrel between various nations in Africa especially border disputes weakened the movement. Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. Reasons why Hitler was interested in Russia at the beginning of the 2nd World War
  • It had rich natural resources such as oil coal and iron ore.
  • It provided a space for Germans expansion. Any 2 x 1 = 2mks

 

SECTION B (45MKS)

 

  1. a) Ways in which Homo Erectus attempted to improve his way of life.
  • Improved stone tools through the use of lavallois method ie the use of cores of smaller stones to hit bigger ones in a special way inorder to remove the relatively thin sharp pieces called flakes and blade forms.
  • Invented fire which he used for roasting meat, scaring wild animals, warmth and light at night.
  • Made and lived in caves for more permanent shelter and security
  • Made clothes from skin
  • Created leisure activities such as artwork – rock painting
  • Developed a form of language for communication
  • Migrated to warmer regions to improve his life.                 1 x 7 = 7mks

 

  1. Why the early man changed from hunting and gathering to plant and animal production
  • Overhunting leading to the need to domestic certain animals
  • Climatic changes as increased drought created deserts and threatened plant and animal life. Man could no longer rely on nature for his livelihood.
  • Competition for food between man and animals and between man themselves due to population increase resulted in inadequate food. They had to look for alternative source of food.
  • Hunting and gathering had become a tiresome job as people had to wonder over a large area to get adequate food.
  • Increasing aridity forced man to share water with certain wild animals which were eventually tamed.
  • Some like cattle were domesticated as a result of acquiring and keeping them for sacrificial purposes.
  • Some were fairly social and they learnt to tolerate and eventually accept man as part of larger social group eg. Cattle, sheep, goats and dog
  • Need for security. 1 x 8 = 8mks

 

  1. a) Ways in which research and development has benefited agriculture.
  • Genetic engineering (biotechnology has improved strains of high yielding crops and livestock which resist disease.
  • New foods are developed from existing crops.
  • Livestock are also genetically engineered for specific endowments eg. Pigs are made to grow faster and leaner.
  • Widespread application of fertilizer has also increased yield.
  • Use of selective weed killers and insecticides has also contributed to high yields.

1 x 5 = 5mks

 

  1. b) Factors that have led to inadequate food supply in Africa
  • Rapid population growth has put a lot of pressure on the available food resources leading to shortages
  • Settler farming in colonial African discouraged crops growing and laid more emphasis on cash crop farming. This has continued to be the case today leading to food shortages.
  • Poor transportation network has led to uneven distribution of food supplies in some countries eg. Food rot in the farms due to impassable roads.
  • Poor climate that led to famine over several years
  • Poor and inadequate storage facilities have led to wastage of a lot of food eg. Kenya is said to be loosing a million bags of grain between harvesting and consumption
  • Diseases and pests – a third of Africa in tsetsefly infested. This discourage human settlements.  Locust invasion is major cause of famine.
  • Poor farming methods have led to low agricultural yields eg. Over cultivation and overstocking.
  • Political instability – Civil wars or military take over thus causing insecurity which is not ideal for economic activities.
  • Rural urban migration which has left the old and weak in the rural areas. These can do little as far as food production is concerned.
  • Natural calamities such as foods, drought, army worms and locust invasion bring about food shortage.
  • Some of the indigenous crops which are drought resistance have lost their popularity. Such crops include cassava, yams, sorghum and millet .  instead farmers are growing crops that are unsuitable for certain areas eg. Maize, rice and wheat.

1 x 10 = 10mks

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Inventions during the 18th century which imported the textile industry in Britain.
  • Spinning Jenny by James Hargreaves which could spin eight threads at once.
  • The spinning mule by Samuel Crompton which produced high quality threads.
  • Power loam by Edmund Cartwright which facilitated the weaving process.
  • Water frame by Richard Arkwright
  • The flying shuttle by John Kay which increased the speed at which cloth could be woven. 1 x 5 = 5mks

 

  1. The social problems brought about by the Industrial Revolution in Europe.
  • Rural – urban migrations
  • Overcrowding in the urban centres
  • Shortages of lousing leading to creation of slums, shanties.
  • Sewage and sanitation were of extremely low standards
  • Immorality eg. Prostitution.
  • Increase in crime due to unemployment
  • Class struggle
  • Child labour
  • Poor working conditions – long hours of working, low wages, working under harsh discipline eg. Mending brokers thread from dawn to dusk in a standing posture.
  • Spread of diseases due to poor sanitation eg. Cholera, Typhoid
  • There was no adequate medical services and insurance compensation for factory injuries.
  • Pollution of water air due to waste from factories and smoke.

10 x 1 = 10mks

  1. a) Early forms of communication.
  • Messengers / runners
  • Signalling: The coded messages which included – smoke and fire signals
  • Horn blowing
  • Drum beats
  • Screams, cries and shouts
  • Written messages – recorded in materials such as scrolls, stone tablets and paper.             Any 5 x 1 = 5mks

 

  1. b) Factors that led to the decline of Trans-Saharan Trade.
  • Gold and salt mines got exhausted. This discouraged traders from coming to West Africa
  • Moroccan invasion of Sanghai in 1591 created a state of insecurity and merchants were afraid to invest in trade.
  • Political instability in the regions also brought anarchy and insecurity leading to fall of empires that had always provided security to traders.
  • The invasion of the marth by the Turks led to warfare which shifted attention from trade.
  • Capture of Morocco by the Portuguese and Spaniards weakened Morocco as an entry point for goods in and out of the region.
  • Trans-Atlantic trade grew and attracted some traders. Attention was now across the Atlantic instead of across the desert.
  • Colonization of Marth and West Africa by Europeans made trade impossible. They wanted to control all raw materials from the interior.
  • The journey across the desert was long, tiresome and slow. It took as many as 3 months.
  • Lack of common language made it difficult for traders to communicate. They had to use interpreters.
  • Lack of adequate water in the desert
  • Sand storms at times slowed trade
  • Desert animals and insects
  • Attack by robbers in the desert leading to loss of trade items.
  • Rivalry between caravans and competition at times led to war
  • In adequate funds to pay taxes, buy goods and pay guides.

Any 10 :  1 x 10 = 10mks

 

SECTION C (30 MKS)

 

  1. a) The organs of E.CO.W.A.S.
  • The Authority of Heads of state and government which meets once a year.
  • The council of ministers are from each member state which is responsible for general management.
  • The tribunal which interprets the treaty and settles disputes between member states.
  • The executive secretariat which serves a four year term of office and has its headquarters in Lagos
  • Specialised commission eg. In trade, industry, agriculture, social and cultural affairs. 1 x 5 = 5mks

 

  1. b) Factors that led to the collapse of the East African Community.
  • Ideological differences between member states made them pursue different economic policies eg. Kenya had a mixed economy, Tanzania socialism and Uganda had not yet decided after the common man charter was not implemented.
  • Political instability in Uganda undermined the activities of the community
  • Kenya was more developed than others and she was accused of accruing more benefits from the community.
  • Individual differences made it impossible for the Authority of Heads of state to meet. Therefore no decision could be ratified.  This was because Nyerere did not accept Idi Amin as the president of Uganda.
  • Financial constraints resulting from failure by member states to remit their contribution to the community
  • National interests of the individual country were given priority to those of the organisation.
  • Use of different currencies by the 3 states made transactions difficult
  • Hostility towards nationals from member states made things worse.
  • Too much power was placed onto the hands of the authority of the community such that if the three heads were not able to meet no decisions could be made.
  • Lack of trust in managing community resources by member countries led to unlawful nationalisation of the organisations assets
  • Personal ambition of the leaders. Each of them wanted to appear as the most powerful.
  • Tanzania’s closure of the common boarder with Kenya halted the community’s activities. Any 10 x 1 = 10mks
  1. a) The achievements of the league of nations.
  • Settled disputes between member states eg. Turkey and Iraq
  • Efficiently supervised the mandated territories e.g Tanganyika, Namibia, Togo
  • League assisted the refugees in continental Europe.
  • The league administered Saar region successfully.
  • Through its international court of Justice world peace was maintained for a while.
  • Its international labour organisation did a lot in the improvement of working conditions of workers
  • Epidermics such as cholera and smallpox were contained through the work of its health organisation
  • It helped eradicate vices such as trade in women and children and drug trafficking.

 

  • The league helped in the provision of famine relief food to flood or drought striken areas.
  • It helped in the regulation and private manufacture of arms and their sales and held disarmament conference. 1 x 10 = 10mks

 

  1. Essential principles of the league of Nations Covenant.
  • Elimination of causes of war by reducing armaments
  • Arbitration of disputes peacefully
  • Securing fair and human conditions of labour
  • Territories lost by the central powers were to be given to the allies to govern them on behalf of the league of nations.
  • To create permanent institutions to carry on the work of the league eg. Assembly council and secretarial. 1 x 5 = 5mks

 

  1. a) Privileges enjoyed by members of the British parliament.
  • Freedom from arrest within precincts of parliament building
  • Freedom of speech
  • Protection from arrest or civil offence for a period of 40 days before and after a session of parliament. 1 x 3 = 3mks

 

  1. b) Factors that might limit parliamentary supremacy in Britain.
  • They have to consider moral values of the British soviet before taking any decision.
  • They are sensitive to public opinion especially because if a government is unpopular it may not be re-elected.
  • Local authorities are empowered to make by-laws even without consulting parliament.
  • Interests of certain institutions such as the church and universities are always taken into consideration before passing any legislation’s
  • A legislation passed by one parliament can be changed by another.

1 x 5 = 5mks

  1. The powers of a Prime Minister in Britain.
  • Appointing and dismissing ministers with the consent of the Queen.
  • Presides over cabinet meetings
  • Leader of House of commons
  • Leader of parliamentary party that nominated him
  • Settles disputes between various departments
  • Ensures execution of cabinet decisions by various departments
  • He recommends to the Queen the appointments of high judicial officers
  • He recommends to the Queen the people to be awarded civil honours and distinctions. Any 7 x 1 = 7mks

 

HISTORY & GOVT VII

PAPER I

 

SECTION A : (25 MARKS)

 

  1. How does the study of History and Government of Kenya inspire patriotism and nationalist?                                                                                                                                                                  1mk
  2. Give the other three groups of Western Bantu apart from the Abasuba                             3mks
  3. What two national disasters led to the decline of the Maasai                   2mks
  4. Give two reasons that necessitated trading activities among the pre-colonial societies.       2mks
  5. How has tribalism been enhanced in modern Kenya        1mk
  6. What was the main role of chief Kivoi as a Kamba trader?       1mk
  7. In what two major ways did the Kenyan communities respond to British occupation? 2mks
  8. What was the main motive for collaboration with the British in Kenya.       1mk
  9. What are the two sources of foreign aid in Kenya ?                   2mks
  10. What is the main duty of the high court of Kenya as a constitutional court. 1mk
  11. Give three examples of indirect taxes in Kenya.             3mks
  12. In what three ways has the government of Kenya promoted culture since Independence. 2mks
  13. What does the term protection of the law mean. 1mk

 

SECTION B ( 45 MKS)

 

  1. a) Identify three Kenyan Communities who interacted with Kalenjins upto the 19th 3mks
  2. What factors contributed to the growth of Nandi military power during the pre-colonial

period                                                                                                                               12mks

 

  1. a) What factors made the British government to abolish slave trade in Kenya. 3mks
  2. Explain how Said Seyyid encouraged the development of international trade in Kenya.

12mks

  1. a) What were the grievances of the settlers against the colonial government.              3mks
  2. What were the consequences of the 1923 Devonshire white paper. 12mks

 

17.a) What were the characteristics of the early  political parties?                                            5mks

  1. Explain why the early political parties in Kenya failed by 1940s                 10mks

 

SECTION C ( 30MKS )

 

18.a) State five reasons as to why it is important to have national unity in Kenya.                  5mks

  1. Discuss the factors that undermine National unity in Kenya.        10mks

 

19 a) What problems are associated with multiparty democracy in Kenya.                              12mks

  1. Identify three things the ruling party should do to promote education in Kenya 5mks

 

20.a) Explain the meaning of the Independence of the judiciary.                                                3mks

  1. Discuss the Hierachical structure of the court system in Kenya. 12mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT VII

PAPER  ONE

MARKING SCHEME

 

  1. How study of History & Government in Kenya inspire patriotism and nationalist.

–  Students learn about the past political development and this makes them develop

feelings for their country. They become proud of it and they are ready to defend it.

 

  1. Groups of Western Bantu.

– The Abaluhya

– The Abakuria

– The Abagusii

 

  1. Natural disasters led to the decline of the Maasai.

–  Animal and human diseases

–  Drought and famine

  1. Reasons that necessitated trading activities among the pre-colonial Kenyan societies.

–     Different economic activities

  • Different environmental factors which made different areas to produce different items.

 

  1. How tribalism has been enhanced in modern Kenya.

–   Through creation of tribal  Geographical divisions

  • Through voting ( greedy politicians want to solicit votes from particular tribes)

 

  1. The main role of Chief Kivoi as a Kamba trade.

–     Resistance

  • Collaboration

 

  1. The main motive for collaboration with British in Kenya.

–  The collaborators mainly wanted to expand their empires as they were under threat of

powerful neighbors

 

  1. Sources of foreign aid in Kenya

–     Bilateral aid – Money given by other countries

  • Multilateral aid – Money from international institutions e.g.  World bank ,I.M.F, E.E.C

 

  • Duty of the high court of Kenya as a constitutional court.

– It interprets section of the constitution to determine whether or not the hearing of a

particular case is constitutional

 

  1. Examples of indirect taxes in Kenya.

–     Sale taxes

–     V.A.T

–     Cess

  • Custom duties

 

  1. How the government of Kenya promoted culture since independence.

–     Encouragement of music and drama  festivals in schools

–      Promotion of indigenous ( African crafts)

–      Promotion of indigenous literature

  • Use of mass media to encourage revival of culture / allowing vernacular radio stations

 

  1. Protection of the law means:-

– Every person is entitled to fair trial in the court of the law

 

 SECTION B

 

  1. Kenyan communities who interacted with the Kalenjins upto the 19th

–   Luo

–   Abaluhya

–   Abagusii

–   Maasai

–   Abakuria

 

 

 

 

  1. Factors that contributed to the growth of the Nandi military power during the pre-colonial period.

–   They were militarily strong -had strong warriors who were well equipped. The army was

able standing one

  • They had a mixed economy hence a strong economic base and hence devoted time     fighting
  • They raided other communities instilled fear and hence expanded through military conquests
  • They had the institution of Orkoiyot who was a unifying factor. The Nandi consequently united against their enemies
  • The decline of the Maasai – enabled them to fill the power vacuum.
  • The existence of the age-set system – always ensured that they had worriors .
  • The Nandi superiority/pride . They were always ready to fight and never wanted to loose in the war .
  • Their land was mountainous with many valleys hence were able to spy on their enemies and used guerilla warfare.
  • High population hence adequate provision of soldiers

 

  1. 14. a) Factors made the British government to abolish slave trade in Kenya.
  • Pressure from the humanitarians / slave trade was evil
  • Britain was Industrialized and needed people back in Africa to produce cheap materials for industries.
  • The use of machines required less labour as they were more efficient and reliable than slaves .
  • Public opinion in Britain influence by writers like D. living stone who argued that freemen walk better than slaves

 

  1. How said Seyyid encouraged the development of international trade in Kenya.

–     He reduced custom duty hence many  traders were encouraged to come

  • Improved monetary system-Said Seyyid introduced small copper coins to supplement silver currency
  • He encouraged the coming of Indian merchants called Banyons who organized credit facilities for the caravan going into the interior . The Banyans were also in charge of tax collection
  • Seyyid Said sent caravans into the  interior  who went back to the coast with a lot of goods
  • Seyyid Said affirmed that no one country would be allowed into the interior apart from Britain hence reduced competition and strengthened trade
  • Seyyid said signed treaties with U.S.A and other European countries which strengthened commercial ties between Kenya  and the rest of the world.
  • Seyyid Said established specific markets such as Zanzibar and Mombassa hence facilitated exchange of goods.

 

  1. The grievances of the settlers against the colonial government.

–     The sudden  recall of Sir Edward Northing also favored them

  • The decision of the government to open up the white highlands to all races.
  • The Increased numbers of Asians in the Legco threatened them
  • The issuance of the Devonshire White paper which dashed their hopes of making Kenya  a white mans country.

 

 

 

  1. The consequences of the 1923 Devonshire white paper.

–    It declared that Kenya was a primarily an African country and if and when the interests

of  the Africans and those of emigrants

  • It ruled out further advance towards self government under European rule hence no further constitutional privileges for the settlers
  • The paper however reserved the white highlands for the settlers
  • Asians were allowed to elect 5 members to the Legco. on a common role hence this was an increase in the number of representatives and the settlers were unhappy
  • The document ruled out racial segregation in residential areas and also restriction of Indian migration .
  • Africans interests were to be represented in parliament by a missionary Arthur.

 

  1. a) The characteristics of the early political parties.

–     They began after the first world war

  • They were regional/local in outlook
  • They were moderate in their demand not militant
  • They were mostly welfare organisations not interested in independence but to improve their conditions
  • They were tribal based
  • They had grievances against the ills of colonialism

 

  Why the early political parties in Kenya failed by 1940’s

–     They were not so much concerned with the fight for independence but in eradication

of some ills of colonialism > so long as the ills of colonialism were not there they did

not bother i.e. Kipande, forced  labour e.t.c.

  • The Africans were divided – Each was fighting for its own welfare and hence they were easily crushed by the colonist
  • The parties were so moderate in their demands and they were not taken seriously by the colonist
  • The parties were local and hence lacked international support .
  • Most of the leaders were not educated and hence could not provide effective leadership
  • They lacked external influence /ideas and did not know how to command their own destiny
  • They lacked finances hence they could not carry out party activities effectively
  • They were internal disagreements and factions/rivalry among the leaders
  • The coming of the second World war disrupted their activities
  • The colonial government banned them
  • There were language barriers
  • Lacked general support

 

SECTION C (  30 MKS)

 

17.a).  Reasons as to why it is important to have national unity in Kenya.

–     Unity enables people to develop socially and economically

  • Unity enhances political stability
  • Unity minimizes and eventually eliminates intercommunity suspicions hence people develop a sense of belonging ness  and security
  • Unity promotes co-operation and opens opportunities to excellence e.g. through Harambee spirit .
  • Unity promotes collective responsibilities in the times of need/ crises e.g. disaster or natural calamities people help one another                                  

 

  1. Factors that undermine Naitonal Unity in Kenya.

–     Tribalism /nepotism /racism – all these forms of discrimination create  bitterness,

suffering which in the long run can lead to war ,suspicion and injustices.

  • Religious conflicts – They lead to lack of tolerance and respect of other peoples beliefs hence religious fighting’s / splits and general disorder
  • Corruption – makes public lose faith in national institutions, creates suspicion, frustration and hatred from those who cannot afford to bribe
  • Intolerance of divergent views – The intolerant leaders usually molest, harass, intimidate and silence opponents, this can result to fear, hatred and frustrations.
  • Discriminative laws: –  Different institutions governed by different laws eg. Gender laws, sharia, others outside are discriminated and this can create hatred and eventually disunity.
  • Ignorance –  lack of information and knowledge sometimes can cause confusion as propaganda and indoctrination are used in some sections of the society.
  • Greed – resulting to grabbing, cheating, misappropriation; Those left out feel frustrated, bitter and suspicious.
  • Poverty / unequal development – The poor are denied opportunities while those in the high circles are provided with many opportunities and services.  This leads to hatred and bitterness among the poor.
  • Capitalism – has led to very few rich and poor many.  Majority poor can rise against the established order which in most cases seem to be responsible for their plight.

 

  1. a) Problems associated with multiparty democracy in Kenya.
  • –    Tribalism
  • Unequal development especially in areas that fail to support the ruling party
  • Tribal clashes
  • Rivalry between parties
  • Leadership struggle within parties
  • Rigging of election as every party struggles to win
  • Civil unrest and disobedience sometimes initiated by opposition
  • Poor image abroad and disgruntled members of loosing parties tarnish the name of the government.
  • Defections as members of parliament keep on moving form one party to another
  • Lack of adequate funds
  • Waste of national resources and individual wealth especially during campaigns
  • Poor relations with the ruling party as the opposition at times tries to discredit the ruling party while it struggles to maintain he status quo

 

  1. Things the ruling party should do to promote education in Kenya.

–   Provide free primary education

  • To expand educational facilities at all levels – primary secondary and tertiary.
  • Try and achieve gender balance in education
  • Offer scholarship to the deserving students.

 

  1. a) Meaning of the independence of the Judiciary.

–      The law courts are free to make legal decisions in strict accordance with the law

without fear of either the executive or the legislature.

  • The judiciary can make decisions without favouring anybody regardless of his position in the society.
  • Judges and magistrates are free to make professional decisions without fear or punishment, victimization or intimidation but the judgement must be based on laws.

 

  1. The Hierarchical structure of the court system in Kenya.
  2. District magistrate Courts  –  Dm 3, 2, 1
  • Found at District level
  • Listen to both original and appellate cases
  • Apart from Dm 3
  • Deals with cases of low magnitude.

 

Resident magistrate courts:  –

–     At provincial land.

  • Listen to both original and appellate cases.

 

Chief magistrate courts

  • Only situated in Nairobi
  • Administer matters affecting magistrates
  • Hears important criminal cases.

 

High court

  • Presided over by judges
  • Has circuit system –  Visits provinces in cycles
  • Listens to both original and appellate cases of high magnitude

 

Court of appeal

  • Highest in the land
  • Headed by appellate judges
  • Hears only appellate cases

 

Special courts and tribunals

–     Hear cases from certain groups of people e.g Rent tribunal, industrial court, Kadhi,

martial courts ( order must be followed)

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT VII

PAPER TWO

 

SECTION A:  (25 MKS)

 

  1. List three main areas in the study of history       3mks
  2. List two methods used by archaelogists to determine the age of fossils.       2mks
  3. Identify two characteristics of Homo Habilis.                   2mks
  4. Give two reasons for the decline of the early urban centres in African.       2mks
  5. Give one way in which railway transport contributed to the Agrarian revolution in

Western Europe in the 19th century.                                                                                1mk

  1. What main event contributed to the decline of industrialization in Japan after 1945? 1mk
  2. Give two negative effects of development of science and technology       2mks
  3. What main factor contributed to the success of the triangular trade?       1mk
  4. State two disadvantage of coal as a source of energy though widely used during the

Industrial Revolution.                                                                                                      2mks

  1. State the African country where iron was first used before it spread to Africa.       1mk
  2. Give two reasons why Lewanika of Lozi collaborated with the British.       2mks
  3. What main role was played by Kabaka Mutesa I of Buganda in the colonization of his

country.                                                                                                                            1mk

  1. What two roles were played by Ghana in the achievement of independence in the rest

of Africa.                                                                                                                          2mks

  1. Give two reasons that made the Boers of S. Africa to establish Bantustants (black settlements)

in 1959.                                                                                                                             2mks

  1. What was the main political problem that Zaire faced immediately after independence. 1mk

 

SECTION B. (45 MKS)

 

  1. a) Identify any three forms of early transport.                                                        3mks
  2. b) In what six ways were the early means of transport limited.       12mks

 

  1. a) In what five ways did overseas colonies contribute to industrialization in Europe?      5mks
  2. State the problems which were created by industrialization in Europe from the mid

18th century.                                                                                                          10mks

 

  1. a) Identify five pillars of Islam.                                                                                5mks
  2. b) What factors contributed to the spread of Islam during the foundation stage? 10mks

 

  1. a) Name any three individuals in Africa who offered great resistance against European

occupation and expansion in Africa.                                                                         3mks

  1. b) Give reasons that enabled the British to defeat the Ndebele by 1907.                     12mks

 

 

SECTION C (30 MKS)

 

  1. a) Explain why the French used the policy of Assimilation in W. Africa.              5mks
  2. b) Account for the failure of the policy of assimilation.       10mks

 

  1. a) State the methods that were used by the blacks of  Africa in their struggle against

Apartheid.                                                                                                                   8mks

  1. b) What problems were encountered by African nationalists in the struggle for independence.                                                                                                                                     7mks
  2. a) What is the composition of the British parliament                                              3mks
  3. b) What are the functions of the British parliament.             12mks

 

 

HISTORY & GOVT VII

PAPER TWO

MARKING SCHEME

 

  1. Areas in the study of history
  • Political history
  • Economic history
  • Social history 1 x 3 = 3mks

 

  1. Methods used by archaelogists to determine the age of fossils.
  • Radio carbon dating
  • Potassium argon method
  • Stratigraphy
  • Fission track
  • Statistical dating – averaging length of generation 1 x 2 = 2mks
  1. Characteristics of Homo Habilis.
  • He had ability to grasp objects
  • Had ability to make pebble tools
  • Had brain capacity of about 680cc
  • He was omnivorous 1 x 2mks

 

  1. Reasons for the decline of the early urban centres in African.
  • Wars of conquest
  • Decline of trade
  • Exhaustion of mineral deposits
  • Lack of water 1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. Ways in which railway transport contributed to the Agrarian revolution in Western Europe in the 19th century.
  • Improved transport made it possible for bulky goods to be transported
  • Migration and settlement of people who engaged in farming
  • Trade was promoted and this encouraged agriculture as people could get markets for their farm produce.

 

  1. Event that contributed to the decline of industrialisation in Japan after 1945
  • The Second World War which two important cities (Hiroshima and Nagasaki) were bombed by U.S.A.

 

  1. Negative effects of development of science and technology
  • Promoted warfare
  • Polluted the environment
  • Manufacturing of dangerous drugs and other chemicals
  • Has led to unemployment 1 x 2 = 2mks

 

  1. Factor contributed to the success of the triangular trade
  • Proper organisation / high level organisation

 

  1. Disadvantage of coal as a source of energy though widely used during the industrial Revolution.
  • It is bulky
  • It is non renewable
  • It pollutes the air
  • It is expensive to mine

 

  1. African country where iron was first used before it spread to Africa.
  • Egypt

 

  1. Reasons why Lewanika of Lozi collaborated with the British.
  • To be protected from other European countries for he had seen how they were all struggling to control Africa / wanted the British to protect him against his neighbours such as the Ndebele, Kololo etc
  • He was influenced by Khama of Botswana who talked highly of them.
  • He was encouraged by the Christian missionaries eg who promised education to sons of chief.

 

 

  1. Role played by Kabaka Mutesa I of Buganda in the colonization of his country.
  • He invited Christian missionaries to settle in Buganda and later on they were joined by the colonists.

 

  1. Roles played by Ghana in the achievement of independence in the rest of Africa
  • Encouragement of the African leaders
  • Hosting of a Pan – Africa congress where issue of colonialism was discussed
  • Provision of financial assistance
  • Allowing military bases to be formed in Ghana.

 

  1. Reasons that made the Boers of S. Africa to establish Bantustans (black settlements) in 1959.
  • Wanted to control African countries
  • Wanted to improvise Africans so that they could provide labour in that farms, mines and industries
  • Wanted to enhance segregation inorder to retain ‘purity’ of the whites.

 

  1. What was the main political problem that Zaire faced immediately after independence.

–     Struggle for leadership which even led to the succession of the Katanga region

 

SECTION B. (45 MKS)

 

  1. a) Forms of early transport.
  • Land
  • Water
  • Human
  • Animal

 

  1. b) Early means of transport limited.
  • Some were very slow eg. Human transport
  • Some could not be used to carry bulky goods eg. Water transport
  • Some form of transport were restricted to some areas. Eg animal transports was mainly restricted to flat areas
  • Some of them carried limited goods eg human transport
  • Some of them were cumbersome
  • Some animals could be stubborn to move
  • Some were prone to danger eg human transport
  • Some were unreliable eg water transport could only be used when it was windy, animal / human transport could only be used during the day.
  • Some were huge and difficult to load eg elephants.

2 x 6 = 12mks

 

  1. a) Ways in which overseas colonies contribute to industrialization in Europe
  • They provided markets for industrial goods
  • They provided raw materials used in the industries
  • The Europeans exploited the resources to obtain capital which they used to invest in industries
  • They were able to obtain slaves who worked in the plantations which in return provided raw materials for the industries.
  • The colonies paid taxes which were used to set up industries in their mother countries. 1 x 5 = 5mks
  1. Problems which were created by industrialization in Europe from the mid

18th century.                                                                                                              

  • Led to rural urban migration hence farms were left without adequate labour
  • Led to conflicts and unhealthy competition between the powers and eventually led to the world wars.
  • Led to division of the world into two blocks (developed and developing countries)
  • Dangerous weapons were manufactured in the industries and this increased insecurity in the world.
  • Led to forced labour
  • Led to child and women labour
  • Led to the exploitation of the working class
  • Health of the workers deteriorated as they were subjected to pollution of all kinds – noise air and water pollution.
  • Led to pauperism as the poor increased especially those who moved into towns and were not employed.
  • Machines were not designed for human safety hence so many people were mutilated.
  • Poor working conditions, workers lined in congested slums, they were lowly paid and worked for long hours. 1 x 10 = 10mks

 

  1. a) Identify five pillars of Islam.
  • Prayers to Allah – 5 times a day
  • Payment of alms (Zakat) to the poor
  • Fasting during the month of Ramadhan
  • Making pilgrimage to Mecca atleast once in ones life time
  • Daily recital of the creed. 1 x 5 = 5mks

 

  1. b) Factors that contributed to the spread of Islam during the foundation stage
  • Trade between Arab merchants and other people, as they traded they converted people
  • Migration and settlement of Arabs over large parts of Africa and Southern Europe
  • Establishment of Islamic states especially in North African and Asia
  • Islam accommodated cultural practices of many societies hence it was appealing
  • The weaknesses of the Arab neighbours made the Arabs of easily conquer them.
  • Efficient means of transport and communication during the early years eg use of dhows and animals transport eg. Camels and horses
  • Islam spread through holy wars Jihad’s (wars of conquest) hence people were forced to accept Islam.
  • Conversions – Arab missionaries spread Islam to many parts of the World.
  • Islam spread through intermarriages 2 x 5 = 10mks

 

  1. a) Individuals in Africa who offered great resistance against European occupation

          and  expansion in Africa.        

  • Menelik
  • Lobengula and Ndebele
  • Samori Toure of Guinea 1 x 3 = 3mks

 

  1. b) Reasons that enabled the British to defeat the Ndebele by 1907.
  • The British used superior firearms against the Ndebele who still used locally manufacture simple arms
  • The Ndebele were let down by the other African communities e.g Shona who refused to unite and co-operate so that they would defeat the British.
  • The British retaliated so ruthlessly so the Ndebele got seared and discouraged from resisting further.
  • The British further were helped by some Africans so they became stronger by the Ndebele.
  • The Mwari cult let the Ndebele down and demoralized the fighter as the expected magic failed to work.
  • The flight and eventual death of Lobengula discouraged the fighters.
  • The British soldiers were better trained and more organised than the Ndebele fighters who lacked military strategy.
  • The Ndebele had different loyalties the youth supported Lobengula’s son, the older people a relative of a former king, some even decided to negotiate for peace.

2 x 6 = 12mks

 

SECTION C (15 MKS)

 

  1. a) Why the French used the policy of Assimilation in W. Africa.
  • The French assumed that their culture and civilization was superior to the others hence it was their burden to impose it on them.
  • They assumed that other people were capable of being assimilated into French culture.
  • French considered their colonies as part of France and unlike the British did not consider cost as a burden
  • Unlike the British, the French had no intention of preparing the colonies for eventual self – government.
  • The inhabitants has long contact with France hence would be assimilated easily.

1 x 5 = 5mks

  1. b) Failure of the policy of assimilation.
  • The governors faced strong opposition from the traditional rulers who were not ready to accept the French mode of civilization.
  • There were few Frenchmen to carry out the policy
  • The French traders were against the police for they feared competition from Africans if they became equal
  • The Africans had diverse culture and it was not easy to convince different groups to abandon their culture in favour of assimilation.
  • The French hoped to use the school system and it failed to sufficiently indoctrinate the Africans on the value of the policy.
  • The colonial period did not last long enough to enable a whole community to change cultural practices.
  • The French realized that the policy was expensive and hence defeated their purpose of acquiring colonies for economic gain.
  • The laws once passed in Paris took long to reach the local people.
  • The French administration were dishonest, as they rarely implemented the laws that were passed in Paris, Africans felt cheated and rose against them.
  • The Muslims resisted attempts to make them Christians which was one of the qualifications for assimilation.
  • The French citizens in France feared being out numbered in the chamber of deputies hence opposed assimilation.
  • There was rise of Negritude –  the movement advocated for the dignity of all black people no cultures was superior hence French had no moral right to impose their culture on other people.                                                                                             1 x 10 = 10mks

 

 

 

  1. a) Methods that were used by the blacks of Africa in their struggle against Apartheid.
  • Formation of parties eg. A.N.C
  • Use of diplomacy to convince the white regime to dismantle apartheid
  • Appealing to International bodies like U.N.O to pressurise S. Africa to dismantle Apartheid
  • Use of mass media to sensitize the public and international communities on evils of apartheid especially through films lie cry-freedom, Sarafina etc.
  • Hunger strikes among the jailed
  • Armed struggle
  • Organising defiance campaigns e.g boarding buses which were exclusively for Europeans, invading residential areas, parks and restaurants marked white only.
  • Organising peaceful demonstration and protests.
  • Preaching by churches led by people like Bishop Tutu – championing against apartheid.
  • Riots and uprising – eg Soweto uprising.

1 x 8 = 8mks

 

  1. b) Problems encountered by African nationalists in the struggle for independence.
  • Harassment, arrests and detentions of freedom fighter
  • Banning of political parties
  • Open violence and murder eg.Steve Biko
  • Obvious divide and rule tactics by the white regime to divide people – creation of Bantustans
  • Lack of money and other material resources
  • Denial of access to state owned media
  • Frustrations of national leaders no freedom of association, speech / intimidation by security agents

 

  • Emergency regulations which ensured that African meetings were censored
  • Pass laws which curtailed the movements of the Africans.

1 x 7 = 7mks

  1. a) The composition  of the British parliament
  • Monarch (Queen)
  • House of commons
  • House of the Lords 1 x 3 = 3mks

 

  1. b) The functions of the British parliament.
  • It is the law making organ of the government
  • It controls the government finances
  • It can pass a vote of no confidence against the government and force it to resign
  • It has power to declare war or state of emergency.
  • It represents the will of the people
  • It acts as a check on the possible abuse of power by other arms of the government.
  • It criticises government proposals with the aim of improving them
  • It promotes democracy
  • It approves government revenue and expenditure.

–     It has power to change the countries constitution.                2 x 6 = 12mks

SOCIAL STUDIES GRADE 1 NOTES- NEW CBC PDF

TERM ONE

OUR HOME

A _________is a place where a family lives (tree, home)
One or many _________will make a home (houses, people)
Our home and what is around us make up our _________ (compound, house)
Every home must have a ________ (car, house)
Our home is in ________ estate
Types of houses
A hut is a _________ house (traditional, modern)
A hut has ___________doors (one, two)
Many huts together make a ___________ (homestead)
A place where we store grains is called a __________ (granary, hut)
A__________ is house for the ____________ and ___________ (manyatta, bus, Luo, Maasai, Samburu)
A manyatta is a _______ house (traditional, bad)
__________are many houses in one tall building (flats, stairs)
Flats are mainly found in ________ (towns, villages)
A flat is a _______ house (traditional, modern)
A block of flats is also called_________ (apartment, semi – apartment)
This houses stay for a _________time (short, long)
A camp has many _______ together (tents, huts)
Semi-permanent houses include

GRADE ONE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES
____
____
 Makuti houses
 Mabati houses
 Timber houses
 Small huts
Permanent houses
This houses stay for a _________ time (long, short)
It is a _________house (modern, traditional)
Permanent house include
Bungalow
Storied houses
Materials used in building
The roof of a hut is made of ___________
The wall of a hut is made of ___________
The floor of s hut is made of ___________
A manyatta is made of ___________and ____________
_________ are used to make a granary
A mabati house is made of ___________
Another name for mabati is ___________
A timber house is made of __________
The roof of a permanent house is made of ___________
The walls of a permanent house is made of ___________
Parts of a house
A house has different parts called __________ (rooms, toilet)
Name the rooms found in your home
 Bedroom

____
 Kitchen
 Bedroom
 Bathroom
 Store
 Toilet
The sitting room is also called____________
The _______is also called the washing area
A kitchen is also called the _________area
The bedroom is also called the _______area
Uses of different parts of the house
We ____________and rest in the sitting room
When it is time to sleep we go to ___________ (bedroom, store)
When it is time to eat we go to __________ (dining, store)
Food is cooked in the _____ (kitchen, store)
Farm tools are kept in the __________ (toilet, stores)
Tissue paper is found in the ________ (toilet, store)
People sleep in the ________
We wash our bodies in the ________
Importance of houses
Houses protect us from hot sun, heavy clouds and strong winds
Our house keeps us safe from dangerous _________________ (people, trees)
__________are bad people who steal from our houses (thieves, teachers)
A _______person is a person I do not know (mother, stranger)
Birds stay in a _________ (nest, house)

____
A dog lives in a _________ (kennel, nest)

SAFETY IN THE HOME

Things found in the home
Some things are found inside the house and others outside the house
Name of some things found in the house
 Lamp
 Broom
 Chair
 Jiko
 Basin
 Utensils
 Beds
 Cupboards
Some animals kept at home
 Dog
 Cat
 Chicken
 Pig
 Donkey
 Sheep
 Camel
Uses of things found in the home
A panga is used for ___________
We use a lamp to ____________ (light) up a house
A __________is used to collect rubbish in the compound (jembe, rake)
Peter wants to cut grass; he will use a ______________ (panga, slasher)
We use a ________ to sweep

____
We listen to news from the _________
People use _______________to split firewood
Uses of some animals found at home
Donkeys and camels help us to carry ____________ things (heavy bad)
Name 3 animals that give us milk
_____________
_____________
______________
Sheep, rabbits and pigs give us___________ (meat, wool)
Match the animals and the meat
Cow mutton
Goat pork
Hen beef
Sheep goat meat
Pig chicken
A sheep give us_______and________
Dangerous objects at home
Some objects are dangerous they can ____________ us (hurt, love)
Do not play with ___________ (toys, fire)
Fire can ___________us or even our houses (burn, wash)
A hot jiko can __________us (burn,)
A dog can _________us and a cat can ___________us (scratch, bite)
Putting things like sticks into electrical sockets can cause_________ (shock, play)

____
Playing with matchsticks can cause __________ (fire, rain)
Medicine should be kept away from ___________ (children, teachers)
Broken bottles can __________us (hurt)
Name four sharp objects
______________
________________
________________
_____________
Keeping our homes clean
We sweep the floor to remove __________ (dirt, soap)
We clean utensils to keep away_________and _____________ (rats, dogs, cockroaches)
We should cut long _________around our home (grass, tree)
_________and__________ are some animals that can hide in long grass
We remove cobwebs to keep away __________ (spiders, cows)
Tools are kept safely in the ___________ (kitchen, store)
We should sleep under the _________ (bed, mosquito net)
A fence keeps away_________ from entering the home (friends, strangers)
Dirty toilets have ________ (flies, flowers)
A _________takes care of our home at night (teacher, watchman)

OUR FAMILY

____
MEANING OF A FAMILY

A group of people who are related is called ____________ (group, family)
A family has __________and _________
Father and mother are my _______________ (parents, enemies)
Father is a __________parent (male, female)
A ________ is a female parent (mother, father)
A male child is a _______ and a female child is a _____________
In a family we ________one another (love, hate)
Types of families
Nuclear family
It is made up of father, mother and children
__________is the head of the family (father, mother)
A nuclear family has _________parents (one, two)
A single parent family
It has __________parents (one, two)
It is made up of ___________and _____________
Father and _______make up a single family
An extended family
______are members of an extended family

____
My grandparents call me __________ (grandchild, sister)
Uncle, aunts, cousins are my _________ (relatives, friends)
A boy will be called ___by his grandparents (granddaughter, grandson)
How family members are related
My parents calls me a ________ or a ________ (son, daughter)
My mother’s sister is my ____________
My father’s mother is my __________
My brothers and sisters child is my ____________
The child of my aunt is my_________________ (uncle, aunt)
My father’s brother is my _________ (uncle, aunt)
Work done by family members
___cooks for us at home (mother, aunt)
Our ________pay our school fees
Her work is to tell us stories, she is my _____________
Children should help their parents by
___________
____________
______________
When work is shared it becomes _________________ (easier, good)
Sharing work makes us __________ (happy, sad)
Family celebrations
A celebration is a _________ (parade, ceremony)
Name three family celebrations

____
_______________
_______________
_______________
The day I was born is my _________
In a birthday party people are __________
We celebrate the birth of a child by giving___________ (gifts, stones)
When two people get __________there is a wedding ceremony (money, married)
Wedding celebrations are _________ ceremonies (sad, happy)
When someone dies we go for _________ (wedding, funeral)
A funeral is a ________ceremony (happy, sad)
Religious celebrations
Muslims worship in a ________
Hindus celebrate __________
Christians worship in a ___________
Iddul –fitr is celebrated by __________
Hindus worship in a _________
Christmas is celebrated by ___________
National celebrations
Match the celebrations
Celebration date
New year 1st may
Labour Day 20th October
Madaraka day 25th December
Jamhuri day 26th December

____
Mashujaa day 1st June
Christmas day 12th December
Boxing Day 1st January

TERM 2

OUR FAMILY NEEDS AND CHILD RIGHTS

FOOD
Food gives us __________to work and play
We eat food in order to grow _________
Food makes us look __________
We get food from plants and _______________
After eating food we should drink ___________
Water is ___________
We cover our food to keep away ______________
Match the following
Hen pork
Pig fillet
Cow chicken
Fish mutton
Sheep beef
Draw and name three foods we eat
__________
___________
___________

____
(Water, strong, animals, soil, energy, life, fat, healthy, water
Clothes
We wear ___________ to cover our bodies
When it is cold we wear_________clothes
In __________places people wear light clothes
Clothes we wear at school are called ______
We use ___________ on a rainy day
Shoes make us look __________
On a muddy day we wear ______________
Draw clothes we wear
(Heavy, light, umbrella, gumboots, smart, warm, clothes, uniform)
Shelter
People live in a _________
Another name for a house is _________
Houses protect us from _________-animals
Houses provide us with__________
We ___________i n houses at night
Every home must have a __________
Name three types of houses
___________
___________
____________
(Wild, shelter, domestic, sleep, food, toilet, manyatta, stoned house, hut)

____
How to meet family needs
To meet family needs we need to ____________
Our parent’s _________to get money
My mother is a __________
A__________sells fish to get money
A__________grows food
A cow gives us _________and___________
A sheep gives us ________and __________
We buy food from the ___________
A cobbler repairs our ________
Revision: basic needs
Name three basic needs
_____________
___________
___________
Name three sources of water
______________
______________
_____________
Shelter protect us from
__________________
__________________
__________________
Name three types of food that we eat
__________________
_________________
___________________
Name three types of clothes we wear

____
________________
________________
_______________
A person who makes clothes is a ______________
A carpenter uses_________to make a house
Maintaining a happy family
Good behaviour in the family
Good behaviour means _________manners
We should ____________other people
We should not ___________our parents and friends
We say __________when we do something wrong
We say _________when we wake up in the morning
Children should ________their parents
We say ________when people do good things
We say ________- when asking for something
(Good, bad, abuse, respect, love, sorry, good morning, beat, obey, thank you, please
Child rights
A right is a ________ to do something
Children’s right makes them to be treated ___________
All children have a right to __________life
All children need food to __________
Children should go to school
Child _________is when children work for money

____
When sick children should be taken to __________
Parents should__________from bad people
(Freedom, well, badly, good, die, labour, hospitals, protect)
OUR SCHOOL
Name of our school
Our school is called __________
People ________in School
A school is a place where we learn to ____________and _____________
Our school is a ____________school
Boys wear __________-and__________ while girls wear____________and _____________ to school
The pupils in our school are ________
Our school was started by _________
(Learn, fight, read, and write, public, private, shirts, skirts, dresses, blouses, boys and girls, boys alone)
Symbols of the school and their importance
School logo
A _____is a symbol of the school
Our school motto is __________
Name two thing found in the logo of our school
______________
_____________
Draw the school logo
Name two things that you can see on the school logo
(Logo, fearing God wisdom begins)

____
The flag
This is a __________
The flag of Kenya has ______colours
We stand at _________-while raising the flag
We rise the flag __________and _______________every week
Name the colours of our flag
_______________
________________
________________
________________
Red on our flag shows ___________
Green on our flag means ___________
_____________raises the flag at our school
The Colour on top of the flag is ___________
Flag, 4, 10, attention, ease, Monday, Friday, black, white, red, green, blood, Colour, natural resources,
scouts, black)
National anthem
______anthem is sang when raising the flag
National anthem is a ____________-for our country
Name two languages that we use when we sing national anthem
____________
_____________
There are __________verses in the national anthem
Complete the following sentence of the national anthem

____
“Oh God of all ___________”
(Church, National, Prayer, English, Kiswahili, 4, 3, Creation)
Revision
Children should _________their parents
Patents and friends should not be __________by children
Good behaviour means good ___________
We should wash our __________after visiting the toilet
Children should wear___________
Children should live in a _________
Children should go to __________to learn
Good children say_____-when they do something wrong (obey, abused, good, hands, sorry, legs,
clothes, school, house)
School compound
Our school compound has ____________and____________
We help ourselves in the _____________
In ___________–we are given story books to read
Our school has __________where we go to play at breaktime
We plant ________and__________in our Shamba
We should keep our school compound _________
Draw and name two things found in the school compound
(Classroom, kitchen, dormitory, stores, library, toilet, bush, playground, maize, potatoes, cabbages,
coffee, small, clean)
Our school routine

____
We go to school from ___________to ______________
I go to school for ___________days in a week
Assembly is also called________
We go for assembly at ____________o clock in the morning
When the bell rings we change the subject
We go for lunch at ____________
After learning we leave school in the _________
(Monday to Sunday, Monday to Friday, 7, 8, school, circle, parade, 5, 9, 10.00am 12.45pm, every
morning, every afternoon)
People in the school and their roles
Some people in the school community are ____________
We have __________teachers in our school
There are _________pupils in our school
My class teacher is called________
The secretary types___________and______________
The __________guards the school during day and night
A __________drives our school bus
Food is cooked from the ____________
(Teachers, cooks, drivers, gateman, secretary, 2, 10, 60, tests, books, exams, 100, 700, kitchen)
Our classroom
Am in class _____________
We learn in the _________room
Name some things found in your classroom
We sit on ________

____
In our classrooms desks are arranged into ____________rows
________sits behind in class
The ___________tells us what to do when the teacher is absent
We keep our books in _________after classes
We use _________to clean the blackboard
Name three things you do to keep the classroom clean
_____________
____________
____________

REVISION: OUR SCHOOL

The special song for our school is called__________
Our school motto says________
Write three needs in your school
____________
____________
____________
The school __________make we look different from other pupils
We should keep our school ____________
The colours of our school uniform are ________and ___________
The name of our head teacher is ___________
Class rules
__________guides us in class
Pupil’smust________the class rules
Name two rules in the class
We should _________our teachers

____
The __________help us keep order in the classroom
We clean our school by____________
We ___________our class everyday
We use __________-for sweeping
Name three things you do to keep your classroom clean
____________
____________
___________
Taking care of things in our classroom/school
We write using _________in school
All children in school write on ____________
The teacher __________the cupboard so that the books cannot be stolen
Before going home we should ___________the windows
Our__________locks the classroom
Tearing books to make toys is ___________
It is bad to play with chairs and tables
A class timetable shows time and___________that we learn everyday
Safety on the way to and from school
Different ways of travelling to school
I go to school by _________
Kama lives far from school; he goes to school by __________
Some pupils ___________to school because they live near the school
Name three ways that we can use to go to school

____
_____________
______________
_____________
Draw two means of travelling to school
How to use the road safely
Road safety means free from___________on the road
Road_________helps us use the road safely
We should __________road signs
We should walk on the _________side of the road
Before crossing the road, look ____________, look_________look____–again and cross if the road is
clear
A__________is a person walking on foot
Another name for zebra crossing is ___________
The colours of a zebra crossing are __________-and _____________
Draw and Colour the road signs for
Bus stop
Stop
Dangers of talking and going with strangers
A ___________is a person I don’t know
We should not talk to _____________
Write two things that strangers might do to you
_____________
______________
Write three things we should not accept from strangers

____
_____________
_____________
_____________
Strangers can__________to us
We should walk with the other ____________
Gifts from strangers can be __________
Revision
We should cross the road only when it is _________
It is wrong to __________near the road
People we do not know are ____________
We should not get out of a ______________vehicle
Name two ways of travelling to school
Important features on the way to school
Features seen along the way
We see many things on our way to ___________
Things that we see are called __________features
Name three physical features that you see on your way to school
Many trees growing together make a __________
Animals that live in the forest are called __________animals
Name some of the wild animals
A_________has a lot of water
We buy vegetables and fruits from__________

____
Draw some things you see when coming to school
______________
_______________
_______________
Christians go to __________and Muslims pray in __________
Importance of the features to the people living near our school
We grow plants in a _________
Plants give us ____________
Wild animals are___________because they attract visitors
We get water and fish from a __________
Trees provide a ________for birds and monkeys
Tourists bring a lot of ___________when they visit us
We get ___________from trees in the forest
Visitors who come to see wild animals are called__________
We cross a river using a ____________

FORM 2 CRE OPENER EXAM PLUS MARKING SCHEME FREE

 CRE

FORM 2  OPENER EXAM

TIME 2HRS

NAME………………………………………………CLASS……………..ADM…………………

  1. Name the five books of the bible which are referred to as the Pentateuch.(5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State five promises that God made to Abraham (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Give reasons why Israelites demanded for a king(5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Outline the activities carried out by the Israelites on the night of the Passover.(5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Describe the contest between prophet Elijah and the prophet of Baal at mount Carmel(1kings 18:17-40)(8mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State ways in which God demonstrated his concern for the Israelites during exodus(5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Highlight the achievements of David as king of Israel.(6mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. What are the benefits of learning Christian religious education in secondary school.(6mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Describe the incident when Abraham was willing to sacrifice his son Isaac.(gen 22:1-19)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State effects of translating the bible into African local languages(7mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Sate five responsibility of the living towards ancestors in traditional African community(5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Which moral values were acquired during marriage in tradition African communities(5mks)

CRE

FORM 2 OPENER EXAM MARKING SCHEME

  1. Name the five books of the bible which are referred to as the Pentateuch.(5mks)
  • Genesis
  • Exodus
  • Leviticus
  • Numbers
  • Deuteronomy

 

  1. State five promises that god made to Abraham (5mks)
  • He would make Abraham’s name great/famous
  • He would bless/protect those who bless/protect Abraham/ curse those who curse him
  • All families would be blessed through Abraham
  • God would give land to Abraham’s descendants
  • God would give Abraham many descendants/ he would be a great nation
  • God would bless Abraham
  • God would give Abraham long life/he would die in peace
  • He would give Abraham a son/heir
  • Kings would come from Abraham’s descendants

 

 

  1. Give reasons why Israelites demanded for a king(5mks)
  • Samuel had become old/unable to rule/fear that he would die
  • Samuel appointed his sons as judges/made the post hereditary
  • The sons of Samuel were corrupt
  • The Israelites wanted to be like other nations
  • They wanted a king who could lead them to war against their enemies
  • They wanted a leader whom they could see
  • They wanted a political government with national authority

 

  1. Outline the activities carried out by the Israelites on the night of the Passover.(5mks)
  • Every man chose a lamb or a young goat for his family
  • The chosen animals was to be slaughtered
  • Blood was put on the door posts of the houses
  • The slaughtered animal was to be roasted
  • The Israelites ate the unleavened bread/bitter herbs with roasted meat
  • They stayed indoors till morning
  • They ate while fully dressed for the journey/in a hurry
  • They burnt all the leftovers of the meat
  • They collected jewellery/clothing from the Egyptians

 

  1. Describe the contest between prophet Elijah and the prophet of Baal at mount Carmel(1kings 18:17-40)(8mks)
  • Prophet Elijah asked King Ahab to assemble all the prophets at mount Carmel
  • The king summoned all the people including the prophets of Baal to mount Carmel
  • He suggested to the people that two bulls be brought and each party to offer the sacrifice to their God.
  • He challenged them and said whichever party will make their god to burn the sacrifice is the true God.
  • The prophets of Baal were given a bull which they prepared and called upon the name of their god.
  • Elijah mocked them/asked them to shout louder to their God
  • He placed the sacrifice on the altar and asked the people to pour water on it.
  • He called upon God to prove that he was the living God.
  • Fire consumed the sacrifice/ the wood/stone/the water/dust around it
  • He called up[on god to prove that He was the living God
  • The people threw themselves on the ground and worshipped the Lord as the true God
  • Elijah killed the prophets of Baal.

 

  1. State ways in which God demonstrated his concern for the Israelites during exodus(5mks)
  • He made a passage for them in the red sea
  • He provided them with manna
  • He provided them with quails
  • He provided them with water from the rock/stone
  • He gave them the ten commandments
  • He defeated their enemies the Egyptians/Amalekites
  • He provided a pillar of fire to lead them in the darkness
  • He provided their leaders

 

 

  1. Highlight the achievements of David as king of Israel.(6mks)
  • David conquered and defeated the enemies of Israel
  • He expanded the geographical boundaries of Israel
  • He captured Jerusalem from the Jebusites
  • He made Jerusalem the capital city of Israel
  • He made Jerusalem a religious centre by bringing back the ark of the covenant there
  • He made peace treaties with his neighbors
  • He composed psalms which are used during worship
  • He united the twelve tribes of Israel under one rule
  • He made preparations for the construction of the temple                                                                                     `
  1. What are the benefits of learning Christian religious education in secondary school.(6mks
  • It equips the learner with an understanding of God/spiritual growth
  • The leader acquires life skills to handle challenges in life
  • It helps one to respect his/her/other people’s religious beliefs
  • It helps one acquire basic principles for Christian living/moral values
  • It helps one to understand how to relate with other people
  • It gives answers to questions/mysteries of life
  • It explains the origin/purpose of human beings on earth
  • It leads to employment/careers

 

 

  1. Describe the incident when Abraham was willing to sacrifice his son Isaac.(gen 22:1-19)
  • God told Abraham to take his son Isaac to the land of Moriah/to offer him as a sacrifice
  • Abraham took his son, two servant and wood for burnt offering
  • They arrived at the place after 3days journey
  • Abraham commanded his servants to remain behind as he and Isaac went up to worship
  • He took Isaac, the firewood and the knife and went up
  • Isaac asked his father where the lamb for a burnt offering was
  • When they arrived at the place god commanded Abraham to build an alter
  • He bound Isaac/ laid him on the altar upon the wood
  • Abraham took the knife to slay his son but the angel of the Lord stopped him
  • Abraham saw a ram which he offered instead of his son
  • He called the name of the place ‘the Lord will provide”
  • The angel appeared to Abraham a second time and gave him promises because of his obedience
  • Abraham returned with his men to Bethsheba

 

  1. State effects of translating the bible into African local languages(7mks)
  • It led to development of African languages
  • It has led to the spread of the word of god to many people
  • It has contributed to improved literacy levels amongst the African/development of formal education
  • It has led to emergence of African independent churches
  • It gives people an opportunity to analyse the bible in relation to their cultures
  • It has led to development of printing press/bookshop
  • It has made people to carry out research in African beliefs/practices
  • It has led to ecumenical cooperation among Christians in Africa
  • It has led to creation of jobs
  • It has led to religious schism

 

  1. Sate five responsibility of the living towards ancestors in traditional African community(5mks
  • Naming children after them
  • Pouring of libation for them
  • Taking care of their graveyards
  • Making sacrifices/offering to honor them
  • Inviting/involving them in ceremonies
  • Invoking/chanting their names during prayers
  • Transmitting their wishes through /visions
  • By holding commemoration ceremonies for them
  • Building shrines for them
  • Teaching about them
  • Safeguarding their properties

 

  1. Which moral values were acquired during marriage in tradition African communities(5mks)
  • Faithfulness
  • Responsibility/hard work
  • Respect/courtesy
  • Humility
  • Integrity
  • Courage
  • Hospitality/kindness
  • Tolerance/perseverance

Free Opener, Termly Exams For All Subjects – Form one to Four

Opener, Termly Exams For All Subjects – Form one to Four’

F2 AGRIC T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 BIOLOGY T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 BUSINESS T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 CHEM T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 CRE T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 ENGLISH T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 GEO T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 HIST T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 KISW T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 MATHS T1 SET 2.pdf
F2 PHYSICS T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 AGRIC T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 BIO T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 BUS T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 CHEM T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 CRE T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 ENG SET 2.pdf
F3 GEO T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 H-SCIENCE T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 HIS T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 KISW T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 MATHS T1 SET 2.pdf
F3 PHY T1 SET 2.pdf
F4 AGRI PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 AGRI PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 BIO PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 BIO PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 BIO PP3 QN.pdf
F4 BST PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 BST PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 CHEM PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 CHEM PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 CHEM PP3 QN.pdf
F4 CRE PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 CRE PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 ENG PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 ENG PP3 SET 2.pdf
F4 GEO PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 GEO PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 HIST PP1 SET 3.pdf
F4 HIST PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 HOMESCIENCE PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 KIS PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 KIS PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 KIS PP3 SET 2.pdf
F4 MATH PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 MATHS PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 PHY PP1 SET 2.pdf
F4 PHY PP2 SET 2.pdf
F4 PHYSICS PP3 QSTN.pdf
FORM 1 ENTRY EXAMS.pdf
FORM 2 ENTRY EXAMS.pdf
FORM 3 ENTRY EXAMS.pdf
FORM 4 ENTRY EXAMS.pdf

Kala KCSE 2025 Joint Exam Papers & Answers

Kala KCSE 2025 Joint Exam Papers & Answers

KALA BIOLOGY PP 3 CONF.pdf
KALA BIOLOGY PP 3 CONF.docx
KALA PHYC PP 3 PRED CONF.pdf
KALA PHYC PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA PHYC PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA CHEM PP3 CONF 2025.pdf
KALA CHEM PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA BIOLOGY PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA KCSE BIO CONF 2025 PREDICTION.pdf
KALA KCSE BIO CONF 2025 PREDICTION.docx
KALA SIGN LANGUAGE PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA SIGN LANGUAGE PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA SIGN LANGUAGE PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA SIGN LANGUAGE PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA GERMAN PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA GERMAN PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA GERMAN PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA GERMAN PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA FRENCH PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA FRENCH PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA FRENCH PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA FRENCH PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA FRENCH PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA FRENCH PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA IRE PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA IRE PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA IRE PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA HOME SCI PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA HOME SCI PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA HOME SCI PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA HOME SCI PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA HOME SCI PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA COMP PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA COMP PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA COMP PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA COMP PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA MATHS PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA MATHS PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA MATHS PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA GEO PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA GEO PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA GEO PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA HIST PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA HIST PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA HIST PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA CRE PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA CRE PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.docx
KALA CRE PP 1 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA KISW PP 3 PREDICTION 2025.pdf
KALA KISW PP 2 PREDICTION 2025.pdf